'■ 
 
S/g 
 
 APPLETONS' 
 
 School and Colle&e Text-Books 
 
 LcLtin, Grree?c, Syrtac, Sebrew. 
 
 LATIN. 
 
 Arnold, T. E. First and Second Latin Book and Practical Grammar. l; 
 
 Spencer. 12rao. 
 
 Latin Prose Composition. 12mo. 
 
 Cornelius Nepos. With Notes. 12mo. 
 
 Besa. Latin Testament. 12mo. 
 
 Butler, Noble, and Stnrgn?, Minard. Sallust^s Jagartha and Catiliae, wit; 
 
 Notes and Vocabulary. Revised edition. 12mo. 
 CflBsar. See Harkness and Spencer. 
 
 Cicero. See Harkness, E. A. Johnson, LiifooLN, and Thachkb. 
 Cornelius Nepos. See Arnold and Lindsat. 
 Crosby, W. H, Qnintus Curtius Rufus. Life and Exploits of Alexander tl 
 
 Great. Edited and illustrated, with English Notes. 12mo. 
 Frieze, Henry S. The Tenth and Twelfth Books of Quintilian. With Not 
 
 12rao. 
 
 Vergira Aeneid. With Notes, etc. 12mo. 
 
 Vergil's Aeneid. With Notes and Dictionary. New edition. 12mo. 
 
 The Complete Works of Vergil. With Notes and Dictionary. l-2mo. 
 
 A Verifilian Dictionary, embracing all the Words in the Eclogue 
 
 Georgics, and Aeneid. 12mo. 
 The Georgics, Bucolics, and the First Six Books of the Aeneid of V< 
 
 gll. With Notes and a Vergilian Dictionary. 12mo. 
 Gates. C. 0. Latin Word-Building, 12mo. 
 Harkness, Albert. Series of Latin Text-Books. 12mo: 
 
 An Introductory Latin Book, intended as an Elementary Drill-Book on 
 Inflections and Principles of the Language. 
 
 Arnold's First Latin Book, 
 
 Second Latin Book. 
 
 Progressive Exercises. 
 
 A Complete Course for the First Year. 
 
 A Latin Grammar, for Schools and Colleges. 
 I A Latin Grammar, for Schools and Colleges. Revised edition. 1881. 
 
 The Elements of Latin Grammar, for Schools. 
 
 A Latin Reader, intended as a companion to the author's Latin Grammar. 
 
 A Latin Reader. With Exercises. 
 ( A New Latin Reader. With References, Suggestions, Notes, and Vocabnl 
 
Standard Classical Text-Books, 
 
 Harkneu, Albert. Series of Latin Text-Booka. 12mo : 
 
 A Practical Intniduction to Latin Cninposition. For Schools and Colleges. 
 
 Cs^ar'ii Coramentarieii on the Gallic War. With Notes, Dictionary, etc, 
 New Pictorial Edition. 
 
 Preparatory Course in Latin Prope Author?, comprising Fonr Books of 
 Cesar's Qallic War. Sallnsfs Catiline, and Eieht Orations of Cicero 
 With Notes, Illustrations, a Map of Gaul, and a Special Dictionary. New 
 Pictorial K<IUlon. 
 
 Salltist's Catiline. With Notes and a Special Dictionary. 
 
 Cicero's Select Orations. With Notes, etc. 
 
 The Same, with Notes and Dictionary. 
 
 This series has received the unqualified commendation of many of the 
 most eminent classical prnfcfpors and teachers in oar country, and is already in 
 use In every State of the Union, and. indeed, in nearly all our leading classical 
 institutions of every grade, both of school and college. 
 Herbermann'8 Sallust's Jugurthine War. 
 Horace. See Lincoln. 
 
 Johnson, £. A. Cicero's Select Orations. With Notes. 12mo. 
 Latin Speaker. See Sewall. 
 Lincoln, John L. Horace. With Notes, etc. 12mo. 
 
 Llvy. With Notes, Map, etc 12mo. 
 
 Ovid. 
 
 Same, with Notes and Vocabulary. 
 
 Lindsay, T. B. Comelln«« Ncpos. With Notes, Vocabulary, Index, and Exer« 
 
 cises. Illustrated. 12mo. 
 
 Same, for Sight- Reading. 
 
 Lord's Cicero's Ltpllns. 
 
 Quintilian. See Frieze. 
 
 Qnintus Cnrtins Snfos. See Chosbt, W. H. 
 
 Sallast. Sen BrTLER and Sturqus, Harkness, and Hbrberhann. 
 
 Sewall, Frank. Latin Speaker. Easy Dialogues, and other Selections forMem- 
 
 oriziiiz and Declaiming In the Latin Language. 12mo. 
 Spencer, J. A. Caesar's Commentaries. With Notes, etc. 12mo. 
 Thacher, Thomas A. Cicero's de Offlclls. Three Books, with Notes and Con- 
 spectus. 12mo. 
 Tyler, W. S. (Jermnnia and Agricola of Tacitus. With Notes, etc. 12mo 
 
 Histories of Tacitus. With Notes. 12mo. 
 
 Vergil. See Fbiub. 
 
 GREEK. 
 
 Adams, F. A. Greek Prepositions. 
 
 Anabasis. See Boirb and Owen. 
 
 Antigone. See Sitead. 
 
 Arnold, T. K. First Greek Book. Edited by Spekckr. 12mo. 
 
THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 IN MEMORY OF 
 
 PROFESSOR WILLIAM MERRILL 
 
 AND 
 
 MRS. IMOGENE MERRILL 
 
 ELUCATIOJJ IIB2. 
 
COMPLETE LATIN COURSE 
 
 FIRST YEAR, 
 
 COMPRISING 
 
 AN OUTLINE OF LATIN GRAMMAR, AND A SERIES OF 
 
 rilOGRESSIVE EXERCISES IN READING AND 
 
 WRITING LATIN, WITH FREQUENT 
 
 PRACTICE IN READING 
 
 AT SIGHT. 
 
 BY 
 
 ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D., LL.D, 
 
 PROFKSSOR IN BKOWN UNIVERSITY. 
 
 REVISED EDITION. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 
 
 1, 3, AND 6 Bond Street. 
 
 1888. 
 
GDT 
 
 JiUitered, according to Act of Ck)ngre88, in the year 1883, by 
 
 ALBERT HARK NESS, 
 In tbe OflSce of the Librarian of Congress at Wasbington. 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1888, by 
 
 ALBERT HARKNESS, 
 In the office of the Librarian of Congress at Washington. 
 

 PREFACE 
 TO THE REVISED EDITION. 
 
 In this edition, the Latin Course for the First Year 
 has been thoroughly revised and in part rewritten. 
 In its present form it aims to introduce the beginner 
 to the Latin language as a means of expressing thought, 
 and not as a mere system of grammatical forms and 
 rules, to make his first lessons as simple and attractive 
 us possible, and then to' conduct him by easy stages to 
 such a practical and working knowledge of the lan- 
 guage as will enable him to read Caesar or Vergil with 
 some little facility and with some degree of pleasure. 
 
 The following are a few of the leading features of 
 the revised edition. 
 
 1. The beginner is introduced, at the outset, to com- 
 plete Latin sentences, and is informed how he may best 
 ascertain their meaning. 
 
 2. He learns no arbitrary rules. He is allowed to 
 see the various Latin usages exemplified in the language 
 itself, and is thus prepared to recognize in each rule of 
 syntax, to which his attention is called, only a simple 
 statement of the facts in the case. 
 
 Hi 
 
 M689471 
 
iv PREFACE. 
 
 3. He is instructed that his chief object must be to 
 read and appreciate the language itself, and that the 
 grammar will be useful mainly as it aids him in this 
 work. An attempt is made to enable him to under- 
 stand and enjoy the thought in tlie original, to see 
 that Latin words are not mere equivalents for corre- 
 sponding English words, but that they have a meaning 
 of their own, that Latin nouns, for instance, are the 
 actual names of real persons and things. 
 
 4. The grammatical information, which will be of 
 immediate and constant use to the learner in reading 
 and understanding Latin, is given in the lessons them- 
 selves, while other grammatical facts which ought to 
 be within his reach, but which should not be allowed 
 to burden his memor}-, are placed in the introduction 
 for reference. 
 
 In conclusion, tlie learner is advised to make faithful 
 use of the Suggestions, which he will find in the latter 
 part of the book, beginning on p«ige 261. It is hoped 
 that they will greatly aid him in his work. 
 
 Brown UxiVERsm-, July, 1888. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The volume now offered to the public is intended to 
 furnish the pupil a comj)lete course for his first year in tha 
 study of Latin. It conducts the beginner through the com- 
 mon forms and inflections of the language, introduces him 
 to the leading principles of its syntax, and aims to prepare 
 him to enter with success upon the consecutive study of 
 Caesar or of any of the less diflicult Latin authors. It com- 
 prises an Outline of Latin Grammar, Progressive Exercises 
 in Reading and Writing Latin, eighteen pages of Connected 
 Discourse from Caesar, Directions for Reading at Sight, 
 Suggestions to the Learner, Notes, a Latin-English and an 
 English-Latin Vocabulary. 
 
 The Paradigms and Rules are introduced in the exact 
 form and language of the author's Grammar. Thus the 
 great objection to many First Latin Books, that they fill the 
 memory of the pupil with forms of statement that must be 
 laid aside as soon as ho passes to his Grammar, is entirely 
 obviated in this volume. 
 
 The Latin Exercises are taken chiefly from Caesar's 
 Commentaries on the Gallic War. They are made so 
 strictly progressive, that the learner will find it perfectly 
 easy, in the latter part of the volume, to make the transition 
 from classified sentences to connected discourse. The 
 
vi PREFACE. 
 
 English Exercises arc modelled after the Latin, and involve 
 the same constructions and the same vocabulary. 
 
 The Exercises in Heading at Sight consist of easy pas- 
 sages of connected discourse from Caesar's Commentaries. 
 They are so arranged that all the words and constructions 
 involved in any given exercise are introduced and used in 
 previous lessons. The pupil, therefore, who has learned all 
 the vocabularies, and has been faithful in his other work, will 
 find little difficulty in reading at sight in accordance with 
 the directions given him. The important point is not that 
 he should translate any given passage absolutely at sight, 
 but that he should master it without help from any source 
 whatever. The exercises are intended to encourage inde- 
 pendent work, to promote self-reliance in study, and to give 
 facility in reading and appreciating Latin. 
 
 The Suggesti<yns to tfie Learner are intended not only to 
 point out to the beginner the process by which he may most 
 readily and surely reach the meaning of a Latin sentence, 
 but also to aid him in expressing that meaning in idiomatic 
 English. Experience has abundantly shown the need of 
 such directions. The beginner's first efforts to solve the 
 problem presented by a Latin sentence are too often little 
 better than a series of unsuccessful conjectures, while his 
 first translations are purely mechanical renderings, with little 
 regard either to the thought of his author or to the pro- 
 prieties of his mother-tongue. 
 
 I am happy in this connection to acknowledge my obliga- 
 tions to my esteemed friend, Mr. Edward H. Cutler, the 
 accomplished Head-Master of the Newton High School. 
 His accurate scholarship and large professional experience 
 have contributed greatly to the value of every part of the 
 work. The vocabularies are all from his hand. 
 
 The work which aj)pears entire in this volume is also pub- 
 lished without the Grammatical Outline^ under the title : 
 Progressive Exercises in Reading and Writing Latin^ with 
 
PREFACE. vii 
 
 Frequent Practice in Reading at Sight, intended as a Com- 
 panion Book to the Author^s Latin Grammar. 
 
 Teachers who use the author's Latin Series in connection 
 with the Standard Edition ^ of liis Latin Grammar, may now 
 choose for their classes during the first year of their Latin 
 studies any one of the following courses : — 
 
 1. The Complete Latin Course for the First Year. 
 
 2. The Gramm.ar, and the Progressive Exercises in Head- 
 ing and Writing Latin. 
 
 3. The Grammar, and the New Latin Header. 
 
 Each of these courses will be found to furnish an ade- 
 quate preparation for the reading of any of the less difficult 
 Latin authors. In making the selection, teachers will have 
 an opportunity to gratify their individual preferences, and to 
 consult the special needs of their schools. 
 
 1 Those who retain the earlier edition of the Grammar will find the 
 hxtniductory Latin Book and the Latin Reader adapted to it. The 
 editions of Latin Authors may be had with references to either edition of 
 the Grammar, at the option of the instructor. 
 
 B&owN UNiVERsrrY, PnovroKNCE, R.I., 
 July, 1883. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PACiE 
 
 iKTBODUcnoN. Pronuiioiatiou. — QuauUty. — Accentuatioii . 1 
 
 Seutonces. — Verbs 11 
 
 Lesson I. Parts of Speech. — Nouns 15 
 
 n. Cases 17 
 
 IIL, IV. Sentences. — Verbs. — First Con jujjatiou . . 19 
 
 V. First Declension 22 
 
 VI. Subject Nominative. — Agreement of Verbs . 23 
 
 VII. Direct Object 26 
 
 VIII., IX. Questions 28 
 
 X., XI. Certain Forms of tbe Second Conjugation. — 
 
 Appositives. — Genitive with Nouns ... 30 
 
 XII., XIII. Second Declension 33 
 
 XIV. Adjectives. — First and Second Declension. — 
 
 Agreement of Adjectives 37 
 
 XV. Adjectives. — Certain Forms of /S't/m . ... 'JfJ 
 
 XVI., XVII. Adjectives. — Lifter. — Je.vcr 40 
 
 XVin., — XXIV. Third Declension 43 
 
 Dative with Verbs 47 
 
 Predicate Nouns Til 
 
 XXV. Gender in Third Declension. — Cases with 
 
 Prepositions !Hi 
 
 XXVI. Certain Forms of the Third Conjugation. — Use 
 
 of Adverbs GO 
 
 XXVII., XXVIII. Certain Forms of the Fourth Conjugation. — 
 
 Perfect Tense. — Ablative of Means . , . . f»2 
 
 XXIX., XXX. Adjectives of the Third Declension HO 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives 70 
 
 XXXI. Ablative with Comparativea 71 
 
 XXXII. FourthDeclenslon. — Fifth Declension.— Time 74 
 
Lesson XXXIII. 
 XXXIV. — XXXVI. 
 
 XXXVII. 
 XXXVIII. 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 XL., XLI. 
 
 XLII. 
 XLIIL 
 XLIV. 
 
 XLV. 
 
 XLVI., XLVII. 
 
 XLVIIL-L. 
 LI., LII. 
 
 LIII.-LV. 
 
 LVI., LVIL 
 
 LVIII. 
 
 LIX. 
 
 LX. 
 
 LXL — LXIII. 
 
 LXIV., LXV. 
 
 LXVI.-LXVIII. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Nnmcrnls. — Accusative of Time and Space . 77 
 
 Pronouns 81 
 
 Questions— Answers 87 
 
 Agreement of Pronouns 88 
 
 Present and Imperfect Subjunctive Active, 
 and Present Imperative Active, in Conju- 
 gations I. and II., and in 6'«m. — Use of 
 
 Indicative 01 
 
 Subjunctive of Desire, Command. — Impera- 
 tive 04 
 
 Present and Imperfect Subjunctive Active, 
 and Present Imperative Active, in Conju- 
 gations III. and I v. — Sequence of Tenses. 
 
 — Purpose H7 
 
 Ilosult 102 
 
 Moods in Indirect Clauses lOG 
 
 Present Infinitive Active. — Uho of Inlini- 
 
 tive. — (Certain Forms of I'o»sum .... 109 
 Directions for Heading at Siglit. — Exercise 
 
 in Reading at Siglit 112 
 
 Sum 115 
 
 Dative with Adjective* 1 IH 
 
 First Conjugation. — Indicative Active . . I'JO 
 First Conjugation. — Active Voice .... 123 
 Two Accusatives— Same Person . . . . 12t» 
 First Conjugation. — Indicative Passive. — 
 
 Separation, Source, Cause 128 
 
 First Conjugation. — Subjunctive Passive. — 
 
 Supine in vm i.'i'j 
 
 First Conjugation.— Passive Voice.— Accusa- 
 tive and Infinitive. — Subject of Infinitive 1.35 
 
 Exercise in Reading at Siglit 140 
 
 Second Conjugation.— Indicative Active . 141 
 Second Conjugation. — Active Voice ... 143 
 
 Place in Which 147 
 
 Second Conjugation. — Indicative Pa&sive. — 
 
 Use of Vocative irA 
 
 Second Conjugation. — Passive Voice ... 153 
 
CONTENTS. XI 
 
 Lbsson LXIX. Exercise in Reading nt Siglit 1(X) 
 
 LXX. Third Conjugntion. — Indicative Active . . 1(»1 
 
 LXXr., LXXII. Tliird Conjugation. — Active Voice . . . . U3 
 
 LXXIII. — LXXV. Tliird Conjugation. — Passive Voice . . . m) 
 
 LXXVL Exercise in Reading at Siglit 170 
 
 LXXVII. Fourth Conjugation. —Indicative Active . 177 
 
 LXXVIII., LXXIX. Fourth Conjugation. — Active Voice ... 179 
 
 Ablative of Specification 183 
 
 LXXX. — LXXXII. FourthConjugatlou. — Passive Voice ... 185 
 
 Ablative of Difference 188 
 
 Ablative Absolute 1<)0 
 
 LXXXIII. Exercise in Rea<lM)g at Sight I'.W 
 
 LXXXIV. Tliird Conjugation.— Verl« in lo.— Active 
 
 Voice. — Supine in « 1!)4 
 
 LXXXV. Third Conjugation. — Verbs in jo. — Passive 
 
 Voice. — Conditional Sentences .... 198 
 
 LXXXVI. Conces.slve Clauses .202 
 
 LXXXVII. Deponent Verbs. -Ablative in Special Con- 
 structions '20rt 
 
 LXXXVIII. Indirect Discourse 209 
 
 LXXXIX. Periphrastic Conjugations. — Exercise In 
 
 Reading at Sight 214 
 
 XC — XCV. Irregular Verbs. — /*o««»m 215 
 
 Fero 216 
 
 Void. — Nolo. — Maid. — Two Accusatives . . 220 
 Flo. — E6. — Accusative of Limit. — Place 
 
 from Which 224 
 
 XCVI., XCVII. Impersonal Verbs.— Two Datives .... 229 
 
 Accusative and Genitive 2.'52 
 
 XCVIII. Exercise in Reading at Sight 2.15 
 
 XCIX., C. Gerunds, Gerundives, and Participles . . . 2.'U) 
 
 Narratives from Caesar.— The Helvetii 242 
 
 Invasion of Rrltaln 253 
 
 P MS un ExerclHos in I^t in Composition 2(J0 
 
 H to the Learner 2;>1 
 
 I^Uin-English Vocabulary 271 
 
 EngliHh-Latin Vocabulary :.<»."» 
 
 Api>endix. — General Rules of Syntax l 
 
FIRST YEAR'S LATIN COURSE. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 XoTE. — The teacher will doubtless deem it advisable to begin with 
 Lesson I., page 15, and to use the introduction for reference. 
 
 LATIN ALPHABET. 
 
 1. Latin Grammar treats of the principles of the Latin 
 lancjuasje. 
 
 2. The Latin alphabet is the same as the English, with 
 the omission of w. 
 
 3. Lettere are divided according to the position of the 
 vocal organs at the time of utterance into two general 
 classes, vowels and consonants,* and these classes are again 
 divided into various subdivisions, as seen in the following 
 
 Classification of Letters. 
 
 I. VOWELS. 
 
 \. Opkn vowel^ a 
 
 2. MnniAi. vowels e o 
 
 3. Closk vowels^ i y u 
 
 1 If the vocal or<?an8 are sufficiently open to allow an lunntemiptcd 
 flow of vocal sound, a vowel is produced, otherwise a consonant; but the 
 loivst open vowels are scarcely distuigiiishable from the most open con- 
 sonants. 
 
 ■^ In pronouncing the open vowel a as in father, the vocal organs are 
 fully oi)en. By gradually contracting them at one point and another we 
 produce in succession the medial vowels, the close vowels, the semivowels, 
 the nasals, the aspirate, the fricatives, and linally the mutes, in pronounc- 
 ing which the closure of the vocal organs becomes complete. 
 
 '^ i:,' in a uu-dial vowel between the o[)en a and the close i; o a mediul 
 
PHONETIC CHANGES, 
 
 II. CONSONANTS.* 
 
 GlTTTUUALS. DKNTAL^. LABIALS. 
 
 1. 
 
 Semivoweij*, «onaji«* . 
 
 . i or j = y 
 
 
 V = 10 
 
 2. 
 
 Nasals, Mnant . . . . 
 
 n^ 
 
 XI 
 
 m 
 
 3. 
 
 Asi'iKATE, surd * . 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 FiucATiVES, comprising : 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Liquids^ sonant 
 
 
 1, r 
 
 
 
 2. SpiranlSy surd 
 
 , 
 
 8 
 
 f 
 
 5. 
 
 Mutes, comprising: 
 
 
 
 
 
 1. Sonant mutes . 
 
 S 
 
 d 
 
 b 
 
 
 2. Surd mutes 
 
 . C. k. q 
 
 t 
 
 P 
 
 NoTB. — X = cs, and z = ds, are double cousonants, formed by tlie 
 union of a mute with the spirant s. 
 
 -I. Diplithoiigs are fomietl by the union of two vowels in 
 
 one syllable. 
 
 Note.— The most common diphtliongs are ae, oe, ufi^ and en. Ei, oi, 
 and ul ore rare. 
 
 Phonetic Changes. 
 
 22. Vowels ai-e often weakened, i.e., are often changed to 
 weaker vowels. 
 
 Tlie order of the vowels, from the strongest to the weakest, is as 
 follows: 
 
 vowel between the open a and the close u ; y was introduced from the 
 Greek. 
 
 J Observe tliat the consonants are divided: 
 I. According to the organs chiefly employed in their production, into 
 
 1. Gutturals — throat letters, also called Palatals. 
 
 2. Dentals — teeth letters, also called Liuguals. 
 
 3. Labials — lip letters. 
 
 II. According to the manner in which they are uttered, into 
 
 1. Sonants, or voiced letters. 
 
 2. Surds, or voiceless letters. 
 
 2 The distinction between a sonant and a surd will be appreciated by 
 observing the difference between the sonant b and its corresponding surd 
 p in such words as bad, pad. B is vocalized, }> is not. 
 
 8 With the sound of n in concord, linger. It occurs before gutturals. 
 congruenter, suitably. 
 
PHONETIC CHANGES. 8 
 
 a, o, u, e, V 
 
 Tims a is changed to o . . . u . . . e . . . i 
 o to u . . . e . . . i. 
 u to e . . . L 
 e to i=^ 
 Carmen^* carmeniSf camiinia, a song, of a song; faciOy con-facio^ 
 (On-Jicio^ I make, 1 accomplish; f actus, in-factns, in-feclus, made, 
 not made; te/ieo, con-teneo, con-tineo, 1 liohl, I contain ; tuba, tuba-cen, 
 tiibi-cetiy a flute, a flute-player. 
 
 30. A Guttural — c, g, q, (qu) or h, — before 8 generally 
 unites with it and fornis z : 
 
 I)uc8, dux, leader; pacs, ])ax, peace; reyn, recs, rex, king; legs, 
 lees, lex, law: coquM, cocsi, coxi, 1 have cooked; trahsi, tracifi, traxiy 
 1 have drawn. 
 
 31. S is generally changed to r when it stands between 
 two vowels : 
 
 Floses, fibres, flowers; jiisa, jura, rights; mensdsum, tnensdrum, 
 of tables; ayrbsum, ayrorum, of lields; esuin, cram, 1 was; esainus, 
 erdinus, we were. 
 
 33. Partial Assimilation. — A consonant is often p;nli- 
 ally^ assimilated by a following consonant. Thus before 
 the surd 8 or t, a sonant b or g is generally changed to its 
 cori-esponding surd, p or c : 
 
 Scribsi, scripsi, 1 have written; acribtus, scriptus, written; reysif 
 rtcsi, rexi (30), 1 have ruled; reytus, rectus, ruled. 
 
 * Tlie change from a through o to u is usually arrested at ff, while a 
 ia often changed directly through e to j without pivssing through o or u. 
 Thus the open a is changed either to the close n through the medial o, as 
 seen on the right side of the following vowel-triangle, or to the close i 
 through the medial e, as seen on the left side: 
 
 Open vowel a 
 
 Medial vowels c o 
 
 Close vowels i u 
 
 ' But u, e, and / differ so sliglttly iu strength that tlicy appear at times 
 to be simply interchanged. 
 
 * Here e iu carmen becomes I iu carmlnls, a in /aciO becomes i in c6n- 
 fkm, etc. 
 
 * That is, it is adapted or accommodated to^it, but does not become the 
 same letter. 
 
PRONUNCIA TION. 
 
 rUONUNCIATION OF LATLN.^ 
 I. Roman Method of Pronunciation? 
 5. Vowels. — The vowel sounds are the followin2 : — 
 
 I»NO. 
 
 Shout. 
 
 
 t like & In father: «-;•?«.» 
 
 a like a in Cuba:^ 
 
 a'-me<. 
 
 • ** e " prey;* <'-«/i. 
 
 e •* c " net: 
 
 re' -yet, • 
 
 I " t " macliine:* V-n. * 
 
 i ♦• i " cigar: 
 
 ti'-det. 
 
 6 " 6 " old: o'-rcM. 
 
 o " " obey: 
 
 mo'-«c<. 
 
 a •♦ u " rule:* u'-no. 
 
 u ♦' u •* full: 
 
 «u'-mM8, 
 
 1. A abort vowel in a long syllable is pronoiuiced short: sunij* u as 
 in aunty Hu'-mus, But see 16, note 2. 
 
 3. I preceded by an accented a, c, o, or y, and followed by an- 
 other vowel, is a semivowel with the sound of y in yet (7) : A-chd'-ia 
 ( A-kii - ya). 
 
 4. U in 9«, and generally in gu and «i before a vowel, has the 
 sound of w: qui (kwe), Un'-gua (lin'-gwii), md'-nit (swii'-sit). 
 
 1 lu this country three distinct methods are recognized in the pronun- 
 ciation of Latin. They are generally known as the Roman, the English, 
 and the Contimntal Method*. Recent researches have revealed laws of 
 phonetic change of great value in tracing the history of Latin words. 
 Accordingly, whatever method of pronunciation may be adopted for ac- 
 tual use in the class-room, the pupil should sooner or later be made famil- 
 iar with the leading features of the Roman Method, which is at least an 
 approximation to the ancient pronunciation of the language. The pupil 
 will, of course, at present study only the method adopted in the school. 
 
 * Those who adopt the Englisli Method will now turn to page 6 ; those 
 who adopt the Continental Method to page 8. Strictly speaking, there is 
 no Continental Method, as every nation on the Continent of Europe has 
 its own method. 
 
 ' The I^tin vowels marked with tYie macron "are long in quantity, i.e. 
 in the duration of the sound (16) ; those not marked are short in quantity ; 
 see 1(), note 3. Observe that the accent is also marked. For the laws of 
 accentuation, see 17 and 18 in this introduction. 
 
 ^ Or e like d in made, t like e in me, and u like oo in moon. 
 
 * The short vowels can be only imi>erfectly represented by English 
 equivalents. In theory they have the same sounds as the corresponding 
 long vowels, but occupy only half as much time in utterance. 
 
 ^ Observe the difference between the length or quantity of the vowel and 
 the length or quantity of the syllable. Here the vowel v is short, but the 
 syllable sunt is long^ see 16, 1. In syllables long irrespective of the length 
 
PRONUNCIATION, 5 
 
 6. Diphthongs. — In diplithongs each vowel retains its 
 own sound: 
 
 ae (for ai) like the English ay (yes): mm'sae,^ 
 au like ow in ho"w: can' -m. 
 
 oe (for oi) like oi in coin: /oe'-<it«.* 
 
 7. Consonants. — Most of the consonants are pronounced 
 nearly as in English, but the following require special notice: 
 
 c like k in king: cc'-les (kaylace), ci'-vi (ke-we). 
 g " J7 ** get: re'-giinty re'-i/is, ge'-mis. 
 j ** y " yet: JM'-5(um (yoo-stum), ja'-cc^ 
 a " s " Bon: sa'-ccTf 80' -ror J A' -iti-a. 
 t *' t •* time: ti'-mor, to'-tiis, ac'-li-Om 
 V " to " "we: va'-Oum, vi'-c'i, vi'-ti-um.^ 
 
 8. Syllables. — In dividing words into syllables, 
 
 1. Make as many syllables as there are vowels and diph- 
 thongs : mo'-re^ persud'-de, men'-sae. 
 
 2. Join to each vowel as many of the consonants which 
 precede it — one or more — as can l>e conveniently pro- 
 nounced at the beginning of a word or syllable : * pa'-ter^ 
 jm'-treSy ge'-ne-ri^ do'-mi-nus^ men'-s<t^ bel'-l nn. But — 
 
 3. Coni})Ound words must be separated into their compo- 
 nent parts, if the fii-st of these parts ends in a consonant: 
 ab'-€Sy oh-V-re} 
 
 of the vowels contained in them, it is often difficult and sometimes abso- 
 hitely impossible to determine the natural quantity of the vowels; but it 
 is thought advisable to treat vowels as short in all situations where there 
 are not gootl reasons for believing them to be long. 
 ^ Combining the sounds of a and i. 
 
 * Ei as in veil, eu with the sounds of c and u combined, and o»=« or, 
 occur in a few words: deiu^ neu'-ter, proin. 
 
 » There is some uncertainty in regard to the sound of r. Corsscn gives 
 it at the beginning of a word the sound of the English r. 
 
 * By some grammarians any combination of consonants which can 
 b<^gin either a Latin or a Greek word is always joined to the following 
 vowel, as o'-nwjM, i'-pse. Others, on the contrary, think that the Romans 
 pronounced with each vowel as many of the following coiwoDants as oould 
 be readily combined with it. 
 
 * Those who adopt the Roman Pronunriation, omitting the Knfflish 
 ind the Contiwntal Method, will now turn to Lrsson I., page Mi. 
 
 2 
 
6 PRONUNCIA TION, 
 
 II. JCiifflish Method of Pronunciation, 
 
 9. Vowels. — Vowels generally have their long or short 
 English sounds. 
 
 10. Long Sounds. — Vowels have their long English 
 sounds — a as in fate^ e in mete^ i in 7)ey«?, o in note, u in 
 tube, y in ti/pe — in the following situations : — 
 
 1. In final syllables ending in a vowel: — 
 Se, aif 8er'-vi, «cr'-co, cor' -mi y mi'-sy. 
 
 2. In all syllables, before a vowel or dij)hthong: — 
 De'-uij de-o'-rumf de'-ae^ di-e'-i^ ni'-hi-lumA 
 
 3. In j>enultimate * syllables before a single consonant, 
 or befoi-e a mute followed by a liquid : — 
 
 Pa'-teVt jm'-treSf ho-no'-riSf A'-thos, O'-tlmjs. 
 
 4. In unaccented syllables, not final, before a single con- 
 sonant, or before a mute followed by a liquid : — 
 
 Do-lo'-riSy cor'-po-riy con'su-liSj a-nric-o-la. 
 
 1. A unaccented^ except before consonants in final syllables (11, 1), 
 has tlie sound of a final in America: men'-aay a-cu'-tus, a-ma'-mus.* 
 
 2. I and y unaccented^ in any syllable except the first and last, gener- 
 ally have the short sound : nob'-i-lis (nob'-e-lis), Am'-y-cus (Am'-e-cus). 
 
 3. I preceded- by an accented a, e, o, or y, and followed by another 
 vowel, is a semivowel with the sound of y in yet: A-cha'-ia (A-ka'- 
 ya), Pom-pe'-ius (Pom-pe'-yus), La-to'-ia (La-to'-ya), Har-py'-ia 
 (Har-py'-ya). 
 
 4. XT in qii, and generally in r/w and su before a vowel, has the 
 sound of to : qui (kwi), qua ; lin'-gua (lin'-g^va) ; sua'-de-o (swa'-de-o). 
 
 11. Short Sounds. — Vowels have their short English 
 sounds — a as in fat^ e in met, i in pin, o in 7iot, u in tttb, 
 y in 97iyth — in the following situations: — 
 
 1 In these rules no account is taken of tlio aspirate h: hence the first i 
 in nihilitm is treated as a vowel before another vowel ; for the same reason, 
 ch, ph, and th are treated as single mutes; tlius th in Athos and Othrys. 
 
 2 Penultimate, the last syllable but one. 
 
 3 Some give the same sound to a final in monosyllables: da, qua: 
 while utheis ^ive it the hnr/ sount', ac^ord'nc; to 10, 1. 
 
PRONUNCIATION. T 
 
 1. In final syllables ending in a consonant: — 
 
 A'-maU a'-met, rex'-it^ sol, con'-sul, Te'-thys ; excerpt post, es finalf 
 and 08 final in plural cases: re«, di'-cs, hos, a'-yros. 
 
 2. In all syllables before sr, or any two consonants except 
 a nuiic followed by a liqMid (10, 3 and 4) : — 
 
 Bejc'-it, beV-lum, rex-e'-runt, bd-lo'-ruin. 
 
 3. In all accented syllables, not penultimate, befoi-e one or 
 more consonants : — 
 
 Dom'-i-tM8, pnt'-ri-biis. But — 
 
 1) A, e, or o before a single consonant (or a mute and a liquid), 
 followed by e, i, or y before another vowel, has the long sound: 
 a'-ci-cs, a'-cri-a, me'-re-o, do'-ce-o. 
 
 2) U, in any syllable not final, l)eforc a single consonant or a mute 
 and a liquid, except bl, has the long sound: Pu'-ni-cus, sa-lu'-bri-tas, 
 
 12. Diphthongs. — Diphthongs are pronounced as follows: 
 
 A.eV\kee: Cae'-sar, Dned'-a-hiH.^ | Au as in author: a?t'-r«m. 
 Oe like e: Oe'-f<i, Oed'-i-pu8.* I Eu ^ as in neuter: neu'-ter. 
 
 1 3. Consonants. — Tlie consonants ai*e pronounced in gen- 
 
 r:il :us in English. Thus : — 
 
 I. C and O are 8oft (like s and j) before e, i, y, ar, and oe, and 
 hard in other situations': ce'-do (se'-do), cf -r»«, Cy'-rua, cae'-dOj 
 coe'-pi, a'-f/e (a'-je), a'-{fi ; ca'-ilo (ka-<lo), co'-<fO, cum, Ga'-des. 
 
 II. 8, T, and X are generally pronounced as in the English words 
 > ui, time, expect: sa'-cer, ti'-ntor, rex'-i (rek'-si). But — 
 
 1. .S, T, and X are aspirated l)eforo / preceded by an accented syllable 
 and followed by a vowel, — « and t taking the sound of sh, and x that of 
 ktfh : Al'si-um (ArnBhe-um), ar'-ti-um (ar'-she-um), ««a;'-i-w»(ank'-she-iis). 
 
 ' The diphthong has the lonr/ sound in Cae'sar and Oe'-ta, according to 
 
 l<>. 3, but the short sound in Z)aerf'-<i-/»»(Ded'-arlu8) and Ocrf'-j-/>»/*(Ed'-i- 
 
 :>). according to 11, 3, as e would be thus pronounced in tlie same situa- 
 
 . ,'iI»S. 
 
 ^ El and oi are seldom diphthongs, but when so used they are pro- 
 nounced as in hfi'jht, coin : licU pruin. Ui, as a diphthong, with the long 
 •ound of I, occurs in cui, hui, hulc, 
 
 • C has the sound of sh — 
 
 1. Before i preceded by au accented syllable and followed by a vowel: 
 $o'-ci'US (»o'-«he-tt8); 
 
 2. Before &u and yo precrdod by an accented syllable: ca-du'-cC'US (ca* 
 •iu'-fihe-uft), Sic'-y-on (Steh'-y-ou) 
 
B PRONUNCIATION, 
 
 2. S is pronounced like z — 
 
 1) At the end of a word, after r, ae, av, h, m, n, r; gpeStpracs, tawa, 
 Mr6«, hi' -ems, rnons, pars ; 
 
 2) In a few words after the analogy of the corresponding English words: 
 Cae'sar, Caesar; cait'-«a, cause; Tnii'sa, muse; mi'ser, miser, miserable, 
 etc. 
 
 3. X at the beginning of a word has the sound of z : Xan'-thus. 
 
 14. Syllables. — In dividing words into syllables — 
 
 1. Make as many syllables as there are vowels and diphthongs: 
 mo'-re, per-sua'-de, inen'-sae. 
 
 2. Distribute the consonants so as to give the proper sonnd to each 
 vowel and diphthong, as determined by previous ndes (10-12) : |>a'-kT, 
 pa'-tres, a-yro'-runij au-dt'-u/, (jen'-e-ri, doin'-i-nus. 
 
 III. Continental MetJiod of Prommciation, 
 5. Vowels. — The vowel sounds are the following : 
 
 
 Long. 
 
 
 Shoht. 
 
 
 ft like 
 
 d in father: 
 
 (i'-risA 
 
 a like a in Cuba:^ 
 
 a' -met. 
 
 6 " 
 
 e " prey:^ 
 
 C'-dl. 
 
 e ♦' r •' net: 
 
 re'-get. 
 
 I " 
 
 i ** machine. 
 
 2 i'-ri. 
 
 i " i " cigar: 
 
 vi'-det. 
 
 6 " 
 
 6 " old: 
 
 O'-raa. 
 
 o ♦* " obey: 
 
 mo'-net. 
 
 u " 
 
 u " rule: 2 
 
 U'-JIO. 
 
 u *' n " full: 
 
 su'-mti8. 
 
 1. A short vowel in a long syllable is pronounced short: aunt,* u as 
 in sum, su'-mus. But see 16, note 2. 
 
 6. Diphthongs. — In diphthongs each vowel retains its 
 own sound : — 
 
 ae (for ai) like the English ay (yes): men'-sae.^ 
 au like JO in ho"w: cau'-sa. 
 
 oe (for oi) like oi in coin: foe'-dus.^ 
 
 1 The Latin vowels marked with the macron " are long in quantity, 
 i.e. in the duration of the sound (16); those not marked are sAort in quan- 
 tity ; see 16, note 3. 
 
 2 Or € like a in made, i like e in me, and u like oo in moon. 
 
 8 The sounds of the vowels and diphthongs are the same as in the 
 Koman method ; see pages 4 and 5. 
 
 * See foot-note 6, page 4. ^ See foot-note 1, page 5. 
 
 6 See foot-note 2, page 5. 
 
QUANTITY. 9 
 
 13. CoxsoxANTS. — The consonants are pronounced in 
 general as in English ; see 13, I., II. 1, 2, page 7. 
 
 14. Syllables. — In dividing words into syllables make 
 as many syllables as there are vowels and diphthongs : mo'-re^ 
 per-8iid'-de, inen'sae.^ 
 
 Quantity. 
 
 16. Syllables are in quantity or length either long, short, 
 or common.* 
 
 I. LoxG. — A syllable is long in quantity — 
 
 1. If it contains a diphthong or a long vowel: haec, res.* 
 
 2. If its vowel is followed by x or z or any two consonants, except 
 a mute and a liquid:* tiux, rex, sunt.^ 
 
 II. Short. — A syllable is short, if its vowel is followed by 
 another vowel, by a diphthong, or by the aspirate h: di-es^ 
 vi-iie^ ni'-hil.^ 
 
 1 Join to each vowel as many of the consonants which precede it — 
 one or more — as can be conveniently pronounced at the beginning of a 
 word or syllable: pa'-ter, pa'-tres, ge'-ne-ri, do'-mi-mis, men'-sn, bel'-lum. 
 But compound words must be separated into their component parts, if the 
 first of these parts ends in a consonant : ab'-es, ob-V-re. 
 
 a Common, i.e. sometimes long and sometimes short. 
 
 t See note 3, below. 
 
 * That is, in the order hero given, with the mute before the liquid; if 
 the li(|uid precedes, the syllable is long. 
 
 * Observe that the vowel in such syllables may be either long or short. 
 Thus it is long in rex, but short in dux and sunt. 
 
 * By referring to pages 4 and 8, it will be seen, that, in the Roman 
 Method and in the ContincutAl, quantity and sound coincide with each 
 • >ther: a vowel long in quantity is long in sound, and a vowel short in quan- 
 I ity is short in sound. But, by referring to 10 and 11, it will be seen, that, 
 in the English Method, tlie quantity of a vowel does not at all affect its 
 sound, except in determining the accent (18). Hence, in this method, a 
 vowel long in quantity is often short in sound, and a vowel short in quantity 
 is often long in sound. Thus in rix and ifol, the vowels are long in quantity; 
 but by 11, 1, they have the short English sounds: while in ave, mare, the 
 vowels are all short in quantity; but by 10, 1 and 3, they all have the 
 long English sounds. Hence, in pronouncing according to the E:)g]ish 
 Method, determine the i>lace of the accent by the quantity, according to 
 
10 ACCENTVATfON. 
 
 III. Common. — A syllable is common, if its vowel, natu- 
 rally ^ short, is followed by a mute and a liquid : a-yrl. 
 
 Note 1. — Vow^els are also in quantity either long, short, or common; 
 but the quantity of the vowel does not always coincide with the quantity 
 of the syllable."^ 
 
 Note 2. — Vowels are long before n», n/, (jn, and gm; con'-sul, 
 in-fe'-Ux, rerj'-num^ dgmen. 
 
 Note 3. —The signs ', " are used to mark the quantity of vowels, the 
 first denoting that the vowel over which it is placed is haf/, the second 
 that it is common, i.e. sometimes long and sometimes short: a-md -bO, 
 All vowels not marked are to be treated as short.^ 
 
 Accentuation. 
 
 17. Words of two syllables are always accented on the 
 fii"st: men'-sa. 
 
 18. Words of more tlian two syllables are accented on 
 the Pemdt,*ii that is long in quantity;* otherwise on the 
 Antepenult : * ho-nd'-ris, con -»itrlis.^ 
 
 3. A secondai-y or subonlinate accent is placed on the second or 
 third syllable before the primary accent — on the second, if that is the 
 first syllable of the word, or is long in quantity, otherwise on the 
 third: mo'-nu-e'-ranU mo'-nu-e-rd'-mtnf,'' in-stau'-ru-ve'runt. 
 
 18, and then determine the sounds of the letters irrespective of quantity, 
 according to 10-13. 
 
 ' A vowel is said to be naturally short, when it is short in its own 
 nature; i.e. in itself, without reference to its ])osition. 
 
 ' Thus in long syllables the vowels maybe either long or short, as in 
 rex, dux, sunt (see foot-uote G, p. 4). But in short sylUvbles the vowels are 
 also short. 
 
 8 See p. 4, foot-note 0. In many works short vowels are marked with 
 the sign ^ : ri^t/U. 
 
 * The penult is the last syllable but one ; the ant«i)enult, the last but 
 two. 
 
 * Thus the quantity of the sjfllable, not of the rowel, determinas the 
 place of the accent : reffen'-tis, accented on the penult, because that *yWa- 
 ble is louf/, though its vowel is short: see 16, I., 2. 
 
 6 In the subsequent pages, the pupil will be exi^ected to accent words 
 in pronunciation according to these rules. 
 
 ' In the English Method divide thus: man -u-c' -runt, mon-ii-e-ra'-mua. 
 
SENTENCES. \\ 
 
 SENTENCES. — VERBS. 
 
 346. A sentence is a combination of words expressing 
 either a single thought or two or more thoughts. 
 
 347. A Simple Sentence expresses a single thought : 
 Deus munduiu aedificavlt, God made (built) the world. Cic. 
 
 348. A Complex Sentence expresses one leading thought 
 with one or more dependent thoughts : 
 
 Donee eris felix, multos numenibis ainlcos, so long as you shall be 
 prosperous, you will number many friends.^ Ovid. 
 
 840. A Compound Sentence expresses two or more in- 
 dependent thoughts : 
 
 Sol ruit et montes umbrantur, the sun hastens to Its setting and the 
 vtoiintaiiis are shaded. Verg. 
 
 356. The Simple Sentence in its most simple form con- 
 sists of two distinct parts, expressed or implied ; — 
 
 1. The SuiWECT, or that of which it speaks; 
 
 2. The Predicate, or that which is said of the subject : 
 Cluilius moritur, Cluilius dies.* Liv. 
 
 NoTK. — In Latin, both subject and predicate may be contained or 
 iiupliod in a single word, if that word is a verb: 
 Amas,' thou lovest. Amat,* he loves. 
 
 857. The Simple Sentence in its most expanded form 
 consists of these same parts with their various modifiers : 
 
 » In tliM example two simple sentences — (1) *youwill beproaperovs,* 
 and (2) ' i/ou tcill number many friends* — are so united that the first 
 only specifies the time of the second: You tcill mtmber many friends so 
 long as you shall be proupcrous. The part of the complex sentence which 
 makes complete sense of itself — muUos numerdbis amtcos — is called the 
 Princiital or Indefiendent t'lauxe ; and the part which is dependi-nt xxiton 
 it — donee eris felix — is called the Subordinate or Dependent Clause. 
 
 3 Here Cluilius is the subject, and moritur the predicate. 
 
 » The ending « shows that the subject is of the second person sinynlar, 
 THOU, while t shows that it is of the third person siiiyular, hr. 
 
12 VERBS. 
 
 In his castrfs Cluilius, Albilniis rex, moritiir, Cluilius^ the Alba 
 king^ dies in this camp.^ Liv. 
 
 192. Verbs in Latin, as in English, express existence 
 condition, or action: est^ he is; dormit^ he is sleeping 
 legiU, he reads. 
 
 193. Verbs comprise two principal classes: — 
 
 I. Transitive Verbs admit a direct object of the action 
 sermim verberat^ he beats the slave.* 
 
 II. Intransitive Verbs do not admit such an object 
 puer ciirrit, the boy runs.* 
 
 194. Verbs have Voice, Mood^ Tense^ N'umber and Person 
 
 195. There are two voices: 
 
 I. The Active Voice' represents the subject as actinc 
 or EXISTING : pater /Ilium amatf the father loves his son 
 est, he is. 
 
 II. The Passive Voice represents the subject as actei 
 UPON by some other jKjrson or thnig: fUiics dpatre amutur 
 the son is loved by his father. 
 
 196. There are three moods : * — 
 
 I. The Indicative Mood either asserts something as ; 
 fad or inquires after the fact : 
 
 LegiU he is reading. Legitne, is he reading ? Servius reg 
 ndvit, Servius reigned. Quis ego «wm, who am I f 
 
 1 Here C^mllus, Albdnus rex, is the sabject in its enlarged or modifie( 
 form: in his castris moritnr^ the predicate in its enlarged or modified form 
 
 =^ Here senuim, 'the slave,* is the object of the action; beats (what? 
 the stave. The object thus completes the meaning of the verb. He beat 
 is incomplete in sense, but t/ic boy runs is complete, and accordmgly doe 
 not admit an object. 
 
 « Voice shows whether the subject acts (Active Voice), or is acted vpa 
 (Passive Voice). Thus, with the Active Voice, *the father loves his son, 
 the subject, father, is the one who performs the action, loves, while wit) 
 the Passive Voice, *the son is loved by the futJter,* the subject, son, merel; 
 receives the action, is acted upon, is loved. 
 
 * Mood, or 3fode, means manner, and relates to the manner in whicl 
 the meaning of the verb is expressed, as will be seen by observing th 
 force of tlie several moods. 
 
VERBS. V6 
 
 II. Tlie Sri;.n .\( nvE Moon ex))resscs not an actual fact, 
 but a possibiliti/ or concejHiofi, 
 
 Amhntts palriain, let us love our country. Hint beiiti, may 
 TiiEY BE hupp!/. Quaerat quispiaiu, some one may inquikk. 
 
 III. The Impkrativk Mood expresses a command or an 
 entreat}/ : 
 
 Justitiam cote, vkawise justice. Tu ne cede mails, do not yicld 
 to misfortunes. 
 
 197. Thoi-e are six tenses : ' 
 
 I. TiiiiPiE Tenses for Incomplete Action: — 
 
 1. Present : orwio, I love, I am loving. 
 
 2. Imperfect : amdbam^ I was loving, I loved. 
 *6. Future : aniCibOy I shall love, I will love. 
 
 11. Three Tenses for Completed Action: 
 
 1. Perfect : wnavly I have loved, I loved. 
 
 2. Phii)erfect : amdveram^ I had loved. 
 
 3. Future Perfect : anu'tvero, I shall have loved. 
 
 198. Tenses are also distinguished as — 
 I. Principal or Primary Tenses : 
 
 1. Present : amO^ I love. 
 
 2. Present Perfect ; amCtvi, I have loved. 
 
 3. Future : amdbo^ I shall love. 
 
 4. Future Perfect : amdveroy I shall have loved. 
 II. Historical or Secondary Tenses: 
 
 1. Imperfect: a}ndbani, I was loving. 
 
 2. Historical Perfect : amdvl, I loved. 
 
 3. Pluperfect : amdverantj I had loved. 
 
 190. In Verbsy as in Nouns (44), there are two numbers. 
 Singular and Plural, and three ])ersons, First, Se(X>nd, 
 and Third. 
 
 Note. — The various verbal forms wljioli have voice, mooti, tense 
 number, and |>erson, make up the finite vertt. 
 
 ' TlniT? means time The tonae of a verb sliows tbe time of llie action. 
 
14 VERBS, 
 
 200. Amonjj verbal forms are included the followinjj 
 verbal noiiiis and adjectives: 
 
 I. The Infinitive is a verbal noun. It is sometimes best 
 translated by the English Infitiitwe^ sometimes by the verbal 
 7ioun in ing, and sometimes by the Indicative: 
 
 Exire ex urbe void, 1 wish to r.o out of the city. GestiO scire omnia, 
 / long TO KNOW all things. Ilaec scire juvat, to know these things 
 a^'ords pleatsure. 
 
 II. The Gerund gives the meaning of the verb in the fonn 
 of a verbal noun of the second declension/ used only in the 
 genitive^ dative^ accusative^ and ablative singular. It cor- 
 responds to the English verbal noun in ing : 
 
 Amandi, of i.ovinq. Amandi causa, for the sake of loving. 
 Ars Vivendi, the art of living. Ad dlscenduni prOpensus, inclined 
 
 TO LEAKN, or TO LEARNING. 
 
 III. The Supine gives the meaning of the verb in the 
 form of a verbal noun of tlie fourth declension.^ It has a 
 form in um and a form in u: 
 
 Amatimiy to love, for loving. AmutO, to be loved, for 
 LOVING, IN loving. Auxilium postitldtum venit, he came to ask 
 aid. Difficile dictit est, it is dijjicult to teli« 
 
 IV. The Participle in Latin, as in English, gives the 
 meaning of the verb in the form of an adjective. It is 
 sometimes best translated by the English Participle or Ifir 
 finitive, and sometimes by a Clause: 
 
 AmanSj loving. AmcdUrus, about to love. Amatiis, loved. 
 Amandns, deserving to be loved. Plato scrlbens mortuus est, 
 Plato died while writing, or while he was writing. 
 
 Note. — A Latin verb may have four participles: two in the Ac- 
 tive, the Present and the Future, amuns, amatiirus ; and two in the 
 Passive, the Peifect and the Gerundive, amiitus, aniandus. 
 
 201. Regular verbs are inflected, or conjugated, in four 
 different ways, and are accordingly divided into Four Con- 
 jugations. 
 
 1 See 32 a 2 See 92. IIG. 
 
LESSONS AND EXERCISES. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 PAUTS OF SPEECH. — NOUNS. 
 1. Lesson from the Grcnnmar} 
 
 38. Lv I^tin, as in English, words are divided, according 
 io their use, into eiglit classes, called Parts of Sjyeech, viz. : 
 
 Vowis^ Adjectives^ Pronouns^ Verbs^ Adverbs^ Prepositions, 
 ('o)ijuncttonsy and Interjections.^ 
 
 Nouns. 
 
 39. A Noun or Substantive is a name, as of a person, 
 j.lace, or thing: Ciceru, Cicero; JiOma, Rome; domus, 
 liouse. 
 
 1. A Proper Noux is a proi)er name, as of a person or place: 
 ( icerd; Roma. 
 
 2. A Common Noun is a name common to all the members of a 
 rhiss of objecU: c/r, man; equus, Uorse. 
 
 40. Nouns have Gender, Number, Person^ and Case. 
 
 1 The lessons are from the author's TjAtiii Grammar, and the numerals 
 at tlie side of the page, .'(8, 3*.l, etc., designate articles in t)iat work. It is 
 inlvi.sed that tlie InlnHluction be used niainly for reference, but that 
 i<>h parts of it be learned from time to time as the interests of the class 
 nay require. For pronunciation the pupil must at first depend upon his 
 i< I' h< r, but he will soon be able to profit by the rules contained in the 
 I 111 Induction. 
 
 3 In general, the use of the Parts of Speech is the same in Latin as in 
 
 l'MgV.s\t. 
 
16 NOUNS. 
 
 I. Gender. 
 
 41. There are three genders:^ 3fascidine^ Feminine^ and 
 Neuter. 
 
 Note. — In some nouns, gender is determined by signification; io 
 others, by endings. 
 
 42. General Rules for Gender. 
 
 I. Masculines : — 
 
 1. Names of Males; Cicerd ; tlr, man; rex, king. 
 
 2. Names of Rivers, Winds, and Months: R/UnuSy Rhine; Notus, 
 south wind; MurtiuSy March. 
 
 II. P^niinines: — 
 
 1. Names of Females: imtliery woman; leaena, lioness. 
 
 2. Names of CountrieSy TownSy Islands, and Trees: Graecla, 
 Greece; Roma, Rome; Deles, Delos; pirus, pear-tree. 
 
 II. Person and Number. 
 
 44. The Latin, like the English, has three persons and two 
 Tiumbei-s. The fii-st pei*son denotes the speaker; the second, 
 the person spoken to ; the third, the pei*son spoken of. The 
 singular number denotes one ; the i)lural, more than one. 
 
 2. In this exercise give the G^^ny^ER and 'Numbeh of each 
 noun, and tell whether it is Common or Proper. 
 
 1. Caesar (Caesar), Alexander (Alexander), Graecia 
 (Greece), 2. Matres (mothers), mater (a mother), Ilispania 
 (Spain). 3. Pater (a father), patres (fathers), Rhenus 
 (the river Rhine). 4. Puer (a hoy), pueii (boys), puella (a 
 girl), puellae (girls). 5. Sicilia (Sicily), Sparta (the city 
 Sparta), miles (a soldier), milites (soldiers). 
 
 1 In Englisli, tjender denotes sex. Accordingly, masculine nouns de- 
 note 7nale^ ; feminine nouns, females ; and neuter nouns, objects which 
 are neither male nor female. In Latin, however, this natural distinction 
 of gender is applied only to the names of males and females ; while, in all 
 other nouns, gender depends upon an artificial distinction, according to 
 grammatical rules. 
 
NOUNS. 17 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 NOUNS.— CASES. 
 3. Lessons from the Grammar, 
 
 45. TIjc Latin lias six cases:* — 
 
 Namks. Kxolisii Equivalents. 
 
 Koininativc, Noniinative. 
 
 Genitive, Possessive, or Objective with of. 
 
 Dative, Objective with to ov for. 
 
 Accusative, Objective. 
 
 Vocative, Nominative Independent. 
 
 Ablative, Objective \\\x\\ from^ with^ h\j^ in. 
 
 Thus in genernl the English cases arc rei)rcsented in 
 Latin as follows : 
 
 L The Nominative, by the N^ominative in Latin: 
 The queen is praised. liegina laudatur.' 
 
 2. The Possessive and the Objective with of by tlic Gen- 
 itive in Latin : 
 
 The queen's dauprhter is praised. Filia reginae laudatur.* 
 
 Tlie daughter of the queen is praised. Filia reginae laudjitiir. 
 
 3. The Objective with to or /or, by the Dative m Latin ; 
 the Objective without a preposition, by the Accusative: 
 
 They give a book to tue quekn. Reginae librum donant.* 
 
 1 Tlie case of a noun shows the relation which that noun sustains to 
 other words: as, John's book. Here the jiosscssive cas^ shows that John 
 sustains to tlie book the relation of possessor. 
 
 2 Observe tliat the English words to he illustrated are printed in small 
 CAPITALS and the corresponding Latin in Italics. Quken is in tlie Nomi" 
 native, and is the subject of the verb is praised, an<l rei/ina, the correspond- 
 ing word in the Latin, is also in the Nominative and is the subject of the 
 Latin verb laudatur. The Latin has no article j accordingly reyxna may 
 mean a queen, the queen, or simply queen. 
 
 ■ Here dauffhter, the subject of the English sentence, and /Ilia, the 
 subject of the Latin sentence, are both in the Nominative, hut the pofw 
 sessive queen^s, or its equivalent, of the queen, becomes in the Latin 
 rff/inae, the Genitive of rer/lna. 
 
 * Book, the object of give, is in the Objective case, and the corrosimnd* 
 
18 NOUNS. 
 
 4. The XotniiuUioe Lidepoulent in an address, by tho 
 Vocative in Latin : 
 
 They praise you, O queen. Te, rvglnay laiulant.^ 
 
 5. The Objective withy)*owi, tcithy by, in, by the Ablative 
 in Latin : 
 
 They are fortifying the city with a wall. Urbein valid muuiunt.' 
 
 Tliey are walking in the oakden. Inhorlo ambulant. 
 
 Note 1. Tlie Gcuitive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative are called 
 the Oblique Cascu 
 
 Note 2. The Latin has also a fnw remnautsof another case, called 
 the Locative, denoting the place in tchich, 
 
 4. Tji this exercise give tJie Gender, Number, and Case of 
 each N'oun, and tell whether it is Commos or Proper. 
 
 1. Rex (t/ie king) laudutur (is ^^r^f^cV). 2. Filius (the 
 son) regis {of Vie king) laiiddtur (is praised). 3. Filil {t/i6 
 sojis) regis (of the king) laudantur (are praised). 4. Filil 
 (the sons) v^gmw (of kings) XnwihmUw (are praised). 5. Rex 
 (the king) filiain (his • daughter) amat (loves). 6. Rex (t/ie 
 kifig) fllias (his daughters) amat (loves). 7. Cnos^r (Caesar) 
 mllites (the soldiers) laudat (praises). 8. Militea (the sol- 
 diers) laudantur (are praised). 
 
 ing Latin, libntm, the object of the Latin verb donant, is in the AccusO' 
 tive, but the words to the queen are rendered by rcyinac, the Dative of 
 rif/inn. Observe the order of the words: 
 
 English okder: They give a book to the queen. 
 
 Latin order: To the queen a book they give. 
 
 1 queen is rendered by the Vocative rcgina ; and you, the object of 
 praise, by the Accusative te, the object of laudant. Here again observe 
 the order of the words. 
 
 '^ With a xoall is rendered hy the Ahlative vallo, but in the garden by 
 the Ablative with in : in horto. Observe the order of the words : 
 
 English order: They are fortifying the city with a wall. 
 
 Latin order: The city with a wall they are fortifying. 
 
 English order: They are walking in the garden. 
 
 Latin order: In the garden they are walking. 
 
 Observe that in all these examples the verb in Latin stands at the end 
 of the sentence. 
 
 8 In Latin the possessive pronouns, meaning his, her, their, when not 
 emphatic, are seldom expressed if they cau he sui>i)lied from tlie con text 
 
S&y TENCES. — VERBS. 19 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 SENTENCES. -VERHS. — CERTAIN FORMS OF THE FIRST 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 5. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 
 350. Every Sentence consists of two distinct parts, ex- 
 IMissed or implied: — 
 
 1. The SuiuKCT, or that of which it speaks; 
 
 ii. The PiiKPiOATE, or that which is said of the subject: 
 
 Chiilius moritiir, Clnilius ilies.^ Llv. 
 
 Note. — In Latin, both subject and predicate may be contained or im- 
 plied in a single word, if that word is a verb : 
 
 Amas,2 thou lovest. Amat,^ he loves. 
 
 201. Regular verbs' are conjugated in four difTe rent ways, 
 and are accordingly divided into Four Conjugations. 
 
 6. In Verbs of the First Conjugation, the Third 
 Person in the suiyidar and plural of tlie present^ imperfect, 
 fii\([ future tenses of the indicative 7nood has the following — 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 Present. 
 Sinyular, at, 
 Plural, aut, 
 
 
 Impkufect. 
 ubat, 
 abant, 
 
 
 FrrPBE. 
 abit. 
 ubuDt. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 
 PLCRAL. 
 
 Pres. amnt, he loves ; < amant, they love. 
 
 Imp. amabnt, he was loving ;^ amftbant, they were loving. i 
 
 FuL Simiibit, lie will hve ; fim&hunt, they will love.(i 
 
 > f'linlius is tlie subject, and inoritur the predicate. 
 
 * The ending s shows that the subject is of the second person sin/juloTf 
 THOU, while t shows that it is of the third person sinfjtdar, he. 
 
 * For I'crbs, mood, tense, number, and person, sec pages 12 and 13. 
 
 * The subject of each of the^o verbs may be, in English, either he, 
 '(", or it: amat, he loves, she loves, or it loves. Tlie suffix, t, shows the 
 
 number and person of the subject, but not its gender. 
 
 » Or, he loved; plural, they loved. See page 13, 1U7. 
 
 « Earh of those Latin forms, amat, amant, etc., consists of two distinct 
 ; leuieuta — (I) the stem, which givts the general mcanin'j of the verb; 
 
20 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 7. In English, the tenses^ mimhers^ and persons of verbs 
 are indicated by certain vjords or signs; as, 
 
 Present. Imperfect. Fi'ture. 
 
 He loves, Jie icas \o\ing, he loill love. 
 
 l^hey love, they were loving, they will love. 
 In Latin, however, no such signs are used ; but their place 
 is supplied by the endings of the verb. Hence, in transla- 
 ting English into Latin, omit these signs, and express the 
 tense, number, and person of the verb by the proper endings: 
 Present. Imperfect. Future. 
 
 Eng. He loves, he was loving, lie will love, 
 Lat. Amat, amdbat, mnabit. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 CERTAIN FOllMS OP THE FIRST CONJUGATION.— 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 8. Vbcabidary.^ 
 
 Anibulat, he walks, he is walking.* 
 
 Aral, he ploughs, he is ploughing. 
 
 Deliberat, he deliberates, he is deliberating. 
 
 Equitat, ^e rides, he is riding, 
 
 Lacrimat, he weeps, he is weeping. 
 
 Navigat, he sails, he is sailing. 
 
 Regnat, he reigns, he is reigning. 
 
 and (2) the suffix, added to the stem, to designate tense, number, and per- 
 son. Thus in ama-t ama-nt 
 
 ania-bat ama-bant 
 
 ama>bit ama-bunt 
 
 the stem is awa, and the suffixes are t, nt, bat, bant, bit, bmit; but as in 
 some verbal forms the final vowel of the stem has become inseparably 
 united witli the suffix, it is impossible to keep the two elements of the 
 word distinct. We accordingly give the endings produced by the union 
 of this final vowel with the suffix, as above, at, ant, etc. 
 
 The Jinal vowel of the stem is called the stem characteristic. 
 
 1 It is recommended that the Vocabularies be so carefully and accu- 
 rately learned that the pupil shall be able to give with promptness either 
 the English for the Latin or the Latin for the English. 
 
 2 Or, she ivalks, etc. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 21 
 
 9. In this exercise^ first pronounce the several sentences y/oith 
 care, thai give the Tkxse, Number, and Person of each 
 Verbf and finally translate the whole into English, 
 
 1. Regnal,* regnant. 2. Dellberubat, ileliberabant. 3. Ln- 
 trimabit, lacrimdbunt. 4. Ambulant, arant, equilant. 5. 
 Equitat, equitabat, cquitabit. 6. Navigat, navigabat, navi- 
 gabunt. 7. Ambulat, ambulabunt, ambulabat. 8. Regnant, 
 regnabit, regnabant. 9. Navigant, ambulabit, equitabant. 
 
 10. 2ranslat€ into Latin. 
 
 1. He was reigning, they will reign, she will reign.* 2. 
 They are walking, he will walk, they were walking. 3. She 
 is weeping, they will weep, he was weeping. 4. They will ride, 
 he will sail. 5. He is deliberating, they will deliberate. 6. Ho 
 was i»loughing, they will plough. 7. They were ploughing, 
 he will plough. 8. They were sailing, they are deliberating. 
 
 * In preparing this exercise, notice carefully the endings of the words; 
 even a Roman could not understand this Latin without attending to theso 
 endings. What, then, is the meaning of the endings at, ant, in reynat, 
 reijnant f They sliow that in the first the subject, or aijent, of the action 
 is in the third person singtilar, he, she, or it ; and, in the second, in the third 
 l>or8on plural, thej/. But these endings also show that the verbs are in the 
 present tense. How docs tliat fact help you to understand the meaning? 
 It tells you that the action is now taking place : He is reigning. 
 
 Again, what is the meaning of dbat, fibant, in deliberdbat, deiiberabantt 
 and of abit, abunt, in lacrimabit, lacrimdbunt f What do these endings 
 tell you about the subjects of these verbs? What about their tense f 
 Wljat about the time of each action^ The endings dbat and dbant assure 
 you that the action of the verb was taking place at some past time ; dbit and 
 dbunt that it will be taking place or will take place at some future time. 
 
 In these exercises you may use at pleasure either he or she as subject, 
 •f the sense permits: he reigns, he is reigning, or she rcignf, she is reign- 
 
 7. You should, however, accustom yourself to think of all the possible 
 iiic^anings of a Latin word, or of a Latin sentence, before you attempt to 
 translate it. This habit, if early formed, will be of great value to you 
 in your subsequent work. 
 
 * Observe that the English pronouns, h", she, it, they, are not to be 
 rendered by separate Latin words, as the Latin verb contains a pronomi- 
 
 il subject in itself. Uence, ' he reigns,* regnat ; ' they reign,' regnant. 
 8 
 
22 NOUNS, — CA SES. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 NOUNS.- CASES. — FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 11. Zesson from the Grammar, 
 
 40. Declensions. — Tbe process by which the seveial 
 
 cases of a word are formed is called Declension. It consists 
 
 in the addition of certain suffixes to one common base called 
 
 the stem.^ In Latin there are five declensions. 
 
 First Declension. — A Nouns. 
 
 48. Nouns of the first declension end in 
 
 a and l&— feminine ; fis and Ss — masculine,^ 
 Kouns in a are declined as follows : 
 
 SIKGULAft. 
 
 EXAVPIA 
 
 
 HBAima. 
 
 CASi-Evomo.* 
 
 Kom. minamt 
 
 
 a table • 
 
 ft 
 
 Oen. mensae, 
 
 
 of a tabfe^ 
 
 ae 
 
 Dot. m«nsae. 
 
 
 lOf/or a table. 
 
 ae 
 
 Ace. mfinsam. 
 
 
 atabU, 
 
 am 
 
 Voe. ID6ll8fl^ 
 
 
 table. 
 
 a 
 
 Abl. measA, 
 
 frfmiy 
 
 tcUh, bjf a table, 
 
 I 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 ITom. mCnsoc, 
 
 
 table*, 
 
 ae 
 
 Oen. mens&riuit, 
 
 
 of tables. 
 
 ftnim 
 
 Dot. miosis, 
 
 
 to, for tablex. 
 
 IS 
 
 Aee. mensas, 
 
 
 tables. 
 
 fts 
 
 Voe. mensae, 
 
 
 tables. 
 
 ae 
 
 At>l. mensls, 
 
 frwn 
 
 , leith, by tables. 
 
 Is 
 
 1 Thns each case-form contains the stem, which gives the general 
 meaning of the word, and the case-suffix, which shows its relation to some 
 other word. In reg-is, * of a king/ the general idea, king, is denoted by 
 the stem, rig ; the relation of, by the suffix is. When the stem ends in a 
 vowel, the case-sttffix is seen only in combination with that vowel. The 
 ending thus produced is called a case-ending, and the final vowel of 
 the stem is called the stem characteristic or simply the characteristic. 
 
 2 That is, nouns of this declension in a and e are feminine, and those 
 in as and es are masculine, unless their gender is determined by their 
 signification according to the General Rules : see page 10, 42. 
 
 8 Mensa may be translated a table, table, or the table. 
 
 * These case-endings should be carefully studied and compared, as 
 
FIRST DECLENSION, 23 
 
 1. Stem. — In nouns of the first declension, the stem ends in kA 
 
 2. In the Pauadigm, observe that the stem is me»i«a, land that the 
 several cases are distinguished by their case-endings.^ 
 
 3. Examples for Practice. — Like mensa decline : — 
 Ala, wing; aqua, water; causa, cause; fortuna, fortune. 
 
 4. Locative. — Names of towns and a very few other words Lave 
 a Locative Singular in ae, denoting the place in which (p. 18, note 2) : 
 liOmae, at Rome; inllitiaey in war. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 NOUNS. - FIRST DECLENSION. — NOMINATIVE CASE. — 
 RULES III. AND XXXVI. 
 
 12. Examine carefully the following examj^les. 
 
 L Regnat, ECj she, or it reijns.^ 
 
 2. Nunia regnat, Numa reigns^ 
 
 3. Kegnat, He reigns, 
 
 4. Victoria regnat, Victoria reigns. 
 
 5. Regnat, She reigns. 
 
 6. Reginae regnant, Queens reign. 
 
 7. Regnant, They reign.* 
 
 they will serve as a practical .s:uide to the learner in distinguishing the 
 different cases and in ascertaining the meaning of words. 
 
 1 Remember that the final vowel of the stem forms a part of the case- 
 endinff. See page 22, foot-note, 1. 
 
 * Observe also (1) that the Nominative and Vocative are alike, (2) that 
 tho Dative and Ablative plural are alike, and (3) that the Genitive and 
 Dative singular and the Nominative and Vocative plural are all alike. 
 
 * This is the full meaning of regnat when there is nothing in the con- 
 text to restrict it, but take notice that in the third example it is ren- 
 (l.rcd he reif/ns, because wc make it refer to Numa, the king, while in the 
 lifth example it is rendered ahe reigns, because we make it refer to 
 I'ictoria. 
 
 * Ohscrvo (1) that regnant, 'they reign,' differs from regnat, ' he, slie, 
 f>r it reigns,' only in having nt, meaning thcii, as its ending, while ref/nat 
 lias s'mply /, meaning hr, she, it ; and (2) that, though the forms of the 
 v< rb thus contain a pronoun, yet a substantive may at any time be intro- 
 duced as subject, and that then the pronoun is not translated. Thus regnat, 
 ' he, she, or it reigns,' but Numa regnat, ' Numa reigns ' (not ' Numa he 
 reigns'), Victoria re^/jiof, ' Victoria reigns,' regnant, 'they reign,' but 
 reginae regnant, * queens reign.' 
 
24 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 Note 1. — Observe (1) that in the first, third, fifth, and seventh ex- 
 amples the subjects are pronouns implied in the endings at^ ant, or, 
 more strictly, (, nf, he, she, it, they, and (2) that in tlie second example 
 the subject is Numa, in the fourth l^ictoria, and in the sixth reglnae, 
 and that these three subjects are all in the Nominative case. This is 
 in accordance with general Latin usage,^ expressed In the following 
 
 RULE III.— Subject Nominative. 
 
 368. The subject of a finite verb^ is put in the Nomi- 
 native. 
 
 NoTB 2. — Observe that in the examples at the head of this lesson 
 the verb is in the singular if the subject is singular, and in the plural 
 if the subject is plural. Thus, in the second example, the singular verb, 
 rerjnat, is used, because the subject, Numa, is singular, while in the sixth 
 example the plural verb, regnant, is used, because the subject, rcginae, 
 is plural. Observe also that these verbs are in the third person, because 
 their subjects, Numa and reglnae, are in the third person.' This is in 
 accordance with general Latin usage, expressed in the following 
 
 RULE XXXVI. — Agrreexnent of Verb witb Subject. 
 
 4G0. A finite verb agrees with its subject in number 
 and PERSON. 
 
 13. Yocab alary. 
 
 Agricola, ae,* m.^ huahandman.^ 
 
 Incola, ae, m. or/. inhabitant. 
 
 1 English usage is the same. 
 
 2 That is, Latin writers always put a noun or pronoun in the Nomina- 
 tive case when they wish to use it as the subject of a finite verb, i.e. of 
 any part of the verb except the Infinitive. This Rule is a simple state- 
 ment of that fact. 
 
 3 See page 13, 190. If the subject was a pronoun of the first or of the 
 second person, the verb would be in the first or the second person; as we 
 shall see when we take up those parts of the verb. 
 
 * The ending ae is the case-ending of the Genitive : agricola ; Genitive, 
 agricolae. 
 
 * Gender is indicated in the vocabularies by m for masculine, f. for 
 feminine, and n. for neiiter. 
 
 « In learning Latin it is not enough to find English equivalents for 
 Latin words, the pupil must early learn to see the meaning in the Latin 
 itself, without even thinking of the English. The Latin nouns in this 
 
FIRST DECLENSIOX. 26 
 
 Naiita, ae, m. sailor, seaman. 
 
 Poela, ae, in, poet. 
 
 Puella, ae,/. girl, maiden. 
 
 Pugnat, he is fighting. 
 
 PiCgina, ae,/. queen. 
 
 Victoria, ae, /. Victoria, queen of England. 
 
 14. Give the Gender, Number, Person, and Case, of each 
 Koun, and the Tense, Number, and Person of each 
 Verb, and translate the whole into Miglish. 
 
 1. Puella ^ lacrimat. 2. Puellae ^ lacrimant. 3. Agricola 
 arfibat. 4. Agricolae arabant. 5. Poeta equitabit. 6. Puellae 
 ambulabunt. 7. Victoria regnat. 8. RGgnabit.* 9. Reg- 
 iiabat. 10. Victoria deliberat. 11. Incolae deliberant. 12. 
 Nauta navigabat. 13. Nautae iiavigabunt. 14. Incolae de- 
 llberabunt. 15. Nautae pugnabant. 16. Nautae navigant. 
 17. I'outae naviixabunt. 
 
 o* 
 
 15. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Victoria was reigning. 2. She is reigning. 3. The' 
 inhabitants were deliberating. 4. They will deliberate. 
 5. The • girls are riding. 6. They will ride. 7. The sailors 
 were walking. 8. They are walking. 9. The poet was 
 sailing. 10. He will walk. 11. The husbandman is plough- 
 ing. 12. Husbandmen plough. 13. The poets are deliber- 
 ating. 14. The queen will reign. 15. Queens reign. 
 
 vocabulary, for instance, must represent to him not loords, but living per- 
 sons. Ayricola should sugj^est to him, not the English word husband' 
 man, but the husbandman himself, not the name, but tlie man. 
 
 1 As the Latin has no article, a noun may, according to the connection 
 in which it is used, be translated (1) without the article: as, puella, girl; 
 puellae, girls ; (2) with the indetinite article a or an : as, pice/Za, agirl ; (3) 
 with the definite article the: as, puella, the girl. 
 
 * See page 23, foot-note, 3. 
 
 * The pupil will remember that the Englisli articles, a, an, aad the, 
 are not to be rendered into Latin at all. 
 
26 VERBS. — SUBJECT. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 VERBS. - SUBJECT. - DIRECT OBJECT. — RULE V. 
 
 16. JCxatnine carefully the following examples. 
 
 1. Re^iia l;iu«1at. The queen pra'mea. 
 
 2. Regina ;)Mc//ftm laudat. The queen praises twk oiiii^ 
 
 3. Puella rtglnam lauJat. The yirl praiseit Tnii (^ukkx. 
 
 NoTK 1. — In the ex.iraple regina laudat, **the queen praises," 
 the thought Is not entirelycotnplele, as wcare not told what the queen 
 praises, but in the example regina puellam laudatj ** the queen praises 
 (what ?) the girl," the sense is complete. The noun which thus com- 
 pletes the meaning of a verb is called the Direct Object. 
 
 Note 2. — Observe that in English the object follows the verb : 
 thus in the examples above, the objects, the girl and the queen, follow 
 the verb, praises ; but in Latin the object usually precedes the verb ; 
 thus puellam and reglnam precede the verb laudat. 
 
 Note 3. — Again compare the second and third examples. Observe 
 that laudat is common to both, that regina in the second becomes 
 reginnm in the third, and that puellam in the second becomes puella 
 in the third. Notice now the effect of these simple clianges upon the 
 meaning of the sentences. You thus learn that when the Romans 
 spoke of a queen as the subject of an action, they used the form regina, 
 but when they spoke of a queen as the object of an action they used 
 reglnam. These forms, regina, reglnam, are types or examples of a 
 large class of Latin nouns which in the singular end in a when used 
 as subject and in am when used as object. 
 
 Note 4. — Observe that puellam, the Direct Object in the second 
 example, and reglnam, the Direct Object in the third example, are 
 both in the Accusative. 'J'his is in accordance with general Latin 
 usage, expressed in the following 
 
 RULE v. — Direct Object. 
 
 371. The Direct Object of an «iction is put in the 
 Accusative. 
 
 17. Vocabulary. 
 A mat, he loves. 
 
 Aniicitia, friendship. 
 
 Delectat, he delights. 
 
VERBS. 27 
 
 Epistula, ac,/. letter ^ epUtle, 
 
 Filia, ae, /. daughter, 
 
 Justltia, ae, /. justice. 
 
 Laudat, he praiaea. 
 
 18. Translate into English. 
 1. Kugina puellos laudabat.* 2. Puellae reginam lauda- 
 bant. 3. Regliia incoliis laudat. 4. Incolae reginam lau- 
 daiit. 5. Poetae amlcitiam laudant. 6. Poetae reginam 
 laudilbunt. 7. Reglna poettis laudubit. 8. Nauta poetam 
 laudubat. 9. PoGta nautam laudabit. 10. Poetae nautas 
 laudant. 11. Poeta deliberabit. 12. Poetae deliberabant. 
 13. Puellae ambulabant. 14. Regina filiam* amat. 15. 
 Filiani amabil.' IG. Epistula reginam delectat. 
 
 19. IVanslate into Latin. 
 1. The poet praises the queen. 2. He was praising the 
 queen. 3. The poet will praise friendship. 4. The letter 
 delights the girl. 5. The girl praises the letter. 6. The 
 girls were praising the poet. 7. The girls love the queen. 
 8. The queen loves the girls. 9. The husbandman will 
 
 1 In taking up a Latin sentence, remember that the meaning must be 
 learned in part from the vocabulary, and in part from the endings of the 
 words. In this sentence, for example, wo first learn the general meaning 
 of the words from the vocabulary. We then ascertain the number and 
 case of m/i/ia from its ending. We find that it is in the singular number, 
 and that in forvx it may be either a Nominative or a Vocative. As a 
 Xominative it would mean that the queen is the subject of the action, as 
 that is the only use of the Nominative which we have thus far learned ; 
 as a Vocative, that the queen it addressed. We next notice puellds. This 
 must be an Accusative Plural, and it accordingly represents the girls as 
 the object of an action ; puellas, then, must be the object of the action of 
 which reifina is the subject. The ending abat in laudabat shows that the 
 verb is in the imperfect tense, third person singular, and that it accord- 
 ingly represents the action as taking place in past time, and as having one 
 person for its subject. We are now prepared to translate the sentence: 
 The queen was praising the girls. See Suggestions, I. to X., page 261. 
 
 * Render her daughter. In Latin the possessive pronouns, meaning 
 his, her, their, when not emphatic, are seldom expressed. 
 
 * Render she will love, thus making the pronoun refer to regina. 
 
28 SUBJECT, — DIRECT OBJECT. 
 
 j»long]i. 10. The husbandmen were plougliing. 11. The poets 
 are deliberating. 12. The husbandman loves his daughter. 
 
 LESSON viir. 
 
 SUBJECT. — DIRECT OBJECT. — QUESTIONS. 
 20. lu questions the interrogative particles, -nCy iiOmiey 
 and ;mm, are often used in Latin. 
 
 1. Questions with -ne ask for information ; liegatne,^ 'is he reign- 
 ing?' 
 
 2. Questions with nonne expect the answer 'yes*: NOnne regnat^ 
 * is he not reigning ? * ^ 
 
 3. Questions with num expect tlie answer * no* : Num reynaty ' is he 
 reigning ?'■-' 
 
 21. J^ocabidari/. 
 
 Artemisia, Artemutiaf queen of Caria. 
 
 Corona, ae, /. croimi, 
 
 Exspectat, he expects, awaits. 
 
 Fabula, ae, /. story, fable. 
 
 Julia, ae, /. Julia, a Roman name. 
 
 Non, not. 
 
 Sapientia, ae, /. wisdom. 
 
 22. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Nonne Artemisia regnabat?'* 2. Kegnabat. 3. Nonne 
 poeta reginam laudabit? 4. KOginam laudabit. 5. Num 
 poetanavigabat? 6. Non navigabat. 7. Nonne poetae sap- 
 ientiamlaudant? 8. Sapientiara laudant. 9. Ambulantne?^ 
 10. Non ambulant. 11. Equitantne? 12. Equitant. 
 
 13. Nonne regina coronam amabat ? 14. Coronam ama- 
 bat. 15. Nonne fabulae puellas delectabant? 16. Puellas 
 delectabant. 17. Fabula nautas delectat. 18. Fabulae nau- 
 tam delectant. 19. Nautae navigabunt. 
 
 1 The particle -ne is always thus appended to some other word. 
 
 2 Observe in 2 and 3 that the auxiliary is stands at the begimiing of 
 the question in English, and that the subject follows : is he not reigninf/ f 
 IS he reigning ? Doex and do often introduce questions i^ the same way, 
 and in the past tense was and did: was lie not reigning, nonne regndbat f 
 
 * Ambulantne = ambulant and the interrogative particle -ne. 
 
SUBJECT.— DIRECT OBJECT, 29 
 
 23. Translate into J[,atin. 
 
 1. Does not Julia praise the queen? 2. She praises 
 the queen. 3. Will the girls love Julia? 4. They will 
 love Julia. 5. Is not Victoria reigning? 6. She is reign- 
 ing. 7. Is the sailor expecting letters? 8. He is not ex- 
 pecting letters. 9. Does the poet love his daughters ? 
 
 10. He loves his daughtei-s. 11. Will not the letters 
 delight the queen? 12. They will delight the queen. 13. 
 Were not the inhabitants deliberating? 14. They were 
 deliberating. 15. The story will delight the poet. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 SUBJECT. — DIRECT OBJECT. — QUESTIONS. 
 
 24. Vocabulary. 
 
 Accus.it, he accuses. 
 
 Armat, he arms. 
 
 Familia, ae, /. family^ servants. 
 
 Gallia, ae, /. Gaul, now France. 
 
 Ilonorat, he honors. 
 
 Patria, ae, /. country, one's country. 
 
 Probat, he approves. 
 
 Sententia, ae, /. opinion, sentiment. 
 
 Tullla, ae, /. TuUia, a Roman name. 
 
 25. TS'analate into English. 
 
 1. Xonne agi'icolae patriam amabant ? 2. Patriam araa- 
 bant. 3. Num incolae reginani accusfibunt? 4. Non regi- 
 nam accusabunt. 5. Reginani amant. 6. Reglna nautas 
 arraabit. 7. Nonne fainiliam armabat ? 8. Familiara arma- 
 ^';it. 9. Nura Artemisia incolas armabat ? 
 
 10. Non incolas armabat. 11. Regnabatne? 12. Regna- 
 lat. 13. Incolae nautas accusabunt. 14. Nonne agricolae 
 nautas accusabant? 15. Nautas accusabant. 16. Nonne 
 ivglnasententiam probabat? 17. Sententiam probabat. 18. 
 
 I 
 
 Nonne incolae sententiam probabunt? 
 
30 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 26. Tratislate into I^cUin, 
 
 1. Was Artemisia reigning? 2. She was not reigning. 3. 
 Victoria was reigning. 4. l>o the husbandmen love Gaul? 
 5. They do ^ not love Gaul. 6. Will not the queen honor 
 the poet ? 7. She will honor the poet. 8. The inhabitants 
 honor tlie queen. 9. Do they not love their country ? 
 
 10. They love their country. 11. Will the queen approve 
 the opinion? 12. She will approve the opinion. 13. She 
 approves the opinion. 14. Was not Gaul arming its inhabi- 
 tants? 15. Gaul was arming its inhabitants. 16. Did not 
 Artemisia accuse* her servants? 17. Slie accused* her 
 servants. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 CERTAIN FORMS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. — 
 RULES II. AND XVI. 
 
 27. In verbs of the Second Conjuqatio.v, the Thibd 
 Person in the singular and plural of the present^ imperfect, 
 and future tenses of the indicative mood has the following 
 
 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 IMPEKFECT. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular^ 
 
 et, 
 
 ebat, 
 
 ebit. 
 
 Plural, 
 
 ent, 
 
 ebant, 
 
 ebunt.» 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 8INGULAIL. PLURAL. 
 
 Pres monet, he advises ; * monent, they advise. 
 
 Imp monCbat, he was advising: & mon^bant, fhey were advinng.^ 
 
 Put. moD^bit, he will advise ; monebunt, they will adviu, 
 
 1 Omit do in rendering into Latin, as that language has no separate 
 words for the English auxiliaries, does, do, did. 
 
 2 Use the imperfect; see page 19, foot-note 5. 
 
 8 Observe that these endings all begin with the stem-characteristic c. 
 
 4 Or, she advises, it advises ; see page 23, foot-note 3. 
 
 ^ Or, he advised ; plural, they advised ; see page 19, foot-note 5. 
 
APPOSITIVES. 81 
 
 28. Examine thefollotoing examples. 
 
 1. Artemisia regnat. Artemisia reigns. 
 
 2. Artemisia regina regnat. Artemisia the queen reigns. 
 
 3. Poeta Artemisiam laudat. The poet praises Artemisia. 
 
 4. Artemisiam re(jinani hiiulat. He praises Artemisia TiiE quekn. 
 
 5. Coronara laudat. He praises the rrown. 
 
 G. Coronam rtfjinae laudat. He praises the crown of the queen. 
 
 XoTK 1. — A noun or pronoun used to qualify or identify arother 
 noun or pronoun, denoting the same person or thing, as regina \n 
 the second example and reginam in the fourth, is called an appositiv?. 
 lilglna^ " the queen," is an appositive, showing the rank or office of 
 Ariemisia, — ^rfemma the queen. 
 
 Note 2. — Observe that in the second example, whore Artemisia is 
 in the Nominative, the appositive, regina is also in the Nominative, 
 while in the fourth example, where Artemisiam is in the Accusative, 
 the appositive is also in the Accusative. This usage is expressed in 
 tlie following 
 
 RULE II. — Appositives. 
 
 363. All Appositive agrees in Case with the noun 
 r pronoun which it qualifies.* 
 
 Note 3. — Observe that in the sixth of the above examples the 
 genitive reginae limits or qualifies coronam by showing wliose crown is 
 meant, the croicn of tue queen. Tliis usage is expressed in the follow- 
 ing 
 
 RULE XVI. — Genitive witli Nouns. 
 
 395. Any noun, not an appositive, qualif3'ing the 
 meaning of another noun, is put in the Genitive.* 
 
 397. The Partitive Genitive designates the whole of which a 
 part is taken. 
 
 Gallorum fortlssiml, the bravest of the Gauls. 
 
 * The pupil must not fail to notice that the Appositive always denotes 
 the gome person or thing as the noun or pronoun wliich it qualifies, 
 while the Genitive alwaj-s denotes a different person or thing. The Ap- 
 I>o8itive follows its noun as in examples 2 and 4 above. The Genitive 
 generally follows its uoun as in example U, but when emphatictt is placed 
 before that noun. 
 
32 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION, 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 CEUTAiy FORMS OP THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 29. Vocabulary, 
 
 Delet, he ^ destroys. 
 
 Docet, he teaches, 
 
 Habet, he has, 
 
 Luxuria, ae, /. luxury, 
 
 Monet, he advises, 
 
 Pecuula, ae, /. money, 
 
 Konia, ae, /. BomCt the city Rome. 
 
 Tacet, he is silent. 
 
 Timet, he fears, 
 
 Videt, he sees. 
 
 30. Translate into English,^ 
 1. Poeta filiam docebat. 2. Filiam docebit. 
 
 3. Noiine 
 
 1 Soe page 23, foot-notes 3 and 4. 
 
 3 The pupil has already learned that in the first declension a noun in 
 a is always in the Nominative or Vocative singular, and he has observed 
 that in the previous exercises the Nominative is always the subject of a 
 verb. He has now learned a new use for the Nominative, viz. that it 
 may be an Appositive qualifying another Nominative. 
 
 Again, he has learned that a noun in am is in the Accusative singular 
 and a noun in as in the Accusative plural, and he has observed that in 
 previous exercises the Accusative is the direct object, i.e. the object of 
 some action, but he has now learned a new use for the Accusative, viz. 
 that it may be an Appositive qualifying another Accusative. Hence, in 
 future, in preparing his exercises, he must remember that a Nominative 
 may be either the subject of a verb or an Appositive, and that an Accusa- 
 tive may be either the object of an action or an Appositive, but he will 
 have little difficulty in distinguishing the Appositive from the subject or 
 object, if he remembers that it follows another noun or pronoun in the 
 same case, as in examples 2 and 4 under 28. 
 
 The pupil has also learned that a noun may be qualified by another 
 noun denoting a different person or thing, and that the qualifying noun is 
 in the Genitive, as in the sixth and seventh examples under 28, but the 
 Genitive may also be used as an Appositive to another Genitive ; hence 
 the pupil must remember when he sees a Genitive that it may either 
 qualify another noun, denoting a diCfcrent person or thing, or may be an 
 Appositive to another Genitive. See Suggestion VI., page 2C2. 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 83 
 
 agricolae* fllias doccbunt? 4. Fllias docebuiit. 5. Arte- 
 misia rOglna^ tacebat. 6. Victoria regliia justitiam laiulat. 
 7. Incolae Victoriain reginaiu ' bonoraut. 8. Nonne poeta 
 filiara Juliam * docebit? 9. Filiam Juliam docebit. 10. 
 Konne poeta Victoriam rcginarn videbit? 11. Reglnani 
 videbit. 12. Poeta pecuiiiam babet. 
 
 13. Nonne Julia, fllia poetae,* p^cuniam habebit? 14. 
 Pecuniam habebit. 15. Num agricolae tacebant? 16. Non 
 taeebant. 17. Nonne luxuria Romam delebat? 18. Luxuria 
 Romam delebat. 19. Tiillia, filia reginae, filiara poetae 
 amat. 20. Nonne Julia TuUiam, filiam reginae, amabit? 
 
 31. Iranslate into Latin. 
 
 1. The queen was advising her daughter. 2. Was not 
 Victoria advising her daughters ? 3. Victoria the queen 
 was advising her daughters. 4. Will not the poet praise 
 Mctoria the queen? 5. He will praise Victoria the queen. 
 G. He is praising the daughter of the queen. 7. He praises 
 the daughters of Victoria the queen. 
 
 8. Did Artemisia the queen fear the sailoi-s? 9. She did 
 not fear the sailors. 10. Did not the husbandmen fear the 
 queen? 11. They were fearing Artemisia the queen. 12. 
 Will not the girls see the queen? 13. They will see the 
 queen. 14. AVill they not see the crown? 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 NOUNS. — SECOND DECLENSION. 
 32. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 51. Nouns of the second declension end in 
 er, ir, us, and os — masculine ; um, and on — neuter. 
 
 1 In form where may agricolae be found ? In what case is it in this 
 sentence? See Suggestion VII,, page 203. 
 
 2 Whicli nominative is subject and which appositive ? 
 
 • Which accusative is object and which appositive ? 
 
 * Inform where may poetae be found ? In what case is it here? 
 
84 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION, 
 
 Nouns in <t, ir^ us, and um are declined as follows : 
 
 Servus, slate. Puer, hoy. Ager, JUld. Templum, temple. 
 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 
 
 Nam. servM* 
 
 puer 
 
 aj;er 
 
 templum 
 
 Gen. Bcrvl 
 
 puerl 
 
 agri 
 
 tempil 
 
 Dai, serv© 
 
 puer* 
 
 agr* 
 
 tempi* 
 
 Aoe. scrvam 
 
 puemm 
 
 agr«m 
 
 templum 
 
 Voe. aerv© 
 
 puer 
 
 ager 
 
 templum 
 
 Abl. scrvO 
 
 puer* 
 
 PLriUL. 
 
 agr» 
 
 templO 
 
 Nom. servl 
 
 pucrl 
 
 agrl 
 
 templn 
 
 Gen. serrOrani 
 
 puerOmm 
 
 Agr«ram 
 
 templOrofl 
 
 JDot eervls 
 
 puerls 
 
 agrl0 
 
 tcmpllB 
 
 Aee, servO* 
 
 puerOs 
 
 agrOs 
 
 templa 
 
 Toe. servl 
 
 puen 
 
 agrl 
 
 templa 
 
 Abl. scrvl* 
 
 pueria 
 
 agrl» 
 
 templl* 
 
 1. Stem. — In nouns of the second declension, the stem ends in o. 
 
 2. In the Paradigms, observe — 
 
 1 ) That the stems are serro, puero, agro, and templo. 
 
 2) That the characteristic o becomes a in the endings us and um, 
 and e in serte ; tliat it disappears by contraction in tlie endings a, i, 
 and is (for o-a, o-i, and o-is), and is dropped in tlie forms puer and 
 ager. 
 
 3) That the case-endings, inchiding the characteristic o,' arc as 
 follows : — 
 
 SISOULAR. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Mart. 
 
 Nbct. 
 
 Ma8C. 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 Nom. us^ 
 
 um 
 
 Nom. i 
 
 a 
 
 Gen. I 
 
 i 
 
 Gen. drum 
 
 drum 
 
 Dat. 6 
 
 5 
 
 Dat. is 
 
 is 
 
 Ace. um 
 
 um 
 
 Ace. 6s 
 
 a 
 
 Voc. e 
 
 um 
 
 Voc. i 
 
 a 
 
 Abl. 6 
 
 6 
 
 Abl. is 
 
 is 
 
 3. Examples for Pit actice. — Like servus: dominus, master. 
 Like puer: gener, son-in-law. Like aqer: magister, master. Like 
 templum: bellum, war. 
 
 ^ For the characteristic, aud lor the distinction between case-endings 
 and case-suffixes, see 11 with foot-note. 
 
 2 The endings of the Nominative and Vocative Singular are wanting 
 in nouns in er. Tims jfUer is for puerus. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 85 
 
 6. Nouns in iua generally contract il in the Genitive Singular and 
 le in the Vocative Singular into I witliout change of accent ; Claudi 
 for Claudii, of Clauilhis,/in for fili'i, of a son ; Merciiri for Mercuric, 
 Mercury, /til for filie, son. 
 
 8. Locative. —Names of towns, and a few other words, have a 
 Locative Singular in I, denoting the ;)face iu loAic/t (page 23,4). 
 Corinthl, at Corinth ; hiiml, on the ground. 
 
 33. Vocabulary. 
 
 Ager, agri, m. field. 
 
 Crassus, I, m. Crassns, a Roman name. 
 
 ])iscipulus, I, m. pupil, learner. 
 
 Dominus, i, m. master, owner. 
 
 Filius, i, iiiA son. 
 
 Liber, librl, m. book. 
 
 Llberat. he liberates, liberates. 
 
 Puer, pueri, m. boy. 
 
 Servus, i, m. slave. 
 
 Temphnn, 1, n. temple. 
 
 Tyrannus, i, m. tyrant. 
 
 34. Translate into English.^ 
 1. Filia tyranni tncebat. 2. Filiae tyraiini laceiit. 3. 
 Servus agrum arat. 4. Scrvi agrnm arabnnt. 5. Servi 
 rejrtnae asfros arabant. 6. Ruijjlna servos laudabit. 7. Non- 
 ne puer librum liabet? 8. Librum babet. 9. Noune pnerl 
 libros habebunt? 10. Libros liabebunt. 11. Discipulus 
 libros habebat.* 12. Nonne discipuli libros habebant? 
 
 13. Libros habebant. 14. Tullia, fliia reglnae, discipulos 
 1 iiulabat. 15. Discipull Tulliam, flliam reglnae, laud ant. 16. 
 issus am-os habebat. 17. Nonno servos habebat? 18. 
 bervos liabObat. 19. Nonne servos liberabat? 20. Servos 
 liberabat. 21. Poeta servum habet. 22. Nonne servum li- 
 1 ' ribit? 23. Servum liberabit. 
 
 1 Fill tor filii; see 32,."). 
 
 2 It is important tliat the pupil should early learn to recognize Latin 
 words by their sounds as well as by their forms. Many teachers, there- 
 fore, frequently read the Latin to their classes, and require them to trans- 
 late with closed books. « Had = was having ; see page 19, foot-not« 5. 
 
36 SECOND DECLENSION, 
 
 36. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. The story delights the boy. 2. Stories deliglit boys. 
 3. The stories will delight the boys. 4. The boy was 
 expecting a letter. 5. The boys were expecting letters. 6. 
 The queen praises her daughter. 7. The queen will praise 
 the daughter of the tyrant. 
 
 8. Is not the husbandman ploughing the field ? 9. He is 
 ploughing the field. 10. The husbandman will plough the 
 fields. 11. Did not the slave love his master? 12. He 
 loved liis master Crassus. 13. Will not the boys see the 
 temple ? 14. They will see the temple. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 36. Vocabulary/. 
 
 Amicus, i, in. friend. 
 
 Donum, i, n. gift, present. 
 
 Fortuna, ae, /. fortune. 
 
 Gener, generi, m. 8on-in-laio. 
 
 Natura, ae, /. nature. 
 
 Pisistratus, i, m. Pisistratus, tyrant of Athens. 
 
 Socer, soceri, m. father-in-law. 
 
 Terret, he tenifieSy frightens. 
 
 Verbum, I, n. word. 
 
 37. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Verba tyranni reginam terrebant. 2. Verba Pisistrati 
 tyranni reginani terrebant. 3. Servus puerum terret. 4. 
 Servl pueros terrebunt. 5. Verba servi puerum terrent. 6. 
 Socer tyranni tacebat. 7. Pueri servos reginae timent. 
 8. Puer librura habet. 9. Puer libros habebit. 10. Pueii 
 libros habebunt. 11. Regina tyrannura timebat. 12. 
 Tyrannura timebit. 13. Pisistratura timebant. 
 
 14. Pisistratum tyrannura timebant. 15. Puer amicura 
 habebat. 16. Noiine araicum amabat? 17. Amicum ama- 
 
SECOND DECLENSION, 87 
 
 bat. 18. Ainicos habebit. 19. Puerl amicos habeiit. 20. 
 Tullia amicos exspectabat. 21. Servine ^ dominum exspectar 
 bunt? 22. Doininum cxspcctabunt. 23. Nonne epistula 
 CrassI regiiiam delectabat ? 24. liGgTuam dolcctabat. 25. 
 lieglna sapientiani, donuin naturae, habet. 
 
 38. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Will the boy see tlie crown of the tyrant? 2. He 
 will see the crown. 3. Did not the gift delight Tulli;^? 4. 
 It delighted Tullia, the daughter of the queen?* 5. Did 
 not Tullia praise the gifts? 6. She nraised the gifts. 7. 
 Did not the letter of Tullia delight her father-in-law ? 8. 
 It delighted her father-in-law. 
 
 9. Did not the tyrant terrify the son-in-law of the queen ? 
 10. He terrified the son-in-law of the queen. 11. The slave 
 was ploughing the field. 12. The slaves are ploughing the 
 field. 13. The slaves will plough the fields. 14. The son-in- 
 law has the letter. 15. He will have the lettci-s. 16. The 
 tyrant will see the letter. 17. He will see the letter of the 
 queen. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. — 
 RULE XXXIV. 
 
 39. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 146. The Adjective is the part of speech which is used to 
 qualify nouns: bonns, good; nidgnus^ great. 
 
 Note. — The foiin of tlie adjective in Latin depends in part upon 
 the gender of tlie noun which it qualifies: bonus puer, a good boy; 
 bonapuella, a good girl; bonum tetnplinn, a good temple. 
 
 147. Some adjectives are partly of the first declension, 
 and partly of the secoml, while all the rest are entirely of 
 the third declension. 
 
 J Seri'lne — servl with the interrogative particle ne. 
 3 In what case should tlie Latin word for daughter bo put? The word 
 for 0/ the queen ? See 28, Rule IT. and Rule XVI. 
 4 
 
38 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 First and Second DEa^EKSiONS : 
 
 ▲ AKD O Stems. 
 
 148. Bonus, good,^ 
 
 SINOULAR. 
 
 
 Mabo. 
 
 Ftil. 
 
 K«UT. 
 
 Norn, bon«0 
 
 bona 
 
 bonnm 
 
 Gen» boni 
 
 bonae 
 
 bonl 
 
 Dot. bono 
 
 bonae 
 
 bono 
 
 Ace. bonum 
 
 bonam 
 
 bonnm 
 
 Voe. bone 
 
 bona 
 
 bonnm 
 
 A^ bono 
 
 bon* 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 bono 
 
 Norn. bonI 
 
 bona© 
 
 bona 
 
 Gen, bonOrecm 
 
 bon&run 
 
 bon<^rnm 
 
 -DoA bonia 
 
 bonlM 
 
 bonis 
 
 -4cc bonOs 
 
 bon&iv 
 
 bona 
 
 Voc, bonI 
 
 bonae 
 
 bona 
 
 ^6/. bonia 
 
 bonis 
 
 bonis 
 
 6er?i]8 Bonus, a good »lare,' 
 
 1 
 
 SIN07L4B. 
 
 
 Xom. serms bona:», 
 
 
 apoodtlav^. 
 
 Om, Bervl bonI, 
 
 
 of a good slave. 
 
 Dot. 9crv6 bono, 
 
 
 for a good slave. 
 
 Ace, serviun bonvm. 
 
 
 a good xlave. 
 
 Voc scire bone, 
 
 
 good slave. 
 
 AU. BervO bonO, 
 
 
 fi-om a tjood tlape. 
 
 ^onu servl bonl, 
 
 
 good slaves. 
 
 Gen. servOrnm bonOmin, 
 
 of good slaves. 
 
 Bat. servls bonis, 
 
 
 for good slavea. 
 
 Ace. servOs bonO», 
 
 
 good slaves. 
 
 Voc servl bonl. 
 
 
 good slaves. 
 
 Abl. Beryls boolfl, 
 
 
 from good slaves. 
 
 ^ Bonus is declined in the Masc. likcsenv/g of Decl. II., (32,51,) in the 
 Fem. like mensa of Decl. I., (11, 48), and in the Neut. like templvm of 
 Decl. II., (32, 51). The stems are bono In the Masc. and Neat., and honO, 
 in the Fem. 
 
 2 In English the adjective usually precedes its noun, but in Latin it 
 sometimes precedes and sometimes follows, though when not emphatic it 
 more frequently follows. 
 
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 89 
 
 40. Examine the following examples, 
 
 1. Servus bonus. A good slave. 
 
 2. Servi boni. 0/ a good slave. 
 
 3. Servis bonis. For good slaves. 
 
 4. 'Ferae aniicitlae.^ '£ hue friendships. 
 
 5. Tempi ura pulchruni. A beautiful temple. 
 
 Note. — In these examples, observe that the adjectives are all in 
 the same Gender, Number, and Ca.se as their nouns. This usage is 
 expressed in Ihe following 
 
 RULE XXXIV. — Agreement of Adjectives. 
 
 438. An adjective agrees with its noim in gender, 
 
 NUMBER, and CASE. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. — 
 RULE XXXIV. — EXERCISES. 
 
 41. Certain Forms of the Verb Sum, lam. 
 
 SIXGULAn. PLUIUL, 
 
 Pres. est, he, she, or it is ; stint, they are. 
 
 Imp. crat, he, she, or it was ; erant, they wei-e. 
 
 Fut. erit, lie, she, or it will be ; erunt, they will be. 
 
 42. Vocabtdary. 
 
 Aureus, a, urn, golden, of gold. 
 
 Bonus, a, um, good. 
 
 Fidus, a, um, faithful. 
 
 Gloria, ae, /. . glory. 
 
 Magnus, a, um, great, large. 
 
 Multus, a, um, much; plural, many. 
 
 Nov us, a, iim, new. 
 
 Sanctus, a, um, sacred. 
 
 Superbus, a, um, proud, haughty.. 
 
 43. Translate into English. 
 1. Nonne corona aurca* reglnnm delectat? 2. Rcginam 
 l)onam delectat. 3. Corona aurea est. 4. Coronae sunt 
 
 1 Verae is emphatic: See page 38, foot-note 2. 
 
 * On the position of the adjective in Latin, see page 38, foot-note 2. 
 
40 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 aureae.* 6. Nonnc regiiia bona coronam laudul>nt. 6. 
 Coronani aiiream laudabat. 7. Puellae reginain bonam 
 amant. 8. Puellae bonae reiriiiain amant. 9. Puellae bonae 
 
 o 
 
 reginam bonam aniabunt. 
 
 10. Discipulus novum ^ librum habet. 11. Discipuli libros 
 novos habebunt. 12. Nonne discipuli multos libros habent? 
 
 13. Non habent. 14. Libros multos habebunt. 15. Poeta 
 gloriam habet. 16. Poetae gloriam niagnam habebunt. 17. 
 Poeta magnuR gloriam mugnam habebat. 18. Gloria est 
 magna. 19. Templum erat sanctum. 
 
 44. Translate into Latin, 
 1. Tullia has many* books. 2. Are the books new?' 
 3. They are not new. 4. Has not the poet a faithful 
 friend?* 5. He has many friends. 6. Are the friends 
 faithful? 7. They are faithful. 8. The good queen has 
 many friends. 9. The slave loves his good master. 10. Do 
 not good masters have good slaves ? 
 
 11. They have good slaves. 12. Tullia was praising the 
 gi'cat poet. 13. The great poet will praise the good queen. 
 
 14. Great poets have great glory. 15. The haughty tyrant 
 terrified the poet. 16. Tullia feared the haughty tyrant. 
 17. Tullia loves faithful friends. 18. The sailor will see the 
 sacred temple. 
 
 LESSON XVL 
 
 ADJECTIVES. — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 
 
 45. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 1 "While in general the verb in Latin occupies the last place in the 
 sentence, est and sunt often stand between the subject and tlie predicate 
 adjective, as in this sentence. Some freedom of arrangement is, how- 
 ever, allowed. Thus Coronae sunt aureae might be coronae aiireae sitnt, 
 and corona anrea est, above, might be corona est aurea. 
 
 * Novum is emphatic. 
 
 * Put the adjective in the right form to agree with its noun. 
 
 * In translating English into Latin, the pupil is expected, in the ar- 
 rangement of words, to imitate the order followed in the Latin Exercises. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 
 
 41 
 
 Itif, L^uvij J i^r* 
 
 SINOCLAR. 
 
 
 Maeo. 
 
 Fem 
 
 Neitt. 
 
 Kom. Ubcr 
 
 libera 
 
 llbcrum 
 
 Gen. llberl 
 
 llberao 
 
 llberl 
 
 Dai. llberO 
 
 llbcrac 
 
 llbero 
 
 Ace. llberam 
 
 llbcram 
 
 llberum 
 
 Voc. llbcr 
 
 libera 
 
 llberum 
 
 AU. Uberft 
 
 libera 
 
 PLCUAL. 
 
 UberO 
 
 Jlorw. llbcrl 
 
 llberae 
 
 libera 
 
 (?m. llbcrOrum 
 
 llberArum 
 
 llberorttm 
 
 Jjal. liberie 
 
 llberlii 
 
 Ubcrls 
 
 ^cc llberOa 
 
 llberfts 
 
 libera 
 
 Voc. llberl 
 
 llberae 
 
 libera 
 
 ^6/. llbcria 
 
 Ubcrls 
 
 Uberl* 
 
 150. Aeger, sick. 
 
 SISOCLAE. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fm, 
 
 Nktjt. 
 
 Aom. aeger 
 
 aegra 
 
 
 Ocn. aegri 
 
 aegrae 
 
 aegrl 
 
 Da/. aegrO 
 
 aegrao 
 
 aegr» 
 
 ^ff. aegrnm 
 
 aegram 
 
 aegrum 
 
 Voe. aeger 
 
 aegra 
 
 aegram 
 
 ^6/. aegrO 
 
 aegra 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 aegr* 
 
 JS'om, aegrl 
 
 aegrao 
 
 aegra 
 
 Gm. aegrOrnm 
 
 aegrArunt 
 
 aegrOram 
 
 Do/. aegrlM 
 
 aegrl » 
 
 aegrls 
 
 Ace. aegrO* 
 
 aegrfti* 
 
 aegra 
 
 Voe. aegrl 
 
 aegrae 
 
 aegra 
 
 Abl. aegrls 
 
 aegrl» 
 
 aegrl» 
 
 151. Irregularities. — Nine adjoclivet* have in the singu* 
 Iir ins in the Genitive and I in the Dative: 
 
 Alius, a, ud, another; nullus, a, um, no one; solus, alone; tdtu», 
 whole; uUu8, any; ti)jtt»,*one; alter, -iera, -ternm, the other; titer, 
 -tra, 'trum, which (of two) ; neuter, -tra, -truin, neither. 
 
 ^ In the Masculine liber is declined like puer (33. 51), aeger, like 
 ager (32, 61). * For declension see pa^e 78. 
 
12 ADJECTIVES, 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 46. Vocabulary, 
 Aeger, aegra, aegrum, ill, sick. 
 
 Beiitus, a, um, happy j blessed. 
 
 Egregius, a, um, excellent, diatinguished, 
 
 Grutus, a, um, acceptable^ pleasing, 
 
 Hora, ae,/. hour. 
 
 Longus, a, um, long, lasting. 
 
 Pulcher, pulchra, pulcUruin, beautifuL 
 Verus, a, um, true. 
 
 Victoria, ao,/. victorj/. 
 
 Vita, ae, /. life. 
 
 47. Translate into English. 
 
 I. Agricola agi-um pulchrum habet. 2. Estne bcatus? 
 3. Beutus est. 4. Agricola beatus agruin aiTibat. 5. Nonne 
 agricolae bcati sunt? 6. Beat! sunt. 7. Puella pulclira 
 pulchram reglnam aiuat. 8. Puellae pulcbrae roglnam bo- 
 nam anmbnnt. 9. Nonne reglna bona puellas pulchras ama- 
 bit? 10. Puellfis pulchras amabit. 
 
 II. Poeta servnm eccreoriuin habebat. 12. Servus TuUiae 
 egregius erat. 13. Doniinus superbus egregios servos habet. 
 14. Suntne horae longae? 15. Non longae sunt. 16. Estne 
 \italonga? 17. Non est longa. 18. Puer erat aeger. 19. 
 Puerl erant aegri. 20. Suntne puellae aegrae? 21. Noq 
 sunt aegrae. 22. Vita agricolae est beiita. 
 
 48. Translate int3 Latin. 
 1. The present is beautiful. 2. Is it acceptable? 3. It is 
 acceptable. 4. Presents are acceptable. 5. Beautiful pres- 
 ents are accejJtable. 6. Victory will be acceptable. 7. Tho 
 glory of the victory will be great. 8. Is the story true? 
 9. It is not true. 10. Many stories are true. 11. Is the 
 slave of the poet ill ? 12. He is not ill. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 48 
 
 13. Julia, iho beautiful daughter of the poet, is ill. 14. 
 Tullia was praising the beautiful daughter of i\w ])OL't. 
 15. The temple is beautiful. 16. Many temples are beau- 
 tiful. 17. Tullia will see the beautiful teiii])le8. 18. Will 
 not the pupils have beautiful books? 19. They will have 
 beautiful books. 20. Friends will be faithful. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION — CONSONANT AND I NOUNS. 
 49. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 
 55. Nouns of the third declension end in 
 
 a, e, i, 6, y, c, 1, n, r, s, t, and x. 
 
 56. Nouns of this declension may be divided into two 
 
 hisses: 
 
 I. Nouns whose stem ends in a ConsonujiC. 
 II. Nouns whose stem cuds In L 
 
 
 Class I. 
 
 — Consonant Stems. 
 
 
 57. Stems ending 
 
 LN A Labial: b oa P. 
 
 
 
 Princeps, m., a leader, chief. 
 
 
 
 
 SIMGULAR. CaS 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 prfnceps, 
 
 a leader^ 
 
 8 
 
 Gen, 
 
 principis, 
 
 of a leader. 
 
 la 
 
 Dot 
 
 principle 
 
 to, for a leader, 
 
 I 
 
 Ace. 
 
 prfncipcm, 
 
 a leader. 
 
 em 
 
 ro€. 
 
 princep», 
 
 leader. 
 
 8 
 
 A'>1. 
 
 prfncip©, 
 
 from, wifh, by a leader, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 e 
 
 Nom. 
 
 prlncip^^s, 
 
 leader*. 
 
 68 
 
 Ocn. 
 
 prlncipam, 
 
 of leader*. 
 
 urn 
 
 Dat. 
 
 prlnciplbiM, 
 
 to, for leader*. 
 
 ibo8 
 
 Ace. 
 
 prTncipCv, 
 
 leader*. 
 
 «8 
 
 Voe. 
 
 prTncip<^», 
 
 Oleader*, 
 
 es 
 
 Abl. 
 
 prlncipibu*. 
 
 from, wUh, 6y leader*. 
 
 ibUf 
 
44 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 1. Stem and Case-Suffixes. — In this Paradigm observe — 
 
 1) That the stem is pWnce/>, modified before an additional syllable 
 to prtncip ; see p. 2, 22, and 49, 57, 2. 
 
 2) That the case-suffixes appear distinct and separate from the 
 8tem;i see 1 1, 46, with foot-note. 
 
 2. Variable Vowel. — In the flnal syllable of disyllabic conso- 
 nant stems, short e or 1 generally takes the form of c In the Nomina- 
 tive and Vocative Singular, and that of i in all the other cases. Thus 
 princepa, principis, and judex, JudiciH (53, 59), alike have e in the 
 Kominative and Vocative SlngiUar, and t in all the other cases. 
 
 58. Stems ending in a Dental : D or T. 
 
 Lapis, M., ttoM. 
 
 Aetas, F., age. 
 
 Miles, M., soldier. 
 
 
 
 SLNOCLAR. 
 
 
 Kom. 
 
 Upia 
 
 aetaa 
 
 mlleii 
 
 Om. 
 
 lapidls 
 
 aetAtf-s 
 
 mllitfs 
 
 Dot, 
 
 lapidl 
 
 aet&tX 
 
 mlliti 
 
 Ace. 
 
 lapidena 
 
 aetfttena 
 
 mllitcm 
 
 Voe. 
 
 lapis 
 
 aetfts 
 
 nUles 
 
 Ahl. 
 
 lapide 
 
 aeUte 
 
 FLCIUL. 
 
 mllite 
 
 Norn, 
 
 Iapid«iv 
 
 aetAtfiM 
 
 mllites 
 
 Oen. 
 
 lapidum 
 
 aetatum 
 
 mllitum 
 
 Dot, 
 
 lapidibtts 
 
 aetatibns 
 
 inTlitibiis 
 
 Ace. 
 
 lapid«* 
 
 aetat«B 
 
 mllit«0 
 
 Voe. 
 
 lapidCs 
 
 aetat«« 
 
 mllitCw 
 
 All 
 
 lapidlbns 
 
 aetatibns 
 
 mllitibus 
 
 NepOs, 
 
 M., grandson. 
 
 Virtus, F., Tirtue. 
 
 nSGITLAR. 
 
 Caput, N., head. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ncpus 
 
 ▼irtQs 
 
 caput 
 
 Geii. 
 
 nepOtis 
 
 virtQtl* 
 
 capitis 
 
 Dot. 
 
 nepotl 
 
 virtQtl 
 
 capiti 
 
 Ace. 
 
 nepotcm 
 
 virtutcm 
 
 caput 
 
 Voe. 
 
 nepCs 
 
 virtfl* 
 
 caput 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ncpdte 
 
 Turtuto 
 
 capita 
 
 1 Tlius, prlnceps, princip-is, etc. In the first and second declensions, 
 on the contrary, the suffix can not be separated from the final vowei of the 
 stem in such forms as mens'is, pueri, agrls, etc 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 45 
 
 N<m. 
 
 neputC* 
 
 ruvKJU.. 
 TirtQtCs 
 
 capita 
 
 Gen, 
 
 nepotum 
 
 virtQtnni 
 
 capitam 
 
 Dot 
 
 nepOtibns 
 
 rirtatibus 
 
 capitiba* 
 
 Aee, 
 
 nepOtCs 
 
 TirtQt«s 
 
 capita 
 
 Voe, 
 
 nepOtCa 
 
 virtQtC* 
 
 capita 
 
 AbL 
 
 nepOtibn* 
 
 TirtQtibiUI 
 
 capitibns 
 
 1. Stems and Case-Suffixes. — In these Paradigms observe — 
 
 1 ) That the stems are lapid, aetat, milit, nepdty virtutj and caput. 
 
 2) That miles has the variable vowel, e, i, and caputs u, L 
 
 3) That the dental d or t is dropped before 8 : lapis for lapidSj aetas 
 for aetdts, miles for mlletSy virtus for virtuts. 
 
 4) That the casc-suftixes, except in the neuter, caput, 'head,' are 
 the same as those given above; see 49, 57. 
 
 5) That the neuter, caput, has no case-suffix in the Nominative, 
 Accusative, and Vocative Singular, a in the Nominative, Accusative, 
 and Vocative Plural, and the suffixes of masculine and feminine nouns 
 In the other cases. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — CLASS I. 
 
 50. Vocabulary. 
 
 Caput, capitis, n. 
 Comes, comitis, m. and f. 
 Ilospes, hospitis, m. 
 Lapis, lapidis, m. 
 Miles, militis, m. 
 Nepos, nepotis, m. 
 Princeps, principis, m. 
 Virtus, virtutis, /. 
 
 head. 
 
 companion. 
 
 guest, host. 
 
 stone. 
 
 soldier. 
 
 grandson. 
 
 leader, chief, chieftain, 
 
 virtue, valor, bravery. 
 
 61. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Nonnc mllitcs pilgnabunt? 2. Pilgnabunt. 3. Nonne 
 Bunt fidl? 4. Sunt fi<11. 5. Princeps nepOtem laudat. 6. 
 KOnne militenii laudat? 7. Mllitem laudat. 8. Estne super- 
 bus? 9. Superbus est. 10. MllitCs principem laudant. 11. 
 Virtttteni principis laudant. 
 
4C THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 1*2. VirtQs mllituin. 13. Virtute mllitum. 14. Virtutem 
 militum timet. 15. Tyrannus virtutem mllitum timcbat. 
 16. KegTna virtutem mllitum laudat. 17. Filia reglnae 
 mllites laudabit. 18. Mllites flliam rOginae lauclant. 19. 
 Pisistratum tyrannum aceusat. 20. I'isistratum tyrannum 
 accusabant. 21. Miles donum pulchrum videt. 22. Mllites 
 dona pulehra videut. 23. Tyrannus principes timebat. 
 
 62. Translate into Latin, 
 
 I. The chief praises his companion. 2. lias he many com- 
 j)anions? 3. lie has many companions. 4. Did the chiefs 
 approve the opinion? 5. They approved the opinion. 6. 
 The chief j>raised his grandson. 7. The queen praises her 
 guest. 8. She has many guests. 9. The boy has a large 
 head. 10. The cliief praises the valor of his soldiers. 
 
 II. The companions of Tullia, the queen. 12. For the 
 companions of Tullia, the queen. 13; They accuse Tullia, the 
 queen. 14. They were accusing the companions of Tullia, 
 the queen. 15. They fear the tyrant. IG. They will fear 
 the grandson of the tyrant. 17. The friends of the queen 
 praise the chief. 18. The friend of the queen was praising 
 the good chiefs. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — CLASS L — PwULE XII. 
 53. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 59. Stems ending in a Guttural : O or G. 
 
 
 Rex, M., 
 
 Judex, M. 
 
 & F. 
 
 , Radix, F., 
 
 Dux, M. ft P^ 
 
 
 king. 
 
 judge. 
 
 
 root. 
 
 leader. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 
 
 N<ym. 
 
 r6x 
 
 judex 
 
 
 radix 
 
 dux 
 
 Oen, 
 
 regis 
 
 judicis 
 
 
 radicis 
 
 duels 
 
 Dat. 
 
 rcgl 
 
 judici 
 
 
 radlcl 
 
 duel 
 
 Ace. 
 
 regem 
 
 judicem 
 
 
 radlcem 
 
 ducem 
 
 Voc. 
 
 rex 
 
 judex 
 
 
 radix 
 
 dux 
 
 AM. 
 
 regc 
 
 judicc 
 
 
 ra(Uce 
 
 duco 
 
THIRD DECLENSION, 47 
 
 
 
 rHJEAL. 
 
 
 
 Kom, 
 
 reg«s 
 
 jQdic«s 
 
 r§dTc«« 
 
 duc«« 
 
 Gen. 
 
 regnm 
 
 jQdicnm 
 
 r&dlcnnt 
 
 ducnm 
 
 Dat. 
 
 regiba* 
 
 judictbns 
 
 radlcibuft 
 
 ducibus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 rCji«» 
 
 jadic«s 
 
 radices 
 
 duc^s 
 
 Voc. 
 
 rcpCs 
 
 jQdicCs 
 
 radlcC* 
 
 duc««i 
 
 Ahl 
 
 rCgibns 
 
 jQdicibun 
 
 radlclbns 
 
 ducibus 
 
 1. Stems and Case-Siffixes. — In the Paradigms observe — 
 
 1) That the stems are reg, judic, rOdic, and due ; Jiidic with the 
 variable vowel, i, e; see 49, 57, 2. 
 
 2) That the case-suffixes are those given in 49, 57. 
 
 3) That B in the Nominative and Vocative Singular unites with 
 c or g of the stem, and forms x ; see p. 3, 30. 
 
 54. Examine the following examples. 
 
 1. Impend parct Be is obedient to (obeys) autiiouity. 
 
 2. Hoc miht placel. Tin's is pleasing TO (pleases) me. 
 
 3. Nobis vita data est. Life has been given TO U^. 
 
 4. Ligis civitail scripsit. He wrote laws FOR THE STATE. 
 
 Note.— In these examples imperlb, 'to authority,' nu'/u, 'tome,* 
 nobis, 'to us,' and cltiU'Ul, 'for the state,' are examples of what is 
 called the Indirect Object. The first is the Indirect Object of pdret, 
 the second of placet, the third of data est, and the fourth of scripsit. 
 If the verb is transitive (p. 12, 193), as in the last example, an Accusa- 
 tite of the Direct Object ( 16, .371 ) may be used in addition to the Indirect 
 Object. Observe that in these examples the Indirect Objects are all in 
 the Dative Case. This is in accordance with the following 
 
 RULE XII. — Dative witli Verbs. 
 384. The Indirect Object of an action is put in the 
 Dative. It is used — 
 I. With Intransitive and Passive Verbs : 
 
 Serviunt populo, they are devoted to the peotle.* Clc. Imperio 
 p&rC'bant, they veere obedient to (obeyed) authoiiitt. Caes. Tempori 
 
 1 Pnpvlo, ' to the people,' is in the Dative, and is the Indirect Object of 
 scrrtvnt, ' they serve ' or * are devoted;' plfbl, ' to the common people,' ia 
 the Indirect Object of the transitive verb <l"''r ' Iv^ i::ive,' which also 
 take8 the Direct Object agrOs, ' lielda/ ' hwds. 
 
 L 
 
^^ TIIIIW DECLENSION. 
 
 ci-Uit, he yields to the time. Cic. Laliori student, they devote them- 
 selves to labor. Cae«. Mundus deo paret, the world obeys God. Cic. 
 Nobis vita data est, t^fe has been {/ranted to us. Cic. 
 
 II. With Transitive Verbs, in connection with the 
 Direct Object: 
 
 Agros plibi > dedit, he gave lands to toe common people. Cic. 
 T16I gratias ago, / give thanks to you. Cic. Pons iter hostlbus dedit, 
 the bridge gave a passage to Ute enemy. Liv. Leges civitatibus suis 
 scripserunt, tfiey prepared laws/or their states. Cic 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — CLASS I. — EXERCISES. 
 55, Vocabulart/. 
 
 Divina^, a, um, 
 
 divine. 
 
 Donat, 
 
 he presents. 
 
 Huiuanus, a, um, 
 
 kumatu 
 
 Iniquus, a, um, 
 
 ui^ust. 
 
 Judex, Judids, in. and /. 
 
 Judge. [Central Italy. 
 
 Latinus, i, in. 
 
 Latinus, King of the Laurentians in 
 
 Luvinia, ae, /. 
 
 LaviniOy daugliter of King Latinus. 
 
 I^x,legU,/. 
 
 law. 
 
 NSintiat, 
 
 he announces. 
 
 Paret, 
 
 he obeys. 
 
 Placet, 
 
 he pleases. 
 
 Kex, regis, m. 
 
 king. 
 
 ^>uperbus, a, um, 
 
 proud. 
 
 56. Translate into English. 
 1. Milites princijn piirebant. 2. Leg! parent. 3. Legibus 
 parent. 4. liegem bonum laudant. 5. Rex judices bonds lau- 
 dat. 6. Miles victoriam nuntiat. 7. Regi victoriara nuntiat. 
 8. Jfldex erat iniquus. 9. Regiua regl librum pulchrum dona- 
 bit. 10. Piinceps sapientiam regis laudabat. 11. Rex bo- 
 nus legibus parebat. 12. Reges boni legibus parebunt. 
 
 1 See foct-note, paga 47. « In what cas2 ? See 54, Rule XII. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION, 49 
 
 13. LC'X (livina reg! bono placet. 14. Leges bonae jildicl 
 placent. 15. Jfldex bonus regcm superbum timet. 16. Ke- 
 gem superbum timebit. 17. Keges superbos timObunt. 18. 
 Kegina judicom bonura laudabat. 19. jQdex rOgem bonum 
 laudabit. 20. Hegiiia bona judieem iniquum timebat. 21. 
 Jfl<lex pucro lilu'um dOnat. 22. Filia rOglnae puellis libros 
 dOnabit. 
 
 67. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. The judge praises the law. 2. Does he obey the law? 
 3. The king will present a beautiful gift to the judge. 4. 
 The soldiers praise the judge. 5. The poet praises the king.^ 
 6. The good poet was praising the daughter of the king. 7. 
 The poets praise Lavinia, the daughter of Latinus, the king. 
 
 8. They were praising the virtues of the good king. 9. 
 The queen was praising the bravery of the soldier. 10. The 
 ))oet8 will praise the bravery of the soldiers. 11. The sol- 
 diers will obey the laws.^ 12. The king will present a golden 
 crown * to the queen.* 
 
 LESSON XXIL 
 
 THIUD DECLENSION. — CLASS I. 
 
 68. Lesson from tlie Grammar. 
 60. Stems ending in l, m, n, or R. 
 
 
 sol, M., 
 
 consul, M., 
 
 Passer, m., 
 
 Pater, m., 
 
 
 gun. 
 
 comul. 
 
 SISGCLAR 
 
 tparroxD. 
 
 father. 
 
 Kwn, 
 
 801 
 
 consul 
 
 passer 
 
 pater 
 
 OCH. 
 
 eOUs 
 
 consults « 
 
 passeris 
 
 patris 
 
 Lot. 
 
 Bull 
 
 cOnsulI 
 
 passerl 
 
 patrl 
 
 Ace. 
 
 sOlem 
 
 cOnsulem 
 
 passerem 
 
 patrem 
 
 Voc. 
 
 801 
 
 cOnsul 
 
 passer 
 
 pater 
 
 AbL 
 
 sole 
 
 cOnsule 
 
 passere 
 
 patre 
 
 1 In what case will you put the I^tin word for lUu/ ? 16, Rule V.; 
 the I^uin words for Imcn, rroirn, to the queen.' 54, 8^4, I. and II. 
 
50 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 Norn, 
 
 B6\e» ' 
 
 consults 
 
 passerC* 
 
 rntr€» 
 
 Gmi, 
 
 
 cOnsuIvni 
 
 passenam 
 
 pat rum 
 
 Dot, 
 
 sOUbM 
 
 cOnsulIba* 
 
 paaserlbas 
 
 patribns 
 
 Ace. 
 
 sole* 
 
 oOnsules 
 
 passerCs 
 
 patrCs 
 
 Voc. 
 
 BO\em 
 
 cOn«ul€» 
 
 passerCa 
 
 patrC* 
 
 AU. 
 
 •Olibas 
 
 cunffulibns 
 
 passeribas 
 
 patribus 
 
 
 Pistor, M., 
 
 Lefi,M., 
 
 TlTg6, F., 
 
 Carmen, w., 
 
 
 $lupKcrd. 
 
 lion. 
 
 ilNGCLlR, 
 
 fnaiim. 
 
 9ong. 
 
 Kom, 
 
 pfl9tor 
 
 leS 
 
 Tirg« 
 
 carmen 
 
 Ocn. 
 
 pfUitOrU 
 
 leOnU 
 
 YirginI* 
 
 canninls 
 
 Dai, 
 
 pflsturl 
 
 leCnl 
 
 rirgiDl 
 
 carminl 
 
 Ace, 
 
 ptstOreaa 
 
 leOnem 
 
 Tirginem 
 
 carmen 
 
 roc 
 
 pistor 
 
 left 
 
 Tirg5 
 
 carmen 
 
 AU. 
 
 pasture 
 
 leODe 
 
 PLCRAL. 
 
 Tirgice 
 
 oarmiue 
 
 Nom, 
 
 pAstArCa 
 
 Is0n«s 
 
 virgin** 
 
 carmins 
 
 OOL 
 
 pAstOmm 
 
 ledmain 
 
 ▼irginnm 
 
 carminnm 
 
 DoL 
 
 p&stOriba» 
 
 Icunlbna 
 
 Yirginlbu* 
 
 carmiaibiui 
 
 Ace, 
 
 pi8tOrC» 
 
 leOnes 
 
 TirginCs 
 
 carmina 
 
 Voe, 
 
 pAstOres 
 
 leOD«» 
 
 Tirgin«s 
 
 carmina 
 
 AU, 
 
 pftdtOribna 
 
 leOnlbnM 
 
 Tirgiuibas 
 
 carmiulbna 
 
 1. Stems and Case-Suffixes. — In the Paradigms observe — 
 
 1 ) The stems are«dl, congul^passerjpatrjpastdr^ leon^ virgonj carmen, 
 
 2) VirgiT (virgon) has the variable vowel, o, t and carmen^ e, L 
 
 3) In the Nominative and Vocative Singular s. the case-suffix, is 
 omitted, the stem pastor shortens o, while tebn and cirgon drop xl 
 
 61. Stems ending in s. 
 
 Opus, N., Corpus, N., 
 
 
 Fids, M., 
 
 Jtls, ] 
 
 
 Jlotcer. 
 
 right. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 flos 
 
 1 
 
 jns 
 
 Gen. 
 
 fluris 
 
 jurU 
 
 Dai. 
 
 flOrl 
 
 jurl 
 
 Ace. 
 
 flOrcm 
 
 jus 
 
 Voe. 
 
 flos 
 
 jus 
 
 AU. 
 
 flOre 
 
 jflre 
 
 work. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 opus 
 
 operl» 
 
 operl 
 
 opus 
 
 opus 
 
 opere 
 
 body. 
 
 corpus 
 
 corporis 
 
 corporl 
 
 corpus 
 
 corpus 
 
 corpore 
 
 1 Many mooosyllabies want the Crenitive Plural. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 51 
 
 Norn. 
 
 flOrCs 
 
 Gen, 
 
 flGrant 
 
 Dot. 
 
 floribus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 florC» 
 
 V0€. 
 
 flur«« 
 
 Abl. 
 
 fluiibns 
 
 opera 
 
 
 opemm 
 
 corporuitt 
 
 oporibus 
 
 corporlbns 
 
 opera 
 
 corpora 
 
 opera 
 
 corpora 
 
 operibuB 
 
 corporlbu* 
 
 PLUHAL. 
 
 jQra 
 
 juri 
 
 juribus 
 
 jura 
 
 jura 
 
 jQrlbu« 
 
 1. Stems and Case-Suffixes. — In the Paradigms observe — 
 
 1) Tliat the stems are fios, jusy opoa, and corpon. 
 
 2) That opu8 has the variable vowel, e, u, and corpus^ o, u. 
 
 3) That 8 of the stem becomes r between two vowels :^6a, florls 
 t f or Jlosis). 
 
 4) That the Nominative and Vocative Singular omit the case-suflOx; 
 sec 58, 60, 1, 3). 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. — RULE I. — EXERCISES. 
 
 1. Serviiis rix. 
 
 2. Servius r&c crat 
 
 3. Artemisia, Mausoli uxor. 
 
 4. Artemisia Mausoli tuor emt 
 
 69. Examine the following examples. 
 
 Servius THE KING. 
 Seitius was king. 
 ArUmisia^TllT. WIFK of Mausnlns. 
 Artemisia was the wife of Man- 
 solus, 
 
 Note 1.~ In the first example rex is an Appositive; see 28, Rule II. 
 In the second example, however, rex is predicated or affirmed of 
 SerciM*, — Servius was king, —and is calletl a Predicate Noun. Rex 
 erat is the Predicate of the sentence of which Sernius is the subject. 
 In the third example uxor is an Appositive^ while in the fourth it is a 
 Predicate Noun, predicated of Artemisia. 
 
 Note 2. — In the second and fourth examples observe that rex and 
 tutor are In the same case as the noims of which they are predicated, i.e, 
 in the Nominative. This usage is expressed in the following 
 
 RULE I. — Predicate Nouns.* 
 
 862. A noun predicated of another noun denoting the 
 Bame person or thing agrees with it in Case: 
 
 Compare this Uulo with Rule II. ; tee 28. 
 
52 
 
 THIRD DECLEysION. 
 
 Brdtiis eflfCdf > libcrtiitls fuit, Bruiua was the guardian of liberty. 
 Llv. Senrfus rex est decldriita^, Serriua was declared kino. Liv. 
 Oreatem s6 esse dixit, he aaid that he teas Obestes. Cic 
 
 60. Vocabnliiry. 
 
 Bellum, I, M. 
 
 Brutus, i, m. 
 
 Carla, *e,/. 
 
 Catd, onis, in. 
 
 Causa, ae,/. 
 
 CIcerd, onls, m. 
 
 Exsul, ulis, fit. and f. 
 
 Frater, fratris, m. 
 
 Herodotus, i, m. 
 
 Historia, ae,/. 
 
 Imperator, oris, m. 
 
 Libertas, alis,/. 
 
 Mausolus, i, fu. 
 
 Nnma, ae, m. 
 
 Oritor, 6ris, m. 
 
 Uxor, oris, /. 
 
 Victor, oris, m. 
 
 Ylndex, vindicis, m. and/. 
 
 vjar. 
 
 Jirutua, a Roman name. 
 
 Caria, a country in Asia Minor. 
 
 CatOt a Roman name. 
 
 cauae, 
 
 Cicero, a Roman orator and staten- 
 
 exile, [man. 
 
 6rotAer. 
 
 Jierodotua, a Greek historian. 
 
 Aiatory. 
 
 general, commander, 
 
 liberty t freedom. 
 
 Jiauaolua, King of Carta. 
 
 JVumo, second of the legendary kings 
 
 orator. [of Rome. 
 
 wife. 
 
 conqueror. 
 
 d^ender. 
 
 61. D'ansiate into English, 
 
 1. CiccrS exsul cr.at. 2. Noniie consul bt^llum timebal? 
 3. Bellum timebat. 4. Numa erat bonus rex. 5. Cicero 
 consul victorcm laudat. 6. Numa rex patriam amabat. 7. 
 Orator Numani laudat. 8. Cicero consul erat. 9. Vindex 
 llbertatis.* 10. Brutus, vindex llbertatis. 11. Brutus est 
 vindex* llbertatis. 12. Poeta imperatoreni laudat. 13. 
 
 ^ In these examples cuatog, rex, and Oreatem are all predicate nouns, and 
 agree in case respectively with Brutvs, Servius, and ae. 
 
 * Libertatia is in tlie Genitive, depending upon vi)idex, according to 
 28, Rule XVI. The Genitive generally follows its noun, as in this in- 
 stance, but sometimes, especially when emphatic, it precedes, as in belli 
 cauaa below. 
 
 » Vindex in 10 is an Appoaitive, according to 28, Rule II., but in 11 it is 
 a Predicate Novn, according to 59, Rule I. 
 
rilIRD DECLENSION, 53 
 
 Tullia belli causa erat. 14. Tullia, rGgis fllia.* 15. Ilero- 
 * lotus, pater historiae. IG. Cato, magnus iinperutor. 17. 
 Cat<S magnus imperator erat. 
 
 18. Justitia, reglna virtutum. 19. Jilstitia est roglna vir- 
 tQtum. 20. Ai-temlsia regis* uxor erat. 21. Artemisia 
 Mausoll, Cariae regis,' uxor erat. 22. Virtus est cornea 
 sapientiae. 23. Virtutes sunt comiles sapientiae. 24. jQdex 
 virtutem regis laudat. 25. Virtutes regis boni laudabat. 
 liG. Poetae virtutes Numae, regis bonI, laudabunt. 27. Rex 
 ]>onus* est. 28. Pater judicis regem bonum laudabit. 29. 
 Tulliam, regis filiara,* accusabant. 
 
 62. Trwislate into Latin. 
 
 1. Cicero was an orator. 2. He was a great orator. 3. 
 Mausolus was king. 4. Was he not king of Caria? 5. lie 
 was king of Caria. 6. Poets will praise the great com- 
 mander. 7. They praise the father of liistory. 8. Does not 
 the consul praise his brother? 9. He praises his brother. 
 
 10. The soldiers fear the king. 11. Latiniis was the king." 
 12. Lavinia was the daughter of Latinus. 13. Lavinia was 
 the daughter of Latinus, the king.' 14. The daughter of the 
 king was praising the faithful slave. 15. The orator will 
 ]«r.n><e the wisdom of the judge. 16. Cicero, the orator, 
 j»!;iisi>s the bravery of the conqueror. 17. Cicero, the consul, 
 ]>raises the bravery of the soldiers. 18. The judge praises 
 the wisdom of Cicero, the consul. 
 
 > Filia governs refiU, according to Rule XVI., but is itself in ai>p<^i- 
 tion with Tullia, according to Uule II. Tho appositivc generally follows 
 its noun. 
 
 * llemember that the Genitive sometimes precedes the governing word, 
 t-specially when it is emphatic. 
 
 * What is the construction of reuit? See28t Rule 11. 
 < See 40, Uule XXXIV. 
 
 ' Kxitluin the case of ftUam. See 28 and 16> Roles II. and V. 
 
 « .\ Trodicate Noun. See 50, Rule I. 
 
 ^ In what cafw^ will you put the I^tin word? Soe28, Rale 11. 
 
54 
 
 TUIUD DEi.Li:.S^iuS, 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 II. — I STEMS. 
 
 63. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 Class U. — I Stems. 
 62. Stems ending in 1,— Nouns in is and 98, not 
 
 increasing in tho GcnitiYC* 
 
 Tuasifl, r., TorriB, f., IgnU, u., 
 
 eaugh, 
 
 Ncm, tnmim 
 Om, tnaUm 
 Dot, tussl 
 Act, tosslaB 
 Vce, tnuim 
 AN, txuBt 
 
 Kom. tu88«« 
 Otn, tusslmat 
 DaL tuMib«0 
 
 toteer, 
 
 turrl* 
 turris 
 turrl 
 
 turriBi, c 
 turri* 
 turrl, • 
 
 turrlNi 
 
 turriwnt 
 
 turribss 
 
 Aee, to— g«, In turres, !• 
 turrCs 
 turribMS 
 
 AbL tnssibws 
 
 JIre, 
 
 SOfOULAB. 
 
 ignis 
 ignis 
 ignl 
 • igneai 
 ignis 
 ignite 
 
 rLCEAU 
 
 ign«« 
 
 ignlbws 
 ign*», Is 
 ign«s 
 ignlbas 
 
 Ho6ti8,M.*p., NObes, F., 
 elaud. 
 
 hoetls 
 bostls 
 bostl 
 
 hOBt«Bl 
 
 boste 
 
 bo6t€s 
 
 bosUiuM 
 
 hoetlbas 
 
 bostls, Is 
 
 bostCs 
 
 hostlbas 
 
 nQbCs 
 
 nQbls 
 
 nQbl 
 
 nQbess 
 
 nQb^s 
 
 nQbe 
 
 nflb^s 
 
 nubiuBA 
 
 nublbns 
 
 nub^s, is 
 
 nub€s 
 
 nubibas 
 
 I. Paradigms. — Observe — 
 
 1. That the stems are tussi^ turri, ignly hosti, and nubi. 
 
 2. Tliat the case-endings. Including the characteristic i, which dis- 
 appears in certain cases, are as follows: — 
 
 SINGULAR. PLUBAI.. 
 
 Horn, is, es es 
 
 Gen. is ium 
 
 DaL i ibus 
 
 jlcc. im, em es, is 
 
 Voc. is es 
 
 AbL i, e ibus 
 
 1 That is, having as many syllables in the Nominative Singular as in 
 tlie Genitive Singular. 
 
TinUD DECLENSION. 
 
 65 
 
 G3. Stems ending in l,— Neuters in e, al. 
 
 anddJC. 
 
 Marc, sea. 
 
 Animal, animal. 
 
 Calcar, spur 
 
 
 
 
 8INGCLAR. 
 
 
 Cass-Eitddics. 
 
 Kom. 
 
 mare 
 
 animal 
 
 calcar 
 
 e— 1 
 
 Gen, 
 
 maris 
 
 anim&Iis 
 
 calcarls 
 
 ia 
 
 Dot. 
 
 marl 
 
 animall 
 
 calcftrl 
 
 I 
 
 Ace. 
 
 mare 
 
 animal 
 
 calcar 
 
 e— 
 
 Voc, 
 
 mare 
 
 animal 
 
 calcar 
 
 e— 
 
 Abl. 
 
 marl 
 
 anim&ll 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 calcflrl 
 
 r 
 
 Norn. 
 
 maria 
 
 animalia 
 
 calcfirla 
 
 ia 
 
 Oen. 
 
 marium 
 
 animaliuin 
 
 calcarium 
 
 ium 
 
 Bat. 
 
 maribuM 
 
 auimalibus 
 
 calcaribuit 
 
 ibua 
 
 Ace. 
 
 maria 
 
 anim&lia 
 
 calcfiria 
 
 ia 
 
 Voc. 
 
 maria 
 
 animalia 
 
 calcftrla 
 
 ia 
 
 Abl. 
 
 raaribas 
 
 animalibns 
 
 calcaribus 
 
 ibus 
 
 1. Paradigms. — Observe — 
 
 1) That the stem-ending i is changed to e in the Nominative, Accu- 
 sative, and Vocative Singular of mare^ and dropped in the same cases 
 of animal (for animale) and calcar (for calcdre). 
 
 2) That the case-€ndings include the characteristic L 
 
 G4. Stems ending in l.^ Nouns in s and x generally 
 preceded by a consonant. 
 
 Cli§ns, M. &p., Urbs, p., Arx, p., MQs,* M., 
 
 
 client. 
 
 eUy. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 citadel. 
 
 nunue. 
 
 Kom. 
 
 cliCna 
 
 urbs 
 
 arx 
 
 mQs 
 
 Oen. 
 
 clientl»« 
 
 urbls 
 
 arcls 
 
 mQrIs 
 
 Dat^ 
 
 clicntl 
 
 urbl 
 
 arc! 
 
 mQrl 
 
 Ace. 
 
 clientem 
 
 urbem 
 
 arccm 
 
 mQrcm 
 
 Voe. 
 
 cliSnfi 
 
 urbs 
 
 arx 
 
 mQs 
 
 Abl. 
 
 clicnte 
 
 urbe 
 
 arc* 
 
 mare 
 
 ^ The dash here implies that the case-«nding is sometimes wanting. 
 
 * Cliens is for clientis, urbs for urbis, arx for arcis, and mis for mikis. 
 Mu*, originally an «-etom, Greek iti%, became an i-stem in Latin by assum- 
 ing /. 
 
 « The vowel e is here short before n(, but long before n«; see p. 0, 10. 
 nnt«i2. Indeed, it seoms probable that nt and nd shorten a precediiij; 
 rowel, as n$ lengthens it. 
 
66 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Norn, 
 
 clients* 
 
 Oen, 
 
 clieDtlam 
 
 Dot 
 
 clientlbas 
 
 Ace 
 
 clientftfi, Is 
 
 Voe, 
 
 clients* 
 
 Abf. 
 
 clientlb«« 
 
 arc«« 
 
 mtiv^m 
 
 arclnia 
 
 inQriiuia 
 
 arclbns 
 
 mQribas 
 
 arc*», Is 
 
 mar*ii, 10 
 
 arc^B 
 
 lDQr«« 
 
 arcibas 
 
 m&ribas 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 urbiam 
 
 urblb«« 
 
 tirb««, Is 
 
 orb«s 
 
 urblbas 
 
 L Paiiadiqms.— Observe — 
 
 1) That the stems are cUentiy urbi^ arci, and muri. 
 
 2) That these noons are deci'^'ed in the singular precisely like con- 
 sonant-stems, and in the plural precisely like all other masculine and 
 feminine i-stems. 
 
 65. Summary of Z-stems To I-fitcms belong — 
 
 1. All nouHH in is and Sb which do not increase^ in the 
 Genitive ; see 63, C2. 
 
 2. Neuters in e, al (for alls), and ar (for aris); sec 63, 63. 
 
 3. Many nouns in s and x — especially (1) nouns in bb 
 and ni, and (2) monosyllables in s and z preceded by a con- 
 sonant ; see 63, 64. 
 
 GO, 4. LocATiYE. — Many names of toi^-ns have a Locative Sin<:^1ai 
 in I or e denoting the place in which (11,40,4). Karlhayini or 
 Karthdgine, at Carthage, Tiburi or Ttbure, at Tibur. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 GENDER IN THIRD DECLENSION. — RULE XXXIIL — 
 ):.XERC1SES. 
 
 64. Lesson J¥om the Grammar. 
 Gender in Third Declension. 
 99. Nouns in the third declension ending in 
 o, or, OS, er, and in €s and es 
 increasing in tlie Genitive^^ are masculine: sermS^ discourse^ 
 dolor, pain ; mos, custom ; agger, mound ; pes. Genitive 
 j^edis, foot. 
 
 ^ That is, have no more syllables in the Genitive than in the Nominative. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 67 
 
 1C5. Nouns of the third declension ending in 
 as, as, is, jrs, z, in gs 
 ^not increasing in the Genitive^ and in s preceded by a con- 
 mant^ are feminine: aetas^ age; ndviSy ship ; chlamys^ cloak; 
 peace ; nubea^ cloud ; urbs, city. 
 
 111. Nouns of the third declension ending in 
 
 a, e, i, 7, c, 1, n, t, ar, ar, ur, us, and us 
 
 neuter : ^ poema, poem ; marCy sea ; IdCy milk ; animal^ 
 limal ; cannen, song ; caput, head ; corpuSy body. 
 
 65. Examine the following examples, 
 
 1. Apud concilium. In the presence of the COUNCIL. 
 
 2. Post castra. Behind the camp. 
 8. Ab urbe. From the city. 
 4. Pro castns. Before the camp. 
 
 Note. — Observe that in the first ind second of these examples, 
 nouns after the prepositions apud and post arc in the Acctisative, 
 that in the third and fourth the nouns after ab and pro are in the 
 ^Ablative. This general usage is expressed in the following 
 
 RULE XXXIII. — Cases wltb Prepositions. 
 
 432. The Accusative and Ablative may be used with 
 prepositions: * 
 
 1 Nouns whose gender is determined by Signification (1. 42) may be 
 •zcoptions to these rules for Render as determined by Endinqs. 
 
 3 Tlie Proposition is the part of speech which shows the relation of ob- 
 jects to each other: apmi jiidicem dixit, ' he spoke in the presence of the 
 Judge'; procastris, 'before the camp.' Here apud and pro are preposi- 
 tions. In the Vocabulary, each preposition, as it occurs, will be marked 
 M snch; and the c<use which may be used with it will be specified. The 
 following examples illustrate the use of prepositions: in Asiam profugit, 
 hejied into Atia; in Italia fuit, he was in Italy: sub montcm, toward the 
 mountain; sub monte, at the foot of the mountain; ad urbom, to the city; 
 apud concilium, lu the presence of the councii; contra naturam, contrary 
 to nature; al> urbe,/n>m the city; ex ^Vsia, out of Asia. 
 
58 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Ad amlcmn scrip*!, 7 have wHUen to a friend. CIc In curiwn, 
 into the aenate-fiouse. Li?. In ilaliii,* in Italy. Nep. Pro castris, be^ 
 fore the camp. Cacs. 
 
 66. Vacabitlary, 
 
 AediScat, 
 
 he builds. 
 
 Ante, prep. te. oec 
 
 b^ore. 
 
 Apnd, prep. le. ace 
 
 U the pretence qf, among, in ; of an 
 
 
 author, in the works qf. 
 
 Caesar, aria, m. 
 
 Caesar, the celebrated Roman states- 
 
 
 man and general 
 
 CiTis, civU, m.* 
 
 crtizen. 
 
 aTlUs, iUs,/. 
 
 9taU. 
 
 Contra, prep. w. ace 
 
 agaimMt, contrary to. 
 
 Habitat, 
 
 he resides^ lives, dwells. 
 
 Hoetis, U, m. and/. 
 
 enemy. 
 
 In, prep, to. ace. and abl. 
 
 into, in. 
 
 Lux, lucis,/. 
 
 light 
 
 Multus, a, urn, 
 
 much, many. 
 
 Nttvis, is,/.* 
 
 ship. 
 
 Oppugnat, 
 
 he assaults, attacks, storms. 
 
 Patria, ac,/. 
 
 native country. 
 
 Pro, prep. to. abL 
 
 for, b^ore. 
 
 I»ugnat, 
 
 he fights. 
 
 Huiuulus, i, m. 
 
 Romulus, the legendary founder 
 
 Superat, 
 
 he conquers. [of llome. 
 
 67. TVtmsliUe into English. 
 1. Cives rdgem laudant. 2. Rex cives laudat. 3. Puer 
 Iconem timebit. 4. Leo puerum terret. 5. Urbs est magna. 
 6. Estne pulchra ? 7. Est pulchra. 8. Rex hostes super- 
 abit. 9. Caesar multas naves habebat. 10. Apud Herodo- 
 turn sunt fabulae. 11. Apud Herodotura, patrem historiae, 
 sunt multae fabulae. 12. Milites pro patria pugnabant. 13. 
 
 I Here the Ablative ftalia is used with in, thongh, in the second exant^ 
 pie, the Accusative curiam is used with the same preposition. The rule 
 is, that the Latin preposition in is used with the Accusative when it 
 means into, and that it is used with the Ablative when it means in. 
 
 s Decline cirit like ignis: ndvis like turris. 
 
 s See Role XXXIIL, 432. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 69 
 
 MllitC'S pro libcrtate pQgnant. 14. Civis bonus legibus pa- 
 triae paret. 
 
 15. Consul in urbe habitabat. IG. Ilostes urbem oppflg- 
 nabant. 17. Hex urbGs multas oppugnabit. 18. Caesar 
 hostes superabat. 19. Consul virtutcm hostium tiraObat. 
 20. Milites consulibus parebunt. 21. Caesar turrira opj)Ug- 
 nabat. 22. Kcx turrOs oj)pugnabit, 23. Hostes arcem 
 oppflgnabunt. 24. Hostes naves multas habent. 25. Cao- 
 siU'I pugnara nuntiant. 26. Cives boni legibus parent. 27. 
 Consules virtutem hostium timent. 
 
 68. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Tlie consul was attacking the tower. 2. He had (was 
 having) many soldiers. 3. The king had a beautiful ship. 
 4. The consul had many ships. 5. The ships of the consul 
 were large. 6. The commander destroyed the city. 7. He 
 destroyed the city contrary to the law.^ 8. Caesar conquers 
 the king. 9. The citizens praise the law. 10. They praise the 
 laws. 11. They praise the laws of the state. 12. The judge 
 will obey the laws. 13. The citizens will obey the laws of 
 the state. 14. The consul was building a large ship. 
 
 15. The citizens will build many ships. 16. The king has 
 a good ship. 17. The soldiers were fighting for liberty. 
 18. The consul will attack the city. 19. He will conquer 
 tlic enemy. 20. The conqueror is in the city. 21. The 
 father of the king resides in the city. 22. The father of 
 the good queen will reside in the city. 23. Good citizens 
 will fight for their country. 24. The soldiers of the good 
 king were assaulting many cities of the enemy. 
 
 » See 65, Rule XXXIII. The words contrary <o are to bo rendered by 
 ft single Latin preposition. We have already learned that the English 
 propositions of, to, bf/, with, etc., may generally bo rendered into Latin 
 without prepositions by simply using tho proi)er case; but many preposi- 
 tions, as before, bcliceen, behind, around, contrary to, must bo rendered 
 by corresponding prc[>o6itiou8. 
 
GO THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 CERTAIN FORMS OP THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 69. In verl)8 of the Third Conjugation, the Third 
 Person in the singular and plural of the present, imjyer^ 
 fect^ and future tenses of the indicative mood has the fol 
 lowing 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 Prsskkt. 
 
 lUVKUTECr, 
 
 FUTUXB. 
 
 Singular, it 
 
 ebat 
 
 et 
 
 Plural, unt 
 
 ebant 
 
 eat 
 
 PABADIGlf. 
 
 8IN0ULAB. PLUBAL. 
 
 Pres. regit, ?ie ruU$ ; regvitt, they rule, 
 
 imp. reg«bat, he was ruling ; reg«baat, they wr*i ruling, 
 
 f\tL reget, he wia rule ; re^emt, they will rule- 
 
 70. Examples. — Adverbs. 
 
 1. Miles pOgnat The soldier Jights. 
 
 2. lAHe&fortiter pQgnat The soldier Jights bbavelt. 
 8. Miles nOn pQgnat The soldier does 'SonJigJU, 
 
 Note. — In these examples /or<i7cr (bravely), and nbn (not) are 
 adverbs modifying pugnat. The use of adverbs is expressed in the 
 following 
 
 RULE LXI.— Use of Adverbs. 
 
 651. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other 
 ADVERBS : 
 
 Sapientes feliciter ^ vivunt, the wise lite happily. Cic Facile doc- 
 tissimus, unquestionabli/ the most learned. Cic Uaud aliter, not 
 othericise. Verg. 
 
 1 The Adverb is, therefore, the part of speech which is used to qualify 
 verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. Feliciter, * happily/ is an adverb 
 qualifying the verb rintnt, * live ' Give happiht). Facile, ' easily,* * un- 
 questionably,* is an adverb qualifying the adjective doctissimvs, 'the 
 most learned * (easih/, i.e. tinquestionabbj the most learned). Haud, * not,* 
 is an adverb qualifying the adverb aliter, * otherwise ' (not otherwise). 
 The adverb in Latin usually stands directly before the word which it 
 qualifies, as in these examples. 
 
Til HID CONJUGATION. 
 
 01 
 
 71. Adverbs, unlike Nouns and Adjectives, from which 
 tliey are largely derived, are iiideclimible. They have a 
 variety of endings, of which we now notice c, o, and ter: 
 modeste^ * modestly'; saepe, * often'; tutOy * safely '; /orft^r, 
 *bravelv.' 
 
 72. Vocabulary, 
 
 Ad, prep, with ace. 
 IJi-eviter, adv. 
 De, prep, loitli ubl. 
 Dicit, 
 
 Dlligenter, adv. 
 Ducit, 
 
 Feliciter, adv. 
 Fortiter, ado, 
 Legutus, 1, in. 
 Legit, 
 Mittit, 
 
 Modeste, adv. 
 Non, adv. 
 Numenis, i, m. 
 OriitiS, onis,/. 
 Kegit, 
 Saepe, adv. 
 Scribit, 
 
 Sirapliciter, adv. 
 Veniin, i, n. 
 Vivit, 
 
 to. 
 
 briefly. 
 
 about, concerning, in regard to, 
 
 he says, speaks. 
 
 attentively, diligently, 
 
 he leads. 
 
 happily. 
 
 bravely. 
 
 ambassador; lieutenant, 
 
 he reads. 
 
 he sends. 
 
 modestly, 
 
 not, 
 
 number. 
 
 oration, speech, 
 
 he rules, 
 
 <iften. 
 
 he writes. 
 
 simply. 
 
 truth. 
 
 he lives. 
 
 73. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Dk'it, dicebant, dicet. 2. Legunt, legebat, legent. 3. 
 Dicunt, scribunt. 4. Dicebat, scribebat. 5. Dicent, scri- 
 "bent. G. Dflcit, dQcebat, dilcet. 7. Regunt, regebat, regent. 
 8. Consul modeste dicebat. 9. Pueri raodeste dicunt. 10. 
 Rex breviter dIcet. 11. Consules brevier dicunt. 12. 
 JGdex feliciter \ivit. 13. Gives feliciter vivebant. 14. 
 Pastores simpliciter vivunt. 
 
 15. jQdex librum legebat. IC. Jildices orationes Cioero- 
 nis legebant. 17. Jfldices boni orationes Ciceronis consulis 
 
62 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 
 
 dlligenter legebant. 18. Epistulas consulis dlligenter legent. 
 19. HostOs legates ad Cacsarem mittunt. 20. Hostes lega- 
 tos ad regera mittent. 21. Mllites fortiter pQgiiabant. 22. 
 Consul amlcos multos habebat. 23. Consul magnum amico- 
 rum numcrum habebat. 
 
 74. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. He leads, he was leading, he will lead. 2. lie rules, ho 
 was ruling, he will rule. 8. They lead, they rule. 4. They 
 were leading, they were ruling. 5. They will lead, they will 
 rule. 6. The judge will speak the truth. 7. They speak 
 the truth. 8. They will speak modestly. 9. Cicero was 
 writing to a friend. 10. The boys will write often. 11. 
 Cicero was writing about friendship. 
 
 12. The king is writing a book. 13. He will write many 
 books. 14. The boy is writing about virtue. 15. The boys 
 will WTite about the victory. 16. The king lives happily. 
 17. The father of the good queen was living happily. 18. 
 lie was reading a good book. 19. The boys will read good 
 books. 20. Caesar sends an ambassador to the enemy. 21. 
 The king will send ambassadors to the enemy. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 CERTAIN FORMS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. — 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 75. In verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, the Third 
 Person in the sincfxdar and plural of the present, imperfect, 
 and future tenses of the indicative mood has the following 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 PKESEXT. iMrERFECT. FCTUBB. 
 
 Singular, it iebat let 
 
 Piural, iuiit iubant lent 
 
Founrn conjugation. 63 
 
 PABADIGM. 
 eiNQULAR. FLUKAL. 
 
 I*re». audit, he hears ; audi nnt, they hear. 
 
 Imp. audi^bat, he was hearing ; audi£bant, they were Tuaring, 
 
 Fut, audiet, lie leiU hear ; audlent, they vriU hear. 
 
 76. In verbs of the Four Conjugations, the Third 
 i'KRsoN in the sinffxdar and plural of the perfect tense of 
 the indicative mood has the following 
 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 
 
 8I50nLAB. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Conj. I. 
 
 ttVit 
 
 averunt 
 
 Conj. II. 
 
 uit 
 
 uenmt 
 
 Conj. III. 
 
 sit 
 
 serunt 
 
 Conj, IV. 
 
 ivit 
 
 iverunt 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 BINOULAB. PLURAL. 
 
 I. amftvlt, he has loved ;* am&TCriiiit, they have loved.* 
 
 n. moQuit, he has advised; monuCmnt, t/iey have advised, 
 
 III. rCxit,-Aff has ruled; rCiCrimtj^Mfy have ruled. 
 
 IV. audlvit, he has lieard; audiv^runt, t/icy have heard. 
 
 77. In the verb Sum, the Third Person in the singular 
 and plural of the perfect tense of the indicative mood has 
 the following forms : 
 
 SIKOULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Mt, he has beetif he was ; fu^mnt, they have heen^ they twr*. 
 
 78. Examples. — Ablative, 
 
 1. Virtaie rCgnum tenuit He obtained the kingdom by merit. 
 
 2. Oppidum vallo munlvit He fortified the toum by means of a 
 
 RAMPART. 
 
 Note. — Observe in tlicse examples tliat virtftte, * by merit,' and 
 tatlOf *by means of a rampart,' are both in tlie Ablative, Tliis Latin 
 Idiom is expressed in the following 
 
 » Or he loved, they loved. * Rexit—reg-sit, rez€runt'=reg-tirunt; p. 3, 30. 
 
C4 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 RULE XXV.— Ablative of Means* 
 
 420. Instrument and Means are denoted by the 
 
 Ablative : 
 
 Cornibua taiiri se tutantur, bulls defend themselves with their 
 BOKNS. Cic. Gloria ducitur, he is led by olouy. Cic Sol omnia 
 luce colliistrat, the sun illumines all things with its lUjht. Cic Lacte 
 ▼ivunt, they live upon milk. Caes. Tellus saucia vomeribus, the earth 
 turned (wounded) with the ploughshare. Ovid. 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION AND PERFECT TENSE. 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 79. Vocabulary/, 
 
 Alius, a, iim, 
 Arte, ado. 
 Castra, drum, lu pL 
 Custodit, 4,» 
 Discipulus, i, m. 
 Domiit, 4, 
 Erudit, 4, 
 Fossa, ae,/. 
 Fugitivus, i, m. 
 Gallia, ae, /. 
 Ilelvetii, 6rum, m. pL 
 Legio, onis,/. 
 Munit, 4, 
 Mums, i, m. 
 Posted, adc. 
 Pfigna, ae,/. 
 Romaiius, i, m. 
 Serrao, onis, m. 
 Vallum, i, n. 
 Vox, vocis,/. 
 
 high. 
 
 closely f soundly. 
 
 camp. 
 
 he guards, 
 
 leameTf pupiL 
 
 he sleeps. 
 
 he instructs. 
 
 ditchf moat 
 
 runaway, deserter, |to France. 
 
 Gaulf a country nearly corresponding 
 
 the Ilelvetii or IlelvetianSy a people of 
 
 legion, iSwitzerland. 
 
 he fortifies. 
 
 wall. 
 
 afterward. 
 
 fight, battle. 
 
 Boman. 
 
 discoursCf conversation. 
 
 rampart. 
 
 1 As the ending of the third person singular of the present indicative 
 is the same in the fourth conjugation as in the third, verbs of the fourth 
 conjugation for the present will be distinguished in the vocabularies by 
 tlio numeral 4. 
 
FOUnril CONJUGATION, C5 
 
 80. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Amliunt, aiuliebat, audicnt, aiullvit. 2. Erudit, crudio- 
 bant, erudiet, crudiverunt. 3. Munit, custodit, custodient, 
 mflnient. 4. PiierT dormiebant. 5. Puer arte dormiebat. 
 6. Pustores arte dorrniunt. 7. MilitOs arte dormlveruiit. 
 8. Milites arcem muniebant. 9. Caesar castra munlvit. 10. 
 LcgiOnes castra muiiiObant. 11. HostGs fortiter pugnave- 
 runt. 12. Ilostes urbem oppugnuverunt. 13. Judex bonus 
 tyrannum timuit. 14. Gives Pisistratum tyrannum timue- 
 runt. 
 
 15. Ilostes urbem muro muniebant. 16. Consul urbem 
 niuro alto munivit. 17. RomanI Helvetios superuverunt. 
 18. Mllites castra fossa muniebant. 19. Caesar castra vallo 
 munivit. 20. Fugitivi hostibus pugnam nuntiaverunt. 21. 
 KomanI postea hostes superaverunt. 22. Caesar in Gallia 
 fuit. 23. Hostes naves multas habuerunt. 24. Cicero con- 
 sul epistulas multas scribit. 25. Consul voces militum audi- 
 vit, 26. Pueri sermonem de amlcitia audient. 
 
 81. Translate vUo Latin, 
 
 1. He hears, he guards. 2. They hear, they guard. 3. 
 He was hearing, they were sleeping. 4. He was sleeping, 
 they were hearing. 5. He will hear, they will hear. 6. 
 They have slept, they have heard. 7. The boys heard the 
 oration. 8. The pupils heard the conversation. 9. They 
 did not hear the oration. 10. The citizens are fortifying the 
 city. 11. They will guard the beautiful city. VI, The sol- 
 diers will guard the city. 13. They will guard the temple. 
 
 14. The shepherd was sleeping soundly. 15. The she|v 
 herds will sleep soundly. 16. Caesar heard the voice of the 
 soldier. 17. Caesar hears the voices of the soldiers. 18. 
 The soldier heard the voice of Caesar. 19. They heard the 
 conversation in regard to the consul. 20. Caesar was fortify- 
 ing the camp with a rampart. 21. The soldiere will fortify 
 tiie camp with a moat. 
 
66 ADJECTIVES, 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OP THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 82. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 152. Adjectives of the third declension may be divided 
 into three classes : 
 
 I. Those which have in the Nominative Singular three 
 different forms— one for each gender. 
 
 II. Those which have two forms — the masculine and 
 feminine being the same. 
 
 III. Those which have but one form — the same for all 
 genders. 
 
 153. Adjectives op Three Endings in this declension 
 have the stem in i, and are declined as follows : 
 
 Acer, iharp} ^^^^ 
 
 Mamj. 
 
 Fm. 
 
 Kwrr. 
 
 Norn, ftoers 
 
 icrls 
 
 icre 
 
 Oen, icrl» 
 
 icrl* 
 
 IcrUl 
 
 Dot, Acrl 
 
 icrl 
 
 &crl 
 
 Aec. acrem 
 
 icreai 
 
 icre 
 
 Voc, acer 
 
 ftcrls 
 
 acre 
 
 AhL icrl 
 
 tcrl 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 acrl 
 
 Hamx 
 
 Fbm. 
 
 Nnrc 
 
 Kom. ficr«s 
 
 ftcr«« 
 
 acria 
 
 Goi. acrinm 
 
 ftcriom 
 
 acriom 
 
 DaL ftcribns 
 
 &cri1»wi 
 
 acribM 
 
 Aee, 4cr«», !• 
 
 4cr«»,I» 
 
 acria 
 
 Voe, ftcr«s 
 
 ficrCs 
 
 acria 
 
 AhL &cri1»iiB 
 
 flcribus 
 
 acribns 
 
 1 Acer is declined like trims in the Masc. and Fem., and like mare 
 (63, rw^) in the Neut., except in the Nom and Voc. Sing. Masc., and in 
 the Abl. Sing. 
 
 2 These forms in er are like those in er of Decl. II. in dropping the 
 ending in the Nom. and Voc. Sing., and in developing final r into er ; acer 
 for dona, stem acrl. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 
 
 67 
 
 1 
 
 54. Adject 
 
 [VES OF 
 
 Two Endings are 
 
 declined as 
 
 follows : 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tristis, sad.^ 
 
 
 Tristior, sadder. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1 
 
 
 U. AND F. 
 
 NlUT. 
 
 M. AKD P. 
 
 NXITT. 
 
 Kom. 
 
 tristlii 
 
 trlsto 
 
 tnstior 
 
 tnstius 
 
 Oen, 
 
 tristi* 
 
 tristis 
 
 tnstiuris 
 
 trIstiOrls 
 
 Dai. 
 
 trlstl 
 
 tristi 
 
 trlatiOrl 
 
 trIstiOrl 
 
 Ace. 
 
 trlstem 
 
 tristo 
 
 trTstiCrem 
 
 tristi us 
 
 Voc. 
 
 trlstin 
 
 tristo 
 
 tristior 
 
 tristius 
 
 Abl. 
 
 trT.stI 
 
 trIstI 
 
 trfstlOre (I) 2 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 trIstiOre (I) 
 
 Norn. 
 
 trlstCs 
 
 tristia 
 
 trlstiurCs 
 
 tnstiSra 
 
 Gen. 
 
 trTstium 
 
 tristiam 
 
 trIstiOrnm 
 
 trIstiOram 
 
 Dot. 
 
 tristibus 
 
 tnstibas 
 
 trIstiOribus 
 
 trlstiuribnw 
 
 Ace. 
 
 trlst«8, 1» 
 
 tristia 
 
 trl8tior«s (Is) 
 
 trIstiOra 
 
 Voe. 
 
 trl.st«» 
 
 tristia 
 
 trIstiOrC* 
 
 tnstiOra 
 
 Abl. 
 
 tristibas 
 
 trlstibuB 
 
 83. 
 
 trlstiuribus 
 Vocabuiari/. 
 
 trlstiOril:^* 
 
 
 Acer, acris, acre, 
 
 sharpf severe. 
 
 
 
 Aetas, alls,/. 
 
 aye. 
 
 
 
 Copia, ae 
 
 ,/. 
 
 abundancet supply. 
 
 
 
 Crudelis, 
 
 e, 
 
 cruel. 
 
 
 
 Fertilis, c 
 
 > 
 
 fertile. 
 
 
 
 Fortis, e, 
 
 
 brave. 
 
 
 
 Gallus, i, 
 
 m. 
 
 Gaul. 
 
 
 
 Gemianus, i, m. 
 
 German. 
 
 
 
 Incolit, 
 
 
 he inhabits. 
 
 
 
 Inutilis, c, 
 
 useless. 
 
 
 
 Naval is, e, 
 
 naval. 
 
 
 
 Occupat, 
 
 
 he seizes, takes possession of. 
 
 
 Oranis, e 
 
 » 
 
 all. 
 
 
 
 Pabulum 
 
 i, n. 
 
 fodder. 
 
 
 
 Per, prep 
 
 . to. ace. 
 
 through, on account of, by means 
 
 
 Post, prep. toUh ace 
 
 . after. [of, by, during, for. 
 
 
 Singularis, e, 
 
 remarkable, singular. 
 
 
 
 Timor, oris, m. 
 
 fear. 
 
 
 
 Utilis, e, 
 
 
 useful. 
 
 
 » Trittis and triste are declined like acris and acre. Tristior is the com« 
 parative of trittis. ^ Enclosed endings are rare. 
 
68 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 84. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Civis est fortis. 2. Gives fortes erunt. 8. Rex est 
 beutus. 4. Estne fortis? 5. Fortis est. 6. Libri sunt Utiles. 
 7. Gallia fertilis crat. 8. Gives fortiter ptignant. 9. Ferti- 
 les agros habent. 10. Verba sunt utilia. 11. Lex acris est. 
 12. Leges acres sunt. 13. Miles est fortis. 14. Mllites 
 sunt fortes. 15. Gonsul virtQtem mllitis fortis laudat. 16. 
 Gonsul est orator. 
 
 17. Gate magnus imperator est. 18. Timor oranes 
 mllites occupavit. 19. Timor omnes hostes occupabit. 20. 
 Galli fortes sunt. 21. Gaesar Gallos fortes superavit. 22. 
 German! agros fertiles incolunt. 23. Pabuli copia in agns 
 fertilibus erat. 24. Leges sunt Qtiles. 25. Gives boni legi- 
 bus Otilibus parent. 26. Judices per aetatem ad pugnam 
 inQtiles erant. 27. Timor omnes cives occupabit. 28. Agr! 
 GallOrum fertiles erant. 29. Miles verba ducis fortis audit. 
 
 85. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Will the brave leader obey the words of the consul ? 
 2. He will obey the words of the consul. 3. Is he a good 
 commander? 4. He is a good commander. 5. He is brave. 
 6. Will not the books be useful ? 7. They will be useful. 
 8. The leadei-8 of the soldiers are brave. 9. The brother of 
 the consul is a brave soldier. 10. The brother of the king 
 was a severe judge. 11. The brother of the orator will bo 
 a severe judge. 
 
 12. The brave soldiers were guarding the camp. 13. The 
 soldiers will be brave. 14. They will all be brave. 15. 
 Caesar praised the brave soldiers. 16. The soldiers will hear 
 the words of the brave leader. 17. The field is fertile. 18. 
 The fields are fertile. 19. Fear is taking possession of all 
 the citizens. 20. There will be an abundance of fodder in 
 the fields of the Germans. 
 
 Genitive according to Rule XVI. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THIRD DECLENSION. — COMPARISON OP 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 86. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 155. Adjectives of One Ending generally end in s or 
 7. but sometimes in I or r. 
 
 156. Aud&x, audacious.^ 
 
 F6Ux, i 
 
 happy.* 
 
 M. Aim F, 
 
 SINGULAB. 
 
 Nkut. M. axd F. 
 
 N«CT. 
 
 Nom. audax 
 
 audax 
 
 felrx 
 
 fellx 
 
 Oen. audacis 
 
 audads 
 
 fellds 
 
 fullds 
 
 Dot. aud&cl 
 
 audacl 
 
 felld 
 
 fCUd 
 
 Ace. audacem 
 
 audax 
 
 fellcem 
 
 fellx 
 
 Voc. audax 
 
 audax 
 
 fellx 
 
 fellx 
 
 Abl. audftcl(o) 
 
 audacl (e) 
 
 fCUd (e) 
 
 felid (e) 
 
 "om. audficCs 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 audada 
 
 feiiccs 
 
 felida 
 
 uen. audacinm 
 
 audadum 
 
 fslldnm 
 
 felidnm 
 
 IkU. audilcibuti 
 
 audacibus 
 
 fulldbns 
 
 feildbus 
 
 -'re. audac«»(I») 
 
 audada 
 
 mic^u (Is) 
 
 felrda 
 
 XT. audac€s 
 
 audada 
 
 f5llc«» 
 
 felida 
 
 Ab'.. audacibus 
 
 audacibns 
 
 fuUdbas 
 
 feiidbiM 
 
 157. Amins, laving. Prudfins, 
 
 8IN0CLAB. 
 M. AHD P. Neut. M. ahd F. 
 
 prudent. 
 Neot. 
 
 ' 'm. amans 
 
 amaaa 
 
 prudena 
 
 prudCns 
 
 o<u. amnntla 
 
 amantls * 
 
 prQdcntis 
 
 prQdcntls * 
 
 Dot. amanti 
 
 amanti 
 
 priidenti 
 
 priidcnti 
 
 A re. amantem 
 
 amans 
 
 prQdentem 
 
 prOdens 
 
 e. amans 
 
 amans 
 
 prQdGns 
 
 pradCns 
 
 Abl. amante(l) 
 
 amant« (I) 
 
 prQdentI (e) 
 
 pradentl (•) 
 
 » Observe that i in the Ablative Singular, and ia, ium, and ia in tho 
 Plural, are the regular case-endings for i-stems. See 63. 
 
 ^ According to Ritschl, Schmitz, and others, the e which is long in 
 >i(lens before ns is short in all other forms of tlie word, i.e. before nt. 
 1 n the same manner the a which is long in amans, is according to Ritschl 
 ohort in amantis, amanti, etc. 
 G 
 
70 
 
 ADJECTIVES, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 JVbm. amant4B0 amantfa prtldcnt^s 
 
 Oen. amantiniki amantlam prudentium 
 
 Dot, amantibus amantlbns prQdcntibaii 
 
 Ace, amantfis (I«) amantia prtidentCs (Is) 
 
 Voe. axnantSs amantia prQdent£« 
 
 Abl, mnantibtt* amantiba* prQdentibiui 
 
 Note. — The participle amans differs in decleusion 
 jective prudins only in the Ablative Singular, where 
 usually has the ending e, and the adjective, 1 
 
 prQdcntla 
 
 prudentii 
 
 prudentibufi 
 
 prudentia 
 
 prQdentia 
 
 pradentibn* 
 
 from the ad- 
 the participle 
 
 CoMPAUisoN OF Adjectives. 
 
 160. Ailjcctives have three forms, called tlie Positive 
 degree, the Comparative, and the Superlative : altiiSy alitor^ 
 altissimiiSj^ high, higher, highest. These forms denote dif- 
 ferent degrees of the quality expressed by the adjective. 
 
 161. TIic Latin, like the £nglish, has two modes of com- 
 parison : 
 
 I. Terminational Comparison, by endings. 
 
 II. Adverbial Comparison, by adverbs. 
 
 I. Terminational Comparison. 
 
 162. Adjectives are regularly compared by adding to the 
 stem of the positive the endings : 
 
 COMPARATIVE. 
 
 
 SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 Ma«c. Fem. Nkct. 
 
 MA9C. 
 
 Fem. Nect. 
 
 ior ior iua 
 
 issimus 
 
 issima issimum 
 
 Altus, altior, altissimus : hi(/h, higher, highest, 
 Levis, levior, levissimus : light, lighter, lightest, 
 1. Vowel Stems lose their final vowel: alto, altior, outs' 
 
 timus. 
 
 1 Each of these forms of the adjective is declined. Thus altvs and 
 altissimus are declined like bonus, 39, 148: altus, a, wm; alti, ae, t, etc.; 
 altissimus, a, vm; altissimi, ae, i, etc. Altior is declined like tristior, 
 82, 154; altior f altius; allioris, etc. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 
 
 n 
 
 166. The following are compared irregularly: 
 
 bonus, nielior, optimus, 
 
 magnus, major, maxiinus, 
 
 parvus, minor, minimus, 
 
 166. Positive wanting. 
 
 cilerlor, citimus, nearer^ prior, 
 
 di'tcrior, deterrimus, worse, propior, 
 
 interior, intimus, t;iner, ulterior, 
 
 ocior, ocissimus, sw^fteVf 
 
 goody better, best, 
 great, greater, greatest, 
 small, smaller, smallest. 
 
 primus, 
 
 proxinius, 
 
 ultimus. 
 
 former, 
 
 nearer, 
 
 farther. 
 
 II. Adverbial Comparison. 
 170. Adjectives which want the terminational comparison 
 form the comparative and superlative, when their significa- 
 tion requires it, by prefixing the adverbs, magis^ more, and 
 maximey most, to the positive : 
 
 Arduus, magis arduus, maxime arduus. 
 ArduouSy more arduous, most arduous. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. — CO^EPARISON. — 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 87. Examples. — Comparison. 
 
 1 . Aunim j^vius est quam argenium. Qold is heavier THAN SlLVEit 
 
 2. Aurum argentO gnivius est. Gold is heavier twls Silveil 
 
 Note. — Observe (1) that in the first example, the Latin construc- 
 tion is the same as the English, and that the two nouns compared, 
 aurum and argentum, are in the same case, i.e. in tlie Nominative, and 
 (2) that in the second example qtiam is omitted, and that the second 
 noun is put in the Ablative, This Latin idiom Ib expressed in the 
 fnlluwing 
 
 RULE XXIIL — Ablative wltli Comparatives. 
 
 417. Comparatives witliout QU^\3i are followed by tho 
 Ablative : 
 
72 COMPARISON. 
 
 Nihil est amubilius virtutCj^ nothing is more lovely tiiax virtue. 
 Cic. Quid est melius honitdte,^ what is better than goodness? Cic 
 Sciinus solem mfijorem esse terra,^ we k)iow that the sun is larger than 
 the earth. Cic. 
 
 1. CoMPARATiVKS WITH QUAM are followed by the Nominative, 
 or by the case of the corresponding noun before them: 
 
 Hibernia minor qnam Britannia exlstimatur, Ireland is considered 
 smaller than Britain. Caes. Agris quara urbl terribilior, more 
 terrible to the country than to the city. Liv. 
 
 Note. — Conjunctions are mere connectives, and are without inflec- 
 tion. Quam is a conjunction. 
 
 88. Comparisoji of Adverbs, 
 Most adverbs are derived from adj(^ctivcs, and are depend- 
 ent upon them for their comparison. The comparative is 
 the accusative neuter singular of the adjective, and the 
 superlative changes the ending us of the adjective into 
 long S : 
 
 altus, altior, altissimus, l^ifly. 
 
 alte, altius, altissime, lojtily. 
 
 prudens, prudentior, prudentissimus, prudent. 
 
 priidenter, prudentius, prudentissime, prudently. 
 
 89. I^otabulary. 
 
 AquilGia, ae, /. Aquileiay a town in north-eastern Italy. 
 
 Ariovistus, i, m. Ariomstus, a German king. 
 
 Aurum, i, n. gold. 
 
 Belgae, arum, m. pi. the Belgae, or Belgians, a people of 
 
 Circum, prep. w. ace. around, in the vicinity of. [Gaul. 
 
 Clarus, a, um, clear, illustrious. 
 
 Consilium, ii, n. counsel, plan. 
 
 Divitiacus, I, m. Divitiacus, a chieftain of the Aedui in 
 
 Duplex, duplicis, double. [Gaul. 
 
 Felix, felicis, happy , fortunate. 
 
 Hannibal, alls, m. Hannibal, a Carthaginian general. 
 
 Hiemat, Jie winters, passes the winter. 
 
 Homo, hominis, m. andf. man, human being, person. 
 
 1 Virtute = quam virtHs ; bonitdtc = quam bonitds ; terra = quam terram 
 (so. esse). 
 
COMPARISON. 73 
 
 Infelix, infulicis, unhappy, unfortunate. 
 
 Labienus, i, m. Labienus, an officer in Caesar's army in 
 
 Potens, potentis, powerful. [Gaul. 
 
 Pretiosus, a, urn, jyrecious, valuable. 
 
 Quani, conj. than. 
 
 Sapiens, sapientis, wise. 
 
 90. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Orator est clilrus. 2. Estne clarissimus? 3. Estclaris- 
 s'lmus. 4. OratorOs fuOrunt clarL 5. Oratores clariOrGs^ 
 sunt. 6. OratorOs clarissiml erunt. 7. Consul fulix erat. 
 8. Consulcs felTcOs sunt. 9. Caesar regein Tnfellcem supera- 
 vit. 10. Caesar Ariovistum regem superavit. 11. Caesar 
 Ariovistum, iufelicera Germanorura regem, superavit. 12. 
 Legio circum Aquileiam hiemabit. 13. Hannibal infclIx 
 erat. 14. Judex sapiens est. 15. OranCs cives judicem 
 sapientem laudant. 16. Sapientes homines civitatem ro- 
 gunt. 
 
 17. Caesar Labienum laudavit. 18. Jadex sapientior erat 
 quam rex. 19. Turris altior est quam murus. 20. Con- 
 silium clarius est quara lux. 21. Consilium luce clarius est. 
 22. Consilia omnia luce sunt clariora. 23. Belgae fortis- 
 siml sunt. 24. Gallorum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae. 
 25. Milites uon pugnabuiit. 20. Ilostes castra altissimo muro 
 muniverunt. 
 
 91. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Gold is valuable. 2. Wisdom is more valuable. 3. 
 The king is unfortunate. 4. Is not the consul ill? 6. The 
 consul is ill. 6. Life is precious. 7. Is not gold useful ? 8. 
 It is useful. 9. Cato was wise. 10. The Gauls were brave. 
 11. The Romans were braver than the Gauls. 12. The Gauls 
 were unfortunate. 13. The Komans conquered the unfor- 
 tunate Gauls. 14. King Divitiacus was very powerful. He 
 
 » Declined like trUtior, 82, 154. Comparatives and superlativen, as 
 well a« positives, must agree with their noons, according to 40 Rule 
 XXXIV. 
 
74 FOURTH AND FIFTH DECLENSIONS. 
 
 was the most powerful of all tlie chiefs. He was the most 
 ])Owerful of all the Gauls. 
 
 15. Virtue is more valuable than goKl. 10. Wisdom is 
 more useful than gold. 17. Virtue is better than wisdom. 
 1 8. The soldiers are braver than the general. 19. The wall 
 will be double, 20. The enemy will fortify the city with a 
 double walL 21. The wall was very high. 22. The Gauls 
 were fortifying the city with a very high wall. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 NOUNS. — FOUBTH DECLENSION. — FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 92. Lesson J)roni the Grammar, 
 
 Fourth Declension: IT Nouns. 
 
 116. Nouns of the fourth declension end in 
 
 us — masculine; tl — neuter. 
 They arc declined as follows : 
 Frdctus, fruit. Coma, ham. 
 
 
 SIKOULAR. 
 
 CAM-EKODfOi. 
 
 Kom. fructns 
 
 cornA 
 
 as 
 
 ft 
 
 Om. frOctOfl 
 
 oornlUi 
 
 Q8 
 
 fts 
 
 DaL frQctuI, tt> 
 
 corntt 
 
 ul, u' 
 
 a 
 
 Ace. fructom 
 
 cornft 
 
 urn 
 
 a 
 
 Voc. frQct«» 
 
 corntt 
 
 na 
 
 ft 
 
 AbL fractft 
 
 coma 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Q 
 
 ft 
 
 Kom. frQcttts 
 
 cornna 
 
 U3 
 
 ua 
 
 Gen. fructniun 
 
 comniuii 
 
 uum 
 
 uum 
 
 Dot. fructibus 
 
 cornibus 
 
 ibus (ubus) 2 
 
 ibus (ubos) 
 
 Aec fructa» 
 
 cornua 
 
 us 
 
 ua 
 
 Voe. fructlks 
 
 conma 
 
 us 
 
 ua 
 
 AhL fructibms 
 
 cornibiui 
 
 ibus (ubus) 
 
 ibus (ubus) 
 
 1 Thus vi is contracted into u: fructvl^ frfictu. 
 
 2 The enclosed endings occur in a few words. 
 
FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 75 
 
 1. Tlie Stem in nouns of the fourth declension ends in n:/ruc(u, 
 coruu, 
 
 2. Tlie Case-Endings here given contain the characteristic n, 
 weakened to i in ibuSf but retained in ubua; see p. 2, 22. 
 
 Fifth Declension: E Nouns. 
 120. Nouns of the fifth declension end in ^b— feminine, 
 and are declined as follows : 
 
 
 Dies, daij.^ 
 
 Rgs, thing. 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Caci-Endiko*. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 di«8 
 
 res 
 
 Cs 
 
 Oen. 
 
 di«I or dift 
 
 r^I or re 
 
 «T,S 
 
 Dai, 
 
 di«l or die 
 
 rel or rfi 
 
 &,« 
 
 Ace. 
 
 diem 
 
 rem 
 
 em 
 
 Voe. 
 
 dies 
 
 res 
 
 6B 
 
 Abl. 
 
 die 
 
 re 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Casx-Eitdihob. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 dies 
 
 res 
 
 6a 
 
 Gm. 
 
 dierlun 
 
 reruni 
 
 6rum 
 
 Dal. 
 
 diebus 
 
 rebus 
 
 ebuB 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dies 
 
 res 
 
 68 
 
 Voe. 
 
 dies 
 
 res 
 
 6s 
 
 Abl. 
 
 diebas 
 
 rebus 
 
 Cbus 
 
 1. Tlie Stem of nouns of the fifth declension ends in 6 : die, re. 
 
 2. Tlie Case-Endings here given contain the characteristic 6, which 
 appears in all the cases. It is shortened (1) generally in the ending ei 
 when preceded by a consonant, and (2) regularly in the ending em. 
 
 93. Examples. — Time. 
 
 1. Urbom hnc tempore mnniiint. They are AT this time fortifying 
 
 the city. 
 
 2. Sexto anno. In THE SIXTH YF..VK. 
 
 Note. — Observe that hoc tempore^ *at this time,' and sexto anno 
 'in the sixth year' are both in the Ablatite. This Latin idiom Is 
 • xpressed in the following 
 
 ' By exception, dili is nsnally masculine in the singular, and always in 
 the plural. 
 
70 TIME. 
 
 RULE XXXI. — Time. 
 
 429. The Time of an Action is denoted by the Abla- 
 tive: 
 
 Octogesimo anno est mortuus, he died in his eioiitieth teab. 
 Cic Vire convenure, they assembled in the sprino. Liv. 
 
 94. Vocabulary, 
 
 Acies, acici,/. edge^ line qf battle. 
 
 Advcntus, U8| m. approach^ arrivoL 
 
 Avis, Is,/. Wrd. 
 
 Cantus, us, m. singing, 
 
 Comparat, he prepares^ raises. 
 
 Conspectus, us, m. sights view. 
 
 Exercitus, us, m. army. 
 
 Impetus, us, m. attack^ charge, [forms the line of battle, 
 
 Instrutt, fie constructSf draws up ; aciein instruit, he 
 
 Magistratos, us, m. magistrate^ magistracy, fibus, in hand. 
 
 Manus, us,/.> hand^ a band of soldiers, a force ; in man- 
 
 Mililaris, e, military ; res militaris, military affairs. 
 
 Occasus, us, m. setting ; suits occusus, sunset. 
 
 Portus, us, m. port, harbor. 
 
 Posterns, a, uni, following, next 
 
 Keducit, he leads back. 
 
 Spes, spfii,/. hope. 
 
 Tenet, he holds. 
 
 Usus, us, in. use, usage, experience. 
 
 95. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Rex exercitura comparabat. 2. Aciein instruebat. 3. 
 Tenetne portum?* 4. Portuiii tenebit. 5. Impetum limebat. 
 6. Opus est magnum. 7. Timor exercitum occupabat. 8. 
 Portus est bonus. 9. Labienus in exercitu' Caesaris fuit. 
 10. Hannibal exercitum magnum in Italiam duxit. 11. 
 Caesar exercitus magnos comparavit. 1 2. In conspectti hos- 
 tium erat. 
 
 1 Feminine by exception. 
 
 2 Tenetne = tenet and interrogative particle -ne. 
 * See page 58, foot-note 1. 
 
NUMERALS. 77 
 
 18. Pucr cantum avis audiebat. 14. Pucri cantus avium 
 andient. 15. Consul hostium exercitura non timObat. IG. 
 Cicero consul opus magnum in manibus habebat. 17. Hos- 
 tes portum tenebant. 18. Caesar aciem Instruct. 19. Pos- 
 tero die aciem instruebat. 20. Postero die in conspecta 
 hostium aciem instruebat. 21. Postea exercitum in castra 
 reduxit. 22. Ariovistus solis occasu exercitum in castra 
 lodfixit. 23. Hostes adventuni Caesaris exspectubaut. 24. 
 Timor omnem exercitum occupjivit. 
 
 96. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. At sunset fear seized the army. 2. The next day Cae- 
 sir conquered the king. 3. The consul will hold the harbor. 
 4. He has a large army. 5. Will he fortify the harbor? G. 
 He is fortifying the harbor. 7. Does he expect an attack ? 
 8. He expects an attack. 9. The commander fears the attack 
 of the enemy. 10. The soldiers will fight in sight of the 
 ' "immander. 11. The pupil is writing about the army. 12. 
 The girl hears the singing of the bird. 
 
 13. Fear will take possession of the ai-my. 14. Caesar led 
 I large army into Gaul. 15. Ariovistus, the king of the Ger- 
 mans, had a large army in Gaul. IG. The consul will hold 
 the harbor. 17. He was awaiting the approach of Ariovis- 
 tus, the king of the Germans. 18. The consul has large 
 experience in military affairs. 19. The soldiers of Ariovis- 
 tus did not have large experience in military affaii-s. 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 97. Lesson from the Chammar. 
 
 171. Numerals comprise numeral adjectives and numeral 
 adverbs. 
 
 172. Numeral adjectives comprise three principal classes : 
 
78 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 1. Cardinal Nitmuers : * unua, one ; duo^ two. 
 
 2. Ordinal Kumu£RS : * primus^ fii*st ; secundus, second. 
 
 3. DiSTKiDUTiVEs ; * singuU^ one by one ; blnl^ two hy two. 
 
 174. Partial Tahle of Numeral Adjectives: 
 
 CARDIXAUS. ORDIXALS. 
 
 1. unus, una, iinum, one primus, ^r«t 
 
 2. duo, iluae, duo, two sccundus, second 
 
 8. trGs, tria, three 
 
 tertius, Udrd 
 
 4. quattuor, /owr 
 
 quartus, fourth 
 
 5. quinque,^re 
 
 quintus, fifth 
 
 6. sex, six 
 
 sextus, sixth 
 
 7. septcm, senen 
 
 Septimus, seventh 
 
 8. octo, eight 
 
 ocUivus, eighth 
 
 0. novcm, nine 
 
 nOnus, ninth 
 
 to. decern, ten 
 
 decimus, tenth 
 
 DISTRIBUTIVES. 
 
 singuH, one by one 
 bini, two by two * 
 terni (trini), three by three 
 quatemi, /our by four 
 quini,/re by five 
 seni, six by six 
 septeni, seven by seven 
 octoni, eight by eight 
 noveni, nine by nine 
 deni, ten by ten 
 
 Declension of Numeral Adjectives. 
 176. UtiuSy Dito, and Tris are declined as follows : 
 
 Unus, 
 
 one. 
 
 
 BIXOULAB. 
 
 
 
 I'LITRAL. 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 unus 
 
 una 
 
 uniun 
 
 Qui 
 
 unae 
 
 una 
 
 Gen. 
 
 iiuius 
 
 uniuB 
 
 unius 
 
 unorum 
 
 uuarum 
 
 unorum 
 
 Dat. 
 
 uni 
 
 uni 
 
 uni 
 
 unis 
 
 unis 
 
 unis 
 
 Ace. 
 
 unum 
 
 iinam 
 
 unum 
 
 unOs 
 
 Onus 
 
 una 
 
 Voc. 
 
 une 
 
 una 
 
 unum 
 
 uni 
 
 unae 
 
 una 
 
 Abl. 
 
 uno 
 
 una 
 
 uno 
 
 anis 
 
 unis 
 
 unis 
 
 
 Duo, two. 
 
 
 
 Tres, three. 
 
 Xom. 
 
 duo 
 
 duae 
 
 duo 
 
 ires, m. 
 
 and f. 
 
 tria, n. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 duorum 
 
 duunim 
 
 duorum* 
 
 trium 
 
 
 trium 
 
 Dat. 
 
 duobus 
 
 duubus 
 
 duobus 
 
 tribus 
 
 
 tribus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 duos, duo 
 
 dufis 
 
 duo 
 
 Ires, iris 
 
 1 
 
 tria 
 
 Voc. 
 
 duo 
 
 duae 
 
 duo 
 
 tnls 
 
 
 tria 
 
 Abl. 
 
 duobus 
 
 duubus 
 
 duobus 
 
 tribus 
 
 
 tribus 
 
 1 Cardinals denote simply the number of objects. Ordinals denote 
 the place of an object in a series. Distributires denote the nximher of 
 objects taken at a time. '^ Or two each, two apiece. 
 
 3 Instead of duorum and duarum, duUni is sometimes used. 
 
NUMERALS. 79 
 
 Note 1. — The plural of uni/s in the sense of alone maybe used 
 with any noun: uni Ubii, the Uhii alone; but in the sense of o/ie, it 
 is usctl only with nouns plural in form, but singular in sense: una 
 castrOj one camp; unae litterae, one letter. 
 
 176. Tlie Cartlinals from quatticor, ' four,' to centum, * one 
 hundred/ are indeclinable. 
 
 177. Hundreds are declined like the plural of homes; 
 dttcentl, ae, a, * two hundred.' 
 
 179. Ordinals are declined like bonus, and distributives 
 like the plural of bonus, 
 
 98. Examples. — Duration of Time. 
 
 1. Caecus annOs multOs fuit. He was blind many years. 
 
 2. TrIgintA annOs vixit He lived thirty yeaks. 
 
 3. Fossa quindecim p«dgs lata. A moat fifteen FEi-n? broad. 
 
 Note. — In these examples obser\'e that annos, * years,' and pedf's, 
 'feet,' are in the Accusatice. This Latin idiom ^ is expressed in the 
 Tollowing 
 
 RULE IX. — Accusative of Time and Space. 
 
 379. Duration of Time and Extent of SrACE 
 
 are expressed by the Accusative : 
 
 Romulus septem et triginta regnavit annos, Bomulus reigned thirty- 
 tcccn YEARS. Llv. Quinque milia passuum arabulare, to walk five 
 wii.KS. Cic. Pedes octoginta distare, to be eighty feet distant. 
 Cues. Nix quattuorpedc« alta, «noio /our FEET deep. Lir, 
 
 99. Vocabulary. 
 
 A, ab, prep. w. abl. from, by. 
 
 Annus, i, m. year. 
 
 Celtae, arum, wi. pi. Celts, a people of Gaul. 
 
 Circiter, adv., and jtrep. w. ace. about. 
 
 f onscribit, he enrols. 
 
 ryrus, i, m. Cyrus, King of Persia. 
 
 Dionysius, ii, m. Dionysius, tyrant of Syracuse. 
 
 I>iio<lorlm, indeclinable, twelve. 
 
 > jigliah tuM the Objective case in the same way. 
 
80 NUMERALS, 
 
 Duodequadraginta, indtcXinaJble^ thirty-eight 
 
 Meridies, ei, mA middai/f noon. 
 
 Oppidum, i, n. town. 
 
 Pars, partis,/. part, 
 
 Suessiones, urn, in. pi. Suessionea^ a Gallic tribe. 
 
 Sustinet, he austainSf withstands, resists. 
 
 Triginta, indeclinalde, thirty. 
 
 Undccimiis, a, um, eleventh. 
 
 Usque, adv. • until, even ; usque ad, evzn to^ 
 
 VC-r, verls, n, spring. [until. 
 
 Vicus, i, m. village, 
 
 100. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Galll trC'8 hdrSs pdgnabant. 2. Nonne fortiter pugnant ? 
 3. Fortiter ))QgnaDt. 4. Circiter meridiem exercitum in 
 eastra redueet. 5. Belgae iinam Galliae partem incolunt. 
 C. Celtae tertiam Galliae partem incolunt. 7. Caesar duas 
 legionGs in Italia conscribit. 8. Tres legiones circum Aquilo- 
 iam hiemabant. 9. Duas legiones in Gallia conscrlpsit.* 10. 
 Legionis nonae milites fortiter pQgnavenint. 11. Duao 
 legiones, fmdecima et octava, fortiter pugnabant. 
 
 12. Legionis decimae milites impetura hostiimi fortiter 
 sustinebant. 13. Legionis octavae milites in conspectu im- 
 peratoris impetum hostium fortiter sustinuerunt. 14. Legio- 
 nes sex eastra muniebant. 15. Milites ab hora quarta usque 
 ad soils occasum fortiter pugnaverunt. 16. Suessiones 
 oppida duodecim habent. 17. Cyrus triginta aunos regna- 
 vit. 18. DionJ^sius duodequadraginta annos tyrannus fuit. 
 
 101. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Numa reigned many years. 2. Did not the Gauls 
 fight bravely? 3. They fought bravely. 4. The boy has 
 thirty books. 5. He will present three to his brother. 6. 
 The legions will attack the tower at sunset. 7. At that 
 time the tenth legion was in Gaul. 8. The soldiers of the 
 
 1 Masculine by exception. ^ Conscripsit = conscrib-sit ; see 76. 
 
PRONOUNS. 81 
 
 tenth legion were brave. 9. Tliey were the bravest of all. 
 10. Two legions will guard the camp. 11. Five legions will 
 fortify the camp with a rampart. 
 
 12. The soldiers were fortifying one part of the village 
 with a very high wall. 13. The commander was awaiting 
 the arrival of two legions. 14. The two consuls enrolled 
 six legions. 15. The soldiers of tw^o legions did not have 
 large experience in military affairs. 16. The enemy fought 
 bravely for ten hours. 17. They held the harbor for five 
 days. 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 102. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 
 182. In construction, Pronouns^ are used either as Sub. 
 stantives : ego^ I, <w, thou ; or as Adjectives: mexis^ my, tuus, 
 your. 
 
 183. Pronouns are divided into six classes : 
 
 1. Personal Pronouns : tH, thou. 
 
 2. Possessive Pronouns : meiis, my. 
 
 3. Demonstrative Pronouns : Afc, this. 
 
 4. Relative Pronouns :^ qu% who. 
 
 5. Interrogative Pronouns : quis^ who ? 
 
 6. Indefinite Pronouns : aliquis, some one. 
 
 I. Personax Pronouns. 
 
 184. Personal Pronouns,* so called because they designate 
 the person of the noun which they represent, are : 
 
 * But in their signification and use, Pronouns differ widely from ordin- 
 ary substantives and adjectives, as tliey never name any object, action, or 
 quality, but simply point out its relation to the speaker, or to some other 
 person or thing. 
 
 * Also called Substaniive Pronouns, because they are always used 
 tubstantively. 
 
82 
 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Ego, I, 
 
 TO, <Aow. 
 
 
 BIKOULAB. 
 
 Nom, ego 
 
 tu 
 
 Gen. niei 
 
 tui 
 
 Dat, mihl or mi 
 
 tibi 
 
 Ace, me 
 
 te 
 
 Foe 
 
 tu 
 
 AbL me 
 
 te 
 
 
 PLUltAU 
 
 Norn, nos 
 
 VOS 
 
 ^^1 nostrum 
 ( nostri 
 
 vestrum 
 
 vestri 
 
 Dat nobis 
 
 vobis 
 
 ylcc. nos 
 
 VOS 
 
 Foe. 
 
 YOS 
 
 AbL ndbis 
 
 vobis 
 
 Sal, of himself, etc.* 
 
 sui* 
 sibi 
 se 
 
 sui 
 
 sib! 
 
 se 
 
 2. Sui, qf himse{fj etc, is often called the Reflexive pronoun. 
 4. Reduplicated Fobms. — Sescy tetej memef for se, (e, me. 
 6. Cum, when used with the ablative of a Personal Pronoun, is 
 appended to it: viecumj tecutn. 
 
 n. Possessive Pronouns, 
 
 185. From Persona/ pronouns are formed the Possessives :'* 
 
 mens, a, um, my; noster, tra, trum, our ; 
 
 tuus, a, um, thy, your ; vester, tra, trum, your ; 
 suus, a, um, his, hers, its ; suus, a, um, their. 
 
 ni. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 186. Demonstrative Pronouns, so called because they 
 s}>ecify the objects to which they refer, are declined as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 1 0/ himself, herself, itself. The Nominative is not nsed. 
 
 * Possessives are declined as adjectives of the first and second declen- 
 sions ; hut meus has in the Vocative Singular Masculine generally mi, 
 sometimes meus, and in the Genitive Plural sometimes meum instead of 
 meorum. 
 

 PRONOUNS. 
 
 
 82 
 
 I. Illf, this^ this one, he. 
 
 
 
 
 
 BlNOlTLAtt. 
 
 
 PLUBAL. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fkm. NKirr. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fbm. 
 
 Nkot. 
 
 tionx, h!c 
 
 haec hoc 
 
 hi 
 
 hae 
 
 haec 
 
 Hen, hiijus 
 
 hujus hiijus 
 
 ho rum 
 
 hfirum 
 
 horum 
 
 J)aU huic 
 
 huic huic 
 
 his 
 
 his 
 
 his 
 
 /Ice. hiinc 
 
 hanc hoc * 
 
 bos 
 
 has 
 
 haec 
 
 AU. hoc 
 
 hue hoc 
 
 his 
 
 his 
 
 his 
 
 II. Iste, thaty t/utt of yours, that one, he. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 I'LUKAL. 
 
 
 
 MASC 
 
 Fem. 
 
 NCUT. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fkm. 
 
 NEOT. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 istc 
 
 ista 
 
 istud 
 
 isti 
 
 istae 
 
 ista 
 
 Gen. 
 
 istlus 
 
 istlus 
 
 istlus 
 
 istorum 
 
 istarum 
 
 istorum 
 
 J)at. 
 
 isti 
 
 isti 
 
 isti 
 
 istis 
 
 istis 
 
 istis 
 
 Ace. 
 
 istum 
 
 istam 
 
 istud 
 
 istos 
 
 isUis 
 
 ista 
 
 Abl. 
 
 isto 
 
 ista 
 
 isto 
 
 istIs 
 
 istis 
 
 istis 
 
 III. Ille, that, that one, he, is declined like iste. 
 
 rV. Is, he, this, that. 
 
 
 
 SINaULAR. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Nedt. 
 
 Mabo. 
 
 Fbm. 
 
 Neot. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 is 
 
 ea 
 
 id 
 
 ei, ii 
 
 eae 
 
 ea 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ejus 
 
 ejus 
 
 ejus 
 
 eorura 
 
 earum 
 
 eorum 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ei 
 
 ei 
 
 Si 
 
 els, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 Ace. 
 
 cum 
 
 earn 
 
 id 
 
 eos 
 
 eas 
 
 ea 
 
 V>1. 
 
 eo 
 
 ea 
 
 eo 
 
 els, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 eis, iis 
 
 V. 
 
 Ipse, 
 
 self, he. 
 
 BlVOVhXK. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 Mam. 
 
 Frm. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neot. 
 
 ::.jin. 
 
 ipse 
 
 ipsa 
 
 ipsum 
 
 ipsi 
 
 ipsae 
 
 ipsa 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ipslus 
 
 ipslus 
 
 ipsTus 
 
 ipsonun 
 
 ipsfmim 
 
 ipsorum 
 
 ^'f^ 
 
 ipsi 
 
 ipsi 
 
 ipsi 
 
 ipsis 
 
 ipsis 
 
 ipsis 
 
 •''. 
 
 ipsum 
 
 ipsam 
 
 ipsum 
 
 ipsos 
 
 ipsas 
 
 ipsa 
 
 - 1 './. 
 
 ipso 
 
 ipsi 
 
 ipso 
 
 ipsis 
 
 ipsis 
 
 ipsis 
 
 > Tlie Vocative Is wanting in Demonstrative, Relative, Interrogative^ 
 aiid Indefinite Pronotins. 
 
84 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 VI. Idem, the same} 
 
 8IXQITLAR. 
 
 Masc Fbm. Nkct. 
 
 Nom. idem eadem idem 
 
 Gen. ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem 
 
 DaU Sidem Sidem eidom 
 
 Ace. eundem eandcm idem 
 
 Ahl. cOtlem eudcm eOdcm 
 
 PLURAI.. 
 Fem. Nkitt. 
 
 caedeiu eadem 
 
 Mam. 
 j eidem 
 1 iidem 
 
 eorundem earandem eurundem 
 
 ( elsdem elsdem eisdem 
 
 ] iisdem ilsdem iisdem 
 
 eosdem eiisdem eadem 
 
 ( eisdem eisdem eistlem 
 
 ( iisdem iisdem iisdem 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 PRONOUNS. — EXERCISES. 
 103. Vocabulary, 
 
 Aeqiiita3, atis,/. 
 Commemorat, 
 Commemorati5, onis,/. 
 Cum, prep. to. ahl. 
 Diligentia, ae,/. 
 Doctus, a, um, 
 UIc, haec, hoc, 
 Hiimuiiitas, atis, /. 
 Ille, ilia, illud. 
 Impedimenta, onim, n. pi. 
 Integritil:, atis, /. 
 Iste, ista, istud, 
 Longiis, a, um, 
 PorUt, 
 
 Que, cor^. enclitiCy^ 
 Semper, adn. 
 Sui, 
 
 kindness^ calmness^ fairness, 
 
 he mentlonsy speaks. 
 
 remembrance, mentioningy mention, 
 
 with, 
 
 diligeneef carefulness, 
 
 learned. 
 
 this, this one, the latter, he, she, it, 
 
 culture, refinement. 
 
 that, that one, the former, he, she, iL 
 
 baggage. 
 
 integrity, uprightness. 
 
 that of yours, that, thatone, he, she, U, 
 
 long. 
 
 fie carries, brings. 
 
 and. 
 
 ahcays. \ofher, of it. 
 
 of himself, of herself, of itself, of him. 
 
 1 Idem, compounded of is and dem, is declined like is, but shortens 
 isdem to idem, and iddem to idem, and changes 7n to n before the ending 
 dem. 
 
 2 Tliat is, it is always appended to some other word : virtus-qve, ' and 
 virtue.' Que connects words that are closely related in thought or use. 
 For conjunctions, see 88, 417, note. 
 
PRONOUNS. 85 
 
 Suus, a, um, his^ her, hers. Us, theirs theirs, his 
 
 oif/i, her own, its own, one^a own, 
 Temporantia, ac,/. temperance, selj-control. 
 
 Turn, adv. then, 
 
 Vocat, he calls^ summons^ invites, 
 
 104. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Caesar Divitiacum ad so vocavit. 2. Exercitiis noster 
 in Gallia hicmabat. 3. Ilostes suam urbem vallo muniebant. 
 4. Gain banc urbem valid fossaque muniebant. 6. Militcs 
 omnia imjxjdimenta secuni portant. 6. Pater tuus epistulam 
 longam ad te scribet. 7. Amicus tuus tres epistulas ad mo 
 Boripsit. 8. Omnes boni v6s sem|>er amabunt. 
 
 9. Omnes te laudant ; omnes de tua humanitate commem- 
 orant ; omnes aequitatem tuam, temperantiam, integrita- 
 temque laudant. 10. Me commemoratiS tuae virtiltis 
 delectavit. 11. Omnes bonI omnem a nobis dlligentiam 
 virtutemque exspectant. 12. Sapientes homines illam clvi- 
 tatem regebant. 13. Doctl homines istam civitatem regimt. 
 14. Doctl et sapientes homines banc civitatem regent. 15. 
 CicerS sua manQ epistulam scripsit (for scnb -sit). 
 
 105. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. The boy praises himself. 2. Many boys praise them- 
 selves. 3. Wise men do not praise themselves. 4. Your 
 father loves you. 5. Does he praise me? 6. He praises you. 
 7. This book is beautiful. 8. These books are new. 9. The 
 queen wrote this letter. 10. That legion was wintering in 
 Italy. 11. Those legions will winter in Gaul. 12. The 
 citizens praise you. 13. All the citizens will praise you. 
 
 14. Wise men will always praise your wisdom. 15. Good 
 men will praise your virtue. 16. Good men will always praise 
 your virtue and wisdom. 17. Your father wrote this letter 
 with his own hand. 18. He has written to me. 19. The con- 
 sul had five legions with him. 20. He was then in Italy. 21. 
 The enemy are fortifying their city with a very high wall. 
 7 
 
86 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 LESSON XXXVL 
 
 PRONOUNS. — UELATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE. 
 106. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 rV. Relative Pronouns. 
 187. The Relative qy\^ 'who,' so called because it relates 
 
 to some noim or pronoun, expres.sed or understood, called its 
 
 antecedent, is declined as follows : 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Maso. Fsm. 
 
 Kkct. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 rKM. 
 
 H«rT. 
 
 Norn, qui quae 
 
 quod 
 
 
 qui 
 
 quae 
 
 quae 
 
 Gen. cujus cujus 
 
 cujus 
 
 
 quorum 
 
 quarura 
 
 quomin 
 
 Bat. cui cui 
 
 cui 
 
 
 qui bus 
 
 quibus 
 
 quibus 
 
 Ace. quein quam 
 
 quod 
 
 
 qiius 
 
 quas 
 
 quae 
 
 AbL quo qua 
 
 quo 
 
 
 quibus 
 
 quibus 
 
 quibus 
 
 1. Qui = quoj quUf *with which,* * wherewith,* is a Locative or 
 Ablative of the relative qui. 
 
 2. Cum^ when used with the Ablative of the relative, is generally 
 appended to it: quibuscum. 
 
 V. Interrogative Pronoitns. 
 
 188. The Interrogative Pronouns quis and (jnily with their 
 compounds, are used in asking questions. They are declined 
 as follows : 
 
 I. Quis, ichOy tchich, tchat? 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 Uasc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Nbut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fmi. 
 
 KruT. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 quis 
 
 quae 
 
 quid 
 
 qui 
 
 quae 
 
 quae 
 
 Gen. 
 
 cujus 
 
 cujus 
 
 cujus 
 
 quorum 
 
 quarum 
 
 qudrura 
 
 Bat. 
 
 cui 
 
 cui 
 
 cui 
 
 quibus 
 
 quibus 
 
 quibus 
 
 Ace. 
 
 quern 
 
 quam 
 
 quid 
 
 quos 
 
 quas 
 
 quae 
 
 AbL 
 
 quo 
 
 qua 
 
 quo 
 
 quibus 
 
 quibus 
 
 quibus 
 
 II. Qui, lehich, tchat ? is declined like the relative qid. 
 
 1. Quis is generally used substantively, and Quf, adjectively. The 
 forms quis and quern are sometimes feminine. 
 
 2. Qui, how? in what way? is a Locative or Ablative of the inter- 
 rogative quis. 
 
PRONOUNS, 87 
 
 VI. Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 189. Indefinite Pronouns do not refer to any definite per- 
 sons or things. Tiie most important are quis and qu'i^ with 
 tiieir compounds. 
 
 190. Quis^ *any one,' and qui, *any one/ *any,' are the 
 ^alne in form and declension as the interrogatives quis and 
 qui. But — 
 
 1. After s?, nisi, ne, and nwrn, the Feminine Singular and Neuter 
 Plural h'Avequae or qua: si quae, si qua. 
 
 2. From quia and qxti are formed — 
 
 aliquis, aliqua, aliquid or aliquod, some, some one. 
 
 quiJam, quaedam, quiddam or quoddam,^ certain, certain one. 
 
 351. An Interrogative Sentence has the form of a 
 qr.estion : 
 
 Quis loquitur, who speaks T Ter. Quis non paupertatem extimescit, 
 who does not fear poterty f Cic. Qualis est oratlo, xchat kind of an 
 oration is it? Cic. Quot sunt, how many are there f Plant. UbI 
 sunt, where are they f Cic. Vlsne fortunam experFri meam, do you 
 wish to try my fortune? Cic. Xonne nobilitiiri volunt, do they not 
 wish to be renowned f Cic. Num igitur peccnmus, are we then at 
 fault? Cic. 
 
 1. Interrogative Words. — Interrogative sentences generally 
 contain some interrogative word — either an interrogative pronoun, 
 adjective, or adverb, or one of the interrogative particles: -ne, noHue, 
 v-m ; see examples above. 
 
 XoTF. 1. — Questions with -ne ask for information; Scribltne, ' is he 
 ting?' 
 
 N'oTK 2. — Questionfl with nonne expect the answer yes: Ndnne scribit, 
 lie not writing?' 
 
 NoTK 3. —Questions with num expect the answer no: Num scribit, 
 'is lie writing?' 
 
 2. Tlie particle -ne is always appended to some other word, gencr- 
 illy to tlic empliatic word of the sentence, i.e. to the word upon which 
 tlie question especially turns; appendetl to non, * not,* it forms uOnnt : 
 
 l^tsne experiri, do you wish to try ? Cic. Tune Id verltus es, did 
 Tou fear this? Cic. Omnisne pecunia solQta est, has all the money 
 
 1 Quhlam cliauxes m to n before d : quendam for quemdam. 
 
88 PRONOUNS, 
 
 been paid ? Cic. Unquamne vldlsti, hate you ever seen f Cic. Nonne 
 volunt, do they not wish f Cic. 
 
 352. Answers. — Instead of replying to a question of fact 
 with a Kimj)le particle meaning yes or no^ the Latin usually 
 repeats the verb or some emi)hatic word, often with proraus^ 
 vera, * certainly/ * truly,' and the like, or if negative, with 
 non, *not.' 
 
 Dixitne causam, did he state the cause f Dixit, he stated it. Cic 
 Possuiuusne tuti esse, can we be safe? Nun possuraus, we can not. 
 Cic. 
 
 353. Double or Disjunctive Questions offer a choice or 
 alternativey and generally take one of the following forms : 
 
 1. The first clause has utrum or -ne, and the second an : 
 
 Utrum ea vestra an nostra culpa est, is that your fault or ours 
 Cic. Komamnc venio an hie uianeO, do I go to Romej or do I remain 
 htref Cic 
 
 2. The first clause omits the particle, and the second has an or 
 anne : 
 
 Eloquar an sileam, shall I utter it, or keep silence? Verg. 
 
 LESSON XXX VIL 
 
 PRONOUNS. — RULE XXXV. — EXERCISES. 
 107. Examples. — Agreement. 
 
 Rox quern omnes laudant. The king whom all praise. 
 
 Regina quani omnes laudant The queen whom all praise. 
 
 li qnOs oumCs laudant. Tliose WH03I all praise. 
 
 Ego ^Ml dicO. / WHO speak. 
 
 Note. — In these examples the pronoim quern refers to reXf called 
 its antecedent, quam to its antecedent regina^ qnbs to its antecedent 
 it, and qui to its antecedent ego. Observe that tlie pronoun in eacli 
 instance is in the same gender and number ^ as its antecedent. Thus 
 
 1 The case, of the pronoun is determined by the construction of the 
 clause in which it stands, and not by the case of its antecedent. Thus in 
 these examples, though the antecedents are all in the Nominative, the 
 pronouns quern, quam, and quos are all in the Accusative as Direct Objects. 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 89 
 
 fuem is in the masculine singular, because rix is in that gender and 
 number; (juam in the feminine singular Ulce regina ; and quba in the 
 mascuhne plural like ii. The pronoun has also the same person as its 
 antecedent. Thus quern, qnam, and quos are all in the third person, 
 like their antecedents rex, rigina, and it, while qui is in the first per- 
 son, like its antecedent ego. This agreement of pronouns with their 
 antecedents applies not only to relatives, but to all pronouns when 
 used as substantives,^ and is eicpresscd in the following 
 
 RULE XXXV. — Agreement of Pronouns. 
 
 445. A pronoun agrees with its antecedent in GEN- 
 
 DF.R, NUMBEPw, and PERSON : 
 
 Animal quod sangulnem habet, an animal which has blood. Cic. 
 Ego, qui te confirmo, / who encourage you. Cic Vis est in vir- 
 tiitibus, eds excitil, there is strength in cirtueSf arouse them. Cic. 
 
 Agit, 
 
 Anna, orum, n. pt, 
 
 Britannia, ae,/. 
 
 Cis, prej). to. ace. 
 
 Constanter, ado. 
 
 Cotfdie, ado. 
 
 Debet, 
 
 Doctrlna, ae,/. 
 
 Ex, e, prep. w. abl. 
 
 Fere, ado. 
 
 Gratia, ae,/. 
 
 Locus, I, »«., pL loca, drum, n. 
 
 Navigat, 
 
 Plat6, onis, m. 
 
 Quidam, quaedam, quiddam or 
 
 quoddam, 
 Reliquus, a, um, 
 Kht'nus, 1, ))i. 
 Supra, adv. 
 Tempus, oris, n. 
 Venetl, Orum, m. pi. 
 
 108. Vocabulary/. 
 
 he leads, drites, does, acts, per- 
 forms, treats, pleads ; gralias 
 arms. [agit, he returns thanks. 
 Britain, 
 on this side of. 
 consistently, uniformly, 
 daily. 
 
 he owes ; he ought, 
 learning, 
 out of, from, of. 
 almost. 
 
 gratitude, favor ; gratiae, pl.^ 
 place. [thanks, 
 
 he navigates, sails. 
 Plato, a celebrated Greek philoso- 
 [phcr. 
 a certain^ certain one. 
 remaining^ the other, the rest of. 
 the Hhine. 
 above, 
 time, 
 the Veneti, a tribe of western Gaul. 
 
 • Pronouns when used as adjectives agree like other adjectives, with 
 the uouua to which they belong, uccurding to 40, Uule XXXIV. 
 
90 PRONOUNS. 
 
 109, Translate iiUo EnrjUsh} 
 
 I. Gain ea loca incolunt. 2. Gall! fortes sunt. 3. Gallic 
 qui* ea loca incolunt, fortes sunt. 4. Gemianl, qui cis Rhenum 
 incolunt, in armis sunt. 5. HostOs urbem,* do qua* 8ui>ra 
 scripsit Caesar, valid fossaque mdniebant. C. Reliciui omnes 
 Belgae in armis erant. 7. Hi constanter omnes idem* nunti- 
 ant. 8. Veneti naves halx?nt multas, quibus* in Britanniam 
 iiavigant. 9. li qui vobis omnia debcnt^ vos semper amabunt. 
 10. Gives nobis grutias cotidic agunt. 
 
 II. Ille* princeps doctrinae, Plato, virtutera et sapientiam 
 laudat. 12. li qui banc civitatem regimt, sapientes sunt. 
 13. Quid dixit? Hoc dixit. 14. Num baec dixerunt? Non 
 dlxerunt.' 15. Omnes fere Belgae in armis fuerunt. 16. 
 ( icero in illo ipso* libro dO amicitia scripsit. 
 
 1. Who was tlie king? 2. Was not* Romulus king? He 
 
 110. Translate into Latin, 
 
 Ibe king? 2. Was not* Romi 
 
 was." 3. Who was the leader of the Romans? Was not 
 
 1 In preparing the longer and more difficult sentences in this and in the 
 subsequent exercises, it is recommended that the pupil should follow the 
 Suggestions which are inserted in this volume, page 200, and which are 
 intended to aid him in discerning the process by which he may most 
 readily and surely reach the meaning of a Latin sentence. 
 
 « For Gender and Number, see 107, Rule XXXV. 
 
 s In reading this sentence in the Latin slowly and attentively, in 
 accordance with Suggestion IV., which words do you recognize? What 
 parts of speech do you find ? Wliat cases, moods, tenses, numbers, and per- 
 soni f What does each case, mood, tense, number, and person show you? 
 
 * Direct Object of nuntiant. 
 
 » Ablative of Means. See 78, Rule XXV. 
 
 * IlUiB often thus used of what is well knowx, famous. 
 
 T Observe that the auxiliaries docs, do, did, are often used in inter- 
 rogative and negative sentences in English, but that no corresponding 
 auxiliaries are used in Latin. Thus, nonne dicit, does he say? non dicit, 
 he does not say. Remember this difference in rendering into Latin, as 
 in 110, 4 and 5, Did not Cicero, etc. f 
 
 « Illo ipso, that very ; ipse is sometimes best rendered very. 
 
 » What Interrogative will you use? See 106, 351, 1, notes. 
 M See 106, 352. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 91 
 
 Caesar the leader of the liomans ? Caesar was the leader of 
 the Hoinans. 4. Did not Cicero write this book? He wrote 
 it, 5. Did he write the book that^ the pupils are reading? 
 He did not write it. Caesar, w^ho conquered the Gauls, wrote 
 that book. 6. Cicero, who wrote these books, was at that 
 time a very renowned orator. 
 
 7. The enemy, about whom Caesar wrote above, were Gauls. 
 8. The Belgae, who were at that time in arms, were the 
 bravest of the Gauls. 9. What did Plato praise ? Did he 
 not praise learning and wisdom? He always i)rai8ed virtue. 
 10. Who has written in regard to friendship? Cicero, the 
 consul, wrote a book in regard to friendship. 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE, AND 
 PRESENT IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, IN CONJUGATIONS I. 
 AND II., AND IN TUB VERB Sum, — RULE XXXVII. 
 
 111. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 
 lOG. The SunjuxcnvE Mood * expresses not an actual fact, 
 but a possibility or conception. It is best translated — 
 
 1. Sometimes by the English auxiliaries, let^ tnay, mijfitf 
 should^ woidd: 
 
 Amemus patriam, let us love our country. Slnt bcuti, may 
 TUEY BE happy. Qnaerat qulspiam, some one may inquire. Tide 
 nimS dixeritt no one would say this. Ego cciwecwn, I should think, 
 i»r/AM inclined to think. 
 
 2. Sometimes by the English LuUcatioe^ especially by the 
 Future forms with shall and will : 
 
 Ilulc ceddmnn, shall we yield to this one? Quid dies /prat 
 incertura est, what a day will brino forth is uncertain, Quaesi- 
 vit si licerct, he inquired vohether it was lawful. 
 
 1 For the Gender, Number and Case of the Latin Pronoun, see 107* 
 Rule XXXV.. and 16, Rule V. 
 
 ^ For the Imperative Hood, sec p. 13, 196, III. 
 
92 INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, IMPERATIVE, 
 
 3. Sometimes by the Imperative^ especially in prohibi- 
 tions : 
 
 Ne traMierU Hiberuni, do not cross the Ebro. 
 
 4. Sometimes by the English Infinitive : * 
 
 Contendit ut tincat, he strives to conquer. Miss! sunt qui eon. 
 sulerent Apollinem, they were sent to consult Apollo, 
 
 112. Examples, — Indicative Mood, 
 
 1. Galll ea loca incoiunt. The QauU inhabit those places, 
 
 2. Hostes urbcm mAniibant, The enemy were fortifying the city. 
 
 Note. — Observe In these examples that the verbs incoiunt, *in- 
 liabit/ and muniebant, * were fortifying,' relate to facts. They are 
 in the Indicatiee Mood,in accordance with the Latin usage,^ ex> 
 pressed in the following 
 
 RULE XXXVII. — IndicatlTe. 
 
 474. Tlie Indicative is used in treating of facts : 
 
 Deus mundum aedificuvit, God made (built) the world. Cic. Nonne 
 expulsus est patria, was he not banished from his country f Cic Hdc 
 feci duiu licuit, / did this as long as it was permitted, Cic 
 
 113. Certain Forms of the Subjunctive and Imjyerative. 
 
 I, In the Verb Sum, lam. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Present. 
 
 
 8W0ULAR. 
 
 iE^k. 
 
 PLURIL. 
 
 6lm, 
 
 may 1 6r, 
 
 slmns, 
 
 let w be. 
 
 Bis, 
 
 mayst thou be. 
 
 situ, 
 
 be ye, may you be. 
 
 Sit, 
 
 let him be^ may he be ; 
 
 siBt, 
 
 let tliem be. 
 
 1 Observe, however, that the Infinitive here is not the translation of the 
 Subjunctive alone, but of the Subjunctive with its subject and connective : 
 ut vincat, to conquer (lit., that lie may conquer) ; qui cdnsulerent, to con- 
 sult (lit., tcho should or would consult). 
 
 3 All the verbs in the preceding Lessons are in the Indicative Mood, 
 and are illustrations of this usage. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE, 
 
 eaaet. 
 
 / sliould bf, 
 thou xcoufJst 6e, 
 he voould be; 
 
 iMrKRFsrr. 
 
 esMCmuM, vie sJiould be^ 
 es««titf, you toould fte, 
 
 Fm. efl, he th*m^ 
 
 Imperativk. 
 
 1 este, 
 
 they voould be^ 
 be ye. 
 
 II. Ill the First Conjugation. 
 
 StJBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Prksknt. 
 
 amem, 
 
 am**, 
 
 amet, 
 
 SINOtTLAR. 
 
 may I hve^ 
 may you love^ 
 lei him love ; 
 
 I 
 
 amenans, 
 am«tls, 
 ament, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Id us love, 
 may you lov«. 
 Id Uicm love. 
 
 
 IlSPKI 
 
 IFECT. 
 
 
 amftrcm, 
 
 ainftr^fi, 
 am&ret. 
 
 I should love, 
 you would love, 
 he u,ould love ; 
 
 Impepj 
 
 amftremit*, 
 
 aniftrCtls, 
 
 amftrent, 
 
 LTIVE. 
 
 ve should love, 
 you tcould love, 
 tliey tcould love. 
 
 iVe«. wnH, 
 
 love Ihou ! 1 
 
 am&te, 
 
 love ye. 
 
 III. In the Second Conjugation. 
 
 BXJBJUNCnVE. 
 
 PRKSKNT. 
 
 May I adviae, let him eulvise. 
 
 8INGUL1IL 
 
 noneam 
 
 inoneAs 
 
 moneat 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 moneamns 
 
 monefttiii 
 
 moneaat 
 
 IlfPERPECT. 
 
 I should advise, lie toould advise. 
 
 moD^rcm 
 xnouCrcf 
 
 monCrCtiift 
 monCreaf 
 
 Imperative, 
 
 Pre%. monfi, advise thou ; \ monCte, 
 
94 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE ACTIVE IN CONJUGA- 
 TIONS I. AND II., AND IN THE VERB Sum. — RULES 
 XXWiU. AND XL. — EXERCISES. 
 
 114. Examples. — Sttbjunctive and Iniperatioe, 
 
 1. Arnhnus patriam. Let us love our country, 
 
 2. Nc audeanL Let them not dakr. 
 S. Sint bcAtl. May they de happy, 
 4. jQsiitiam cole. Puactise justice 
 
 b. Ferge^ Catilina. Go, Catiline. 
 
 7roTE L — In the first three of these examples, ohserve that the 
 verbs amhnus^ audeant, and Hint all express or imply a desire or mjmA 
 on the part of the speaker. These verbs are all in the Subjunctive, 
 ill accordance with the Latin usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE XXXVIII. — Subjunctive of Desire, Command* 
 
 483. The Subjunctive is used to represont the action 
 
 NOT AS REAL, but AS DESIRED : 
 
 Valeant cives, may Ute citizens dk wkli- Cic. Amemus patriam, 
 LET us LOVE OUT countrj/. Cic. A nobis dUigaturj let uim be 
 LOVED by ua. Cic. Scribere ne pigrere, do not neglect to write, 
 Cic 
 
 1. Tlie Sui^unctite qf Desire is often accompanied by utinanij and 
 sometimes, especially in the poets, by utj «i, 6 si : 
 
 Utinam conata efficere possim, may I be able to accomplish my 
 endeavors, Cic Ut illiun di perdant, would that the gods would 
 destroy him. Ter. 
 
 2. Force of Tenses. — The Present and Perfect imply that the 
 wish may be fulfilled; the Imperfect and Pluperfect, that it cannot 
 be fulfillod: 
 
 Sint beati, may they be happy. Cic Ne transierfs Hiberum, do not 
 cross the Ebro. Liv. Utinam possem, utinam potuissem, would that 
 I were able, would that I had been able. Cic. 
 
 3. Negatives. — With the Sul^junctire of Desire, the negative is 
 nCf rarely non; with a connective, nece, new, rarely neque : 
 
IMPERATIVE. 95 
 
 Ne audeant, let them not dare. Cic. Non recedamus, let us not 
 recede. Cic Neve minor neu sit productior, let it be neither shorter 
 nor longer. Hor. 
 
 Note 2. — In the fourth and fifth of the examples at the head of 
 this lesson, observe that the verbs cole and perge both denote a com- 
 mand. They are in the Imperative, iu accordance with the Latin 
 usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE XL. — Imperative. 
 
 487. Tlie Imperative is used iu commands, exhor- 
 tations, and ENTREATIES .* 
 
 Justitiam cole, practise justice. Cic. TQ ne cede malis, do not 
 yield to minfortunes. Verg. Si quid in te peccuvi, Ignosce, if I hate 
 ■tinned against you, pardon inc. Cic 
 
 1. The Pkesent Impeuative corresponds to the Imperative in 
 English: 
 
 Justitiam cole, practise Justice. Cic Perge, Catilina, go, Catiline. 
 Cic 
 
 115. Vbcdbulary, 
 
 Animus, i, m. mind, hearty souL 
 
 Castellum, i, n. redoubL 
 
 Casticus, i, m. Casticus, a chief of the Sequani. 
 
 Confimiat, he strengthens ^ assures, establishes. 
 
 Con jurat, he conspires. 
 
 Fehix, acis, productive, fertile. 
 
 Frumentarius, a, um, pertaining to grain ; res frumentaria, 
 
 Juvat, he aids, helps, assists, [grain, supplies. 
 
 Liltus, a, um, broad, widCy extensive. 
 
 Liber, libera, liberum, free. 
 
 Mens, mentis, /. mind, intellect. 
 
 Paratus, a, um, prepared, ready. 
 
 Pax, pacis,/. peace. 
 
 Perturbat, he disturbs. 
 
 Propior, propius, nearer ; sup. proximus, a, um, nearest, 
 
 Viuis, quae, quid or quod, [next, ai^jacent. 86, ItW. 
 
 indef. pron. one, any one, anything. 
 
 Regnum, i, n. kingdom, regal power. 
 
 Suspicio, onis,/. tutpicion, 
 
 Utlnam, inlerj. O that ! 
 
 Vita*, he avoids, shuns. 
 
96 SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 
 
 116. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Palriara amemus. 2. Pr5 patria pQgnemus. 3. In 
 cdnspeclQ im|>eratori8 fortiter ])Qgiiemu8. 4. Milites in con- 
 spectd imperatoris fortiter pdgnent. 5. MllitOs fortes sint ; 
 fortes simus. 6. Legibus' pareamus. 7. CivOs omnes legi- 
 bus pareant. 8. Palriam amate; legibus parete. 9. Illam 
 urbem oppQgnate. 10. Hanc urbem oppilgnemus. 11. No* 
 Helvetios juvemus. 12. Nd quis Helvetios juvet. 13. 
 Susplcionem vlt^^mus. 14. TiinOris suspIciOnem vltes. 
 15. Omnes suspiciones vita. 16. In* reliquum tempus omnes 
 gusplciones vitemus. 17. Milites castellum oppugnent. 
 
 18. Cum his civitatibus* amicitiara confirmemus. 19. Cum 
 ])rdximis eivitatibus pacem et amicitiam c6n6rmate. 20. In 
 hoc loco adventum hostium exspectcmus. 21. Hostcs in hdo 
 loco adventum Caesarb exspectent. 22. Utinam paratus 
 ad* omnia perTcula sis.* 23. Utinam mllites omnes fortes 
 essent.* 24. Casticus regnum in civitate sua occupct. 25. 
 Ilostium impetum sustine&mus. 26. Utinam timor hostium 
 nientes animosque perturbet. 27. Latos feracesque agros 
 occupemus. 28. Item frOmentariam comparemus. 29. Libera 
 sit Gallia. 30. Ne contra patriam conjuremus. 
 
 117. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Let us praise the brave soldiers. 2. May they all fight 
 bravely for themselves and for their country. 3. Let not 
 fear take possession of our army. 4. Let not fear disturb 
 our minds. 5. Let us await the arrival of our army. 6. Let 
 the soldiers obey the commander. 7. Let them not fear the 
 enemy. 8. Let us not fear the enemy. 9. Let us await 
 them in this place. 
 
 1 For Case, see 54, Rule XII. 
 ^ For tlie Mae of ne rather than iion, see 114, 483, 3. 
 » Literally into ; render for. 
 
 < In accordance with Suggestion XI., for what form will you look in 
 the Vocabulary to find the meaning of eivitatibus? 
 
 « Literally to ; render for. « For the force of Tenses, see 114, 483, 2. 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 
 
 97 
 
 10. Let us aid our friends. 11. Do not aid the enemy. 
 
 I'J. 3Iay all the citizens love their country. 13. May they 
 
 obey all the laws. 14. Let us establish friendship with the 
 
 Koinans. 15. Let the Romans establish peace with the 
 
 auls. 16. Let not the soldiers conspire against the king. 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 I'HESENT AND IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE, AND 
 PRESENT IMPERATIVE ACTIVE, IN CONJUGATIONS 111. 
 AND IV. — RULES XLI. AND XLII. 
 
 118. Certain Forma of the Subjunctive and Imperative. 
 I. In the Third Conjugation. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ma}f Irultf let him rule. 
 
 SINOrLAIt 
 
 
 PLrRAL. 
 
 regain 
 
 
 reg&mas 
 
 rega» 
 
 
 reg&tU 
 
 regat 
 
 
 regant 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 / should ruU^ he vould rule. 
 
 regerem 
 
 
 regerCmva 
 
 reger€» 
 
 
 rcgcrCti!* 
 
 regerct 
 
 
 regcrcnt 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 Prn rcg«, rule thou; I regit e, 
 
 rvleifg. 
 
 II. In the Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 . Pusnrr. 
 
 
 Maif I hear, let him hear 
 
 
 butgular. 
 
 PLinUL. 
 
 Audlam 
 
 audlAmvia 
 
 audUU 
 
 audlatlM 
 
 audlat 
 
 
 audiani 
 
98 SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 
 
 iMPuricr. 
 / ihmid Aeor, he wouU hear. 
 audlrem i audlr«ni«s 
 
 audlre* I au(ilr€ti8 
 
 audlrct | audlrent 
 
 iMFSRAnVJC. 
 
 Prei. audi, fiearth^nu; | audlie, hear jf3, 
 
 119. Examples, — Seqtietice of Tenses. — Subjunctive of 
 
 Purpose, 
 
 1. Nititnr ut vineat, Jle strivee to conquer. 
 
 2. NitCbfltiir ut vinceret. He woe striving to conquer. 
 
 3. Mlttuntiir qiil (=— ut it) cOn- They are sent to consult (wImj 
 
 aulant ApoUincm. luaj consult) Apollo. 
 
 4. Mi!«8l sunt qui cOntulerent They were sent to COVSVLT Apollo, 
 
 Apollinem. 
 
 Note 1. — In these examples observe that after a present tense, as 
 iiititur^ mittuntur^ the verb of the subordinate clause ^ ia also Present^ 
 as tincatf consulant^^ while after a past tense, as nt<e6ci(ur, miMi suntf 
 the verb in the subordinate clause is in the Imperfect^ as vinceret^ 
 eonsulerent.^ Hils adjustment of the tense in the subordinate clause 
 to the tense in the Principal clause * is in accordance with the Latin 
 usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE XLI. — Sequence of Tenses. 
 
 491. Principal tenses depend upon principal tenses ; 
 liistorical upon historical : * 
 
 Nititnr ut vineat, he strircs to eonquer.* Cic. Nem6 erit qui cen- 
 seat, there will be no one who will think.* Cic. Quaesieras nonne 
 
 I For Principal and Subordinate Clnnses, see p. 11, 348, foot note, 
 
 * If the verb in the Subordinate Clause denotes completed action, it 
 must be in the Perfect after a Present tense, and in the Pluperfect after a 
 Past tense. See 492, 2, and 493, 2. 
 
 * For Princijyal and Historical Tenses, see p. 13, 198, 
 
 * The Present Subjunctive generally denotes present time in relation to 
 the principal verb. Accordingly, vineat depending upon the present, 
 nitittir, denotes present time, while censeat depending upon the future, 
 erit, denotes future time. 
 
PURPOSE. 99 
 
 pntiircm, yon had asked vohether I did not think. CIc. Ut lionore 
 dignus essem laboriivi, / strove to be worthy of honor. Cic. 
 
 492. In accoril:ince with this nile, the Subjunctive clopcmlent 
 upon a priuciiNil tense, present, future, future perfect, is put — 
 
 1. In the Pjiesent, to denote incomplete action : 
 
 Quaeritur cur dissentlant, the question is asked, why they disagree. 
 ' ic NeraS erit qui cGnseat, there will be no one who will think. Cic 
 
 2. In the Pekfect, to denote completed action : 
 
 Quaerainus quae vltia f uerint, let us inquire what faults there were. 
 Tic. Rogitubit me ubi fuerim, he will ask me whei-e I have been. 
 Ter. 
 
 493. The Subjunctive dependent upon an historical tonsc, imper- 
 feci, historical perfect, pluperfect, is put — 
 
 1. In the Imperfect, to denote incomplete action : 
 
 Timebam ne evenirent ea, I was fearing that those things would 
 take place (i.e. at some future time). Cic. Quaesierus nOnne putarem, 
 you had inquired whether I did not think (i.e. at tliat time). Cic. 
 
 2. In the Pluperfect, to denote completed action : 
 Themistocles, cum Graeciam llberiisset, expulsus est, Tliemistocles 
 
 'rns banished, though he had liberated Greece. Cic. 
 
 Note 2. — In the examples given above, observe that tlie verbs In 
 the Subordinate clauses, vincat, vinceret, consulant, cunsulerent, all 
 express the purpose of the leading action, lie strives (for what pur- 
 ]>ose ?) that he may conquer or to conquer. They are sent (for what 
 purpose ?) that they may consult Apollo or to consult Apollo. These 
 
 >'rbs are all in the SubjunctivCf in accordance with the Latin usage 
 
 \ pressed in the following 
 
 RULE XLII. - Purpose. 
 
 497. The Subjunctive is used to denote Purpose: 
 I. Witli the relative qui, and with relative adverbs, as 
 
 ubi, undo, etc. : 
 
 Missi sunt qui (=>ut it) consulerent Apollinem, they were sent to 
 
 ■ "XSULT Apollo (who should, or that they should). Nep. MissI stmt 
 - lecti qui Thermopylas occuparent, picked men were sent ro take 
 
 PossKssiON OF Thermopylae. Nep. I)omum, ubi habituret, legit, 
 
 he selected a house where he might dwell (that he might dwell in it). 
 
 lie. 
 
100 PURPOSE. 
 
 II. With ut, nS, quo, quominus : 
 
 £nltitur ut rmcat, he Biritea that hk may cosqrr.u. CIc. Punit 
 nC peccetuTf he punishes that critne may not iik committed. Sen. 
 Legum idcirco servi sumtis, ut liberi esse possimus, we are servants of 
 the law for this reason^ that we may be free, Cic Medico dare quo 
 sit studiosior, to gite to tlie physician, that (by this means) he may be 
 more attentive, Cic. N6n recusavit quomiuus poenam subiret, he did 
 not r^use to submit to punishtnent, Nep. 
 
 498. Clauses of Purpose readily pass into Object Clau^esy^ 
 but they still retain the Subjunctive. 
 
 Opto ut id audititis, / desire (pray) that you may hear this. Cic. 
 Senris iniperat ut filiam defendant, he commands his servants to 
 d^end his dawjhter. Cic. Contendit ut vincat, he strive* to eon* 
 quer, Cic 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE ACTIVE IN CONJUGA- 
 TIONS lU. AND IV. — EXERCISES. 
 
 120. Vocabulary, 
 
 Adducit, he leads to, 
 
 Cognuscit, he ascertains. 
 
 Colloquium, ii, n. conversation, conference, interview, 
 
 Deducit, he leads forth, conducts, 
 
 Equildtus, us, m, cavalry. 
 
 Imperat, tr. datire. he orders, gives orders to. 
 
 Iinplorat, he implores, 
 
 Intellegit, he understands, 
 
 Mulier, eris,/. wotnan, 
 
 Nuntius, ii, m, messenger; tidings. 
 
 Obses, idis, m. andf. hostage. 
 
 Pedes, itis, ni. foot-soldier; pi. foot-soldiers, infantry. 
 
 Pedius, ii, in. Pedius, a lieutenant in Caesar's army. 
 
 Populus, i, m. people. 
 
 ' An Object Clanse is one which has become virtually the object of a 
 verb. TIius, in *optd ut id audidtis,' the clause ut id audiatis has become 
 the object of opto, * I desire.' 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 101 
 
 rostulat. 
 
 he demands. 
 
 Keddit, 
 
 he gives back^ returns. 
 
 Remanet, 
 
 he remains. 
 
 Kogat, 
 
 he asks. 
 
 Romanus, a, urn, 
 
 Roman. 
 
 Trudit, 
 
 he gives u|), surrenders. 
 
 121. I'ranslate into English. 
 
 tl. Milites timoris susplcionem vitent. 2. Milites ut timo- 
 ris susplcionem vitent^ in acie remanent. 3. Ut timoris 
 susplcionem vitarent remanObant. 4. Suam urbem valid 
 fossaque muniant. 5. Ilunc locum altissimo^ muro munite. 
 6. Ilelvetii proximas cTvitates rogant ut se juvent.* 7. 
 Kogabant ut se juvarent.* 8. Noster equitatus hostium 
 impetum sustineat. 9. Caesar equitatum, qui sustineret* 
 hostium impetum, misit.* 10. Haec intellegatis. 11. Haec 
 ut intellegatis, audlte Romanos milites. 12. Cum populo 
 Romano pacem confirment. 
 
 13. Castra vallo munite. 14. Mllitibus imperavit ut 
 castra vallo munlrent.* 15. LegatI haec dicant. 16. Galli 
 lOgatos mittent qui haec dicant. 17. Haec cognoscite. 18. 
 Gallis imperabat ut haec cognoscerent. 19. Mulieres 
 jtatrC'S suos implorabant no sO Romanis traderent. 20. 
 Caesar no quem poditem ad colloquium addilcat. 21. 
 Ariovistus jK)stulavit ne quem peditem ad colloquium 
 Caesar addQceret.* 22. Caesar postulavit ut Ariovistus 
 obsides redderet. 23. Caesar duas legiones conscrlpsit, et 
 Pedium misit qui eas in Galliam deduceret.' 
 
 1 Subjunctive of Purpose. See 110, Rule XLII. 
 
 ' In accordance with Suggestion XI., for what form will you look in 
 the Vocabulary to find the meaning of altissimo? See 86, H2. 
 
 * Why juvent in one case, and juvarent in the other ? See lid, 4!)2 
 and 4!W. 
 
 < See Suggestion XVII., 3; misit, sent, tlio perfect of mittit. 
 
 * Ut . . . minirent, an Object Clause. See 110, 498. 
 
 L* AV . . . addHceret. See 110, 408. 
 » For Sfifod, see 110, 4:i7, I.; for Tra/wfafion, see Suggestion XVII., 3. 
 
1U2 BE8ULT. 
 
 122. Translate into Latin, 
 
 I. Let us fortify this city with a high wall.* 2. Fortify 
 your cities with moats and walls. 3. He hnplores you to 
 fortify* the city with a very high wall. 4. Let us hear the 
 words of the lieutenant. 5. The soldiers will remain to 
 hear* the words of the lieutenant. C. Let the soldiers 
 remain to hear the words of the king. 7. The soldiers 
 remained • to hear the words of Caesar. 8. Let us lead the 
 army back into camp. 0. Let us enrol three legions in 
 Gaul. 10. The commander will send five legions to with- 
 stand * the attacks of the enemy. 
 
 II. lie sent three legions to withstand the attack of the 
 enemy. 12. Let him not announce our plans to the enemy. 
 13. Will he not send a messenger to announce these things 
 to Caesar? 14. Listen to me {hear me) that you may under- 
 stand these things. 15. Caesar demanded that the Germans 
 should not remain in Gaul.* 16. The soldiers remained in 
 the city that they might fortify it. 17. He asked us to 
 help you. 18. They demand that you listen to our words.^ 
 19. Ariovistus demanded that Caesar should not help the 
 Gauls. 20. They asked Caesar not to give them up to the 
 Germans. 
 
 LESSON XLII. 
 
 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE. — 
 RULE XLII I. 
 
 123. Examples. — Stibjunctive in Clauses of liesidt. 
 
 1. K6n is sum qui (= ut ego) I am not stich a one as TO USE 
 
 his utar. these things. 
 
 2. Ita vixit ut esset carissimus. He so lived that he was most dear. 
 
 1 In Latin, use the ^6;attre of Meant. See 78, Rule XXV. 
 
 * Use ut with the Subjunctive. 
 
 « Or were remaining ; use the imperfect 
 
 * Use the Relative with the Subjunctive. 
 
 » That . . . in Gaul, an Object Clause ; see 119, 408. 
 
RESULT. 103 
 
 Note. — In these examples observe that the Subordinate verbs, 
 Hiiarf esset, express the Result of what is stated in tlie principal clause. 
 They are in tlie Suhjunctice in accordance with the Latin usage ex- 
 pressed in tlie following 
 
 RULE XLIII. - Result. 
 
 500. The Subjunctive is used to denote Result: 
 
 I. With the relative qui, and with relative adverbs, as 
 ubi, unde, cur, etc. ; 
 
 NOn is sum qui (= tit ego) his utar,^ I am not such aonc as to use 
 these things. Cic. Innocentia est adfectio talis animi, quae (= ut ea) 
 noceai nemini,' innocence is such a state of mind aa INJUAES no one, 
 Cic. 
 
 IT. With ut, Ut n5n, quin: 
 
 Ita vlxlt ut Athenid-nsibus esset carlsslmus, he so lited that he was 
 cwy dear to the Athenians. Nep. Ita laudo, ut nou peitiinescain, I 
 90 praise as not to feab.^ Cic. 
 
 601. Clauses of Result readily pass into Substantive 
 Clauses^ but thoy still retain the Subjunctive. Thus the 
 Subjunctive is used — 
 
 T. In Subject Clauses: 
 
 Fit ut quisque di-lectetur, it happens that every one is delighted. 
 Cic Sequitur ut falsum sit, it follows that it is false. Cic. ^ 
 
 II. In 6njECT Clauses: 
 
 Sol cfRcit ut omnia flOreant, the sun causes all things to bloom 
 (i. e., produces that result). Cic. 
 
 503. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses to 
 characterize an Imlejinite or General Antecedent: 
 
 Quid est qiiod te delectare possit, what is there which can delight 
 you t Cic. Sunt qui putent, there are some who think. Cic Nemd 
 est qui nOn cupiat, there is no one who does not desire. Cic 
 
 I Is 9 rfi. literally, A««e/io»'* such Uiat I.* Tali* quae, literally, twdk 
 which = ' Ruch that it.* 
 « Or that I du not fear. 
 
104 RESULT. 
 
 124. Vocabulary, 
 
 Barbarus, a, uni, barbarous^ rude. 
 
 Cominovet, he moveSf disturbs. 
 
 Coinpellit, he dr'tcea. 
 
 Coiiiplures, plura or pluria, very many^ many, several, 
 
 Condonat, he condones, pardons, forylvcs, 
 
 Confligit, he contends, fights, 
 
 Contendit, 134, foot-note 2. he hastens, goes in haste. 
 
 Contiiiet, he restrains, retains, confines, keeps 
 
 Eques, itis, m. horseman ; jH. horsemen, cavalry. 
 
 Finis, Is, m. andf,^ end, limit ; fines, pi. m. boundaries-^ 
 
 Injuria, ae,/. injury, wrong, [territory, 
 
 Ita, adv, so, in such a way, 
 
 Littera, ae, /. letter, letter of the alphabet ; Htterae. 
 
 pi., letters ; a letter, epistle. 
 
 Periculum, i, n, peril, danger, 
 
 Proliibet, he prohibits, checks, prevents, keeps, 
 
 Scit, 4, he knows. 
 
 Silva, ae,/. wood, forest, 
 
 Tara, ado, so, to such an extent, 
 
 Tantus, a, nin, so great, 
 
 TcuipesUis, alis,/. weather; tempest, storm, 
 
 125. Translate into English, 
 
 I. MilitOs omnes fortissime pilgnabant. 2. Tanta militum 
 virtus fuit ut omnes fortissime pQgnarent. 3. Timor mag- 
 nus omnem cxercitum occupavit, 4. Timor raagnus mentes 
 militum omnium perturbabat. 5. Omnium mentes auimos- 
 quc perturbavit. 6. Tantus timor omnem exereitum occu- 
 pavit ut omnium mentes animosque perturbaret. 7. Caesar 
 non is fuit qui hostes timuret.' 8. Erant tempestates quae 
 nostros' in castris continerent. 9. Tempestates hostera a 
 pugna probibuenmt. 10. Erant complures dies* tempes- 
 tates quae hostem a pugna prohiberent. 
 
 II. Ariovistus non tam barbarus fuit ut haec non sciret. 
 12. Hi nuntii Caesarem ita commovent ut castra vallo fos- 
 
 ' Decline like ignis, page 54. ' See 123, 500. 
 
 • Lit., our, ours ; render our men; a Possessive used substantively. 
 
 * Accusative of Duration of Time. See 98, Eule IX. 
 
RESULT, 105 
 
 B&que mflniat. 13. Hi n until littcracquc Caesarcm ita 
 commovcnt ut in fines Belgarum contendat. 14. Equitus 
 hostium cum cquitutu nostru ita conlllgunt ut nostrl* eos in 
 silvas coinpellant. 15. Tanta DivitiacI apud Caesarcm 
 gratia fuit ut injuriam condOnaret. IG. Utinam in reliquum 
 tempus timoris 8usi)icionem vitetis. 17. Imperator sex 
 legiones misit quae banc urbem oppugnarent. 18. Utinam 
 bae civitates in amiis cssent. 19. Utinam omnes milites 
 nostri fortiter pugnarent. 
 
 126. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Our soldiers fought so bravely that they conquered* the 
 enemy. 2. The courage of our soldiei-s is so great that they 
 always fight bravely, and withstand all the attacks of the 
 enemy. 3. They are not so barbarous as not to help {that 
 they do not help) their friends. 4. lie is not one who {that 
 one who) would announce our counsels to the enemy. 5. 
 So great fear took possession of the commander that he led 
 the army back into camp. 6. So great fear took possession 
 of the Gauls that they fortified their camp with a moat 
 and a rampart. 
 
 7. The fear of the enemy was so great that they gave up the 
 hostages. 8. The soldiers of the tenth legion were so brave 
 that they did not fear the enemy. 9. Our soldiers are po brave 
 that they are i)repared for' all dangers. 10. Fear so dis- 
 
 iibs your minds that you do not listen to {hear) roe. 11. 
 i'or* the future let us avoid all suspicions. VI, For the 
 future our soldiers will fight so bravely tliat they will avoid 
 suspicion of fear. 13. Would that all our citizens were in 
 arms. 14. The enemy sent a large army to assault 
 our city. 
 
 1 Seo foot-note 2. page lOt. 
 
 « What Mood will you use In I^tln ? See 123, Rule XLIIL 
 
 ■ Use ad. See 116, fool-note on ad. 
 
 * Use in. See 110, foot-uote ou in. 
 
106 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 LESSON XLIir. 
 
 PUESENT AND IMrEUFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE. — 
 KULE LV. 
 
 127. Examples, — Indirect Questions, 
 
 1. QiKieris cur disseniiant. You ask why they disagree. 
 
 2. Qu:icsivit salvusne essei cUpeus, He asked wiietiieu iiis shield 
 
 WAS SAFE. 
 
 Note. — In these examples observe that the Subordinate clauses 
 cur dissentianty * why they disagree,' * and salcusne esset clipeits, 
 'whether the (his) shield was safe,'* Involve questions without di- 
 rectly asking them. Such clauses are called Indirect Questions. The 
 verbs in these Indirect Questions are in the Subjunctive, in accordance 
 with the Latin usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE LV. — Moods in Indirect Clauses. 
 
 529. The Subjunctive is used — 
 
 I. In indirect questions: 
 
 Quaeritur, cur doctisslml homines dissentiant, it is a question, why 
 the most learned men disagree. Cic. Quaesieras, nonne putarem, you 
 had asked ichether I did not think. Cic. Quulis sit animus, animus 
 nescit, the soul knoics not what the soul is. Cic. Quid dies ferat incer- 
 tum est, what a day will br in j forth is uncertain. Cic. 
 
 II. Often in clauses dependent upon an Infinitive or upon 
 another Subjunctive; 
 
 Nihil indfgnius est quam eum qui culpa careat supplicio non carere, 
 nothing is more shameful than that he who is free /rom fault should 
 not be exempt from punishment. Cic. Vereor ne, dum minuere velim, 
 labOrem, augeam, I fear that while I wish to diminish the labor, I 
 shall incre<tse it. Cic. 
 
 3. Indirect double questions are generally Introduced by the same 
 interrogative particles as are direct double questions (106, 353). 
 
 1 The Indirect qnestion. ciir dissentiant, involves the Direct qnestion, 
 Ciir dissentivnt ? * why do they disagree ? ' Salvvsne esset clipeits involves 
 the Direct question : Salvusne est clipeus? * is the shield safe ? ' 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 
 107 
 
 Thus Ihey generally take xttrum or -ne in the first member, and an in 
 Ihe second : 
 
 Quaeritur virtus suamne propter dignilutem an propter fruetus 
 aliquos expetatur, it ia naked whether virtue ia aouyht for its own 
 worth, or for certain adoantayea. Cic 
 
 128. Vocabulary. 
 
 Arar, aris,i m. 
 
 Atque, conj. 
 
 Captivus, i, in. 
 
 Cond licit, 
 
 Decertat, 
 
 Fluit, 
 
 Gerit, 
 
 Igitur, conj. 
 
 Interior,'' us, 
 
 Judicat, 
 
 01), prep. w. ace. 
 
 Onicium, ii, n. 
 
 Proclium, il, n. 
 
 Pudor, oris, Mi. 
 
 Quaerit, 
 
 Quantus, a, urn, 
 
 Quot, indeclinable^ 
 
 KeiuT, Oruin, m. pi. 
 
 Uler, tra, truiu, 45, 151. 
 
 Valet, 
 
 the Arar, a river in southeastern Gaul, 
 
 and. (the modem Saone. 
 
 captive. 
 
 he leads together^ brings together. 
 
 he contends, struggles, fights. 
 
 itfiows. 
 
 he carries on, does, loages. 
 
 iher^ore. 
 
 interior, inner. 
 
 he judges. 
 
 on account of, for. 
 
 duty. 
 
 battle, engagement. 
 
 shame, respect. 
 
 he inquires, asks, seeks. 
 
 how great. 
 
 how many. 
 
 The Remi, a tribe of northern Gaul. 
 
 which {of two). [ence. 
 
 he atails, prevails, has force or ii\flu' 
 
 129. Translate into Hjifflish. 
 
 1. Quae cTvitatCs in arnnis sunt ? Ab his legatls quaerit 
 quae civitates in armls sint.' *2. Quae clvitates quanlaeque* 
 in armls sunt ? Ab his quaerebat quae civitates quantaeque 
 in armTs essent. 3. Quid dicit ArioviKtus? Quid dicat 
 Ariovistus cognoscite. His l(?gatl8 imperavit ut, quid diceret 
 
 1 AccQsative Ararem or Ararim, Ablative Ararc or Arari. 
 < See 80. 1G6. 
 
 ■ Quae . . . sint, an Indirect Question. THiat would be the Direct 
 Qttrxtion f For Translation, see Suf^gestion XVII ., 2. 
 ^ Quantaeque, composed o£ quaatac and the conjuuction que, 'and.* 
 
108 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Ariovistus, cogndsccrent. 4. In utram partem* fluit Arar? 
 Ill utram j)artem fluat Arar judicemus. 
 
 5. Quam ob rem^Ariovistus proelio non decertat ? Caesar 
 ex captlvls quaerebat quam ob rem Ariovistus proelio non 
 dOcertaret. 6. Omnem exercitum in Qnum locum condQca- 
 mus. 7. Nonno pudor apud vos valet? Num apud vos 
 timor valet? Utnim apud vos pudor atque oflicium an 
 timor valet? Intellegumus utrum apud vos pudor atque 
 ofiicium an timor valeat. 8. Quid gerunt Belgac ? 9. Quid 
 gerObant Belgae ? Imj)ertttor sciebat quid gererent Belgae. 
 10. TrOs legioncs igitur in interiorem Galliam mittat. 
 
 130. TranslaU into Latin. 
 
 1. For what reason are the Gauls fortifying their cities? 
 Let us ascertain for what reason the Gauls are fortifying* 
 their camp. 2. Let us inquire of •the ambassadors how many 
 Germans there are in Gaul. 8. Caesar knew how many Ger- 
 mans there were in Gaul. 4. Let us inquire of the captives 
 how many states of Gaul are in arms. 5. Did Caesar know* 
 how many states of Gaul were in arms? He knew* which 
 states were in arms. 6. Inquire in which direction the 
 Khine flows. 
 
 7. Caesar knew how large the states of Gaul were. Did 
 he then know how brave the Belgians were ? He knew who 
 were tlie bravest of all the Gauls. 8. The Gauls did * not 
 understand who their enemies were. So great fear took 
 ))ossession of the Gauls that they did not uuderstand who 
 their enemies were.' 9. lie inquired of the captives into 
 what place Ariovistus was leading his anny.« 
 
 1 Partem^ lit. part; render direction; rem, lit. thing; render reatton. 
 « What Mood will you use in Latin ? See 127, 529, I. 
 ■ Or from ; render by ab. This preposition has the form ab before 
 vowels and h ; the form a or ab before the other letters. 
 
 * What Tense will you use? See 129, 9. 
 
 * Did not understand, continued action like sciebat in 120, 9; inquired, 
 i. e., repeatedly = tra« inquiring, as in 120, 2. 
 
 « For Moods, see 123, Rule XLIII., and 127. Rule LV. 
 
INFINITIVE. 109 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 PRESENT INFINITIVE ACTIVE. — RULE LVI. 
 
 131. The Present Infinitive'^ of the verb Sum is eaae^ *to 
 6e.' In the four conjugations, the Present Infinitive Active 
 has the following 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 Cox J. I. Coxj. II. Cox J. II L Coxj. IV. 
 
 are, ere, ere, Ire. 
 
 PsESENT Infinitive Active. 
 
 First conjugation^ amftre, to love. 
 
 Second eojijugation^ monCre, to advite. 
 
 Third eonjugatioUy rcgcrc, to rule. 
 
 Fourth conjuffcUiortf audlre, to hear. 
 
 Verb sum, esse, to be, 
 
 132. Uxan^yles. — Infinitive. 
 
 1. II:icc vUCire cupit lie desires TO AVOID these things. 
 
 2. Vincere scit. He knows how TO CONQUEU. 
 
 3. Gestiunt scire omnia. They long to know all things. 
 
 Note. — In tliese examples obsei-ve that ti(dre depends upon the 
 verb cupit, * he desires to avoid,' vincere upon scit, and scire upon 
 gestiunt. They are all in the infinitive, in accordance with the Latin 
 usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE LVI. — Infinitive. 
 
 533. Many verbs admit an Infinitive to complete or 
 qualify their meaning: 
 
 Audeo dicere, J dare say (I venture to say). Cic. Ilaec vitire 
 cupimus, tee desire to avoid these things. Cic. Constituit non pro- 
 gredi, he decided not to advance. Caes. Creduli esse coeperunt, they 
 began to be credulous. Cic. Vincere scTs, yon know how to con- 
 quer (you know to conquer). Li v. Yictdria uti nescis, you do not 
 know how to use victory. LIv. 
 
 1 For the ItyfinlHte, see p. 14, 200. 1. 
 
110 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 133. In the Irregular verb Possum, * I am able,' a com- 
 pouiul of tSion,^ the third person in the sinr/ular and plural 
 of tlie present, imperfect, future, and perfect of the indica- 
 tioe has the following: forms: 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 Pret. potest, he i$ Me ; 
 Imp. potorat, he vhu able ; 
 Fut. potcrit, he trill be able ; 
 Fer/. potult, he hae been able ; 
 
 134. T 
 Altitude fnis, /. 
 Autem, coi\}.^ foot-note p. 310. 
 Citerior, ius, 80, 100, 
 
 Cdgit, 
 
 Comportat, 
 
 Constiluit, pres. and perfect,'^ 
 
 Diu, diutlus, diuttssiiue, ade. 
 
 DubiUt, 
 
 Expugnat, 
 
 Frumentuin, i, n. 
 
 Ibl, adv. 
 
 luHa, ae, /. 
 
 I^titudo, Inis, /. 
 
 Muturat, xcith ii\finilice^ 
 
 Pes, pedis, m. 
 
 Potest, 
 
 Propter, prep. to. ace, 
 
 Renovat, 
 
 Vastat, 
 
 Venetia, ae, /. 
 
 Vero, adv. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 powmat, they are able. 
 potcnuiC, they were able. 
 potomnt, they vfill he able. 
 potu^rant, they have been able, 
 
 'ocahulary, 
 
 hrUjhtf depth. 
 
 but. 
 
 nearer; citerior Gallia, Cimlpine 
 Gaul, Gaul south of tlie Alps. 
 
 he drives together^ brings together, 
 collects; he forces,. compels. 
 
 he brings together, gathers. 
 
 he determines, has determined, de- 
 termined, 
 
 for a long time, 
 
 he hesitates, doubts. 
 
 he takes by storm, 
 
 grain, 
 
 there. 
 
 Italy. 
 
 xeidth, thickness, 
 
 he hastens.* 
 
 foot. 
 
 he is able, can, 
 
 on account of. 
 
 he renews. 
 
 he lays waste. 
 
 Venetia, the country of the VenetL 
 
 in truth, indeed ; as conj., but. 
 
 1 Compounded of potifi, ' able,' and sum, ' I am.' 
 
 3 In a few verbs the third person singular has the same form in the 
 perfect as in the present. Thus constituit m the present tense means he 
 determines ; in the perfect, he has determined, or he determined. Con- 
 tends, 124, is also either present or perfect. 
 
 » Thus d'lcere malurat, he hastens to write. 
 
INFINITIVE. HI 
 
 135. Translate into Enc/Ush, 
 
 1. Caesar liuc o])i)iclum propter latitudinem fossae milrlque 
 altitQdiuem cxpugnare nOu poterat. 2. Ilostes iinpetum uos- 
 trorum milituin diutius sustinere non poterant. 3. Galli 
 adveiituin KOinanOium ibl exspectui-e constituerunt. 4. 
 Mllites omnia impedimenta secura* portare debent. 5. Mlli- 
 les sesG* diutius sustinere non poterant. G. Caesar autera 
 castra in altitiidinem pedum* duodecim vallo munlre con- 
 stituit. 7. Imperator banc iirbem magnam oi>pagnarc non 
 dubitavit. 
 
 8. Imperator hunc locum altissimo muro milnlre debet. 9. 
 Venetl constituerunt oi)pida munlre, frumenta ex agrls in 
 op])ida comportare, naves in Venetiam cogere. 10. Turn 
 vero Caesar manus* magnas cogere constituit. 11. Galli 
 multis de causis bellum renovare constituerunt. 12. Roman! 
 agros nostros vastare non debent. 13. Imperator duas 
 legiones in citeriore Gallia conscribere maturavit. 14. IIos- 
 tr*s omnem exercitum in unum locum conducerc maturave- 
 nuit. 
 
 136. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Are the enemy able to take our city by storm? They 
 can {are able to) attack the city, but on account of the valor 
 of the citizens, and the height of the wall, they cannot take 
 it by storm. 2. Caesar hastened to fortify l)is camp. 3. 
 The soldiers determined to remain and avoid suspicion of 
 fear. 4. The Romans determined to fortify their camp with 
 a rampart. 5. They determined to enrol five legions in 
 Italy. G. Were the Helvetii able to take their grain with 
 them.* They were not able to take all their grain with 
 tliem. 
 
 > Observe that the preposition cum is appended to the pronoun si-. See 
 102. 184. G. 
 
 « licdiiplicated form o( the pronoun. See 102, 184, 4. 
 
 • Construe with vatto. * See 04, and 1U2, 184, 6. 
 
112 RE A DING A T SIGHT. 
 
 7. The enemy are so brave that they do not hesitate' to 
 renew the war. 8. Ought not the commander to ascertain 
 what states are in arms?* He has not been able to ascer- 
 tain what states are in arms. 9. The enemy will not be able 
 to sustain the attacks of our soldiers. 10. The citizens did 
 not hesitate to remain in Italy. 11. Let not the commander 
 hesitate to fortify the city with a high wall. 12. The sol- 
 diers ought not to hesitate to remain in line, that they may 
 avoid suspicion of fear. 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 READING AT SIGHT. — DIRECTIONS. — EXERCISE. 
 
 137. Directions for Reading at Sight. 
 
 I. Read at Sight in the Latin, slowly and attentively, 
 the entire i)ass.nge that is assigned for the exercise. In this 
 reading 
 
 1. Remember that the full and exact meaning of an in. 
 fleeted word contains two dbtinct elements. 
 
 1) The general meaning of the word, without reference to 
 ca^e, number^ mood, tense, etc., that is, the meaning of the 
 STEM. See 11, 46. 
 
 2) The meaning of the endings which mark case, tnwiber, 
 mood, tense, etc., that is, the meaning of the suffixes. 
 
 2. Recall as vividly as )K)ssible the exact meaning of all 
 the words which you recognize. 
 
 3. Notice carefully the ending of each word, and thus de- 
 tei-mine which words are nouns, which verbs, etc. 
 
 4. Determine from these endings ca^e, number, voice, 
 mood, tense, etc., and endeavor to recall the exact force of 
 each. 
 
 1 What Mood will you xise in rendering into Latin ? See 123, 500, II 
 * By what Mood will you render arc f See 127. 529, 1. 
 
READING AT SIGHT. 113 
 
 0. In Complex and Comi)ound Sentences, observe carefully 
 the relation of the clauses to one another, and determine 
 which are 7>n;iCi/>aZ,* and which are subordinate} Remem- 
 ber that a clause introduced by a conjunction meaning ajul^ 
 or, butj tJierefore^ adds a new thought, while a clause intro- 
 duced by a conjunction meaning ichen^ svice, etc., only ex- 
 plains or modifies some other clause. 
 
 II. Having by this first reading acquired a good general 
 idea of the entire passage, read a second time with the same 
 care. If in this reading, any word should appear unfamiliar, 
 endeavor to recall some passage in which you have previ- 
 ously met it. Be not hasty in turning to the passage, but 
 use the knowledge which you already possess. As a last 
 re&ort, if you fail to recall the word, turn to the vocabulary 
 for it, and make yourself so familiar with it, that you will 
 always recognize it in fu'.ure. 
 
 III. Having by these two readings thoroughly mastered 
 the entire passage, read the Latin aloud tw^o or three times, 
 for the imi)ortant purpose of appreciating and enjoying the 
 thought in its original foi-m. By this practice the Latin will 
 become, in time, a second vernacular, and you will enjoy 
 reading a fine passage in Latin as you would enjoy reading 
 one in English. 
 
 IV. After having thus read and examined the Latin, write 
 a translation* of the passage in good idiomatic English. 
 
 138. Jiead at Siyht^ examine carefnUij, and translate into 
 English} , 
 
 Omnes fere Belgae contra jwpulum Romanum conjQrave- 
 nmt. Caesar igitur duaa legiones in citeriore Gallia con- 
 
 1 On Principal and Subordinate Cla»$^$t see p. 11. 348, notes. 
 
 2 On Translation, («ee Su^ii^efltions XIT, to XIX. 
 
 « It is hoped that the pupil will enter upon this exercise with the deter- 
 mination to master it without help from any source. He has already had 
 In previous lessons crcry tcord and rrery rottstruction contained in it. Tlio 
 
1 
 
 114 READING AT SIGHT. 
 
 ■cripsit et in intcriorem Gnlliam qui dcdflceret Pedium 
 legatum mlsit. Ipse postea ad exercitum contendit et Gallis 
 imperavit ut quid Belgae gcrerent cognoscerent. Hi con- 
 stantcr omnes lulntiavcrunt : " Belgae manu? magnas cogunt, 
 et omnem exercitum in Qiium locum condQcuiit." Turn vero 
 Caesar rem frflmentariam comparavit et ad fines Belgarum 
 contendit. RemI autem qui iion in armis erant, ad eum 
 legates miseruut qui cum populo Romano pucem et amicitiam 
 confirniarent, ct diccrciit : " Relitjul onuies Belgae iu armIs 
 sunt." 
 
 139. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. The Remi did not conspire against the Roman people. 
 All the rest of the Belgae did not hesitate to conspire against 
 the Romans. 2. Caesar enrolled many legions in Italy and 
 Gaul. He determined to send a lieutenant to conduct^ two 
 legions into the interior of Gaul. 3. The Reml hastened to 
 establish jxyace and friendship with the Roman people. They 
 will announce to the Romans what the rest of the Belgae 
 are doing. 
 
 4. Caesar determined to hasten to the army and to ascer- 
 tain what the Gauls were doing. 6. The tidings so disturbed 
 the commander that he hastened^ to enrol soldiers and to 
 fortify his camp. 6. I^t us prepare supplies of grain and 
 hasten* toward the territory of the enemy. 7. Caesar 
 ordered Pedius, the lieutenant, to conduct the legions into 
 Gaul. 8. The Belgae determined to collect large bands of 
 men. 9^ The commander determined to send five legions 
 to withstand * the attack of the enemy. 
 
 important point is, not tliat he shonld translate it absolutely at sight, hnt 
 that he should master it entirely by means of his own resources. These 
 exercises in Rea(lin«; at Sight are intended to encourage independent 
 work, to promote self-reliance iu study, and to give facility in reading and 
 appreciating Latin. 
 
 1 What Mood should be used in rendering into Latin? See 110, 497, 1. 
 
 * For the choice of words, see 124 and i:i4. 
 
SUM. 
 
 Hi 
 
 LESSON XLVr. 
 
 VERB Sum IN FULL. 
 
 140. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 201. Regular verbs are inflected, or conjugated, in four 
 different ways, and are accordingly divided into Four Con- 
 jugations. These Four Conjugations are distinguished from 
 one another by the stem characteristics or by the endings of 
 the Infinitive, as follows : 
 
 
 CHARACTEBISTICS. 
 
 INFINITIVE ENDINGS. 
 
 Coxj. I. 
 
 a 
 
 a-re 
 
 II. 
 
 S 
 
 6-re 
 
 III. 
 
 e 
 
 e-re 
 
 IV. 
 
 i 
 
 i-re 
 
 202. Prixcipal Parts. — The Present Indicative, Pres- 
 ent Infinitive, Perfect Indicative, and Supine are called 
 from their importance, the Principal Farts of the verb. 
 
 203. The Extirk Coxjugatiox of any regular verb may 
 be readily formed from the Principal Parts by means of the 
 proper endings.^ 
 
 1. Sum, / aw, is used as an auxiliary in the passive voice 
 of regular verbs. Accordingly, its conjugation, though 
 quite irregular, must be given at the outset. The Principal 
 Parts are — 
 
 Pre«. Ixdic. 
 
 Sum, /am, 
 
 PnES. INFIK. 
 
 esse, to bey 
 
 Peuf. Indic. 
 
 fuT, I have been. 
 
 > In the Paradi^rnis of ref^lar verbs, the endinj;^ which distinguish 
 the various forms are separately indicated, and should be carefully 
 noticed. In the principal tenses each ending contains the characterstio 
 
116 
 
 VSRB& 
 
 204. Sum, lam. — Stems, e$, fu. 
 
 
 PRIKCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 
 Pbm. Iirn 
 
 Pua. Ur. 
 
 Psmr Iin». 
 
 Buhihl' 
 
 •mm, 
 
 68M, 
 
 ful. 
 
 
 
 Indicativk Mood. 
 
 
 
 BI!(OrLAIL 
 
 Punn Tm ^^., 
 PLiniiL. 
 
 ■W^B, 
 
 lam. 
 
 
 Biimas, 
 
 re are; 
 
 •«. 
 
 Ihouart* 
 
 
 cU.. 
 
 Ifouare, 
 
 •rt. 
 
 hMu: 
 
 
 mat, 
 
 Ouyart, 
 
 
 
 
 
 cram, 
 
 /««» 
 
 
 •rAmas, 
 
 lee teete. 
 
 •rtU, 
 
 CAOMWOi// 
 
 
 erfttla. 
 
 j/amweref 
 
 «■*, 
 
 hewu; 
 
 
 ermat, 
 
 thejfwere. 
 
 
 
 FCTCTE. 
 
 
 erA/ 
 
 lihaUbe,^ 
 
 
 erlaias, 
 
 wethallbe. 
 
 eri.. 
 
 tkmwUtbe, 
 
 
 •rlUih 
 
 Ifouwillbe, 
 
 erft. 
 
 he mill be; 
 
 
 ermat. 
 
 theywillbe. 
 
 
 
 Pnncr. 
 
 
 ful. 
 
 Ihenebem,^ 
 
 
 fulmas, 
 
 we have been. 
 
 fuUtI, 
 
 thou had been. 
 
 
 fulstU, 
 
 you have been. 
 
 fait, 
 
 heha»beem; 
 
 
 fu«raac, 
 fu«re, 
 
 I they have been. 
 
 
 
 PLnT»fTCT. 
 
 
 fueram 
 
 .Ihadheen, 
 
 
 fuerAiuas, ve had been. 
 
 f«era«, 
 
 thou hadai been, 
 
 
 fuerAtis, 
 
 you had been. 
 
 fuerat, 
 
 hehadbetn; 
 
 
 fueraat, 
 
 they had been. 
 
 FcTTRK Perfect. 
 
 fuer6, 
 
 fuerts, 
 fuerlt^ 
 
 / thall hewe been, 
 thou mlt have been, 
 he will have been ; 
 
 fuerfimas, ve shall have been, 
 fuerf tls, you iciU have been, 
 fuerlat, tJicy will have been. 
 
 * Tb« Sapine is wantiiii;. 
 
 * Sum is for e*um^ eram tar etam, WfeaneTer s of the Btena e* comes between two 
 Towels, e is dropped, u in eum, tunt, or « is dunged to r, «s in eram, er6 ; see p. 3. -il- 
 The pnpil will oteenre that tbe endioft whkh mre added to the roota e* sn& /« are dit> 
 tiofnii»bed hj the type. 
 
 * Or y<m are, and in the Imperfsct, you were; thou is confined mos^jr to aolema 
 dlaconrse. 
 
 * In rerbs final o, marited 6. is gmierallj long. 
 » Or. Future, / icili be ; Perfect, / er </«. 
 
VERBS. 
 
 117 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 BIHOULAR. * Ktat.'iT. 
 
 PLCRAL. 
 
 «i», 
 
 ma^ / 6f,' 
 
 slmas, 
 
 let us be. 
 
 8l«, 
 
 rna^«/ Mou &<•,• 
 
 8ltl8, 
 
 be ye, may you be^ 
 
 8it, 
 
 Id him b€, may he be ; 
 
 Bint, 
 
 Id t/icm be. 
 
 
 iMPEnFKCT. 
 
 
 essem, 
 
 /sA<mW6^,« 
 
 essCmits, 
 
 we s/iould 6#, 
 
 esaCai, 
 
 //tou tcouldst be, 
 
 C58«ti9, 
 
 you icould be. 
 
 esMt, 
 
 he would be; 
 
 cssent, 
 
 they Kould be. 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 fuerim, 
 
 I may have becn,^ 
 
 fuertmufl, 
 
 tee may have been. 
 
 fuerfs, 
 
 thou mayst Iiave been, 
 
 fuerftis, 
 
 you may have bcen^ 
 
 fuerit, 
 
 he may have been ; 
 
 fuerint, 
 
 they may leave been. 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 fulssem 
 
 , / should have been. 
 
 fuissSmns, ice should have been. 
 
 fuissCs, 
 
 thou tcouldst have been, 
 
 fuiss<^tis, 
 
 you tcould have been. 
 
 fuUset, 
 
 he toould have been ; 
 
 fuissent, 
 
 they toould have been. 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 /Vrt. eg, 
 
 be thou, 1 este, 
 
 be ye. 
 
 /W. est*, 
 
 thou shall be,* estOtC, 
 
 ye shall be, 
 
 est«, 
 
 he shall be;* 
 
 santd, 
 
 they shall be. 
 
 Participlk. 
 
 Infinitivk. 
 
 Pres. esse, to be. 
 
 Per/, fuisse, to have been. 
 
 /W. futOrns esse/ to be about 
 
 to be. Fui. futarns,^ about to be. 
 
 1. In tho Paradigm all the forms beginning with « or « arc from the stem 
 «f ; all others from the stem /«.• 
 
 2. Rajie Forms -.—forem, /oris, foret, forent^ fore, for etaem, e$sl$, et$et^ 
 tuent^uturiu esse ; stem, siit, siet, stent, or/uam, /uds, fuai, fuant, for «m, 
 li*, tit, tint. 
 
 * On the tnnsUtion of tho Subjonctive, so« 111, 196, and remember th«t it is oflcD 
 by tbo lodlcatiTO. Tliua, Hm may often b« rendered / am, and fuerim, 2 
 
 * Otbe thou, or may you he. 
 
 * The Pat may also be rendered like the Prea., or with let: he thou ; let him he, 
 
 * Futurus ia declined like bonus. So In the Infinitive : /utums, a, vjr esse, 
 
 * A and/u are roots as well as efems. As the basis of this paradigm they are prop* 
 •riy etenu, bat aa they ore not derived from more primlUve forma, they are in them* 
 
118 DATIVE, 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 VERB SUM. — BULB XIV. — EXERCISES. 
 
 141. Humpies, — Dative with Ac^ectivea. 
 
 PutriA omnibus cam est Native country is dear to all. 
 Pax nOlfU gr&ta fuiL Feace was acceptable to us. 
 
 Note. — Ob«enre In these examples that omnibttSf limiting the mean- » 
 Ing of rara, *dear,' and nobis that of gratOf * acceptable,* are both in 
 the Dative. This Latin usage is expressp<1 !«? tl>o following 
 
 RULE XIV. — Dative witn Adjectives, 
 
 391. With adjectives the object to which the 
 quality is directed is put in the Dative : 
 
 Patriae solum omnibus curum est, the soil q^ their country is dear 
 TO ALL. Cic Id aptum est temporlf this is adapted to the time. 
 Cic. Canls simllis lupo est, a dorj is similar to a wolf. Clc. 
 
 142 . T ^ocubidary. 
 
 Contlnenter, adv. continually ^ incessantly. 
 
 Dlvlcfl, onls, m. Ditico, an Helvetian chieftain. 
 
 Flumen, Inls, n. stream^ river. 
 
 Legutifl, onls,/. embassy. 
 
 Longe, adv. by far y far ^ long. 
 
 NobllU, e, noblcy of high birth. 
 
 Omnino, adv. in ally only. 
 
 Orgctorix, igis, m. Oryetorix, an Helvetian chieftxiin. 
 
 Pur, paris,! cqualj a match for. 
 
 Pons, pontis, m, bridge. m 
 
 Rhodanus, 1, m. the Rhone. 
 
 Sequanus, a, um, SequaniaUf of the Sequani ; see 211. 
 
 Testis, is, m. and/.^ witness. 
 
 Totus,* a, um, ally the whole of. [GauL^ 
 
 tJlterior, us,* adj. eomp. farther; Gallia ulterior, Transalpine 
 
 1 Decline testis like hostis; par like audax, i. e., with the same case- 
 endings. ^ See 45. 151. and 86, 1G6. 
 
 » That is, Qaul beyond the Alps from Rome, Gaul west of the Alps. 
 
DATIVE. Ill) 
 
 143. Translate into English, 
 1. Belgae, qui Gallorura^ omnium fortissiml erant, cum 
 Germaiils continenter bellum gerubant. 2. Helvetii legates 
 ad Caesarem miserunt, cujus^ legationis Divico princeps 
 fuit. 3. Apud IlclvOtios longG nobilissiraus fuit Orgetorix. 
 4. Fuerat omnino in Gallia ulteriore legio una. 5. Ad 
 bi'llum parati simus. 6. LegionOs multas conscrlpsit ut 
 ad bellum paratus esset.* 
 
 7. IIujus rei populus Romanus sit testis. 8. Ager Sequa^ 
 nu8 erat optimus totlus Galliae. 9. Ariovistus, rex Ger- 
 manorum, tertiam partem agri SequanI occupavit. 10. In* 
 eo flumine pons erat. 11. Milites omnes fortes esse debent. 
 12. Hostes pares esse nostro exercitui* non poterant. 
 
 144. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. You shall be chief of the embassy which the citizens 
 are sending to the enemy. 2. You are the bravest of all 
 the soldiers. 3. Who will be braver than this soldier? 4. 
 Let us all be brave. 5. Did he not say : " All the Gauls 
 were in arms " ? He says : " All the Gauls will bo in 
 arms." 6. Caesar was in Italy, but his legions were in Gaul. 
 7. The Helvetii said : " We are the bravest of the Gauls." 
 
 8. The Gauls had always been prepared for war. 9. 
 Shall you be prepared to withstand the attack of the enemy? 
 10. Let us be brave, that we may be prepared to withstand 
 the attacks of the enemy. 11. Were the Gauls a match for 
 the Romans? They were not a match for the Roman sol- 
 diers. 
 
 1 Gallonim is a Partitive Genitive, governed by /ortissimi uaed substan- 
 tively, according to Rule XVI.; see 28, 397. 
 
 3 C'i//)'5 is here an adjective, agreeing with litjattonii, according to Rulo 
 XXXIV.; see 40. 
 
 • Wliy in the Subjunctitfe ^axi^ why In the Imperfect? See 119, Roles 
 XLI. and XLII. 
 
 < Ilcnder over, and observe the difference of idiom between the Latin 
 and the English. MVhy in the DaZ/re ^ See 141, Role XIV. 
 
120 FIRST CONJUGATION, 
 
 LESSON XLVIII. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 
 145. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 In the verb Amo learn the Indicative Mood of t}>o A»tive 
 voice. See page 124. 
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE ACTIVE.— 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 146. Vocabulary, 
 
 Acceptus, a, uin, acceptable, 
 
 Aedui, orum, m. pi. the Aedut, AeduanSy a tribe of 
 
 Amicus, a, ura, friendbj. [central Gaul. 
 
 Auxiliuni, ii, n. aid, 
 
 Collocu, fire, uvi, atum, to place^ station, 
 
 Divitiacus, I, m. DivitiaeuSf aii Acduan chieftain. 
 
 Dunmorix, igis, in. DumnoriXy an Acduan chieftain. 
 
 Educit, he leads out. 
 
 Finitimus, a, um, neighboring, 
 
 Graecia, ae,/. Greece. 
 
 Graviter, adv, severely, 
 
 IIibcrna» Orum, n. pi. tcinter quarters. 
 
 Jam, adv. already. 
 
 Maxime, sup. adv. viost^ very greatly. 
 
 Mens, montis, )/l mountain. 
 
 Plebs, plebis,/. the common people, populace. 
 
 Profectio, onis,/. departure^ starting. 
 
 Senutus, us, m. senate. 
 
 Thins, prep. tc. ace. across^ beyond. [Gaul. 
 
 Treveri, orum, m. pi. the Treveri, a tribe of nortlieastem 
 
 147. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Caesar exercitum in hibernis collocavit. 2. Helvetii in 
 
 tertium annum* profectioncm lego^ confirmant. 3. Cum 
 
 1 In tertium annum, lit. 'into the third year'; render for or upon the 
 third year. 3 See 78, Rule XXV. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 121 
 
 m:iltl3 civitatibus pacem et amicitiam confirmaverant. 4. 
 Caesar Acduorum principes, quorum magnara copiam in 
 castrls habebat, gi'avitcr accusavit. 5. Fugitlvi hostibus 
 earn rem nuntiaverunt. 6. Omnes auxilium a populo Ko- 
 mano implorabant. 7. Divitiacus Aeduus maximO plebl 
 acceptus erat. 8. Belgae proximi sunt Germanis qui trans 
 Rhenum incolunt. 9. Treveri proximi flumini Rheno fuerunt. 
 10. Caesar tres legiones quae circum Aquiloiam hiemabant 
 ex hibernis ediixit.^ 11. Tum in Gallia hiemabamus. 12. 
 Auxilium a Caesare imploraveramus. 13. Num nostra con- 
 silia hostibus nuntiavisti? Non vestra consilia hostibus nGn- 
 llavi. 14. PrIncipC'S Aeduorum graviter accQsavistis. 15. 
 Pro pntria fortiter piignabimus. 16. Nonnc timoris sus- 
 pTcionem vitabis? In reliquum tempus oranes suspIcionGs 
 vitiibo. 17. Ilelvetil frflmentum secura'* portabunt. 18. 
 Helvetil jam agros vastaverant et oppida expQgnabant. 
 
 148. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. AVill this judge be acceptable to you? lie will be 
 acceptable to me and to all the citizens. 2. Have you an- 
 nounced this battle to the consul?* I have announced it 
 to the consul and to the senate. 3. Shall you pass the 
 winter in Italy? We shall pass the winter in Greece. 
 4. The commander will place his whole army in winter 
 quartei*s in Gaul, and pass the the winter himself in Italy. 
 
 5. We hastened to establish peace and friendship with 
 the neighboring states. 6. Did you not imj)lore aid from 
 your friends? We im])lored aid from all our friends. 7. 
 You have severely censured the commander himself. 8. 
 The J^emi were friendly to the Romans. 9. Of all the 
 Gauls the Ilelvetii were the nearest to the Germans, with 
 whom * they were continually waging war. 
 
 J For rduc-fU, the perfect of educil. « Eco 102, 181, G, 
 
 * For the proper ooustmction, see 54, Rule XII. 
 « With whom. See 106, 187, 2. 
 
1-2 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON L. 
 
 I IRST CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE ACTIVE. — REVIEW 
 OF DECLENSIONS I. AND II. — RULE XXXL 
 
 149. Vocabulary, 
 
 Absum, abesse, afui, to he absent j distant. 
 
 Coilis, is, m, like ignis, hill, 
 
 Convocu, are, avi, atum, to call together^ assemble. 
 
 Fiiga,ae,/. flight, 
 
 Movct, he moves. 
 
 Kox, noctis, /. night. 
 
 Occulta, arc, avi, atuin, to hide. 
 
 Praesidlam, ii, fi. garrison. 
 
 Septimus, a, uui, seventh. 
 
 Subducit, he tcithdraies, leads off. 
 
 Teoto, are, avt, atuin, to try. 
 
 150. TnmsUitt into l:^n(/li8h. 
 
 1. RomanI Helvetios superibunt. 2. Eo tempore* Hel- 
 vStil adventura Caesaris exspectabant. 3. Aedul belli for- 
 tOnam tentaverunt. 4. Nox fugam hostium non oecultavit. 
 5. Ariovistus eas omnes copias tind proelio superavit. 6. 
 Proximo die Caesar e castrls copias eduxit. 7. Nonne hoc 
 proelinm imperatorl nuntiavisti? 8. Hoc proelium impera- 
 torl nilntiabo. 9. Num bellum rcnovabitis? Multls do 
 causis* bellum renovabimus. 
 
 10. Caesar principes Aeduonim convocavit et graviter eos 
 accusavit. 11. Septimo die Ariovisti copiae a nobis non 
 longe aberant. 12. Proxima nocte castra movebamus. 13. 
 Imi>erator castra movet iit intellegat* utrum apud mllites 
 pudor atque officium an timor valeat.* 14. Caesar hoc 
 
 1 For construction, see 93, Rule XXXI. 
 
 ' Literally, /rom or out of many causes ; render /or many reasons. 
 
 3 Explain Mood; 119 and 127, Rules XLII. and LV. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 123 
 
 oppidum occupavit et ib! praesidium collocavit. 15. Sum 
 copias in proximum coUem subdflcit. 
 
 151. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Caesar was at that time praising the soldiers of the 
 tenth legion. 2. He had often praised the valor of that 
 legion. 3. On what day did you renew the war? We re- 
 newed the war on the tenth day. 4. On which day did the 
 ambassadors announce to you the flight of the enemy? They 
 announced it to us on the same day. 5. Caesar had called 
 together the chiefs of the Aedui, that he might upbraid^ 
 them. 6. Have you called us together at this time, that you 
 may upbraid us? I have called you together that I may 
 praise your valor, and that I may announce to you the 
 approach of the enemy. 
 
 7. For what reason * did you renew the war at that time ? 
 We renewed the war that we might conquer the enemy. 8. 
 At that time we were awaiting the arrival of the general. 9. 
 On the next nijrht the Gauls seized the town. 10. We shall 
 conquer in a single battle* all the forces of the enemy. 11. 
 On the seventh day we shall have placed a garrison in the 
 town, and on the next day we shall try the fortune of war. 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 FinST CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE IN FtTLL. — 
 REVIEW OF DECLENSION III. 
 
 152. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Amo^ learn the Active voice in full. See the 
 following page. 
 
 > For Mood and Tense, sec 110, Rules XLI. and XLII. 
 ^ For what reason ; see nolo on mttUis di cau»ig, 150. 
 * Ina sinfile battle ; Latin idiom, by a nhxale battle. 
 
124 
 
 FIRST COKJUOATJOy. 
 
 FmST CONJUGATION : A VERBS. 
 205. ACTIVE V0ICE.-Am5,/for<r. 
 
 ViRB Stem and Pbksbkt Stem, omA} 
 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 
 PiAlirp. 
 
 Pies. Ikf. P«wr. Ikd. 
 
 
 inA, 
 
 amAre, amATi, 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 amAtom. 
 
 BHionaR. P"«" TwsE. ^^^^ 
 
 •m«.> 
 
 /forr.« 
 
 amAmns, 
 
 wehve. 
 
 amA«, 
 
 3fOMfoife,» 
 
 amAtiis 
 
 you love. 
 
 amat, 
 
 Airfow./ 
 
 amaat, 
 
 tluy love. 
 
 
 iMpnrEcr. 
 
 
 amAbam, 
 
 / IPOS lovinj^ 
 
 amAbAmns, 
 
 ite were loving. 
 
 amAbAs, 
 
 y<m wart hvinff^ 
 
 amAbfttiw, 
 
 you were loving. 
 
 am&bat, 
 
 kewoMkmttff; 
 
 amAbant, 
 
 they were loving. 
 
 
 FCTCRE. 
 
 
 amAbA, 
 
 Js/ialilov(* 
 
 amAbtmas, 
 
 w thatt love. 
 
 amAbis, 
 
 you KiU hoc, 
 
 aroAbitU, 
 
 you will love. 
 
 amAbXt, 
 
 hemfthvc; 
 
 am&bnnt, 
 
 tltey wUl love. 
 
 
 VsancT. 
 
 
 amiTi, 
 
 Ikmtkmd* \ amArlma*, 
 
 tee have loved. 
 
 amftvlstl. 
 
 you have lo9ed^ amflvistls, 
 
 you have loved, 
 
 amftvit, 
 
 he hat tooed ; amflySranf, fire, they have loved 
 
 
 PLrPERTECT. 
 
 
 am;lverain 
 
 7 had loved, 
 
 amaverAmns 
 
 , we had loved. 
 
 aniilvera», 
 
 you had loved, 
 
 amavcrAtis, 
 
 you had loved, 
 
 amftverat, 
 
 he fiad loved; 
 
 amaverant, 
 
 tluy had loved. 
 
 
 FcTTRE Perfect. 
 
 
 
 I shall have loved,* 
 
 amavertmns 
 
 we shall have loved, 
 
 amSvcrfs, 
 
 you will have loved. 
 
 aroaveritis, 
 
 you leill have loved. 
 
 amaverit, 
 
 he tciU have loved; 
 
 amaverint, 
 
 they will have loved. 
 
 * Tb« final <2 of the stem disappears in am6 for ama-i, amem, antes, etc., for ama- 
 im, ama-la, etc Also In the Pass, in amor for ama-or, amer, etc^ For ama-ir, etc. 
 Flnnl <K marked 8, is generally long. 
 
 « Ot lam loving, I do love. 3o in the Imperfect, / loved, I was loring, I did love, 
 » Or thou lovesL So In the other tenses, thou wast loving, thou wilt lore, etc. 
 
 * Or I will lote. &o in the Fatore Perfect, Iskall have loved or I will hate loved, 
 
 * Orii 
 
ACTIVE VOICK 
 
 125 
 
 
 amArcm, 
 
 am&r£0, 
 
 amAret, 
 
 SmOTTLAR. 
 may I love,^ 
 may you love^ 
 Id him love ; 
 
 Ishouldiove^ 
 you Koufd lovCy 
 he would love ; 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Pbbsknt. 
 
 amemiiH, 
 
 aroCtis, 
 
 ameni, 
 
 FLUEAL. 
 
 Ictus lowe^ 
 may you love^ 
 let llicm love. 
 
 lUPKRFECT. 
 
 amftrCmnii, 
 
 amarCtiff, 
 amarent, 
 
 ve should love^ 
 you vould love, 
 tlicy would love. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 amaverlm, I may have loved,'* 
 amilveris, you may have loved, 
 amaverit, Ju may have loved ; 
 
 amiverf muB, xvc may have loved, 
 amilvcrf tiM, you may have loved, 
 amftvcrint, they may have loved. 
 
 Plcpertect. 
 amilrlBsciii, I should have loved, \QmiLyln»^nkWLn,xoesho%ildhavelovcd, 
 
 amiiviBsCs, you would have loved, amavissCtis, 
 amaviaset, he would have loved ; \ amfivlssent, 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pre$. ama, love thou ; | amatc, 
 
 Fut. amatd, thou sliall love, I amatOte, 
 
 amat6, he shall love ; \ amantd, 
 
 you would have loved, 
 they icouldhavc loved. 
 
 love ye. 
 
 ye sJtall lovt^ 
 
 they shall love. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Prcs. am are, ic love. 
 Perf. amilvisse, to have loved, 
 Fut. an)fitQruM ' estte, to be about 
 to lore. 
 
 Gerund. 
 
 Gen, amandl, of loving, 
 
 Dot. ainandO, for loving. 
 
 Ace. amandnm, loving, 
 
 Abl. amaadO, by loving. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Prcs. arnans/ loving, 
 Fut. am&tarns,* cdnnU to lorn. 
 
 SUPINEL 
 
 Aee. am&tana, 
 Abl, amAtft, 
 
 to love, 
 
 to love, be loved. 
 
 > On Uw traoahtion of the SuttfoDcUre, tee 111, 196. 
 
 • Oft«nbestr«ndorod/Aar«<9Mc(. 80 In the naperfbd, / Aod <9r«cl. 
 
 > I>rd1ne Hko 6on««, 39. H8. 
 
 * For dedeoskMi, w« 86, 157. 
 
m\ 
 
 126 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON LII. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE. — REVIEW OP 
 DECLENSION III. — RULE VI. —EXERCISES. 
 
 163. Examples, — Ttco AcciiscUives, 
 
 1. riatonem Ilomintm \M\o- TA^yca// Plato the IIomeu o/* 
 
 sophdrum appcll.int philosophers. 
 
 2. Urbem liOmam vocavit He called the city Home. 
 
 Note. — In these examples obsenre that appellant, * they call/ 
 takes two Accitsatives, Platonem and Uomerumj botli referring to the 
 same person, and that rocdrff, * hecalloxl,' also takes two Accusatives, 
 ur6em and Romam, both referring to the same city. This Latin usage 
 is expressed In the following 
 
 RULE VI. — Two Accasatlves — Same Person. 
 878. Verbs of makino, choosing, calling, regard- 
 ing, SHOWING, and the like, admit two Accusatives of 
 the same person or tiling: 
 
 Hamilcarcm Imp^dforem fecerunt, they viade Uamilcar com- 
 MANDEii. Nep. Ancum regem populus creavit, the people elected 
 Ancus KINO. Liv. Summum consilium appellarunt Sendtum, they 
 called their highest council senate. Cic 
 
 1. Predicate Accusative. — One of the two Accusatives is the 
 Direct Of^ect, and the other an essential part of the Predicate. The 
 latter may be called a Predicate Accusative; see 59, Rule L 
 
 164. Vocabulary, 
 
 AUobrogOs, um, m. pi, the Allobroges, a tribe of southeast- 
 
 em Gaul ; sing. Allobrox, ogis. 
 Appello, are, avi, atum, to call. 
 
 Boil, drum, m. pi. the Boii, a tribe of central GauL 
 
 Conjunx, conjugis, m. and/, spouse, husband, to\fe, 
 Conservo, are, avi, atum, to preserve. 
 Filius, ii,* m. son. [army. 
 
 Galba, ae, m. Galba, a lieutenant in Caesar's 
 
 1 In the singular, the Genitive and Vocative are generally contracted to 
 m. See 82. 51, 5. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 127 
 
 Gens, gcntis,/, like cliens. racCj tribe, nation. 
 
 Liberi, oruni, m. pl.^ children. 
 
 Murciis, i, m. Marcus, a Roman name. 
 
 Nomen, inis, n. name. 
 
 NominO, are, avi, atum, to name, call. 
 
 Nutrix, icis,/. nurse. 
 
 Octodunis, i, m. Octodurus, a town of the Veragrl, 
 
 PrOpulso, are, fivi, atum, to repulse. [now Martigny. 
 
 Recuso, are, avi, atum, to r^ect. 
 
 Roma, ae,/. Borne. 
 
 Sicilia, ae,/. Sicily. [Gaul. 
 
 Veragri, orum, m. pi. the Veragri, a tribe of eastern 
 
 Vergobretus, i, m. Vergobretus, the title of the chief 
 
 magistrate of tbe Aedui. 
 
 155. IWmslate into English. 
 
 1. Seiiatus Romanus AeduOs fratres appellavit. 2. Scna- 
 tus Ariovistum regcm et amlcum appellaverat. 3. Senatus 
 patrcni CasticI poi)ulI^ Komaiil amlcum appellat. 4. Galba 
 ill vico Veragrorum hiemabat. 5. Galli hunc vicum Octo- 
 <lurum appellant. C.Marcus Cato nutricem plebis Romanac 
 Siciliam norainabat. 7. Galll omncs auxilium a populo Ro- 
 mano implorent. 8. Allobroges, qui trans Rhodanum inco- 
 limt, auxilium a Caesare implorare constituerunt. 
 
 9. Boil, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, banc urbem oppugnare 
 constituerunt. 10. Conscrvate vos, conjuges, llberos, fortu- 
 nfusquc vestras. ll.Ariovistus cimi Romanis decertare para- 
 tiis erat. 12. Ne' timor exercitum Romanum occupet. 13. 
 rtinam* timor omnem hostium exercitum occupavisset.* 14. 
 N'c populi RomanI amicitiam recuscmus. 15. Pro patria 
 fortiter pugnemus et hostes propulsemus. 16. Ariovistus 
 partem suarum copiarum quae castra Romana oppugnaret* 
 mlsit. 
 
 ' Not used in the singular. 
 
 ^ Construe with amicum. 
 
 « Wliy is ne ratlier tlian »i«/i useil? See 114, 483, 3. 
 
 « For utinam and for U»e force of tlie ritipcr/,'rt, see 114, 483, 1 and 3. 
 
 « For the use of Mood, see Kale Xiai. 
 
128 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 166. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. They called the city Rome. 2. The Aedui called their 
 chief Vergobretus. 3. Will you call us brothei-s? We shall 
 (all you all brothers. 4. The Itomans call us Gauls. 5. At 
 that time we called Ariovistus king. G. Did not the consul 
 name his son Marcus? Cicero the consul named his son 
 Marcus. 7. The citizens called Marcus Cato wise. 8. The 
 enemy had determined to call the bravest of their leaders 
 general. 
 
 9. Galba determined to winter with the legion in a village 
 which the Gauls call Octodurus. 10. Do you call Ariovistus 
 a friend or an enemy ? * I call him the enemy of the Koman 
 I't nj.K . 1 1. He inquired^ whether you called him a friend or 
 an enemy.* 12. Ariovistus, whom the Germans called king, 
 was prepared to try the fortune of war. 13. The Gauls implored 
 aid of the Komans, ip order that they might repulse the 
 enemy. 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE PASSIVE.— -REVIEW 
 OF DECLENSIONS IV. AND V. — RULE XXII. 
 
 157. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Amo^ learn the Indicative Mood of the Passive 
 voice. See page 136. 
 
 158. Examples. — Ablative. 
 
 1. Caedem d tobis depelliL Ih wards off slaughter from you. 
 
 2. SUitua ex aere facta. A statue made of uuoxze. 
 
 3. Expulsus est7>a^rtd. He was banished vnoM iiis COVTfTRT. 
 i. Ars fUilitaie laudatur. An art is praised because of its 
 
 USEFULNESS. 
 
 1 For the construction of Double or Di^unctive Questions, see 106> 363^ 
 
 2 Or teas inquiring, imperfect. 
 
 8 For the construction, see 127, 520, 3. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 129 
 
 Note. — In theso examples vobia (d c66Is), *from you,' acre (ex 
 aere)y *of bronze,' patria, * from his country,' and utilitntej ' because 
 of Its usefulness,' are all in the Ablative, in accordance with the 
 Latin usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE XXII. — Separation, Source, Canse. 
 
 413. Separation, Source, and Cause are denoted by 
 the Ablative with or without a preposition : 
 
 Separation. — Caedem a vObls depello, / ward off slaughter from 
 YOU. Cic. Expulsus est patria, he was banished from his country. 
 < ic. Urbem conmieatu prlvavit, he deprived the city qf supplies. Nep. 
 ( "Onatu destiterunt, they desisted Jrom the attempt. Caes. 
 
 Source. — Hoc audivl d^ parente med, I heard this from mt 
 FATHER. Cic. Oriundi ab SablniSf descended from tue Sabines. 
 Liv. Statua ex acre facta, a statue made of bronze. Cic. 
 
 Cause. — Ars utilitate laudatur, an art is praised because of its 
 rsEFULXESS. Cic. Kogutu veneram, I had come by request. Cic. Ex 
 vulnere aeger, ill in consequence (if his wound. Cic. 
 
 415. The Ablative of Source more commonly takes a 
 ] (reposition; see examples under 413. It hicludes agency^ 
 parentage^ material, etc. 
 
 I. The agent or author of an action is designated by the Ablative 
 wiih & or ab: 
 
 Occisus est a Thebdnis, he teas slain by the Thebans. Nep. 
 
 Note 1. — The Accusative with per may be used of the person 
 through whose agency the action is effected : 
 
 Ab Oppianico per Fabricios factum est, it was accomplished by 
 Oppianicus tiuiouqh toe agency of the Fabricii. Cic. 
 
 LESSON LIV. 
 
 KIRST CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE PASSIVE. — RULE 
 XXII. — EXERCISES. 
 
 159. Vocabulary. 
 
 Conventus, us, m. assembly, meeting, council, convention^ 
 
 Eniintio, are, avi, atura, to report, disclose, announce. 
 Etiara, adv. also, ecen. 
 
130 FIRST CONJUGATION, 
 
 Lingua, ac,/. tongue ^ language. 
 
 LUcus, i, m. LUcu8y the chief magistrate of the 
 
 Merits, adx), deservedly. [Aedui. 
 
 Paululim, adv. little by little, by degrees^ gradually. 
 
 Per, prep. to. ace. through ^ by^ over. 
 
 Provincia, ae,/. province, [of northwestern Gaul. 
 
 SantonOs, um, in. pi. the Santoni or SantoneSj a txil>e 
 
 Sed, conj. but. 
 
 160. Translate into English. 
 
 I. MHitcs Icgionis decimac omnes a Caesarc^ laudantuf. 
 
 2. Eodem tempore multac legiones merito laudabantur. 
 
 3. Semper laudaberis. 4. Ab omnibus merito laudaminl. 
 5. Ab omnibus laudatus es. 6. Divitiacus ad Caesarem voca- 
 tus erat. 7. Ilaec omnia Ariovisto enuntiuta sunt. 8. Pater 
 Castiei a senatQ amicus • appellutus erat. 9. Ea res per fugi- 
 tlvos' hostibus nuntiatur. 10. AeduI fratres ab senattl 
 a]>])ellatl sunt. 
 
 II. Timor cos, qui non magnum in i6 mllitarl* Usam 
 habCbant^ occupavit; horum timore, paulatim ctiam il, qui 
 magnum in castris dsum kabebant, jxTturbabantur. 12. 
 PrIneipC'S IlelvCtiorum a Caesare convocfitl sunt. 13. Fines 
 Santonum a provincia ROmana non longe absunt. 14. Liscus 
 multas res illo die in conventQ dixit. 15. II qui tertiam 
 Galliae partem incolunt nostra lingua* Galll appellantur. 
 16. Galba in vied qui appellatur Octodurus biemabat. 
 
 161. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. The brave soldiers will be praised by the general. '2. 
 You liave been deservedly praised by Caesar himself. 3. 
 
 1 See 158. 415, 1., and observe that hi the Achve oonstmctioii the Author 
 or Agent of the action is denoted by the y'ominative ; in the Passive by the 
 Ablatice with a or ab. Thxis in this sentence the Active constructioa 
 Krooldhe: Cae»ar nxUitfs . . . laudaU 
 
 2 Predicate Xominative; see 69. Rule I. 
 « See 158, 415, note 1. 
 
 * Lit. in the military thinp; render, in military affair: 
 6 Ahlatiye of Means; see 78. Rule XXV. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION, 181 
 
 Was not Cicero the consul praised by the senate? He 
 was deservedly praised by the Roman people. 4. Has not 
 this citizen been accused by you? He has not been ac- 
 iiisod by me, but by the magistrate. 5. Will not all these 
 lliings Ixj announted to the commander? 
 
 (j. By whom were our plans announced to the enemy? 
 They have not been announced to the enemy. 7. What has 
 l)oen announced to Caesar? All these things have been an- 
 nounced to him. 8. The consul, with a large army, is not 
 far from the city. 9. At that time the enemy were not far 
 from the village which is called Octodurus. 10. The Aedui, 
 who had been called brothers by the senate, implored aid 
 from Caesar. 
 
 LESSON LV. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE PASSIVE. — REVIEW 
 OP ADJECTIVES OF DECLENSIONS I. AND II. 
 
 162. Vocabulary. 
 
 Ac, conj. and. 
 
 Alpes, iura,/. pi. the Alps. 
 
 Arverni, orum, m. jjZ. the Arverni, a tribe of southern Gaul. 
 
 Celerlter, adv. quicklf/. 
 
 Centurio, onis, m. centurion. 
 
 Excito, are, avi, atum, to excite^ arouse. 
 
 Fabius, ii, m. Fabius, a celebrated Roman general. 
 
 Ilarudes, um, in. pL the Uaruden, a tribe of southwestern 
 
 Nuper, adp. recently, of late. [Germany. 
 
 Obslgno, are, avi, atum, to seal, sign and seal. 
 
 Taene, adv. aUnost, well night nearly. 
 
 Paro, are, avi, atum, to prepare. 
 
 Quintus, i, m. Quintus, a Roman praenumen. 
 
 SC'des, Is,/, like nubes. seat, abode ; locus ac sedes, place C(f 
 
 Testamcntum, i, n. vaill. \abode. 
 
 Transport©, ire, avi, atum, to transport, carry over, take oter^ 
 
 bring over. [universally. 
 
 Yulgo, adv, commonly, as a general thing, 
 
182 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 163. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Oppida Acduorum paenc in cOnspectu cxercitOs nostri 
 expQgiiuta sunt. 2. HOs frOmenturia^ inugno cum perlculo 
 comparata erat. 3. EOilem tempore agri Aeduurum vasta- 
 bantur. 4. Ariovistus, rex GermanOrum, amicus u senutil 
 ap|)elltttus crat. 5. Magiiae GaliOrum cOpiae ab Ariovistd 
 uno proelio^supcratae 8unt. C.Timor exercitum popull Ro- 
 munl occupavit; ctiam ccnturiones qui magimm in re 
 mllitari flsum habebant i)erturbabantur; vulgo in castris tes- 
 tamenta obslgnabantur. 
 
 7. Omnes fere Galli ad bellum celeriter excitantar. 8. 
 Aedu! belli fortQnam tentaverunt ct 8U|)erati sunt. 9. 
 TIarudes nQj)or in Galliam transjjortatl sunt.' His locus ao 
 odes ]>arabuntur. 10. Imperator in Qlteriorem Galliam \wr 
 Alpes cum quinque legidnibus contendiu* 11. Multae gcntes 
 flno nomine QermanI apjwllantur. 12. An'ernl ab Quinto 
 Fabio bello sujKTati sunt. 
 
 164. IVanslate into Latin, 
 
 1. Our fields have been devastated by the enemy. 2. 
 Many towns had been taken by storm.* 3. Large forces of 
 the enemy will be conquered by our commander. 4. The 
 Gauls had been conquered by Caesar in many battles.* 5. 
 Many chiefs had been called together by Caesar. 6. The 
 chiefs who had been called together said many things in the 
 council. 7. Many Germans were carried over into Gaul by 
 Ariovistus. For these Germans places of abode had been 
 
 * RfS frumentariat lit, the thing rclbtinff to corn or grain, the affair of 
 the grain ; render ' grain ' or * supplies.' 
 
 ' Observe the difference of construction between expressions of Agknxy, 
 Authorship, ab Ariovisto, and IfJBAKS, proelio. 
 
 » That is, across tJie Rhine. * See 134, foot-nole 2. 
 
 B Btj slonn is not to be rendered by a separate word, but is involyed in 
 the meaning of the Latin verb. 
 
 ^ In many battles ; Latin idiom, bt many battles. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 133 
 
 prepared in Gaul. 8. These legions were wintering in Gaul 
 with great peril. 
 
 9. We are not quickly aroused to war. 10. Many nations 
 had already been aroused to war. 11. The fortune of war 
 has been tried by the Gauls, and they will all be conquered. 
 12. Those who have large experience in military affaii-s, will 
 not be quickly aroused to war. 13. Were all kings called 
 friends of the Roman people? Many kings were called 
 friends by the senate. 14. The lands of the Gauls were 
 often devastated by the Germans. 15. The town in which 
 our army wintered was not attacked by the Gauls. 
 
 LESSON LVI. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. — SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE. — RE- 
 VIEW OF ADJECTIVES. — RULE LIX. 
 
 165. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Amo^ learn the Subjunctive Mood of the Pas- 
 sive voice. See page 137. 
 
 166. Examples. — Supine. 
 
 1. Ad C.icsnrcm con^rra/jt^d/um 7^eycam«^o C*a«ar TO CONGRATU- 
 
 convGnerunt. late lam. 
 
 2. VenCrunt rCs repetifum. They came to demand resUtution. 
 
 Note. —In these examples the supines congratiddtum and rcpetl- 
 titm are employed to denote the purpose of the leading action, in 
 accoi-dance with the Latin usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE LIX. — Supine in Um. 
 
 540. The Supine in um is used with verbs of motion 
 to express purpose : 
 
 LegutI venerunt res repetitnm, deputies came to demand restitution. 
 Liv. Ad Caesarem congratulutura convuncrunt, they came to Caesar 
 to congratulate him. Caes. 
 10 
 
iii4 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON LVII. 
 
 riRST CONJUGATION. — SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE.^ 
 BULE LIX. — EXERCISES. 
 
 167. Vocabulary, 
 
 Casus, us, m. accident^ occurrence, emergency. 
 
 Commcdtus, us, m. auppUes. 
 
 Deditifl, onls,/. surrender. 
 
 Iter, itineris, n. march, journey; miigna itinera, /orc^d 
 
 Judicium, ii, n. judgment, decision, [marches. 
 
 Observo, are, avi, atum, to observe, keep, comply with. 
 
 Socrates, is, m. Socrates, the celebrated Greelc pliilosoplier. 
 
 Sublevd, are, avi, utum, to assist, supporL 
 
 168. Translate into English. 
 
 I. Adventus hostiuni Caesar! nQntietur. 2. Utinnm ca 
 r^ imperSt6rI nilntiata essct.* 3. Ulinam liaec consilia Ilel- 
 vStiis nQnticDtur.* 4. Ne nostra consilia per fugitlvos hosti- 
 bus nQntientur. 5. jQdlcium senatQs obsen'ctur. G. Utinam 
 omnia senatOs jQdicia observata essent. 7. Ab l»is ICgatis 
 quaerit quantac Galliac civitales superatae sint.^ 8. Ab his 
 quacrebat quae urbes expflgnatae essent. 9. Quaerunt quam 
 ob rem commeatils non ad Caesarem portati sint. 10. Eodem 
 tempore ille mons a Labieno occupetur. 
 
 II. Ab principibus Aeduorum quaerebat quam ob rem 
 exercitus populi Roman! ab i!s non sublevaretur. 12. Caesar 
 ad omnes casus subsidia comparabat. 13. Socrates omnium ' 
 sapientissimus fuit. 14. Imperator in citeriOrem Galliam 
 magn!s itineribus* contendit. 15. Hae naves latiores erant 
 quam reliquae. 16. Pr!ncipes Gallorum legatos ad senatum 
 Romanum mittebant. 17. HostGs legatos ad Caesarem de 
 
 1 Show the force of Tenses : see 114, 483, 2. 
 
 8 See 127, Rule LV., and SuggesUon XVIT., 2. 
 
 « Partitive Genitive. 
 
 * Lit. icith large journeys ; render with forced marches. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION, 135 
 
 169. Translate into Latin, 
 
 deditione* mittunt. 18. Aedul legates ad Caesarem mittunt 
 rogatum^ auxiliiim. 
 
 1. What towns have been taken by storm? 2. Let us 
 ascertain what towns hr.ve been taken by storm. 3. Let not 
 our fields be devastated in sight of your army. 4. Let us 
 inquire for what reason these Germans have been brought 
 over into Gaul. 5. May the laws be observed by us and by 
 all the citizens. G. May you all be wise. 7. Would that 
 these boys were wiser. 8. Would that this mountain had 
 been occupied by our army. 
 
 9. Let supplies be brought to our ai-my by the Aedui. 
 
 10. Caesar was hastening with forced marches into Gaul. 
 
 11. Would that all the forces of the enemy had been con- 
 quered.' 12, May our towns never be stormed by the 
 enemy. 13. What towns of the Gauls were stormed by the 
 Germans ? 14. Let us inquire of tlie ambassadors what 
 towns have been stormed and what fields have been devas- 
 tated. 15. Let not these things be announced to the Germans. 
 16. Would that, these towns were all occupied by our friends. 
 Let us send ambassadors to the senate to ask^ aid. 
 
 LESSON LVm. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE IN FITLL. — 
 REVIEW OF PRONOUNS. — RULES LVII. AND LVIII. 
 
 170. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Amoy learn the Passive voice in full. See the 
 following page. 
 
 » Lit. concerning a turrender ; render to treat for a capitulation, or to 
 capitulate. 
 
 « To ask ; see 166. Rule LIX. 
 
 • See 114, 48.1. 2. 
 
 * See 166. Rule LIX. 
 
13d 
 
 FIRST CONJUQATIOK. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION: A VERBa 
 206. PASSIVE VOICE—Amor, lam bmd. 
 
 Tub Sm axd Pumn 8mr, ama, 
 
 FRncaPAL PARTB. 
 Pm. Urn. Tmmb. l!(r. 
 
 am«r, amArl, 
 
 INDICATIVK Mood. 
 Pbbbxt Tbiob. 
 
 SSOVLAB. ^^ PLURAL. 
 
 am^r amAmar 
 
 amAris, or re am&mlml 
 
 vxAtmr 
 
 ainA¥ar 
 amAb&rlii, or 
 
 am&bMHir 
 
 Pnr. Imx 
 aniAtas miu 
 
 smAbor 
 
 amAberls, or re 
 amAbltor 
 
 Impbrpkct. 
 Iwa»lo9ed. 
 
 amftbamur 
 amabanilnl 
 amabantnr 
 
 FUTTRK. 
 
 lihall or wili be loved. 
 
 amAbimnr 
 amAbiminl 
 amAbuntur 
 
 PiRFicr. 
 I have been loved ot I woi loved. 
 
 aro&tas sum* 
 
 amatas em 
 am&tns est 
 
 amfttns eram* 
 amfttus erAs 
 amatas erat 
 
 PLupimcr. 
 Jhadbeenhved. 
 
 amiti somas 
 amfttl efftis 
 am&tl smnt 
 
 amfttl erAmns 
 amfttl erAtis 
 amfttl erf&nt 
 
 Ftture PERrecT. 
 I shall or icill have been loved. 
 
 amfttns er6' 
 amfttus eri»9 
 amfttns erit 
 
 amfttl erinms 
 amfttl erit is 
 amfttl eruMt 
 
 I Ful, /kistt^ etc, are sometiiDefl used for »um, t*, etc : amdtiu ful for /xmJJM 
 nctn, Bo/ueramtfJiuriU, etc, for tram, etc : aho /uer6, etc, for 0r3, etc 
 
PASSIVE VOICE, 
 
 137 
 
 SUBJUNCnVB. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ma}) I he lovtd^ Id him be loved} 
 
 ■IMOULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 amer 
 amCrls, or re 
 
 ametur 
 
 amCxnur 
 amCminl 
 ameniur 
 
 IlIFKRFKCT. 
 
 / thould be loved^ he wnUd be loved.* 
 
 amftrer 
 amArCris, or 
 amftrCtur 
 
 am&remnr 
 amarCiniiil 
 amftrcntar 
 
 Perfect. 
 J may have been lovedy or / luive been loved} 
 
 amfitvM sim* 
 atn&tas sis 
 amitas sit 
 
 amati sliniui 
 amati sitis 
 amatl sint 
 
 PLITFERrECT. 
 
 Ithould have been loved, he voidd have been loved} 
 
 amatiis essem* 
 amatas css€s 
 amfltus esset 
 
 amati essCmn* 
 amati essCtls 
 amatI essent 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 fVei am&re, be i/iou loved ; \ amtLtMkinJ, be ye loved. 
 
 F\U. amfttor, thou thalt be loved^ | 
 
 amfttor, he shall be loved ; \ amantor, they shall be Untd, 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Fret, amftrl, to be loved. 
 Perf. amatns esse,* to have been 
 
 loved. 
 Fni. amatam Irl, to be about to 
 
 behoed. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Per/, amatns, having been lovrd. 
 
 Oer.* amandas, to he loved^ d$' 
 terving toheloHd. 
 
 > Bot oo Um tnoBblioD of the Sat^JaaeHra. M« 111, 196. 
 
 * /Wr<m,/i(«r;«. etc.. are aometlmM OMd fcr aim, i/l», ale.— 00 •hoyMlMai./Wte^ 
 Dtc, for <«MM, Mt^ etc : rarely A'«M Ibr em*. 
 
 * Gt. =! QfttiDdlTe; see p. 14, 200, IV., aot*. 
 
138 FIRST CONJVGA TION. 
 
 171. Examples, — InJinUive with Subject 
 1 Ponttm jubct rescindl. He orders the bridge to be bkokkn 
 
 DOWN. 
 
 -. Sentlmiis caUre Ignem. We perceive that fire 18 hot. 
 
 Note 1. — The Latin usage illustraUHl in tliese examples by the 
 Accusative and the Infinitive is expressed in tlie following 
 
 RULE LVII.— AccusatlYe and Infinitive. 
 
 534. Many transitive verbs admit both an Accusative 
 
 and an Infinitive : 
 
 1 e sapere docet, he teaches you to be wise, Cic Bus suura adven- 
 iuia exspectare jusslt, he ordered them to await his approach. Caes. 
 Pontem jubet rcscindi, Ac orders the bridge to be broken down. Caes. 
 
 Note 2. — In the second of the above examples, the Accusative 
 ignem may be regarded as the Subject of the Infinitive caltre^ in ac- 
 cordance with the Latin usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE LVIII. — Subject of Infinitive. 
 
 53G. The Infinitive sometimes takes an Accusative as 
 
 its subject : 
 
 Sentimns calere ignem, we perceive that fire U hot. Cic. Platonem 
 Tarentum vehisse reperio, Ifind that Plato came to Tarentum. Cic. 
 
 172. Vocabulary. 
 
 Accommodatus, a, um, fitted^ adapted. 
 
 Carina, ae,/. keel, bottom (of a vessel). 
 
 Coucursus, us, wi. running together ; running about^ run' 
 
 ning to andfro^ agitation. 
 
 Extra, prep. w. aec, beyond^ outside of. 
 
 Fluctus, us, m. wave. 
 
 Fremitus, us, m. din^ noise. 
 
 Jubet, he orders, commands. 
 
 MagnitudS, inis,/. size. 
 
 Modus, i, m. measure, manner. 
 
 Natio, onis,/. nation. 
 
 Nudo, are, avi, utnro, to bare, expose. 
 
 Paulura, adv. a little, somewhat. 
 
 Planus, a, um, fiat, level. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION, 139 
 
 Prior, us, sup, primus, a, 
 
 urn, 86, 160, former, first. 
 
 Prora, ae,/. prow, 
 
 Scientia, ae,/. knoicledge. 
 
 Segusifini, orum, m. ;)^ the Segusiani, a tribe of southeastern 
 
 Slgnificu, are, avi, atum, to signify, indicate. (Gaul. 
 
 Superus, a, um, comp. supe- 
 rior, us, sup. supreinus 
 
 and summus, a, um, upper; summus, highest, greatest. 
 
 TardO, are, avi, atum, to retard, check, hinder, impede. 
 
 173. Tratislate ifito Englisli. 
 
 1. Castra ab iliia paito- nQdata sunt. 2. No tOta castra 
 nudentur. 3. Caesaris adventfl paulum hostiura impetus 
 tardutus est. 4. Omnes in conspectu imperatoris etiam in 
 summo periculo fortiter pugnabant. 5. AgrI nostri vastari* 
 non dC'bent. 6. Oppida Aeduorura paene in conspectil 
 exercitus nostri expugnarl non debent. 7. Timor liostium 
 fremitu et concursu slgniticabatur. 8. Maximae nationcs 
 a Romanis superatae sunt. 9. Intellegunt maximas nationGs 
 superatas esse.' 
 
 10. Duces liostium summam scientiam r?I militaris habere 
 exTstimabantur. 11. Caesar duas legiones in proximo montc 
 collocHrl jubet. 12. Fugitlvl dicunt montem a Labieno occu- 
 parl.* 13. SegusianI sunt extra provinciam Romanam trans 
 Rhodanum primi. 14. Naves hostium ad hunc modum aedi- 
 ficatae sunt ; carinae planiores sunt quam nostrarum navium,* 
 prorae ad magnitQdinera flilctuum accommodatae. 
 
 174. Traiulate into Latin, 
 
 1. They say that supplies* have not been brought to 
 Caesar by the Aedui. 2. He says that our fields have been 
 devastated by the Gauls. 3. How many vessels have been 
 
 » Ah una parte; Latin idiom, /rom one part; render, on one side. 
 
 2 See 132. Rule LV I. * See Suggestion XYIII., 1. 
 
 * Xdvittm depends upon carinae understood. 
 
 * See 171. Rule LVIU. 
 
140 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 built by the GanlB ? Let us ascertain how many vessels have 
 been built by them. 4. Deserters say that ten vessels have 
 been built by the Gauls. 5. They say that many cities were 
 stormed by the Romans. 6. Deserters say that the camp of 
 the enemy is exposed on (Ji'om) one side. 7. Let not our 
 camp be exposed. 8. Our camp ought not to be exposed. 
 
 9. Will you not fight bravely in sight of your general? 
 10. We ought to fight bravely for our country. 11. Caesar 
 orders this city to be occupied by our army. 12. An ambas- 
 sador announced that the cities of our friends were occupied 
 by the enemy. 13. The Germans ought not to lay waste the 
 fields of the Gauls. 14. The arrival of Caesar checked the 
 attack of the enemy. 15. They say that one legion was 
 stationed in the city. 16. In what part of Gaul were the 
 legions wintering? 17. Let us ask in what part of Gaul the 
 l^ons are wintering. 18. Caesar said that the legions were 
 wintering among the Belgae. 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION IN FULL, — EXERCISE IN READ- 
 ING AT SIGHT. 
 
 176. Head at Sights examine carefuUy^ and Tramlate into 
 
 English} 
 
 Helvetil per agnim Aeduorum in Santonum fines conten- 
 debant, qui non longe a provincia Romana absunt. Ob eas 
 causas Caesar in Italiam magnis itineribus contendit, duasquc 
 ibi legiones conscripsit, et tres quae circum AquilGiam hiema- 
 bant ex hibemis cduxit, et in ulteriorcm Galliam per Alpes 
 cum his quinque legion ibus contendit. Ab citeriore pro- 
 vincial in Segusianos excrcitum diixit. Hi sunt extra pro- 
 
 1 See Directions for Reading at Sight, 137. 
 
 2 Citerior pr^incia is the Roman province of Citerior or Cisalpine Oaul, 
 while interior vrdvincia is the pioyinoe of Ulterior or Transalpine Gaul. 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 141 
 
 vinciam truns Rbodanum primi. IlelvCtil jam AeduOrum 
 agios vastabant et oppida cxpugniibant. Turn vGro taiitus 
 timor AediiOs occupavit ut omnium mentes animosque per- 
 turbaret. Legat6s igitur ad Caesarem mIsGrunt. Eodem 
 tempore multae Galliae civitates auxilium u Caesare implo- 
 raveruut. 
 
 176. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Caesar says that nearly all the Belgae conspired against 
 the Roman people. The Gauls, whom Caesar had com- 
 manded to ascertain^ what the Belgae were doing, announced 
 that the enemy were collecting large forces {bands of meix)^ 
 and bringing them together in {into^ one place.' 2. How 
 many legions did Caesar enrol in Italy? At that time he 
 enrolled two legions there. How many legions will winter 
 in the vicinity of this town {around this town ) f The gen- 
 eral says that three legions will winter in the vicinity of this 
 town. 
 
 3. By whom have the lands of the Aedui been devastated ? 
 He inquired by whom the lands of the Aedui had been devas- 
 tated. Ambassadors announced that the lands of the Aedui 
 had been devastated by the Helvetii. 4. The general ought 
 to lead all his forces out of winter quai*tei*s. 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 
 177. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Moneo, learn the Indicative Mood of the 
 Active voice. See page 144. 
 
 > Literally to xchom Caenr had given order* that they should ascertain ; 
 see 120 and 110, 406. 
 
 s See 136. 10. 
 
 * Use condicit as in 136, 14, not comporttU, trhich Cftesar employs in 
 speaking of bringing together things but not men ; see 186, 9. 
 
142 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 178. Vocabulary. 
 
 Agmen, inis, n. army on the march, line of marcK 
 
 line ; extremum afnuen, the ex 
 trefnittf of the Ziwe, the rear. 
 Aiiqiiamdiu, adv. for a lime. 
 
 Armo, are, uvi, utnm, to arm. 
 
 Debed, ere, ui, itum, to owe ; ought. 
 
 Extcrus, a, um, eomp. exterior, 
 
 U8, 8up. eztremus ami ex- [the extremity qf. 
 
 Umiis, a, um, outward ; exUvmus, the outermost, 
 
 Uabeu, ere, ul, itum, to have, hold; to regard, regard om. 
 
 Incnnus, a, um, unarmed. 
 
 Moneu, ere, ul, itum, to advise, warn. 
 
 Konne, intcrrog. part., not t 106, 351, 1, note 2. 
 
 Sine, prep. w. all. without 
 
 Sustineo, ere, tinui, tentum, to sustain, withstand, resisL 
 
 TiuicO, ere, ui, to fear, 
 
 179. TranslaU into English, 
 
 1. Num hostes timetis? Non hostes timcmus. 2. Timoris 
 Buspfcionem vlt&re deb^tis. 3. Nonne omnes suspTciones 
 vltare debemus? 4. Non sine causa hostes timuimus. 5. 
 Vdbis omnia dObeo. C. Aedui populo Romano multum 
 debC'bant. 7. Id Cacsari nOntiare debemus. 8. Nostra 
 oppida expQgnare non debetis. 9. Centuriones ma^um in 
 castrls usum habebant. 10. Nonne magnum in re militari 
 usum habebas ? Non magnum in re militari tlsum habebam. 
 11. Caesar Divitiacum fidum semper habebat. 12. Vosfidos 
 semper habebimus. 13. Nonne me fidum babes ? Te fidum 
 babeo. 
 
 14. Caesar Dumnorigem ad se vocavit ; monuit ut in 
 reliquum tempus omnes suspiciones vitaret. 15. Vos monco 
 ut in reliquum tempus has suspiciones vitetis. 16. Ariovis- 
 tus Caesarem non pro amico,* sed pro hoste habebit. 17. 
 Te pro amico semper habui. 18. Num me pro hoste habetis? 
 Te non pro hoste sed pro amico habemus. 19. Impetum 
 
 1 Render pro a», Mt. for. 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 148 
 
 hostium fortiter eustinueramus. 20. Hostes ab extrcmo 
 aii^mine^ fortiter impetum nostrorum militum sustinebant. 
 *J1. Quos aliquamdiu inermos sine causa timueramus, hOs 
 postea armatos siiperavimus. 
 
 180. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. At that time the Gauls feared the Germans, who dwelt 
 beyond {across) the Rhine. 2. Nearly all the Gauls feared 
 Ariovistus, the king of the Germans. 3. Shall you, who have 
 large experience in military affairs, fear the Gauls? We 
 have not large experience in military affairs, but we do not 
 fear this army. 4. These boys owe much to their father. 5. 
 We all owe much to our fathers. 6. Ought we not to attack 
 that town? We ought to take it by storm. 7. Our soldiers 
 always withstand the attacks of the enemy. 
 
 8. We shall always regard you all as our friends.' 9. 
 Caesar regarded the Gennans not as friends, but as ene- 
 mies. 10. Do you not regard your general as faith- 
 ful? We all regard him as faithful. 11. Whom do these 
 boys regard as faithful ? They regard you as faithful. 12. 
 Did I not warn you not to announce these things to the 
 Germans?* You warned us not to announce your plans 
 to the enemy. 13. Did you not fear Ariovistus at that 
 time? I feared him, and regarded him as an enemy. 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE IN FULL. 
 181. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Moneo^ learn the Active voice in full. See 
 the following page. 
 
 1 Render ah, out, lit. from. See note on ab una parte, 173. 
 * Not to annonnoe » that you should not announce, tie with Subjono- 
 tive ; 110, i*M. * As our friends ; Latin idiom, fob our friends. 
 
144 SECOND CONJUGATION 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION: B VERBS. 
 207. ACTIVE VOICE.— MoneiJ, I admu. 
 
 Verb Stem, num^ moni; FMEBtn Stem, mora, 
 
 FRIKCIPAL PABT8. 
 Pbm. hn. Psa. Unr. Pnr. Im. Bcnim. 
 
 BMNieA, monftre, moDUl, monltmi 
 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 
 Fiber Tmi. 
 
 flWOVLAR. 
 
 moDe^ 
 
 
 roonC* 
 
 mon«U« 
 
 
 moneat 
 
 iMTESRCr. 
 
 7 wat advitimfff or Imdviwed, 
 
 iiMm«1»Atls 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 
 JJudlotwiaadvite. 
 
 moD«b6 
 
 
 
 moD£biina» 
 
 iiM»«bU 
 rnooAMt 
 
 
 
 moaebiUs 
 
 maa€lbwukt 
 
 
 Pertvct. 
 
 
 
 /Aowr advised, or I advised. 
 
 DHmiil 
 
 
 
 monulmiis 
 
 monulstl 
 
 
 
 monuistis 
 
 moauit 
 
 
 
 moQuCriuiE. or Cre 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 
 7 Aa(f a<2trtMdL 
 
 
 monueran 
 
 ft 
 
 
 monueramiis 
 
 monuerfts 
 snonucrat 
 
 
 
 monueratis 
 mcnuerant 
 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 
 
 7«Aa// or tnU have advised. 
 
 monuer6 
 
 
 
 monuerfmas 
 
 monuerts 
 
 
 
 monuerltis 
 
 monuerit 
 
 
 
 monuerint 
 
ACTIVE VOICK 
 
 145 
 
 SUBJUNCnVBS. 
 
 Preskxt. 
 
 May I advise^ Id him advise.^ 
 
 BIKGULAK. PLURAL. 
 
 moneam moneftmns 
 
 moneAs moDCfttiif 
 
 moneat moneant 
 
 iMPSRFECr. 
 
 / thould advise, he toould advise. 
 
 monfirem 
 mouCret . 
 
 monCr^Rias 
 
 monCrCtls 
 
 mon6rent 
 
 Perfect. 
 I may have advised, or I have advised} 
 
 monucrinoi 
 
 inonucrfs 
 
 monuerit 
 
 monuerfmns 
 
 monuerftif* 
 
 monuerint 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 /should have advised, he would have advised} 
 
 monuissent 
 
 monuIssCs 
 
 monuissei 
 
 monuissCmai 
 
 monuIsB^tis 
 
 moDuiiisent 
 
 Prez mon© 
 
 f\U. xnonfitd, thou sJialt advise, 
 mon<&t6, lie shall advise ; 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 advise thou ; \ monCte, advise ye. 
 
 I monCtOte, ye shall advise, 
 I monent^, they shall advise. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Prcs. monCns, advising. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Pres. mon*rc, to advise. 
 J'crf. monuistic, to have advised. 
 Fut. monitQrns esse, to be about 
 
 to advise. 
 
 Gerund. 
 
 Gen. monendl, of advising, 
 
 Dat. nionendO, for advising, 
 
 \rc. nionendnm, advising^ 
 
 .\U. monendi^, by advising. 
 
 Fut. monitarns, abotU to advim. 
 
 Supine. 
 
 Aee. monitnin, to advise, 
 
 Abl. monitA, to advise, be advised. 
 
 I But oa the tnaaktioa oTtb* BobJaiwHT*, m« HI, 196. 
 
 * Th« Plup«ritet, Ilk* tin Perfect, \a often rendered by tbe IndlcatlT* : / had «^ 
 Vised, jfou had ( 
 
146 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON LXII. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE. — EXERCISES. 
 182. Vocabulary, 
 
 Hemoria, ae,/. memory ^ recollection. 
 
 Noviis, a, um, new ; novae res, new thingSt a change 
 
 Tared, ere, ui, itum, to obey, [qf affairs, retolutiun, 
 
 rristinus, a, um, ancient, pristine, 
 
 Ketineo, ere, tinui, tentum, to retain, keep, 
 
 Studeo, ere, ui, to desire, 
 
 Studium, ii, n. desire, 
 
 Taceo, ere, ui, Hum, to be silent, keep ftifent, remain silenL 
 
 Teneo, ere, ui, tentum, to hold, keep, 
 
 183. Translate into English, 
 
 1. No hostes sine causa timcamus. 2. Gcmianos timere 
 Ii6n dObOmus. 3. IIos agros amiTs tcneamus. 4. 31ilite8 
 dicebant so hostOs nun tiniOrc* 5. Illc cenlurio dicit se hos- 
 tes non t'lmuisse.^ 6. Ilostium im|)etum fortiter sustincamus. 
 7. Eas res meraoria* tenearaus. 8. Nonne eas res mcraoria 
 tenOre debemus? 9. Milites suae pristinae virtfitis raemoriam 
 retineant. 10. Nostrae pristinae virtGtis mcmoriam retinea- 
 mus. 11. Tuae pristinae virtutis mcmoriam retinere debes. 
 
 12. Vestrae pristinae virtutis mcmoriam retinete, hostium- 
 que impctum fortiter sustinetc. 13. Dicunt Caesarcm (Lnam 
 legionem secum* habuissc.^ 14. Dicunt te magnum amico- 
 nmi numcrum habuissc.^ 15. Dicunt to magnum amicorum 
 immcrum habitQrum esse.* 16. Dicunt vos magnum amico- 
 rum numerum habitilros esse.' 17. Amicos liabens ; consul 
 amicos habens ; amicos habiturus ; consules amicos habituri. 
 18. Ob eas causas Dunmorix novis rebus ^ studebat. 19. 
 Monendo, timendo, tencndi, causa tenendl, studium habendl. 
 
 1 See Suggestion XVITI., 1. 
 
 * Memorid, literally, by i?ic memory, Ablative of Means ; render in 
 memory. 
 
 - See 102, 1S4, ti. < See 54, Rule XII. 
 
 1 
 
PL Ace in which. 147 
 
 ji>. OmiR'S fcrO Galll novis rebus student et ad bellum celeri- 
 lor excitantur; omnes autem homines llbertatl student. 
 
 184. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. We shall always retain the recollection of these things. 
 .. May you ever retain the recollection of this day. 3. The 
 
 >nsul says that he shall always retain the recollection of 
 vdur friendship. 4. For what reason did the Gauls desire a 
 revolution at that time? 5. Docs not Caesar say that the 
 Gauls always desire a revolution? He says that all men 
 desire liberty. C. Let us obey all the laws, and let us not 
 desire a revolution. 7. Obeying, about to obey; obeying 
 the laws, about to obey the laws; by obeying^ the laws,' of 
 keying the laws, the desire of obeying the laws. 
 
 8. By being silent^ you avoided suspicion of fear. 9. 
 Let us not fear the Gennans without cause. 10. We ought 
 not to regard them as enemies without cause. 11. Would 
 tliat they had not feared* us without cause. 12. How many 
 legions will our commander have with him in Italy? They 
 say that he will have five legions with him. 13. Tiie general 
 lys that he shall always regard us as his friends. 14. So 
 uMcat fear took possession of the Romans, that they did not 
 
 retain* the recollection of their ancient courage. 
 
 '^ 
 
 LESSON LXIIL 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. — ACTIVE VOICE. — 
 RULE XXX. 
 
 185. Examples. — Place in which. 
 
 1 . In nostns castrU fuit He toas in our camp. 
 
 2. JiOmae fuit. He tpas at Rome. 
 
 ^ Use the Ablative of the Gomnd, as Ablative of Means. 
 > Komembcr that the Gerund governs the same case as other parts of 
 the verb. 
 
 • For Mood and Tense, see 114. 483, 2. « See 123, 500, II. 
 
148 PLACE IN wniciL 
 
 Note. — The Latin usage illustrated in the Locative Ablative 
 catirU, and in the Locative Jiomae, is expressed in the following 
 
 RULE XXX. — Place in wblcli. 
 
 425. The Placi-: in which is denoted — 
 
 I. Generally by the Locative Ablative * with the preposi- 
 tion in: 
 
 Ilannibal in Italia fuit, Hannibal was in Italy. Nep. In nostris 
 castris, in our camp, Caes. In Appia via, on the Appian way. Cic. 
 
 n. In Names of Towns by the Zocalice^* if such a form 
 exists, otherwise by the Locatioe Ablative: 
 
 Romae fuit, he was at Rome. Cic CorinUti pucros docebat, he 
 taught boya at Cobinth. Cic. AthtnU fuit, he tca» at Athens. Cic 
 
 1. In the names of places which arc not towns, Uie Locative 
 Ablative is often used without a preposition, when Uie idea of 
 means, manner, or cause is combined with tliat o( place: 
 
 Castris se teDuit, fic kept himself jhcaut. Caes. Aliqacm tectd recipere, 
 to rtceiee any one nr ovB*s owir bovsb. Cic Proelio cadere, to fall nr 
 BATTLE. Caes. 
 
 2. Tbo Ablatives locO, locia, parte, partibus, dcxti-d, laeva, sinistra 
 terrth and marl, esjieclally when qualified by an adjective, and 
 other Ablatives, when qualified by tOtHS, nre generally used with- 
 out the preposition : 
 
 Aliqaid loco pOnere, to put anythinff is its place. Cic. Terra manqoe, 
 on land and sea. Liv. Tota Graecia, in all Greece. Nep. 
 
 426. Like Names of Towns are used — 
 
 1. Many Names of Islands : 
 
 Lesbl vixit, he lived in Lesbos. Nep. Conon Cypri vixit, Conon 
 lived in Cyprus. Nep. 
 
 2. The Locatives domi, run, hum!, militiae, and belli: 
 Domi mHitiacque, at home and in the field, Cic. Rfiri agere vitam, 
 
 to spend life in the country. Liv. 
 
 * The Locative Ablative does not differ in form from any other Abla- 
 tive. It is simply the Ablative used with the force of the original Loca- 
 tive, i.e. to designate the place of the action. 
 
 • See 11, 48,4; 32,51.8; 63, GO, 4. The Locative was the original con- 
 struction in all names of places. 
 
PLACE IN WHICH. 
 
 149 
 
 186. Vocabulary. 
 
 Agediiicum, i, n. 
 
 Alesia, ae,/. 
 
 Apertus, a, uni, 
 
 Avus, i, m, 
 
 Bibrax, actis, n. 
 
 Contineo, ere, tinui, tcntuiu, 
 
 Designo, are, avl, fttum, 
 Deterred, ere, ui, ituin, 
 Difficultiis, atis,/. 
 Domiis, us,/. 
 Genuva, ae,/. 
 Iinprobus, a, um, 
 Karthago, inis,/. 
 LargUer, adv. 
 
 Mare, is, 71. 
 Multitudo, iuls,/. 
 Obtineo, ere, tinui, tentum, 
 Seditiosus, a, um, 
 Servitus, litis,/. 
 Solum, adv. 
 
 Agedincum, a town of tbc Senones In 
 
 central Gaul. 
 Alesia, a town in central Gaul. 
 open. 
 
 (jrandfather. 
 
 JUbraXj a town of the Renii. 
 to retain, keep, confine, restrain ; to 
 
 enclose, surround, 
 to desifjnate, indicate, 
 to deter, 
 difficulty. 
 
 house, home ; domi, at home. 
 Geneva. 
 
 wicked, unprincipled. 
 Carthage, 
 largely, widely, extensively ; largiter 
 
 potest, he has extensive iuflacnce. 
 sea. 
 
 multitude ; the multitude, common 
 to obtain, hold. [people, 
 
 seditious, 
 servitude, slavery, 
 only, 
 man. 
 
 187. Translate into English. 
 1. Caesar eo tempore in citeriore Gallia crat. 2. Eodem 
 tera}X)re exercitiis noster in Galliii hiemabat. 3. Dicunt 
 imperatorcm in Gallia in hlbcmis f uisse. 4. German! Aeduos in 
 semtdte tenere non dobent. 5. Ariovistus, rex GerraanOrum, 
 eo die exercituni castris * coiitinuit. 6. Aperto man* tern pesta- 
 tes timebamus. 7. Summa erat a|)ert6 marl difficultas navigan- 
 dL* 8. Allobroges legatos ad senatum miserunt rogatum aux- 
 ilium. 9. Dumnorix magnum numerum cqnitatils habebat. 
 
 1 Ablatire of Place, involving tho idea of Means. 
 
 * See 186, 425, II., 2. 
 
 • yaviftamtl. Genitive of tho Gerund, depending upon difflcnUdn, Ob- 
 werre that tho Genitive of the Gerund is here treated as anj' other Geni- 
 tive would bo troatcd iu the same situation. 8eo 28, Uule XVI. 
 
 II 
 
150 PLACE IN WHICH. 
 
 10. Liscos dicit Dumnorigem, DivitiacI fratrem, magnum 
 numcrum cquitatQs semper circum sc habere. Is non solum 
 domi,* sed etiam apud finitimus clvilates largiter poterat.^ 
 
 11. Caesar duas legiones Agedinci* collocaverat. Ipse 
 Bibracte hiemare constituit. 12. Consul eo tempore 
 ]{6mae * erat. 13. Timor hostes Alcsiae occupavit. 14. Avus 
 hOjus Galli, viri fortissimi, amicus ab senatQ nostro appellatus 
 erat. 15. Avus hQjus Galli in civitatc sua rOgiium obtinuerat, 
 amicus ab senatu nostro apjiellatus. 16. Dicunt hac oratione 
 Dumnorigcm desTgnatum esse. 17. Seditiosa atque improba 
 oratione muItitQdincm dutcrretis n$ frQmentum comportcnt.' 
 
 188. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. They say that you have been in Italy. We were in 
 winter quarters in Italy. 2. Ought wo not to place our 
 army in winter quarters in Gaul? The army ought to be 
 placed in winter quarters in the vicinity of {around) Geneva. 
 The general has already decided to station three legions at 
 Geneva.* 3. Ariovistus, the king of the Germans, was not at 
 home,* but was laying waste the lands of the Gauls. 4. 
 Messengers announced that the consul at that time was at 
 Carthage. 
 
 5. You ought not to hold the deserters in' servitude. We 
 shall keep them in camp.* 6. How many Gauls did Ariovistus 
 hold in servitude ? They announced that Ariovistus always 
 held a very large number of Gauls in servitude. 7. Was 
 Caesar at that time in Italy, or in Gaul ?• He was at Kome, 
 and he had with him a large number of friends. 8. Was 
 there not at Geneva a bridge across the Rhone ?^ Caesar 
 says that at Geneva there was a bridge across the Rhone. 
 
 1 See 185, 425, 426, II. 
 
 " Largiter poterat, literally, was largely able ; render, %cas very power- 
 ful, or had great influence. » See 119, 497, II. 
 
 * What Caw will you use in rendering at Geneva, at home? See 185i 
 425; 426, 2. 
 
 * In camp; see 185, 425, 1. « For Double Question, see 106, 353. 
 ' Across the Rhone : Latin idiom, dj the Rhone. 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 161 
 
 LESSON LXIV. 
 
 SECOND CON.TTJG ATION. — INDICATIVE PASSIVE. — RULE 
 IV. — REVIEW OF RULES L, II., AND IlL 
 
 189. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb MotieO, learn the Indicative Mood of the 
 P:issive voice. Sec page 154. 
 
 190. Examples. — Vocative. 
 
 1. Tuum est, Serpl, rCgniim. TVie kingdom is yours, SeryiuS. 
 
 2. Quid est, Calilina ? Why is it, Catiline ? 
 
 Note. — In these examples the names of the jiersons addressed, 
 Servi and CatiUnay are in the Vocative, in accordance with the Latin 
 usage expressed in the following 
 
 RULE IV. — Case of Address. 
 
 3G9. The name of the person or thing addressed is 
 put in the Vocative: 
 
 Perge, Laell, proceed, Laei.ius. CIc Quid est, CatiUna t Why U 
 it, Catiline? Cic. O dii immortules, O immortal oods. Cic 
 
 LESSON LXV. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE PASSIVE. — RULB 
 IV. — REVIEW OF RULES I., II., AND UI. — EX- 
 ERCISES. 
 
 191. Vocabulary. 
 
 Alter, era, erum, 45, 151. other (of two), second. 
 
 Antea, aJc. before. 
 
 Ascend it, he ascends, 
 
 Bellicosus, a, urn, warlike. 
 
 Clamor, oris, m. shout. 
 
 Consults, Are, avi, atum, to consult. 
 
 IK'mum, adv. at length. 
 
 IX'tinco, ere, tinui, tentuui, to detain. 
 
 Ferus, a, urn, fierce^ aatage. 
 
162 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Impended, ere, to overhang. 
 
 Inter, prep. to. ace. among. 
 
 Jubeo, ere, jussi, jussum, to order. [Gaul. 
 
 Jura, ae, m. Jura^ a mountain range in eastern 
 
 Lux, lucis,/. light; prima lux, the beginning qf 
 
 light, daybreakf early davon,^ 
 
 Hunltid, onis,/. fortification. 
 
 Nervli, drum, mi. pi. the NertHf a tribe of northern Gaul. 
 
 Obsidco, ere, aedi, sessum, to besiege. 
 
 Salus, utis,/. attfety. 
 
 Sapienter, ado. wisely. (powerful German tribe. 
 
 Suvbi, drum, m. pi. the SuebU Sued, or Suabians, a 
 Summus, a, um, svp. q/'supenis, highest ; highest part of, top qf.^ 
 
 Terrco, ere, ui, itum, to terrify. 
 
 192. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Nonne ab amTels moniti estis? A vobis, amicT, monitT 
 Bumus. 2. Nunc, mllitcs, sapienter monOmur. 3. Prima 
 lOce summus nions a Labicud tenebatur. 4. Nunuo boo 
 oppidum ab hostibus tenutur? Ab bostibus tenetur. 5. 
 Vicus qui apjKjllatur OetodGrus altissimls montibus* con- 
 tinetur. 6. Monies qui impendebant a maxima multitQdine 
 hostium tenebantur. 7. Nenil maxime ferl inter Belgas 
 habentur. 8. Helvetil undique loci natOra continentur, tlna 
 ex parte flOmine Kheno, altera ex parte monte* Jura. 9. 
 Omnes hostium impetfis fortiter sustinGbantur. 
 
 10. Hostes qui Alesiae obsidcbantur de salute consulta- 
 bant. 11. II qui munltionibus continentur clamore suorum 
 animos confirmabant. 12. Sueborum gens est longe maxima 
 et bellicosissima Germanormn omnium. 13. Romanae naves 
 tempestatibus detinebantur. 14. Caesar Labienum cum 
 duabus legionibus montem ascendere jubet. 15. Caesar 
 principes convocavit, in his Liscum,* magistratnm qui Yer- 
 
 1 Certain adjectives often designate a particdxar part of an object: 
 prima nox, 'the first part of the night; ' media aestdte, *in the middle of 
 summer:' summus mon^, 'the top (highest part) of the momitain.' The 
 adjectives thns used are primus, medius, iltimus, eztremus, postremus, 
 intimus, summus, intimus, imus, supremus. reliquus, cetera, etc. 
 
 * Ablative of Means. * Object of convocavit. 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 158 
 
 pobretus appellutur. 16. Turn demum, quod antea tacueram, 
 oiiuntiavl. 
 
 193. IVanslate into Latin. 
 
 1. Many Gauls were held in slavery by Ariovistus, the 
 king of the Germans. 2. On that day the Germans were 
 kept in camp by their commander. 3. Brave soldiers, you 
 Iiave been kept in camp by your commander. 4. Judges, 
 you have been regarded by Caesar as friends.* 5. Galba, the 
 lieutenant, was ordered to winter in a village which is called 
 Octodurus. 6. You will always be regarded by us as friends. 
 7. This mountain was held on that day by the Romans. 8. 
 Was not Labienus, the lieutenant, commanded by Caesar to 
 ascend this mountain ? He was commanded to ascend this 
 mountain, and to hold it. 
 
 9. The difficulty of navigation ^ on the open sea is great, 
 and our vessels will be detained by the storms. 10. Was 
 not Dumnorix, the brother of Divitiacus, warned by Caesar? 
 lie was warned by Caesar to avoid all suspicion in future. 
 
 11. AVe have been wanied not to attack this town, on ac- 
 count of the width of the moat and the height of the wall. 
 
 12. We have been ordered to fortify our camp with a ram- 
 l>art. 13. The Suebi were regarded by the Romans as 
 very warlike. 
 
 LESSON LXVI. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE IN FULL. — 
 REVIEW OF RULES XXXVII., XXXVIII, AND XL. 
 
 194. Zessoii from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Mo)ied, learn the Passive voice in full. See 
 the following page. 
 
 1 Remember the Latin idinm. for /rientlx. 
 * Uae the Otrund. 
 
154 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION: B VERBa 
 208. PASSIVE VOICE.— Moneor,/ am odWffd 
 
 Viu Stem, mon, mom; Pusm Stem, monl. 
 
 Pftn. Iwo. 
 
 BM)Q#rls, or re 
 
 mouCtnr 
 
 FBINCIFAL PARTS. 
 Ptsa. Iwr. 
 mooArl, 
 
 iNDicATivB Mood. 
 
 Pansn Tum. 
 /«m«i»iMdL 
 
 P««r. IwD. 
 mooita* 
 
 mon^mnr 
 mon^miiil 
 monentar 
 
 mooC^Aris, or re 
 
 iDon«bAtMr 
 
 tnon^l»or 
 mon^berlii, or re 
 monCbltar 
 
 monitn* am 
 monitns e> 
 iDOoit«9 e«t 
 
 monitns eram* 
 monitvs er&a 
 monitiis erat 
 
 moiiAbAminl 
 mon^^boiitar 
 
 Fumti. 
 lAaU or witf 6« acbnted. 
 
 moD^bimnr 
 iDonJ^biniinl 
 moD^buntar 
 Pkrfict. 
 I have been advised^ I was advued. 
 
 monitl •vm«fl 
 moniti entlu 
 monitl •ant 
 
 PLrPERFECT. 
 
 monitl er&mii 
 monitl er&ti» 
 monitl erant 
 FcrrRE Perfect. 
 / shall or wiU have been advised. 
 
 monitas erd > 
 monitas eris 
 monitas erit 
 
 monitl eriaias 
 monitl eritis 
 monitl eraat 
 
 » See 170, 206, foot-notea. 
 
PASSIVE VOICE, 
 
 SUBJUNCTPIVE. 
 Prissnt. 
 
 Mar/ I be advised, let him be advised. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 155 
 
 monear 
 
 moneftris, or re 
 mone&tur 
 
 moncAmur 
 mone&inini 
 moneantiur 
 
 Imperfect. 
 / ihotdd be advised, he tootdd be advised. 
 roonCrer I monCri^inur 
 
 mon4&r£ri«, or ro monCr^iiiiiil 
 
 monCretur i monCrentiur 
 
 Perfect. 
 I mat/ have been advised, or I have becii advised. 
 
 monitns sim* 
 monitns 8ls 
 mouitua «it 
 
 moniti slmus 
 monitl sltitf 
 monitx siiat 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 I should have been advised, Jie would have been advUed* 
 
 monitl essCmas 
 monitl essCtUi 
 monitl esftent 
 
 monitns 
 monitufi essCs 
 monitas esset 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Fret mon4Sre, be thou advised; 
 J\U. monitor, thou shall be ad- 
 vised, 
 monitor, he shall be advised ; 
 
 Intinitive. 
 
 Pres. mon^rl, to be advised. 
 
 Per/, monitas eitMe/ to have been 
 
 advised. 
 FmL monitum Irl, to be about to 
 
 beadvised. 
 
 monCminl, be ye advised. 
 
 monentor, they shall be advised. 
 Participle. 
 
 Per/, monitas, advised. 
 
 Ger. monendas, to be advised, de- 
 serving to be advised 
 
 > 9^ 177, 206, foot-notes. 
 
 * Ur Ikad bssm advisMl, you had teen adtind, ota 
 
156 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE. — REVIEW OF 
 RULES XXXVU., XXXVIH., AND XL. — EXEKCIStlS. 
 
 196. Vocabulary. 
 
 Amor, oris, m. (ove. 
 
 AnDUiis, a, um, aiMWi/, annually, for a year. 
 
 AuctorlUs, iiis,/. atUkority, it{/iuence. 
 
 Cunsidius, ii, m. Considius, an officer in Caesar's 
 
 Creo, are, ari, atom, to create, appoint, elect, larmy. 
 
 Falsus, a, um, false. 
 
 Iniperilus, a, um, unakHful, IgnoranL 
 
 Mors, mortis,/. dtaih, 
 
 Nex, necis,/. death, putting to death. 
 
 Nonuulli, ac, a. pi. some. 
 
 rerterreo, ere, ui. Hum, to terrify greatly, terrify, frighten. 
 
 Plus, comp. adv., pos. mullum, more. 
 
 Potestas, atis,/. power. 
 
 Publius, ii, m. Publius, a Roman praenOmen. 
 
 Renuntio, are, avi, atum, to report. 
 
 Humor, oris, m. rumor, report. 
 
 ^I'se, reduplicated form of &e. See 
 
 lemerarins, a, urn, rash. [102, 184, 4. 
 
 Valco, ere, ui, itum, to avail, pretaiL 
 
 196. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Oranes colics a nobis tenentur. 2. Omnia loca supcriora 
 a nolns tenebuntur. 3. Omnes colics ac loca saperiora ab 
 exercitfl tenebantur. 4. Ne falsis rumoribus terrcamur. 5. 
 Nu his riimoribus terreantur. 6. Utinam omnes hostes hoc 
 rumore terreantur. 7. Dicunt vos his rumoribus terreri. 8. 
 Homines temeraril atque imperiti saepe falsTs rumoribus ter- 
 rentur. 9. Imperator dicit homines temerarios atque imperi- 
 tos saepe falsis rumoribus terreri. 10. Publius Consldius 
 timore perterritus renuntiavit montem ab hostibus tenerl. 
 11. Sunt nonnulll qui multitudinem deterrent ne frumentum 
 comportent. 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 157 
 
 12. Nonnalli principSs adventil nostrl exercitds perterritl 
 erant. Hi principOs, adventu nostii exercitus perterritl, 
 IC'gutOs ad Caesareiii mittebant. 13. Liscus in conventu 
 dixit sesG ob cam causam diil tacuisse. 14. Non is sum qui 
 gravissime mortis perlculo terrear.^ 15. Mllites mortis perl- 
 culo terrerl non debent. 16. Vergobretus, qui creatur 
 annuus, vitae necisque in suos* habet potestatem. 17. 
 Auctoritas Dumnorigis apud plebem plus valGbat quam 
 ipslus magistrutus.' 
 
 197. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Have not your vessels been detained by storms? Mes- 
 sengers have announced to us that our vessels have been 
 detained by storms. 2. May we always be regarded by you 
 as friends. 3. They say that the Aedui were always re- 
 garded by Caesar as friends. 4. Many towns were besieged 
 by the Germans. 5. Messengers announce that many towns 
 have been besieged by the Germans. Let us ascertain which 
 towns have been besieged by them. 6. We are advised by 
 our friends, who have large experience in military affairs, to 
 remain {keejy aurselves)* in camj). 7. The' ambassadors were 
 BO terrified that they remained silent for a long time. 
 
 8. You ought not to be terrified by these rumors. 9. 
 Would that we had not been terrified by false rumors. 10. 
 Were not the Gauls often terrified by false rumors? Caesar 
 said that the Gauls were often terrified by false rumors. 11. 
 By what rumors, my brave soldiers, have you been terrified? 
 12. With (amotiff) you, Romans, the love of country ought 
 to avail more than the fear of death. 13. Announce to the 
 
 > Subjunctive in a clause denoting Resalt. See 123.500,1.; Sugges- 
 tion XV'H., 3. 
 
 * In 9UU8, literally into or against hi» oicn, render ovkr or among hi» 
 subjects, or his countrymen. Adjectives in the plural are often used sub- 
 stantively in I^tln, as in English. Suds is thus used. 
 
 ' Govcrne<i by auctoritas understood. 
 
 4 For Mood, see 119, Rule XLII. 
 
158 FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 general that this monntain is held by us. 14. Let us hold 
 the mountain which we were ordered to occupy. 
 
 LESSON LXVIIL 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. — PASSIVE VOICE IN 
 FULL. — REVIEW OF RULES XLI., XLII., AND XLUL 
 
 198. Vocabulary, 
 
 Adequito, are, avi, atuni, to ride toward^ ride. 
 
 Alius, a, ud, 46, 151, othert another. 
 
 Conscrvo, ire, avi, atiiin, to save, preservet tpcre. 
 
 Gubernator, dris, in. pilot. 
 
 Iinpctro, are, avi, atuin, to obtain one^a request. 
 
 Liger, is, m. the Liger, now the LoirCj a river in 
 
 southwestern Gaul. 
 
 Lingones, um, m. pi. the Llngones, a tribe of central Gaul. 
 
 NautA, ae, m. sailor. 
 
 Navis longa, a long ship, ship qf war. 
 
 NSve, coi\f, noTf and not, 
 
 Sed, cot\f. buL 
 
 Triplex, icis, triple. 
 
 Undique, (ulo. on every tide. 
 
 199. TVanslate into English, 
 
 1. Vicus appellabatur Octodurus. 2. Dicunt vicum appel- 
 latum esse Octodilrum. 3. Dicebant hunc vicum altissirais 
 montibus undique contineri. 4. Ne ad bellura celeriter ex- 
 citemur. 5. Caesar dicit oranes fere Gallos novis rebus 
 studere et ad bellum celeriter excitari. 6. Dlxerunt se tibf 
 rem enuntiasse,* sed intellegere quanto cum periculo eam 
 rem enuntiassent.^ 7. Caesar ad Lingones litteras ntintios- 
 que misit ne Helvetios frumento neve alia re juvarent. 8. 
 Dicunt eam rem per fugitivos hostibus nuntiatam esse. 9. 
 Tum demum Caesar partem suarum copiarum quae castra 
 
 1 Contracted from enuntidvisse and enuntidvissent. 
 
FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. 159 
 
 hoetium oppflgnaret* misit. 10. Triplicem aciem pro castrfe 
 Instruebat. 
 
 11. Galli legatos ad Caesarcm de deditione mlserunt, et 
 impetraverunt ut conservarentur.* 12. Ne montes qui vico 
 Octoduro impendent ab hostibus teneantur. 13. Naves 
 longae in fl amine Ligere aedificentur. 14. Caesar naves 
 longasin flumine Ligere aedificari jubet. 15. Nautae guber- 
 natoresque ex provincia nostra comparentur. 16. Caesar 
 naiitas gubernatoresque ex provincia nostra comparari jubet. 
 17. Caesari nQntiatum est" equites Ariovisti ad nostros 
 adequitare. 
 
 200. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. The village in which Galba wintered was surrounded 
 by very high mountains. Did he understand with how great 
 peril he was wintering in that village ? He understood that 
 he was wintering there with great peril. 2. Horsemen rode 
 toward us to announce the words of the king. 3. The 
 Aedui were so terrified, that they sent messengers to Caesar 
 to implore help. 4. The general sent a part of his forces to 
 fortify the town. 6. Caesar sent a lieutenant to order ships 
 of war to be built. 6. Ten ships of war have been built on 
 the Rhine. 7. The deserters obtained their request, not to 
 be regarded {that they might not he regarded) aa enemies. 
 
 8. Those who were ordered to withstand the attack of the 
 enemy were so terrified, that they implored help from Caesar. 
 9. May our authority avail more with you than that* of our 
 enemies. 10. The messengers said that their towns had 
 been besieged by the enemy. 11. Brave soldiers will not be 
 terrified by the fear of death. 12. The general says that his 
 
 1 For Mood, see llO. 407, 1. ; see also Sagf;estion X VXE., 3. 
 
 * Ut consercarentur. This is an Object Clause, depending upon imp&' 
 travenint, bat it was developed out of a Claute of Result, and accordingly 
 has the Subjunctive. 
 
 * The Subject of nuntiatum est is the claoae equitis . . . adequitare. 
 See SugKestion XV III.. 1. 
 
 * Omit the pronooo In rendering Into 
 
160 FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 soldiers are so brave that they are not terrified by tlie fear 
 of death. 13. May that city always be held by our friends. 
 14. Would that these towns were held by our friends. * 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 MUST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS IN FULL. — EXEB- 
 CIS£ IN KlfL(\I>LN6 AT SIGHT. 
 
 201. Head at Sights examine car^fkdlyy and translate into 
 
 Englisfi} 
 
 Caesar convocavit prTneipes, quorum maj^am copiam in 
 castrls habebat, in his Liscum, magistratum Aeduorum. I lie 
 magtstratus, qui Vergobretus appellatur, creatur annuus, ct 
 vitac necisquc in suds habet potestatem. 
 
 Caesar principle Aeduorum graviter accusavit. Turn 
 demum Liscus, quod antea tacuerat, enQntiavit. Haec sunt 
 verba : " Sunt nonnQllI, quorum auctoritas apud plebem pltis 
 valet quam ipsorum magistratuum. Hi seditiosa atque 
 improba oratione multitOdinem deterrent ne frQmentum cora- 
 portent. Ab ilsdem vestra consilia hostibus eniintiantur." 
 Postea dixit intellegere sese quanto cum periculo Caesari 
 rem enQntiilsset, et ob earn causam diQ tacuisse. 
 
 Hac oratione Dumnorix, Divitiaci frater, designatus est. 
 Is magnum numerum equitatus semper circum se habebat, et 
 non solum domi, sed etiam apud finitimas civitates, largiter 
 poterat. 
 
 202. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Liscus said that with the populace the authority of 
 these citizens availed more, than that of the magistrate him- 
 self, and that they deterred the multitude from bringing 
 {that they should fiot bring) grain. He also said that they 
 announced to the enemy nearly all the plans of the Romans. 
 
 1 See DirecticQS for Reading at Sight, 137. 
 
TimtD CONJUGATION. 161 
 
 2. Who was Dumnorix? He was an Aeduan chief, the 
 brother of Divitiacus, who was called the friend of Caesar 
 and the Roman people. 
 
 3. So great fear took possession of the Aedui, whose lands 
 the Helvetii were devastating, that they sent ambassadors 
 to Caesar to implore aid from him. 4. The general ought 
 to lead his army through the lands (Jields) of the Aedui 
 into the territory of the Santones, who are not far from our 
 I>rovince. 5. The general is hastening with forced marches 
 into Italy ; he will there enrol three legions, and lead out 
 of winter quarters the five that are now wintering in the 
 vicinity of Rome. 
 
 LESSON LXX. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE ACTIVE. — REVIEW 
 OF RULES v., VI., AND IX. 
 
 203. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 
 In the verb Bego^ learn the Indicative Mood of the Active 
 Voice. See page 1G4. 
 
 204. Vocabulary. 
 
 Auxilia, drum, n. pi. auxiliaries. 
 
 ConscribO, ere, scrips?, scriptnm, to enrol, enlist. [decide. 
 
 Constituo, ere, stitui, stitutum, to station, place; to determine, 
 
 Continuus, a, uiu, continuous, successive, 
 
 Delibero, are, avi, atum, to deliberate. 
 
 Dico, ere, dixi, dictum, to say, speak. 
 
 Eiluco, ere, duxi, ductuin, to lead out. 
 
 Ilicuis, em Is,/. winter. 
 
 fnstruo, ere, struxi, structum, to draio up, arrange, array. 
 
 Interim, ado. meanwhile, in the meantime. 
 
 Item, adv. also, likewise, 
 
 Jugum, i, n. ridije, height. 
 
 Maneo, ere, mansi, mansum, to remain. 
 
 Metlius, %, um, middle ; the middle q/".* 
 
 ^ See foot-note on summus, 101. 
 
162 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 MItto, erCf misi, missum, to 9end, 
 
 Produco, ere, duxi, ductum, to lead forth. 
 
 Pruximc, sup. adt. nearest^ most recently ^ UuL 
 
 Quattuor, indeclinabU, four. 
 
 Reducd, ere, dQxI, ductura, to lead back. 
 
 Sextwi, a, um, sixth. 
 
 Subduco, ere, duxT, ductnm, to withdraw^ lead off. 
 
 Sumo, ere, sumpsl, suiuptuin, to take, 
 
 Veiehuiiis, a, uiu, zeteran, 
 
 206. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Caesar diem ad deliberandum* sGmpsit. 2. Nonne diem 
 ad deliberandum sflmetis? Diem ad deliberandum suiu]>- 
 simus. 3. Ilostes diem ad deliberandum sQmpserant. 4. 
 Quinque legiones quae sustineant* hostium impetum mitto- 
 mus. 5. Caesar copius suas in proximum collem subduxerat, 
 equitatumque qui sustineret' hostium impetum raiserat. 
 Ijise interim in coUe medio' aeiem instrOxit legiOnum quat- 
 tuor veteranarum, sed in summo' jugo duas legiones, quas in 
 Gallia citeriore proximo conscnpserat, et omnia auxilia col- 
 locavit. 6. Nonne haec in conventQ dlxistl? Ea quae in 
 conventd dixl sunt vera. 7. Quid Liscus dixerat? Liscus 
 in conventQ dixerat Dumnorigem, DIvitiacI fratrem, novis 
 rebus studere. 
 
 8. Imperator solis occasQ* suas copias in castra redQcet. 
 9. Caesar ex eo die dies* continuos quinque pro castris suas 
 copias produxit et aciem Instruxit. 10. Ipse constituerat in 
 Gallia hiemare et totam hiemem ad • exercitum manere. 11. 
 Caesar sex legiones pro castris in acie constituit. Hostes 
 item suas copias ex castris eduxerant. 12. Nonne dixisti 
 
 * Ad deliberandum^ 'for deliberation,* or 'to deliberate.' Diliberandum 
 Is a Gerund in the Accusative depending upon ad. In Gerunds the Ac- 
 cusative always depends upon a preposition. 
 
 * See Suggestion XVII., 3 
 
 * See foot-note on summus, 101. 
 
 * Ablative of Time. See 03. Rule XXXI. 
 » Duration of Time. See 08, Rule IX. 
 
 « JVeor, in the vicinity of. 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 163 
 
 Aeduos a seniltil populi Roman! amicos appellatOs esse? 
 Dixl eos a senatu fratrOs appellatos esse. 
 
 208. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. What did you say in the convention? I said that 
 nearly all the Gauls at that time desired a revolution. 2. 
 Shall you not send ambassadors to the neighboring states 
 to implore aid from them ? We have already sent ambas- 
 sadors to these states, and have established peace and friend- 
 shi}) with them. 3. How many legions shall you enrol in 
 Italy? We shall enrol five legions in Italy, and three in 
 Gaul. 4. The general had placed his legions in line of 
 battle before the camj). 6. Have you taken time for * de- 
 liberation ? We have taken time for deliberation, and have 
 decided to send ambassadors to the Belgae. 
 
 6. The enemy kept themselves in camp for five days,' 
 but on the sixth day they led their forces out of the camp, 
 and placed them in line of battle. 7. Caesar placed in 
 winter quarters the legions that he had enrolled in Italy. 
 8. Have you decided to pass the winter in Italy? We have 
 decided to remain in Gaul during the whole winter. 9. For 
 many days the Romans had formed the lino of battle in 
 front of the camp. 10. Caesar says that he remained near 
 the army the whole whiter. 
 
 LESSON LXXI. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE IN FULL. 
 207. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 
 In the verb Regd^ learn the Active Voice in full. See the 
 following page. 
 
 I For; render by a<f. 
 
 * For tho Latiu ooustructiuu, 80« 08, Kule IX. 
 
164 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION: CONSONANT VERBa 
 209. ACTIVE VOICE.— Rcg», /mfe. 
 
 ViEB Stem, t«^ ; pRniMT Smi, ttgt} 
 
 PRUtCIPAL PABT8. 
 
 Psn. Inr. Pkrf. Iivo 
 
 reger«, rfixl,' 
 
 Ikdicative Mood. 
 Yusaet 
 ImU. 
 
 Pfen. Iso. 
 
 Btrpiim. 
 rCctM«« 
 
 nravLAB. 
 
 
 FLUKAU 
 
 xg* 
 
 
 regtaiwi 
 
 regis 
 
 
 nigltis 
 
 regit 
 
 
 WgM«t 
 
 
 iMPSBflCr. 
 
 
 / toas ruling ^ or / m/edL 
 
 reg«bam 
 
 
 reg«l»Ainvs 
 
 regeMs 
 
 
 reg«b&tiH 
 
 ngfihrnt 
 
 
 reg^bani 
 
 
 FrrrRK. 
 
 
 IthaUotmUruU. 
 
 ragaai 
 
 
 rcg«iBWi 
 
 wg«» 
 
 
 reg«ti« 
 
 reget 
 
 regcat 
 
 
 FsftrKCT. 
 
 
 I have ruled, or I ruled. 
 
 r«xl 
 
 
 rexiiH«9 
 
 i^xisU 
 
 
 rexistis 
 
 rfixlt 
 
 
 rex«riuit, or «re 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 /Aarfru/oi 
 
 rtxeram 
 
 
 rCxerilinas 
 
 rexer&s 
 
 
 rexeratis 
 
 rfixerat 
 
 
 rSxerant 
 
 
 FmjRE Perfect. 
 
 
 /«Aa//oriwtfAawru/«/. 
 
 rtxcrft 
 
 
 rSxerfmas 
 
 rgxerls 
 
 
 rCxerttis 
 
 rexerit 
 
 
 rSxeriat 
 
 ' The chantcteristle is a variable vowel— /i, u, «, < ; reff^, rein<Qt, regCTe, regis ; Coxv 
 tius calla It the thematic vowel; see Curtius, I., p. 199, but od ^, see also Meyer, 441. 
 » i>ee p. 3, 30, :«. 
 
ACTIVE VOICE, 
 
 165 
 
 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 May I rule, Id him rule} 
 
 
 BiKOrLAR. 
 
 FLXTftAL. 
 
 
 regam 
 
 
 regain us 
 
 
 regft* 
 
 
 regatiM 
 
 
 regat 
 
 
 regant 
 
 
 
 
 
 / thould rule, he wmld rule. 
 
 
 regerem 
 
 
 reger«ma« 
 
 
 regcr€ii 
 
 
 regerCtlM 
 
 
 rcgeret 
 
 
 regerent 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 I may 
 
 have ruled, or Iliave ruled. 
 
 
 rCxerfm 
 
 
 rexerfmas 
 
 
 rCxcrfs 
 
 
 rSxerftis 
 
 
 r^xerit 
 
 
 r^xerint 
 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 I should have ruled, he toould have ruled. 
 
 
 Tf^xlnHetu 
 
 
 TBxi»»emnm 
 
 
 TiixISHdH 
 
 
 rexis»«tl« 
 
 
 tixi»»et 
 
 
 rSxItfseiit 
 
 
 
 Imperative. • 
 
 /Tea 
 
 
 1 reglte, rule ye. 
 
 Put. 
 
 repltd, thou shall rule, \ regit5te, ye shall rule. 
 
 
 regit 6, he shall rule 
 
 1 reguntd, they shall rule. 
 
 
 ISFTSVnVE. 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Prm. 
 
 rojjcre, to rule. 
 
 
 /V«s. rcgCns, ruling. 
 
 l\rf. 
 
 rexiMSO, to have ruled. 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 rCctam* esBO, to be about 
 
 Fut. r^cittrtiu, about to 
 
 
 to rule. 
 
 
 
 rmU. 
 
 Gerund. 
 
 Oen. regendl, of ruling, 
 Dai. rcgendO, for ruling, 
 Aee. rc^endum, ruling, 
 .\f>l. re^endo, by ruling. 
 
 Supnnc 
 
 Aee. rectni, <9 m^ 
 
 AbL recto, t9nii,yvwUL 
 
 > But 00 the traiulatioo ofthe SaltfaiietlT*, Me 111, 190. 
 
 12 
 
166 
 
 TUUW CONJUGATION. 
 
 208. Vocabtdary, 
 
 Adduc5, ere, dQxi, ductum, 
 Arvenil, drum, m. pL 
 Cognosco, ere, novi, nitum, 
 Conjungo, ere, junxi, jilnctum, 
 Consulo, ere, sului, sultum, 
 Contendo, ere, tendi, tontum, 
 Defendo, ere, fcndi, fensura, 
 Delnde, ado. 
 
 Gentit,eris, n. 
 Inter sS, 
 
 Kdndum, a(/r. 
 Nunc, adc. 
 PericultHus, a, uni, 
 Portus, us, in, 
 Potentdtus, As, m. 
 Prfmum, aup, ado. 
 Tenuis, e, 
 Tribunus, i, m. 
 
 Unqujun, ado. 
 
 to lead iOj lead^ bring. [Gaul. 
 the Arvemif a tribe of southern 
 to ascertain, 
 tojoin, xtnite. 
 
 to COtiBUlL 
 
 to contend^ strive ; to hasten. 
 
 to dffend. 
 
 tJteny in the next place. 
 
 kindt cloM. 
 
 among themselten; with each 
 
 oUier, toiUi one another, to- 
 not yeL \y ether. 
 
 now. 
 
 perilous, dangerous, 
 port, harbor. 
 
 power, dominion, control, 
 first 
 
 thin ; feeble. 
 tr}bunc, one of the six principal 
 
 officers of the legion. 
 ever, ai any Ume, 
 
 209. Translate into EnglisJi. 
 
 1. Nunc do hoc periculosd bello dicam. 2. Primum de 
 gwiere bvlll, deinde de magnUQdine* dicamus. 3. De salQte 
 civium dloere debelis. 4. Patriam defendei-e debemus. 5. 
 Quae civitas unquam antea tarn tenuis fuit quae non portQs 
 suos et agros defenderet?^ 6. Consulite vobis, conservate 
 vos, conjuges, liberos, fortunasque vestras, popull RomanI 
 nomen salutemque defendite. 7. Ob eas causas quiiique 
 legiones in Gallia consrribamus. j 
 
 8. Caesar dicit se in Italiam niagnls itineribus contendisse, I 
 duasque ibt legiones conscripsisse. 9. Aedul et Arverni 
 de potentatu inter se multos annos contcndebant. 10. 
 Imperator tribunes militum monuit ut ])aulatim sesS 
 legiones conjungerent. 11. Milites castra defendant. 12, 
 
 1 That is, de magnitudine belli. 
 
 8 For Mood, see 123, 500. 1. 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 167 
 
 Nonne castra defendetis? Castra defendcmus. 13. Caesar 
 Labienura legatum in TrevcrOs cuin equitiitil misit. 14. 
 Dicunt imperutorera suas copias in proximum collcm sub- 
 duxisse. 15. Postulamus nu quem militem ad colloquium 
 .'i(l<lucatis. IC. Utiuam Ariovistus suas copias in castra 
 reducat. 
 
 210. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. The general has decided to lead back his forces into 
 camp. 2. Caesar says that the enemy led back their forces 
 into camp at sunset. 3. Let us lead our forces out of the 
 camp, and place them in line of battle. 4. Did you not say 
 that the general i)laccd his whole army in line of battle in 
 front of the camj) ? We said that he led out six legions, and 
 })laced them in line of battle in front of the camp. 5. Would 
 that the enemy would lead back their forces into camp. 6. 
 Would that the general had led us back into camp. 
 
 7. Let us speak first of the Romans, then of the Gauls. 8. 
 Yon have spoken of the valor of the soldiers ; speak now of 
 the safety of the citizens. 9. Let us defend the safety of 
 our country. 10. Caesar said that these tribes were at that 
 time contending with each other {among themselves). 11. 
 We ought to consult, not for ourselves, but for our country. 
 12. The general says that he shall consult, not for himself, 
 but for his country. 13. How many legions has the general 
 enrolled in Gaul? 
 
 LESSON LXXIL 
 
 flRST, SECOND, AND THIRD CONJUGATIONS. — ACTIVB 
 VOICE. — REVIEW OP RULES XII. AND XIV. 
 
 211. Vocahulary. 
 
 Commed, are, avi, atum, to go back and forth, resort. 
 
 Deduce, ere, diixi, ductum, to leadfronij conduct, 
 
 Duco, ere, dQxi, ductiim, to lead. 
 
 Efferaino, are, avi, atum, to effeminate, enervaU, 
 
 ExcQsO, are, dvi, atum, to excuse. 
 
108 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Gerd, ere, geitl, festnm, 
 Importd, are, avi, atum, 
 Incolo, ere, colui, cultum, 
 Levitiis, atis,/. 
 Matrimonium, ii, n. 
 
 Menapii, drum, m. pL 
 Merc&tor, oris, m. 
 Matiir§, adt, 
 Noctumas, a, um. 
 Perfrlng6, ere, frrgi, fractuni, 
 Pertined, ere, tinui, tentum, 
 Phalanx, phalangis,/. 
 Praepond, ere, posui, positum, 
 BegiA, 6nis,/. 
 lUpa, ac,/. 
 S^uani, omm, m. pi. 
 Sob,*prep. to. ace. and ahl. 
 Succedd, ere, cessi, cessuiu, 
 Uterque, utraque, utrumque,* 
 
 to carry on, wage, do. 
 
 to bring in^ import, 
 
 to inhabit^ dtoelL 
 
 levity, JlckleneMf {mpuhivene»8. 
 
 marriage; in matrimunium du- 
 
 cer«, to marry. 
 Vie Menapiif a tribe of northern 
 merchant^ trader. [QwaL 
 
 promptly^ early, 
 nocturnal, by night, 
 to break through, 
 to pertain^ tend, 
 phalanx, line. 
 
 to place over or in command of. 
 direction ; region^ districL 
 bank, of a river. 
 
 the Sequani or Sequanianx, atnbo 
 under ; up to. [of eastern Gau). 
 to come under, come up to, ap- 
 each; both. [proach. 
 
 212. TrarulaU into English. 
 
 1. Galli l^atos ad Caesarem miserunt qui se cxcusurcnt. 
 2. Mcrcatdrte ad BelgSs ndn saepe commeant. 3. Mcrca- 
 tores ea, quae ad efTeminandos animos* pertinent, saepe im- 
 portant. 4. Menapil eas regiones incolebant, et ad utramque 
 ripam fluminis KhOnl agros vicosque habebant. 5. Caesar 
 inuturius quam tempos ann! postulabat in hlberna in Se- 
 (|uanOs exercitum dedOxit; hibemls* Labienum praeposuit. 
 6. Galli levitate animi novls rebus studebant. 7. Belgae cum 
 Germanls, qui trans Rhenimi incolunt, bellum gerunt. 
 
 8. Legati dixerunt reliquos omnes Belgas in arrais esse. 
 9. Remi, qui proximi Galliae sunt, legates ad Caesarem 
 
 1 Declined like uter. See 45, 151. 
 
 * Ad effeminandot anim6s=ad effeminandum animos, which is a rare 
 oonstmction. In the second form animos depends npon the gerund effem- 
 inandum ; in the first form it depends npon ad, and effeminandos agrees 
 with it; 40, Rule XXXIV. Literally, to the souls to be enervated; render 
 to enervate the soul. > For construction, see 54, 384, II. 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION, 169 
 
 miserunt, qui dlcerent,* reliquos Belgas in armis esse. 10. 
 Duinnorix Ilelvutils erat amicus, quod ex ea civitate Orge- 
 torigis filiara in matrbuoniura duxerat. 11. Ilostes sub pri- 
 mani nostnun aciem sucecsserunt. 12. Ilostium j)halangom 
 |K'rfringaniu8. 13. Galliae civitates nocturuos conventds 
 habC'bant. 
 
 213. Translate itUo Latin, 
 
 1. Who inliabit these regions? Desertora say that the 
 Menapii inhabit these regions, and that they have many vil- 
 lages beyond the Rhine. 2. Were not these Gauls friendly 
 to Caesar ? They were not friendly to him ; they feared the 
 Romans and desired a revolution. 3. Will not the soldiers 
 obey the lieutenant? He has ordered them to fortify the 
 winter quarters. They will obey him, and they will fortify 
 the winter quarters with a high rampart. 4. Let the citizens 
 consult in regard to the war. 
 
 5. To whom was Dumnorix friendly? Caesar says that 
 Dumnorix, the brother of Divitiacus, was friendly to the 
 Ilelvetii. 6. For this reason* the chiefs remained silent 
 many days. 7. The Aedui were always friends to the Ro- 
 mans. 8. The general sent a lieutenant to lead the army 
 out of winter quarters. 9. We advise you not to speak of 
 this war. 10. We ought to ascertain how many legions 
 Caesar enrolled in Gaul. 11. Let us lead back the soldiers 
 into the camp that we may defend it. 
 
 LESSON LXXIIL 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE IN FULL. — 
 BBVIEW OF RULES XVL, XXIII., AND XXV. 
 
 214. Lesson from the Oramniar. 
 
 In the verb Ileyd^ learn the Passive voice in full. See 
 the following l)age. 
 
 * For Moodt see 119, 407, 1. ^ Latiu idiuin, on acatunt o/ the»e coti«e« 
 
170 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION, 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION: CONSONANT VEIlBa 
 210. PASSIVE VOICE.~Regor, lam nded. 
 
 Yob Sm, rtg; Pubdit Srty, rtgt} 
 rnnvciPAL parts. 
 
 PUBft. braw Pmr. Imr. 
 
 l5DiCATiyB Mood. 
 Punn Tkm. 
 lammiai ^^., 
 
 PLVlAt. 
 
 PZBT. Ink 
 
 rtctas 
 
 Wg#r 
 
 
 
 regtmnr 
 
 rogerin, or re 
 
 
 
 reglminl 
 
 ngllar 
 
 
 
 regvatur 
 
 
 IvratriCT. 
 
 
 
 I teat ruled. 
 
 
 wggfcar 
 
 
 
 regHbAmar 
 
 i«g«bArU, or 
 
 re 
 
 
 reg«b&iuiBl 
 
 Ng«l»Atur 
 
 
 
 regebaatar 
 
 
 Punnii. 
 
 
 
 I $haU or will be mkd. 
 
 wg«r 
 
 
 
 rcg«mar 
 
 rogCrl*. or re 
 
 
 
 regCmial 
 
 icg«fmr 
 
 
 
 rvgeatar 
 
 
 PnncT. 
 
 
 /AoMfiMnniKor/irai 
 
 ruled. 
 
 rtctvs swm* 
 
 
 
 recti namae 
 
 rtctMJi ea 
 
 
 
 recti e»tU 
 
 rSctms ent 
 
 
 
 recti suat 
 
 
 Plcpkrjxct. 
 
 
 
 I had been ruled. 
 
 
 rtctns eram* 
 
 
 
 recti erftmas 
 
 r6ct«s erft« 
 
 
 
 recti erftUs 
 
 r6ct«» erat 
 
 
 
 recti eraat 
 
 
 FrrniK Perfect. 
 
 
 I sfiaU or will hav€ been ntlcJ. 
 
 rtctms cr*« 
 
 
 
 recti erlmns 
 
 rectus* eris 
 
 
 
 recti eritis 
 
 rectus erit 
 
 
 
 recti eraat 
 
 207, 309, foot-uoU-8. 
 
 » See 170. 206, foot-notoi. 
 
PASSIVE VOICK 
 
 171 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Priseht. 
 
 May I be rulcdy let him be ruled. 
 
 gUTGULAR. 
 
 repar 
 
 re^&rlN, or re 
 rci'&tur 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 regftmur 
 regllntini 
 rcKamtar 
 
 rcgcrcr 
 
 rcgerCrl?*, or ro 
 rcgcrCtur 
 
 IlfHEllFECr. 
 /should be ruled^ he wotUd be ruled. 
 
 regcrCnmr 
 rcgcrCminl 
 regercntor 
 
 PfsracT. 
 
 I mat/ have been ruled^ or I have been ruled. 
 
 rCctns sim' 
 rCetuM HlH 
 rSctutf sit 
 
 rCctl 8I111US 
 rCctI f»1tiM 
 recti Mint 
 
 PLDPERreCT. 
 
 I should have been ruled^ he tcould have been ruled. 
 rectus csMeiii' rCctI esMl^mus 
 
 rOctns essCs rCctl eHsCtiM 
 
 rSctus esset rBctl eHsent 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pre*, rcgcrc, be thou ruled; \ reglmiml, be ye ruled, 
 
 Fut. regitor, thou shall be ruled^ I 
 
 regltor, he shall be ruled; \ regantor, they sJiaU be ruled. 
 
 iNPlNmVE. 
 Pres. regl, to be ruled. 
 Per/. Tectum e»»e,* to have been 
 
 ruled. 
 FuL rCctnm Irl, to be about to be 
 
 ruled. 
 
 Participub. 
 
 Per/, r^ctas, ruled. 
 
 Oer. regendws, to be ruledy do- 
 tenting to be ruled. 
 
 S«e 170, 206, foot-notM. 
 
172 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATIOA, 
 
 LESSON LXXIV. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE IN FULL. — 
 
 BEVIEW OP 
 EUCISES. 
 
 RULES XVI., XXIII., AND XXV. — EX- 
 
 Aedificlum, ii, n. 
 
 Aquilifcr, eri, m. 
 
 Curtis, a, uin, 
 
 Centum, indeclinable^ 
 
 Claudu, ere, dausi, d.-msum, 
 
 GcrmanU, ae,/. 
 
 Gcrmanua, a, um, 
 
 Incendu, ere, ceiidi, cOnsum, 
 
 Insula, ae,/. 
 
 Irrumpo, ere, rupi, ruptum, 
 
 Nunquam, adv. 
 
 Occido, ere, ddl, dsum, 
 
 Pagus, i, m. 
 
 Porta, ae,/. 
 
 Premd, ere, press!, pressum, 
 
 Quoque, adv, 
 
 Remane<y, €re, mansi, raansum, 
 
 Repdld, ere, reppuh, repulsuui, 
 
 Ubii, drum, m, pL 
 
 Usipetes, um, m. pi. 
 
 Yercingetorix, igis, m. 
 
 216. T 'ocabulart/, 
 
 buildingt house, 
 
 ttandard-bearcr, 
 
 dear, 
 
 hundred. 
 
 to Khutj close, 
 
 Germany, 
 
 German. 
 
 to set on firCt fire^ hum, 
 
 island. 
 
 to break in, rusA in, 
 
 neeer. 
 
 to killf slay. 
 
 division, canton, 
 
 gale, 
 
 to presSy press hard^ distress, 
 
 also, 
 
 to remain. 
 
 to repelf repulse. [many. 
 
 the Ubiij a tribe of western Ger- 
 
 the UsipeteSf a tribe of nortli- 
 
 westem Germany. 
 Fercinflfe^orLc, a Gallic chief tain. 
 
 216. TVanslate into English, 
 
 1. Aquilifer ipse pro castris fortissime pQgnans* occlditur. 
 2. Multl milites fortissime piignantes occisi sunt. 3. Nonne 
 omnes magna multitudine hostium premOmur? 4. Utinam 
 hostes omnes nostra virtute repellantur. 5. Num ab hosti- 
 bus eo tempore repulsi estis? Nunquam ab hostibus repulsi 
 Bumns. 6. Quid apud Alesiam geritur? Cralll perterriti in 
 oppidum irrumpunt; Vercingetorix imperator jubet portas 
 
 1 WhUefifjhting. See Suggestion XIII., 3. 
 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 173 
 
 claadi, ne castra nddentur. 7. Omnia vici OctodQri acdificia 
 inceiisa sunt. 8. KOnne multa oppida ab IIclvGtiis iiicGnsa 
 sunt? Post Orgetorigis mortem Ilelvctii o])pida sua omnia 
 inccnderunt. 
 
 9. Magna Germaniae pars a bellicosissinils niitiunihus eo 
 tempore incolGbutur. 10. Multae insulae a ferls barbarlsque 
 nationibus incoluntur. 11. Caesar obsides ad so adduci 
 jubet. 1*2. UsIpetOs German! ab Suebis multos annos premc- 
 bantur. Ubii quoque graviter ab Suebis pressi erant. 13. 
 Suebi centum j)ago8 habere dicuntur. 14. Omnium^ qui 
 Galliam incolunt fortissimi sunt Belgae. 15. Suebi, qui 
 bellicosissimi Germanorum omnium esse dicuntur, tlno in 
 loco non longius anno* remanent. 16. Caesar militum vitam 
 sua salute* cariorem habebat. 
 
 217. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Were not the Belgae braver than the other Gauls?' 
 They are said to have been the bravest of all the Gauls. 
 Did they not often wage war with the Germans who dwelt 
 l:>eyond the Rhine ? They are said to have waged war 
 continually with the neighboring states. 2. What is dearer 
 than life ? To brave soldiers liberty and country are dearer 
 than life. Ought we not to hold {regard) liberty and coun- 
 try dearer than life itself? 3. This part of Gaul has always 
 been inhabited by warlike nations. 4. Which part of Gaul 
 was inhabited by the brave Belgae ? 6. One part of Gaul is 
 said to have l>een inhabited by the Celts. 
 
 6. The bravest and most warlike of the Gauls were con- 
 quered by the Romans. 7. By the valor of our soldiers the 
 enemy have been repulsed. 8. The bravest of the soldiers 
 were slain. 9. Let us not remain in this town longer than 
 one day. 10. Did you not say th.at tliese islands were in- 
 habited by fierce nations? These islands are saitl to have 
 
 » Parlitine Oenitive. See 28, 3D7. • For Case, see 88. Rule XXIII. 
 * Render Arst witli qxiam, auil secondly without it. 
 
174 
 
 CONJUGATIONS U lU AND III, 
 
 been inhabited by barbarous nations. 11. Were not many 
 towns burned by the enemy? Many towns are said to have 
 been ]>urned by them. 12. The general has ordered the 
 army to be led back into camp, and the gates to bo closed. 
 
 LESSON LXXV. 
 
 1 MUST, Si:t<>M), AM> THIKD CONJUGATIONS. — PASSIVE 
 VOICE. — IIEVIEW OF RULES XXX., XXXI., AND 
 XXXIII. 
 
 218. 1 '""///'//' /ry. 
 
 Aqultiini, Onun, m. ;>/. 
 
 Cabillonum, i, n. 
 
 Certot, a, nm, 
 
 Comple6« ere, vvi, ctum, 
 
 Confestim, adt, 
 
 Cotta, ae, m. 
 
 Divido, ere, Tiai, Tlsum, 
 
 Funda, ae,/. 
 
 IndieO, ere, dixi, dictum, 
 
 Inopia, ae,/. 
 
 Mando, are, avi, atum, 
 
 Mat!scj(, onis, m. 
 Noms, a, urn, 
 Sulpicius, ii, m, 
 Supplicutio, onis,/. 
 Tigurinus, i, m. 
 Vesper, eri, in. 
 Viginti, indecUnaf'lr^ 
 VuInerO, are, avi, atum. 
 
 the AquUani or Aquitaman»t tbc in- 
 habitants of tlie soutiiwestem di- 
 vision of Gaul. 
 
 Cahillonumf a town of Eastern Gaul. 
 
 certain^Jixedy appoinUd, 
 
 to filly cover, 
 
 hastily f speedily. 
 
 Cottay a lieutenant under Caesar. 
 
 to ditide, 
 
 sling. 
 
 to appoint 
 
 lacky wanty need, 
 
 to commission y order; to cntnisty cofi' 
 sign, commity betake. 
 
 liatiscOy a town in soutiieastem Gaul. 
 
 new, 
 
 Sulpieiusy a lieutenant under Caesar. 
 
 thanksgiring. 
 
 TigurinuSy one of the four cantons of 
 
 evening. [the Helvctii. 
 
 twenty. 
 
 to wound. 
 
 219. Translate into I^nylish, 
 
 1. Omnis civitas Helvetiorum in quattuor pagos divisa 
 est. IlOrum uuus api>ellatur Tigurinus. 2. Gallia est di\isa 
 
CONJUGATIONS /., //., AND HI. 175 
 
 in partes trus, quarum dnam incolunt Belgae, aliara Aquituni, 
 tertiam Galli. 3. Imperator horu septimu vicuin honiiiiibuB* 
 comj)lC'n jussit. 4. Cotta legatus fortissimo pugnans* funda 
 vulneratus est. 5. liomao dierum viginti* supplicutio indi- 
 c'itur. 6. Caesar CicerOnera et Sulpicium Cabilloni et Matis- 
 eone in Aeduis coilocavit. 
 
 7. Hostes ad vesperura fortiter pflgnaverunt ; turn deraum 
 fugae sesc mandaverunt. 8. Litterae ad Caesarem confestim 
 ab Cicerone niittuntur. 9. Ariovistus dixit eas omnes copias 
 a 80 uno proclio superatas esse. 10. Multi omnium rerum 
 inopia adducti auxilium a Cacsare implorabant. Itaque 
 obsides imperavit, eosque ad certam* diem adduci jussit. 
 11. Multa ab Caesare in colloquio dicta sunt. 12. Duae 
 legiones, quae in Gallia proximo conscrlptae eraut, fugae scso 
 mandabant. 
 
 220. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Tlie lands of the Gauls were often seized by the Ger- 
 mans. 2. Many Gauls, distressed with want at home, im- 
 plored aid from the neighboring towns. 3. At that time 
 Caesar was enrolling new legions in Italy. 4. Many legions 
 had already been enrolled in Gaul and Italy. 5. At Rome * 
 Caesar is said to have been advised to hasten into Gaul. 
 On the same day he was advised by Labienus to enlist a new 
 legion. 6. A part of a legion had been placed in winter 
 quarters at Octodurus. 7. At that time he is said to have 
 ordered all the legions to be led out of winter quarters. 
 
 8. On that day the camp of the Romans was assaulted by 
 the Gauls. 9. These bravo soldiers were wounded while 
 fighting* for their country. 10. Let us order them to remain 
 
 1 For Cam, see 78, Rule XVIII. 
 3 See Suggestion XIII., 3. 
 
 ■ Literally, of twenty days; render, /or twenty days. The Acaisatirt 
 0/ Duration of Time could have been used. 
 
 * See foot-note 1, page 234. • See 185, 42S, 11. 
 
 « III reuduriug into Lolin, omit while. See Suggestion XIII., 3. 
 
176 CONJUGATIONS U 
 
 in the province during the winter.* 11. Into how many parts 
 was Gaul divided ? Caesar says that Gaul was divided into 
 three parts. 12. Gaul is said to have been divided into three 
 parts. 13. Into how many parts did you say that our coun- 
 try is divided? I said that it is divided into many parts. 
 14. He is said to have led his anny back into camp about 
 midday. 
 
 LESSON LXXVI. 
 
 FIRST, SECOND, AKD THIRD CONJUGATIONS. — EXER- 
 CISE IN READING AT SIGHT. 
 
 221. Read at Sights excanine carefuUyy and translate into 
 
 EnglUfi? 
 
 Caesar cdpias suas in prdximum collem subdQxit, equita- 
 tumque qui sustineret' hostium impetum misit. Ipse interim 
 in coUe medio ^ triplicem acicm InstrQxit legionum quattuor 
 veteranarum, sed in summo jugd duus legiones, quas in Gallia 
 citeridre proxime conscrlpserat, et onmia auxilia coUocarl, uc 
 totum montem hominibus complorl jussit. Ilelvetii sub 
 primam nostrain aciem successerunt, sed UoraanI facile hos- 
 tium phalangem perfregerunt. Ilostes ab hora septima ad 
 vesperum fortiter pQgnaverunt. Diutius nostrorum impetfls 
 Bustinere non poterant ; mult! viilnerutl erant ; itaque timore 
 perterriti fugae sese mandaverunt, atque in fines Lingonum 
 contenderunt. Caesar ad Lingones litteras nuntiosque misit, 
 ne eos frumento neve alia re juvarent. Tum demiim Ilel- 
 vetii, omnium rerum inopia adducti, legates de deditione ad 
 eum misenmt. 
 
 1 Durinfj the winter. Uae the Accosatire of Duration of Time. See 
 98, 379. 
 
 * See Directions for Reading at Siglit, 137- 
 
 « See Suggestion XVII., 3. 
 
 ^ See XootpQote on summus, 141. 
 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 177 
 
 222. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. About midday the general led out all his forces, and 
 placed them in line of battle before the camj). The enemy 
 in sight of their commander fought bravely for many hours, 
 but at length, repulsed by the valor of our soldiers, and over- 
 come {terrified) by fear, they betook themselves to flight. 
 The general was wounded, and many soldiers were slain. 
 2. So great fear took possession of ' the Gauls, that they 
 decided to fortify their cities, to bring grain into them from 
 their lands, and to build a large number of ships. 
 
 3. The Gauls had filled this town with brave soldiers, and 
 Caesar had been advised not to attack it on account of the 
 valor of the men, the width of the moat, and the height 
 of the wall. 4. At that time so great fear took possession 
 of all the Aedui, whose lands the Helvetii were devastat- 
 ing, that they fortified their cities, and sent ambassadors to 
 Caesar to ask aid. 
 
 LESSON LXXVII. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. — INDICATIVE ACTIVE. — RE- 
 VIEW OF RULES XXXIV., XXXV. AND XXXVI. 
 
 223. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Audio learn the Indicative Mood of the Ac- 
 tive Voice. See page 180. 
 
 224. Vocabulary. 
 
 Adtiatuci, drain, m. pi. the Aduatucij a tribe of northern 
 
 Ante, adv. before. - (Gaul. 
 
 Audio, ire, ivi or li, itum, to hear^ hear qf. 
 (ir-mentla, he,/. clemency y forbearance y merry. 
 
 Cogo, ere, cocgl, coactum, to drive together, bring together^ 
 
 collect ; toforcct compel 
 
178 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 
 
 Convenfo, ire, veni, Tentnm, to come together, assemble, meet, 
 
 Cotidlaniis, a, urn, 
 
 dail}/. 
 
 
 [come. 
 
 Duplex, icia, 
 
 double. 
 
 
 
 Helvetius, a, um, 
 
 UelveUan. 
 
 
 
 Latus, eris, n. 
 
 side. 
 
 
 
 Munio, ire» ivi or ii, itum, 
 
 tofortify. 
 
 
 
 Neque, cor\f. 
 
 neiUtert nor; 
 
 neqne . . 
 
 . neque, 
 
 Pus, pedis, m. 
 
 foot 
 
 [nvUher , 
 
 . . nor. 
 
 Scribo, ere, scrips!, scriptum. 
 
 to write. 
 
 
 
 Venlo, ire, veni, vcntuni. 
 
 to come. 
 
 
 
 ViUed, Ore, vidl, visum. 
 
 tosee. 
 
 
 
 225. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Nonne voces militum audltis? Voces omnium militum 
 aadunus. 2. Turn vero nostrl claraOrem ab ea parte audivo- 
 runt. 3. Nonne castra mQnietis? Castra vallo mQniemus. 
 4. Caesar castra in altitudinem pedum * duodecim vallo mtl- 
 nivcrat. 5. Legiones sex, quae primae venerant, castra muiiio- 
 bant. 6. Aduatucl, de quibus supra 8cri])8imus, unum op})idum 
 duplici altissimo raflro milnierant.* 7. Eo tempore castra 
 vallo fossaquo mOniebamus. 8. Ob eas res Galba Qnam 
 partem vici, qui appcllatur Octodilrus, vallo fossaquc con- 
 ^ <tim munlvit. 
 
 l». FlQmen latus finura castrorum muniebat. 10. Venetl 
 oppida mflniebant, frumenta ex agrls in oppida comporta- 
 bant, naves in Yenetiam cogebant. 11. Rhenus latissimus 
 at que altissiraus agrum Helvetium a Germanis dividit. 12. 
 Aduatucl Caesaris clementiara ab alils audiebant. 13. Tanta 
 opera neque viderant ante* Galll neque audierant.* 14. 
 Eadem de causa Helvetii Celtanim omnium fortissimi sunt, 
 qnod fere cotldianis proeliis cum Germanis contendunt. 15. 
 TotTus fere Galliae legatl, princiixjs cmtatum, ad Caesarem 
 convenenint. 
 
 1 Construe with vaUo. 
 
 « 3fi/« fVranf. contracted irommiimrcrant : avdiernnt, from avdirerant. 
 « Observe that ante is sometimes an adverb, and sometimes a prepo. 
 sition. 
 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 179 
 
 226. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. What (lid you hear at Rome? We heard that nearly 
 all the Belgae had conspired against the Uoman people. 
 From whom did you hear this report ? We heard it from 
 many citizens and from the consuls themselves. 2. Judges, 
 you have heard the words of many witnesses, and all these 
 tilings which you have heard are true. 3. Have the enemy 
 heard what we are doing ? I hear that all our plans have 
 lK»en announced to them by deserters. 4. Have you heard 
 what we have been doing at this time at Rome? We have 
 lieard of* the many good things which you have done in 
 that city. 
 
 5. Have you not fortified all these towns with high walls? 
 We fortify our towns, not by walls and ramparts, but by 
 the valor of our citizens. 6. I have never seen the cities of 
 which * you write, but I have heard of them from others. 
 7. The legions that had been enrolled in Gaul were Jit that 
 time fortifying the camp. 8. Have you not often heard 
 that the Belgae incessantly wage war with the Germans? 
 I have often heard that ' from you. 9. You have all heard 
 that many states sent ambassadors to Caesar at that time 
 to ask aid. 
 
 LESSON LXXVIII. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. — ACTIVE VOICE IN FULL. — 
 KEVIEW OF RULES LV., LVI., AND LXL 
 
 227. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 In the verb Audio^ learn the Active Voice in full. See 
 the following page. 
 
 1 Omit of in rendering into I^tin. See 226. sentence 13. 
 
 * Of xchich ■= amcerninfi irhirh. 
 
 » When the antecedent is a claugc, the prononn must be neuter. 
 
180 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION : I VERBS. 
 211. ACTIVE VOICE.— Audi». Ihtar. 
 
 Tub Srm abd PRnurr Stem, omdL 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 Pm. Iin». Pu*. Ijrr. Psar. lin, BtrranL 
 
 audIA, audire, audlTl, MidllvBi 
 
 
 IiTDiCATivE Mood. 
 
 
 PBBniT Tdub. 
 
 sniarLAB. 
 audiA 
 audia 
 audit 
 
 4 near, ptCTUU 
 
 audlmoa 
 
 audltln 
 
 audlHAt 
 
 
 IifpntnEcr. 
 
 audi«bam 
 
 audiCbas 
 
 audiCbat 
 
 / loot hearing^ or J heard. 
 
 audi«bAiiiiui 
 
 audleb&tiM 
 
 audieoant 
 
 
 FCTUM. 
 
 III 
 
 JthaU or wiU hear, 
 
 audi«MWi 
 
 audi«tis 
 
 audleat 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 audlrl 
 
 audlviutl 
 
 audlrit 
 
 / have hearc 
 
 \ or I fteard. 
 
 audTHHiWi 
 audTvistis 
 audlvCmnt, or £re 
 
 
 PLrPERFECT. 
 
 
 / had ficard. 
 
 andTrernni 
 audlverAs 
 audi vera t 
 
 i 
 
 audlverftmu* 
 
 audlverfttis 
 
 audlverant 
 
 
 FrruKE Perftct. 
 
 audlverft 
 
 audlverfs 
 
 audlverit 
 
 ItJiaU or wii 
 
 Uhaveheard 
 
 audlverfmiis 
 
 audiverttis 
 
 audlveriiit 
 
 1 
 
ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 181 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVK. 
 
 
 Presemt. 
 
 May I hear, let him /uar,^ 
 
 ■moiTLAR. 
 
 PLUBAL. 
 
 audlam 
 
 
 audiftma* 
 
 audlas 
 
 
 audlAtls 
 
 audiat 
 
 
 audiunt 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 IsfumldliMr.hewmlJfuar. 
 
 andlrem 
 
 
 audTrCmns 
 
 audlrCs 
 
 
 audlrCtis 
 
 audlret 
 
 
 audlrent 
 
 
 
 / may 
 
 have heard^ or / /mmw heard. 
 
 audlverlm 
 
 
 audlverfmns 
 
 audTveris 
 
 
 audlvcritis 
 
 audlverlt 
 
 
 audlverint 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 / should have heat^ he wtmld luive heard. 
 
 audlvlssent 
 
 
 audlvisftCmu* 
 
 audlTlssCs 
 
 
 audlvls»«tls 
 
 audlvl»»et 
 
 
 audlvlasent 
 
 Prcs. audi, hear Ihou ; 
 FuL aud1t6, thou shall hear, 
 audltd, fie shall /lear ; 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 iV«. audip©, to liear. 
 
 Perf. audlvlsse, to liave heard 
 
 Put. audltOras esve, to be about 
 to liear. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 I audlte, hear ye. 
 audi tote, ye shall hear^ 
 audlunt^, (hey shall Jiear, 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Pret. audlCBS, Iiearing. 
 
 Gerund. 
 
 Otn. audieadl^ o/fiearitu^, 
 DaL audiendO, for hearing, 
 Aee. audiendum, hearing, 
 Abl. audiendd, by hearing. 
 
 FuL audltOrvs, ab<nU to hear, 
 SUPINK. 
 
 Aee. audlt«m, to hear^ 
 
 Abl. audita, toheear,hekmr4, 
 
 > Bat on the tnoslation of the SabjonctlTt, tM 111. 196, II. 
 18 
 
182 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 
 
 228. Vocabulary, 
 
 Aid, ere, »Iui, alitum and altum, to nourUh^ mtpporty sustain, 
 
 Intellego, ere, lexi, Ic'Ctum, to understand^ know, 
 
 Pronuntio, are, avl, atum, to proclaim^ declare. 
 
 PropCerei, adv, for th is reason ; proptcrea qaod, 
 
 for the reason that^ because, 
 
 Qhmto, tre, qnMtivi or il, itam, to seek^ ingulref ask, 
 Qoisqiie, qoaeque, quidque and 
 
 qoodque, ecery, every one, each, each one. 
 
 Quod, cot\J, that ; because. 
 
 Sabinus, i, m. Sabinus, a lieutenant under 
 
 8cid, ire, ivi or ii, itum, to know, [Caesar. 
 
 Secundus, a, uni, second. \devote'onese\f to, 
 
 Servio, ire, iyi or ii, itum, to serve, subserve; to promote, 
 
 Sincere, adv. truU\fuHy, 
 
 SJunptOi, us, m. expense. 
 
 Titurios, ii, m. Titurius, a Roman name. 
 
 Ullus, a, um, 46,151, any, 
 
 Utilitos, aUs,/. tts^^lnest; inUrestj advantage, 
 
 Yestio, ire, ivi or ii, itwn, to clothe, 
 
 Tiator, oris, m. traveller. 
 
 229. TranslaU into English. 
 
 1. Hoc oppidum dupHci mOro maniaraus. 2. Hostes snam 
 urbora altissimO mGro railnlrc parabant. 3. Imperator nos 
 castra vallo mQnlre jubet. 4. Caesar Quintum Titurium 
 Sabinum legatum castra in altitOdinem pedum duodecim 
 vallo munire jussit. 5. Utinam Caesar castra valid fossaque 
 mQnlvisset.' 6. Audiamus Romanos mllites. 7. Ilaec ut 
 intellegatis a me sincere pronuntiarl, audite Romanos mllites. 
 8. Caesar primam et sccundam aciem in armis esse, tertiam 
 castra mQnlre jussit. 
 
 9. Siciliam nutricem plebis Romanae nomino, propterea 
 qnod sine iillo sQmptu nostro* maximos exercitus nostros 
 vestlvit, aluit, arraavit. 10. Consules utilitati salutique ser- 
 viunt. 11. SalutI elvium omnium servirc debotis. 12. Dicit 
 
 1 For the force of the Tense, see 114, 483, 2. 
 
 * aimpti iiostrd, literally, our expense ; reader, expense to trs. 
 
FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 183 
 
 so hfic ab alils audlvisse. 13. Dicunt sex lopriones castra 
 munituras esse. 14. Stadium audiendl; raaniendO; miles 
 vOcem audiOns ; nostri clamorem audientes ; mllites castra 
 munltun. 15. Galli ab viatdribus quaerunt quid dc quaque 
 re audicrint. 
 
 230. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Which legion was at that time fortifying the camp? 
 The lieutenant said that the sixth legion was fortifymg the 
 camp. 2. The general says that he shall fortify the winter 
 quarters with a high rampart. 3. We all know what you 
 heard at Rome. 4. Let us now hear what you are doing 
 and what you are seeing. 5. Lieutenants, fortify this city 
 with a double wall ; let not the enemy take it by stoi*ra. 
 
 6. Judges, hear now the words of these witnesses. 7. 
 Would that you had all heard the words of these witnesses. 
 S. Hearing the shouts of the soldiers, the general ordered 
 the lieutenants to lead out the whole ai-my, and to place it 
 in line of battle. 9. Have you heard which legions have 
 ))een sent to sustain ^ the attack of the enemy ? We have 
 heard that five legions have been sent to sustain the attack 
 of the enemy, and that two remain in camp. 
 
 LESSON LXXIX. 
 
 THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. — ACTIVE VOICE. — RULE 
 XXIX. — REVIEW OF RULES LVII. AND LVIII. 
 
 231. Samples. — Ablative of Specification. 
 
 1. Nomine fuit rCx. He was king in name. 
 
 2. Chiudus altcrO pede. Lame in one FOOT. 
 
 Note. — The I^itin usage illustrated in the AbUtives nomine aiid 
 ]*ede is expressed in the following 
 
 1 To sustain ; render by a Relative Claute denoting Purpose. 
 
184 FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 RULE XXIX. — Specification. 
 
 424. A noun, adjective, or verb may take an Ablative 
 to defiue its application : 
 
 Nomine^ non poteslatc fuit rex, Ue was king in name, not in 
 POWER, Nep. Claudiu allero pede, lame in one foot. Nep. Reli- 
 quos GallOs virtule praecedunt, they surpaat the other GauU in courage. 
 Caes. 
 
 232. Vocabulary. 
 
 Accnrrt, ere, cucurri or curri, 
 
 cursuin, to run to, haaten to^ run, [much. 
 
 Adamo, are, 4vi, itum, to be greatly pleased with, like very 
 
 Adiiiinl«tr6, are, avi, itum, to administer, manage, direct. 
 
 An^tislus, a, um, narrate, limited. (Oaal. 
 
 Htllovacj, orum, m. ;>/. the Ueiloenci, a tribe of northwestern 
 
 riiltus, us, IN. culture, refinement, civilization. 
 
 Defensor, oris, m. defender. 
 
 Fiiiio, ire, ivi or i\, Unm, to end ; to bound, limiL 
 
 Fhio, ere, fluxl, fluxuin, tofiow. 
 
 Imperium, fi, n. empire, government. 
 
 influo, ere, fluxi, fluxum, tofiow into, empty, fiow. 
 
 tiistituo, ere, ui, utum, to begin, proceed, 
 
 I^cus, us, m. lake. [Lake of Geneva. 
 
 lyomanniis, i, m. Lemannus, Leman; lacus Lenianniis, 
 
 Minus, comp. adv. less; miniroe, sup., least, very little, 
 
 not at all, by no means. 
 
 Voviodunum, i, n. Notiodunum, a town in northwestern 
 
 Praecedo, ere, cessi, cessuro, to surpass. [Gaul. 
 
 Superior, us, comp. qfanperus, superior. 
 
 Vacuus, a, um, vacant, empty, deserted, abandoned. 
 
 233. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Eo tempore Rhenus popiill Roman! imperium tini e:: 
 parte finiebat. 2. Minime ad Belp^as mercatores saepe com- 
 meant. 3. Helvetii angustos fines habent, et ob earn rem 
 minus facile cum flnitimls bellum gerere possunt. 4. Rho- 
 daniis inter fines Helvetiorum et AUobrogiim fluit. 5. Lacus 
 Lemannus in flumen Rhodanum influit. 6. Duces hostium 
 castra munire Tnstituunt. 7. Caesar in fines Suessionum 
 exercitum duxit, et magnis itineribus ad oppidum Noviodu- 
 
FOURTH CONJUGATION, 185 
 
 num contendit; id vacuum ab defensoribus esse audierat. 
 8. Helvetii reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt. 
 
 9. Imixjrator hostes equitatQ superiores esse intellegebat. 
 10. Germain, homines ferl ac barbarl, agros et cultum et 
 copias Gallorum adamabant. 11. Consldius ad Caesarem 
 accurrit, et dicit montem ab hostibus teneri. 12. Bellovaci 
 se cum Romanis bellum gesturos* dlxei unt. 13. Vercinge- 
 torix bellum administrare parabat. 
 
 234. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Caesar says that the warlike Germans were greatly 
 pleased with {liked very much) the refinement of the Gauls. 
 *J. We all know that the river Rhone separated the territory 
 of the Ilelvetii from the Roman province. 3. The Romans 
 are said to have surpassed the Gauls in valor. 4. I have 
 often heard that the Gauls at that time surpassed the Ger- 
 mans in refinement. 5. I have heard from deserters that a 
 brave lieutenant was slain in that battle. 
 
 6. Tiiey say that the enemy have fortified tlicir towns, and 
 that they will fight bravely for their country. 7. We have 
 heard that you will remain in Italy the whole winter. 8. 
 Have you not heard that many Gauls were held in servi- 
 tude by Ariovistus. We have often heard that from the 
 (lauls themselves. 9. The Aedui ought not to be held in 
 servitude by barbarians. 10. At Geneva many friends were 
 awaiting our arrival from Italy. 
 
 LESSON LXXX. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE IN FULL. 
 
 235. Lesson from the Chrammar. 
 In the verb Audid, learn the Passive Voice in full. 
 
 * In the oompouud forms of the Infinitive, etu is often tins omitted. 
 
186 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATIOy, 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION: I VERBa 
 212. PASSIVE VOICE.— Audior, /am AairA 
 
 Vebb Stem ajid PaxsEMT Stkm. awh. 
 
 FRINCIPAL PABT8. 
 
 Pua Imp. Pan. Iiir. 
 audior, audlrl, 
 
 Pntr. Itfo. 
 
 audltas saai. 
 
 bfDiCATivE Mood. 
 
 PsmxT Tbnsb. 
 
 
 nKoui.i '"^^ 
 audior 
 
 audi r Is, or re 
 audi tar 
 
 \eard. 
 
 PLtTRAU 
 
 audlaaar 
 audlaiial 
 audiaatar 
 
 iMpn 
 
 IWQM 
 
 audl«bar 
 audl«barl0, or re 
 audiebAtnr 
 
 met. 
 heard. 
 
 audlCbftaiar 
 audiCb&mial 
 audiebaatar 
 
 FCT 
 
 JtkaJttotw 
 
 audiar 
 
 audi«ris, or re 
 audietur 
 
 muL 
 
 m be heard. 
 
 audi^aiar 
 audi«mia1 
 audieatar 
 
 PSRl 
 
 / have been hearc 
 audita* Sana* 
 audita* ea 
 audltas est 
 
 FTCT. 
 
 \ or / wat heard. 
 
 audltl samas 
 audltl estis 
 audltl saat 
 
 Plupe 
 Ihadbei 
 audltas erarn* 
 audltus er&s 
 audltusi erat 
 
 RFECT. 
 
 11 heai-d. 
 
 audltl erftaias 
 audltl er&tis 
 audltl eraat 
 
 FCTTTRE 
 
 I shall or unU ) 
 audltas er^* 
 audltas eris 
 audltas erit 
 
 PERracr. 
 
 lave bcai heard. 
 
 audltl eriaias 
 audltl eritis 
 audltl eraat 
 
 » Sec 170, 206, foot-notes. 
 
PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 187 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Presknt. 
 May I be heard, let Iiim be Juxurd. 
 
 BIKGULAR. 
 
 audlar 
 
 audi&ris, or r« 
 audi&tnr 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 andlftmur 
 audi&mini 
 audiantiur 
 
 iMPERrECT. 
 
 / should be heard, he vxndd be heard. 
 
 audlrer 
 
 audlrCris, or re 
 audlr€tur 
 
 audlrCmiir 
 audlrCiuiitl 
 audlrentor 
 
 Perfect. 
 I may have been heard, or //«m»« been heard. 
 
 audrtns aim' 
 audltaif His 
 audltas sit 
 
 audltl slnnun 
 audfti sitis 
 audltl sint 
 
 PLUPERftCT. 
 
 I$hould have been heard, he would have been heard. 
 audltna essem* audltl es8«ma* 
 
 audUus esse* audltl essCtIs 
 
 audit us esset audltl essent 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres. audlrc, be thou Jteard ; \ audlnalnl, be ye heard. 
 
 F^. auditor, tfion tlialt be heard, I 
 
 auditor, he shall be heard; I audlantor, they sliall be heard. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Pres. audlrl, to be heard. 
 
 Per/, audita* esse,' to have been 
 
 heard. 
 FWC audltom Irl, to be about to 
 
 be heard. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Per/, audltas, heard. 
 
 Otr. audiendns, to be heard, de- 
 terving to be heard. 
 
 * S«e 170, 206, foot-note^ 
 
188 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 
 
 LESSON LXXXI. 
 
 FOURTH CX)NJUGATION. — PASSIVE VOICE IN FULL. — 
 RULE XXVIII. — REVIEW OF RULE XXIL — EXER- 
 CISES. 
 
 236. Examples, — Abiative of Difference. 
 
 1 . CnO dii longior mensis. A month one day longer {longer by 
 
 one DAY). 
 
 2. Biduo me anteoetBit He preceded me by two days. 
 
 Note. — The Latin usage Illustrated In tlie Ablatives die and 
 bUluo Is expressed In the following 
 
 RULE XXVIII.— Ablative of Difference. 
 
 423. The Mkasure of Difference is denoted by 
 
 the Ablative: 
 
 Una dii longiorem mensem faciunt, Utey make the month one day 
 longer (longer by one day). Cic. Biduo md antecessit, he preceded 
 me BY TWO DAYS. Cic. Sol multis partlbus major est quam terra, 
 the aun Ut very much (literally by uajxy pabts) larger Utan Uie earth, 
 CIc 
 
 237. Voccbidary, 
 
 Britanni, 6mm, m. pi. the Britons. 
 
 Cantlum, li, n. KenL 
 
 Cevenna, ae,/. Cetenna^ a mountain range in 
 
 southern Gaul, now the Ce- 
 
 Egregie, ado. excellently. (cennes. 
 
 Existimo, are, avi, alum, to think. 
 
 Humanus, a, um, citilized. 
 
 Impedio, Ire, ivi or ii, itura, to impede, hinder, embarrass. 
 
 Impeditus, a, um, entangled. 
 
 Mensis, is, m. month. 
 
 Oppugnatid, onis,/. ansault, attack. 
 
 Fauci, ae, a, few. 
 
 Pellis, is,/. fikin. [most. 
 
 Plerusque, raque, rumque, the larger or greater part, the 
 
 Praesens, entis, like prudens, present; in praesentia (neut 
 
 plur.) for the present. 
 
 M 
 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 189 
 
 Probibeo, ere, ul, itum, to profUbit^ cheeky prevent^ keep. 
 
 Kapina, ae, /. robbery, plundering y pillaging. 
 Rei>ori6, ire, repperi, repertuiu, to find. 
 
 Satis, adv. enough; satis habere, to consider 
 
 Tamen, adv. yet, nevertheless, [it sufficient. 
 
 VesontiS, onis, m. Vesontio, a town of eastern Gaul, 
 
 Vinco, ere, vici, victum, to conquer. [now B€8an<;on. 
 
 238. IVanslate itUo English. 
 
 1. Vesontio, oppidum maximum Seqnanoriim, natara loci 
 muniebatur. 2. Nostrum oppidum allissimo muro mQnirT 
 debet. 3. Nostra oppida egregic muuiantur. 4. Hic locus 
 TgregiG natilra atquc operc munitus est. 5. Britanni silvam 
 impedltam, vallo atquc fossa munltam, oppidum vocant. 6. 
 Caesar oppidum egregio natura atquc opere munltum repperit ; 
 tamen hoc duabus ex partibus oppugnare contendit. 7. Iter 
 agniinis nostri multls rebus impediebatur. 8. AduatucT, de 
 <|uibus supra scripsimus, sua omnia in unum oppidum egregic 
 natura munltum eomportabant. 
 
 9. Ex Britannis* omnibus longc sunt humanissimi qui 
 Cantium incolunt; interiores plcriquc pellibus sunt vestitl. 
 10. Oppidorum oppiignatio duabus rebus impediebatur. 11. 
 Arvenii se montc Cevenna munitos esse existimabant. 12. 
 Ex captlvis quaeramus quam ob rem hostes castra non 
 inilniant. 13. Caesar suos a proelio contincbat, ac satis 
 liabebat' in praesentia* hostem rap^pls prohibere. 14. Ario- 
 vistus panels mensibns* ante Gallorum copias proelio vicerat. 
 
 239. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. These cities are all excellently fortified by nature and 
 :ut. 2. You will find that city excellently fortified with a 
 louble wall. 3. Did you say that the winter quarters of the 
 
 1 Literally, out of the Britons ; render, or the Britons. It has the force 
 of a Partitive Genitive. 
 
 * See Vocabulary. 
 
 * See 236, Rule XXVIII. 
 
190 FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 enemy are not fortified ? I have heard from captives that 
 the winter quarters of the Gauls are not fortified by art, but 
 that they are enclosed on all sides* by high mountains. 4. 
 Those who inhabited a large part of this island were bar- 
 barians, and were clothed in skins. 5. Many islands were 
 then inhabited by barbarians, who were clothed in skins. 
 
 G. Among barbarians an entangled forest, fortified with a 
 ram))art and a moat, is often called a town. 7. Our cities 
 will all be fortified many days* before the arrival of the 
 enemy. 8. From whom did you hear that the camp of the 
 Britons is already fortified with a high rampart? I have 
 heard that report from the captives, of whom I have wnritten 
 above. 9. Did you not say that this tower is higher than 
 tlinl ? It is higher than that by many feet. 10. The deser- 
 ters said that the town had been fortified two years before. 
 11. Would that your towns liad been fortified before the 
 arrival of the enemy. 
 
 LESSON LXXXII. 
 
 POUR CONJUGATIONS IX FULL. — PASSIVE VOICE. — 
 REVIEW OF RULE IV. — RULE XXXIL 
 
 240. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 RULE XXXII/— AblaUve Absolute.* 
 
 431. A noun and a participle may be put in the Abla- 
 tive to add to the predicate an attendant circumstance : 
 
 1 On aU sides ; Latin idiom, moM all sides ; ot render by a single adverb. 
 
 * Use the Abladce of Difference. 
 
 -« It seems to be no longer necessary to introduce Rules, as in previous 
 lessons, by means of examples. The pupil has already learned the fact 
 that a Grammatical Rule is nothing more than a statement of the general 
 Msage of the language. The introductory examples were intended chiefly 
 to show him this fact. 
 
 * This Ablative is called absolute, because it is not directly dependent 
 for its construction upon any other word in the sentence. 
 
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 191 
 
 Scnrio regnante vlgiierunt, they flourished in the reign qf ServiuM 
 (Servlus reigning).* Cic. Kegibus exactis, consules creiiti sunt, qfler 
 the banisfiment qf the kings^^ consuls were appointed. Liv. Equitatii 
 praemisso, subsequebiitur, having sent forward his cavalry, he fol- 
 lowed. Caes. Kegnuiu baud satis prospcrum negl«cta religione, a 
 reign not sufficiently prosperous because religion was neglected. Liv. 
 Perditis rebus omnibus tamen virtus se sustentare potest, though all 
 things are lost, still virtue is able to sustain itself. Cic 
 
 1. Tlje Ablative Absolute, much more common than the English 
 Nominative Absolute, generally expresses the timej cau«e, or some 
 attendant circumstance of an action. 
 
 2. This Ablative is generally best rendered— (1) by a noun with a 
 preposition — in, during, after, by, with, through, etc.; (2) by an 
 Gctlve participle with its ohject ; or (3) by a clause M'ith when, while, 
 Oecause, if, though, etc.;' see examples above. 
 
 3. A connective sometimes accompanies the Ablative: 
 
 Nisi munitis castris, unless the camp should be fortified. Caes. 
 
 4. A noun and an adjective, or even two nouns, may be in the Ab- 
 lative Absolute:* 
 
 Sereno caelo, when the sky is clear. Sen. Canlnio consule, in the 
 consulship of CaniniuB. Cic. 
 
 241. Yocahulary, 
 
 Abstlneo, ere, tinui, tentum, to abstain, refrain. 
 
 Acutus, a, um, sharpened, sharp. 
 
 Adhuc, adv. hitherto^ thus far, as yet 
 
 Catena, ae,/. chain. 
 
 Culpa, ae,/. fault, blame. 
 
 Deligo, ere, legi, ledum, to choose, select^ elecL 
 
 Latinus, a, um, Latiii. 
 
 Libero, are, avT, atum, to free, liberate, 
 
 Ligarius, li, m. Ligarius, a prominent Roman in 
 
 whose behalf Cicero pleaded be- 
 
 Navigium, 11, n. vessel, ship. [fore Caesar. 
 
 ^ Or, while Serv'tua was reigning or was king. 
 
 * Or, after the kint/s were banished. 
 
 * The first method of translation comes nearer the original Latin concep- 
 tion, but the other metliods generally accord better with the English idiom. 
 
 * This construction is peculiar to tlje I^ntin. In the corresponding con- 
 structions in Sanskrit, Greek, aud £ugli»h, the present participle of the 
 verb to be is used. 
 
192 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE, 
 
 KobiliUs, atl8,/. nobility ; the nobility j noble; 
 
 Probo, ire, a?i, ittun, to approve ; to prove, 
 
 Quare, ado. toher^ore, 
 
 Relinquo, ere, liqni, licttnn, to leave. 
 
 Spolio, are, avi, atum, to despoil, rob, deprive. 
 
 Sndet, ia,/. •taJke. 
 
 Tameda, ia, m. the Tkame$. 
 
 Trini, ae, a, three-fold, triple, 
 
 Vaco, are, avi, atom, to be without, be/reefrom, 
 
 YiDcio, ire, viaxi, viuctum, to bind. 
 
 242. Translate into English, 
 
 1 . Labienus montc occupfitd noetroe exspectabat, proelioqne 
 abfitincbat. 2. MQnftis castris, Caesar duas ibi legiones re- 
 liquit, quattuor reliquas in castra rcdOxit. 3. Duces ii* 
 dcliguntur, qui summam soicntinm rei militaris habere exlsti- 
 mantur. 4. Caesar ad ' flanien Tamesim exercitum dGxit ; 
 ad* alteram flOminis rTpam magnae copiae hostium erant 
 InstrQctae ; ripa autem erat aeOtis sudibus munlta. 5. Cajv 
 tivl trinis catOnIs vincti sunt. 6. Celiac Latina lingua Galll 
 a)>pellantur. 
 
 7. Dumnorix, Divitiacl frater, dixit Galliam omnI nobilitate 
 8])oliatam esse. 8. Helvetii tertia ex parte lacu Lemanno et 
 flOraine Rhodano continentur. 9. Imperator fortis serv'itute 
 Graeciam liberavit. 10. Mums defensoribus niidatus est. 
 11. Tuum, Brute,* judicium probo. 12. Adhuc, Caesar,* 
 Quintus Ligarius omnI culpa vacat. 13. Quare conservate, 
 judices,* hunc bominem nobilissimum. 14. Caesar navigia, 
 quae secum habebat, militibus compleri jussit, et Icgatos 
 tribunosque militum monuit, ut ad^ tempus omnes res ab ils 
 administrarentur. 
 
 1 Observe that it is the subject, and duces a Predicate Noun. 
 
 * Observe that difTerent English words must be used in rendering this 
 preposition, according to the connection in which it occurs. Thus to the 
 river, on or near the bank, at the (proper) time, or in time. 
 
 * The Vocative rarely stands at the beginning of a sentence. It usually 
 follows an emphatic word. 
 
FOUR CONJUGATIONS, 198 
 
 243. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. As the general had freed the citizens from servitude/ 
 he was called the father of his country. 2. 3Iay our coun- 
 try always be protected {fortified) by the valor of its citizens. 
 3. Having filled the ships with soldiei-s,^ Caesar prepared to 
 hasten into Britain. 4. Soldiers,* may you be called true 
 friends of your country. 
 
 5. Having led his anny to the Thames,^ Caesar was told* 
 that the enemy were on the other bank of the river. 6. 
 General,' we ask that your anny be led back into camp. 7. 
 On hearing our words,^ the general ordered his army to be 
 led back into camp. 8. Citizens,^ this man is free from blame ; 
 kt him be selected as leader. 9. The general, leaving one 
 legion in camp,* led the othera toward the enemy. 
 
 LESSON LXXXIII. 
 
 FOUR CONJUGATIONS IN FULL. — EXERCISE IN READ- 
 ING AT SIGHT. 
 
 244. Read at Sif/ht, examine care/idlt/^ and translate into 
 J^nglish. 
 
 Gallia est divTsa in partes trus, quarum Qnam incolunt 
 Ik'lgae, aliam Aquitunl, tertiam Celtae, qui Latlnii lingua 
 Gain appellantur. Ilorum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, 
 ])ropterea quod minime ad eos mercatores saepc commeant, 
 at(|ue ea quae ad effeminandos animos pertinent important, 
 proximlque sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, qui- 
 
 > Bo careful here and elsewhere not to render the English words by the 
 
 ccrrc spniidiiig I^tln tcordf, but consider by what idiom the thought should 
 
 >\ in Latin. Here the Ablative Absolute should be used, as if 
 
 t li were the citizens havinff been freed, etc. In the first MHp 
 
 teuce, the i/eneral will become the subject of the principal verb. 
 
 3 On the position of the Vocative, see page liR2, foot-uote 3. 
 
 * Latin idiom, i( was told to Cacmxr. 
 
194 VERBS IN lO, 
 
 bnscum continenter belhim gerunt. Eadem dd causa Helvetil 
 reliquos Cellaa virtflte j>raecedunt, quod fer§ cotldianis proe- 
 lils cum Germanis contendunt. 
 
 Helvetil undiquc loci n&tQr& continentur; tln& ex parte 
 flQminc HhOno, hitiiisiino atque altissimo, qui acrrum Ilelvo- 
 tium a Gemiaiils diviilit ; altera ex parte monte jQra, qui est 
 inter SOquanOs et Ilelvetios; tertia lacfl Lemanno et flQinine 
 Khodand, qui provinciam Honianam ab Helvetiis dividit. 
 Ob efts rea minus facile cum fiuitiinis bellum gerere possunt. 
 
 245. TrandaU iiUo Latin. 
 
 1. War could not readily be waged* by the Ilelvetii with 
 their neiglibors. 2. Lake Lemannus and the river Rhone, 
 by which the Ilelvetii are separated from the Roman prov- 
 ince, shut in the Ilelvetii on one side. 3. The rest of the 
 Celts are surpassed in valor by the Ilelvetii. 4. Wars were 
 incessantly waged by the Germans with the Ilelvetii. 
 
 6. The things which are imported by merchants frequently 
 weaken the spirit of the Gauls. 6. Caesar says that Gaul 
 is divided into three parts. By whom are these parts of 
 Gaul inhabited ? 7. Tliose whom the Romans named Gauls, 
 called themselves Celts. 8. Who were the bravest of all 
 those who inhabited Gaul ? 
 
 LESSON LXXXIV. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATIOy. — VERBS IN 10. — ACTIVE VOICE. 
 — REVIEW OF RULE LftC. — RULE LX. 
 
 246. JLessan from the Ghrammar. 
 
 217. A few verbs of the Third Conjugation form the 
 Present Indicative in io, ior, like verbs of the Fourth Con- 
 jugation. They are inflected with the endings of the Fourth, 
 wherever those endings have two successive vowels. 
 
 ^ Bender tocu not able to he waged. 
 
VERBS IN Id. 195 
 
 218. Active Voice. — Capio, I take. 
 
 Verb Stem, cap; Present Stem, cape, 
 
 PRINCIPAL parts. 
 
 Pres. Ind. Pres. Ixf. Perf. Ixd. SrwxE. 
 
 capio, capcre, cepi, captum. 
 
 Indicative Mood, 
 present tense. 
 
 SIXOUiaR. PLURAL. 
 
 capio, capis, capit; | capimus, capitis, capiunt. 
 
 imperfect. 
 capiebam, -lebas, -lebat; | capiebdmus, -iebutis, -iGbant. 
 
 FUTURE, 
 capiam, -ius, -iet; | capiemus, -ietis, -lent. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 cepi, -Isti, -It; | cepimus, -istis, -vrunt, or ere. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 cepcram, -eras, -era t; | ceiHjrdmus, -enitis, -erant. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT. 
 cCpero, -cris, -erit; | ceperiinus, -erltls, -erint. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 capiam, -ids, -iat; | capiumus, -iatis, -iant 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 caperem, -«res, -eret; | caperemus, -eretis, -crent. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 ceperim, -eris, -erit; | ceperlmiis, -erftis, -crint 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 cepissena, -isses, -isset; I cepissemus, -issetis, -issent 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAU 
 
 Pres. cape; I caplte. 
 
 Put. capito, I eapltftte, 
 
 capita; I capluntd. 
 
196 
 
 VERBS IN lb. 
 
 INFIjnTIVB. 
 
 Pel/, oepiase. 
 
 Fut, captunu 
 
 GERUND. 
 Gen, capiendl, 
 JkiL capiendo, 
 Ace, caplenduin, 
 Abl. capiendo. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 Fret, capiens. 
 
 Fut, captunu. 
 SUPINE. 
 
 Ace, capttim, 
 Abl. captu. 
 
 RULE LX. ~ Supine In fL 
 
 547. The Supine in u is generally used as an Ablative 
 of Si^ecification (2^, 424) : 
 
 Quid est tarn jucundum auditi'i, what i« no agreeable to hear (in 
 bearing)? Cic. Difficile dictu est, it is difficult to tell, Cic. De gonerc 
 mortis difficile dictu est, /( i» difficult to tpeak of the kind of death. 
 Cic Civitas incredibile memoratu est quantum creverit, it is incred- 
 ible to relate how much the Uate increased. Sail. 
 
 247. Vocabulary. 
 
 Carriis,!, m. 
 Ceitos, a, um, 
 
 CoCmo, ere, emi, emplum, 
 Conatum, i, n. 
 ConjuratiS, dnis,/. 
 Cupiditas, atis,/. 
 DO, dare, dedi, datum, 
 Facllis, e, comp, facilior, sup. 
 
 facillimus, 
 Facio, ere, feci, factum. 
 Fides, Si,/. 
 
 Indued, ere, duxl, ductum, 
 Jumentum, i, n, 
 Mllle,* indeclinable. 
 
 cartj loagon. 
 
 certain ; certlorem facere, to make 
 
 more eertainf to inform, 
 to buy up, obtain by purchase, 
 undertaking, attempt, purpose, 
 conspiracy, 
 desire, 
 to give. 
 
 eajfy. 
 
 to do, make. 
 
 faith, confidence; assurance, 
 
 to induce, lead on, [pledge, 
 
 draught animal, beast of burden, 
 
 a thousand. 
 
 I mile as an adjective is indeclinable; as a substantive it is used in the 
 Nominative and Accusative singular, but in the plural it is declined like 
 the ploral of mare (63, 63): milia, milium, mllibus. With the substaii- 
 
VERBS IN Id. 
 
 107 
 
 Parco, ere, peperci, pareurn, 
 Perficio, ere, fC-ci, fectum, 
 Pennovco, (ire, mOvi, motum, 
 Quam, adv. 
 
 Recipiu, ere, eepi, ceptura, 
 
 S«inentis, is,/. 
 
 SuscipiO, ere, cepi, ceptum, 
 
 to spare. { Followed by the DaUre. ) 
 
 to accompliHh, 
 
 to move, induce^ influenre. 
 
 how ; Willi a superlative, at . . . 
 UH possible; qiuin mdximiu. the 
 largest possible^ as large as pos- 
 sible. 
 
 to retake, betake, 
 
 sowing, planting. 
 
 to take up, undertake. 
 
 248. Translate into Enr/lish. 
 
 1. Caesar j>acem cum Ilclvetiis fecit. 2. Puccm cum hot- 
 
 tibiis faciamiis. 3. Noiinc pacein cum Gallw faciOtis? Paccra 
 
 cum ils facieiuus. 4. Orgetorix sibi legationem ad cIviUlcs 
 
 iscepit. Is regnl cupiditate inductus conjuratioiiem nobilU 
 
 itis Helvetiorum fecit. 5. Orgetorix facile esse factQ Ca* 
 
 Lico et Dumnorigl probavit conata perficere. IT hac oratldno 
 
 Iducti inter se Hdem dedurunt.* 6. Nostrl mllites sub oc- 
 
 >um sOlis so in castra recOperunt. 7. Ilelvelii, auctorilale 
 
 ^rgetorigis permotl, constituerunt jfimentorum ct carrorum 
 
 lam maximum iiumerum coemere, et sOmontes qunm muxi- 
 
 facerc. 
 8. Ilostes ])ostero die castra ex eO loco movent : idem facit 
 Caesar, equitatumque omnem ad numerum quattuor milium 
 mittit, qui videant^ quas in partes hostes iter faciant. 9. 
 OmnOs Quo tempore in hostes imj>etum faciemus. 10. Utinam 
 eo tempore in hostes im|>etum fecissetis. 11. Nflntil Cae- 
 •arem dc his rCbus certiorem faciebant. 12. Dux Galldrum 
 magna manQ ad castra nostra oppugnalum venlt. Ills K'biis 
 permotus Quintus Titurius legatum ad Gallos mltttt rogitum 
 at sib! miiitibusque* ]>arcant. 
 
 (iv« mllle, tnilia, the name of the obJecU ennmerated to c«M»Uy la ib« 
 0«DiUre. 
 
 * Inter se dare, * to jfire each other,* ' to exchange.' 
 
 * See SaKKeetion XVII., 3. 
 
 * Indirect object; see 54, Rule XII. 
 
 U 
 
198 VERBS IN Id. 
 
 249. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. The Helvetii sent ambassadors to Caesar to ask peace. 
 2. As hostages had been sent by the Helvetii,* Caesar said 
 that he would make peace with them. 3. The Gauls hast- 
 ened to the winter quarters of the legion to attack it. 4. 
 Caesar understood that to conquer the Helvetii was not an 
 easy thing to do. 5. An hour^ before sunset we shall be- 
 take ourselves into our camp. 
 
 6. Which is the easier thing to do, to march into the 
 forest or to remain in the camp? 7. Who will inform us In 
 which direction the enemy marched?* 8. The chiefs of the 
 Gauls did not accomplish their purj>ose8. 9. To accomplish* 
 the purposes of the Helvetii, Orgetorix had undertaken an 
 embassy to the other states of Gaul. 
 
 LESSON LXXXV. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. — VERBS IN l6. — PASSIV^E VOICE. 
 RULE XLIV. 
 
 250. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 219. Passive Voice. — Capior, lam taken. 
 
 PRIXCIPAL PARTS. 
 Pre8. Ixd. Pres. Ixf. Perf. Ixd. 
 
 capior, capi, captus sum. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 SINOtLAR. PLURAL. 
 
 capior, caperis, capitur; | capimur, caplininl, capiuntur. 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 capiebar, -iebaris, -iebatiir; | capiebamnr, -iebamini, iebantur. 
 
 1 Use the Ablative Absolute. 2 Ablative of Difference. 
 
 * An Indirect Question. What mood must be used ? 
 < Remember that it is only after verbs of motion that the Supine is used 
 to express purpose. Here a clause with ut should be used. 
 
VERBS IN 10. 199 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 capiar, -Icris, -ietur; | capiemur, -lemini, -ientar. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 captus sum, es, est; | capti sumus, estis, sunt. 
 
 PLUPERFECT, 
 captus erain, ems, erat; | capti emmus, enltis, erant. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 captus ero, eris, erlt; | capti erimus, eritis, erunt. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 SINGULAR. PLURAIm 
 
 capiar, -iuris, iaiiur; | capiamur, -iamini, -iaiitur. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 caperer, ereris, -eretur; | caperemur, -eremini, -erentur. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 captus sim, sis, sit; | capti simus, sTtis, sint. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 captus essem, esses, csset; | capti essemus, essetis, essent 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres. capere; 
 
 Fnt. cap i tor, 
 
 capitor; 
 
 IXFINITIVE. 
 Pren. capi. 
 Per/, captus esse. 
 Flit, captuni Iri. 
 
 capi mini, 
 capiuntor. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Per/, captus. 
 Ger. capiendus. 
 
 506. Every conditional sentence consists of two distinct 
 parts, expressed or understood — the Condition and the 
 Conclusion : 
 
 Si negem, mentiar, if I should deny it, I should speak falsrlyA 
 CIr. 
 
 1 Here si negem it tbe condHion, and mentiar^ the conclusion. 
 
200 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 RULE XLIV. — Conditional Sentences witli si, nisi» 
 
 ni, sin. 
 
 507. Conditional sentences with si, nisi, ni, sin, take — 
 
 I. The Indicative in both clauses to assume the sup- 
 posed case: 
 
 Si splritura ducit, vivit, if he breathes, he is alive. Cic Si tot ex- 
 empla virtutis iion movent, nihil unquani movebit, if so many examples 
 qf valor do not move {you)y nothing will ever move (you). Liv. 
 
 II. The Present or Perfect Subjunctive in both 
 clauses to represent the supposed case as possible : 
 
 Dies (leficiat, si velira causara defendere, the day would fail me, if 
 I should wish to defend the cause. Cic Improbe fecerfs, nisi monu- 
 crls, you would do wronj, if you. should not yice warning. Cic 
 
 III. The Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive 
 in both clauses to represent the supposed case as con- 
 tra ri/ to fact : 
 
 Phii'ibiis verbis ad tc scnberem, si res verba desideraret, / should 
 write to you wore fully (witli more words), {f the case required words. 
 Cic. Si voluisset, dimlcasset, {f he hud wished, he would have fought. 
 Nep. 
 
 251. Vocabulary. 
 » Adraitto, ere, misi, mlssum, to admit, commit. 
 
 Biennium, ii, n. two years, space of two years. 
 
 Conficio, ere, feci, fectum, to accomplish, complete, finii'h, 
 
 bring to a close. 
 
 Controversia, ae, /. controversy, dispute. 
 
 Decerno, ere, crevi, cretiim, to decide, decree. 
 
 Defessus, a, urn, tired, exhausted, weary. 
 
 Deleo, ere, evi, etnm, to destroy. 
 
 Druides, um, m. pL Druids, the priests of the Gauls. 
 
 Facinus, facinoris, tu misdeed, crime. 
 
 Ilereditas, atis,/. inheritance. 
 
 Interficio, ere, feci, fectum, to kill, slay, put to death. 
 
 Jacio, ere, jeci, jactum, to throw. 
 
 Labor, oris, m. labor, toil, effort, exertion, 
 
 Mos, moris, m. usage, custom. 
 
 Poena, ae,/. penalty, punishment. 
 
 Praecipito, are, avi, atum, to precipitate, throw, hurl. 
 
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 201 
 
 Privatus, a, um, privatef personal. 
 
 Proditor, Oris, m. traitor. 
 
 Proiclo,* ere, projeci, jectum, to throw forward^ throw down. 
 
 Publicus, a, um, public. 
 
 Si, coi\}. \f. 
 
 Vinculum, i, ru feltery bondt chain, 
 
 262. Translate into English. 
 
 1. GermanOrum'' bellum celeriter conficietur. 2. BcIIum 
 Helvetioruni* jam confectum erat. 3. Bello IlelvetiOrum 
 confecto,* totius fere Galliae legatl, prlncipes civitatum, ad 
 Caesarem convenerunt. 4. Germanl suos interfici viderunt ; 
 magiio numero interfectO,* reliqui se in flumen praecipitave- 
 runt. 6. Quid conficietur? Eae res confici debent. Ad 
 eas res conficiendas^ biennium nobis satis ducimus. Quia ad 
 eas res conficiendas* deligetur? Jam tQ delectus es. 6. 
 Lapides undique in murum jaciuntur, murusque defensoribus 
 nudatur. 7. In Gallia Druides fere de omnibus controver- 
 sils publicis prTvatisque constituunt; si quod est admissum 
 facinus, poenas constituunt; si de hereditate controversia 
 est, ildem decernunt. 8. Si quod sit admissum facinus, poe- 
 nas constituamus. 9. Si quod esset admissum facinus, poenas 
 constituissemus. 
 
 10. Ego hoc consilium probarem, si nullum perlculum 
 viderem. 11. Ego hoc consilium probavissem, si nflllura 
 perlculum vidissem. 12. Ilelvetil, si pacem populus Ro- 
 manus cum ils fecissent, arma projecissent. 13. Nisi totius 
 diel labore mllites, essent defessi, omnes liostium c5piae 
 deletae essent. 14. Helvetil moribus suis* proditorem ex 
 vinculls* dlcere^ co6g6runt. 
 
 » Pronounced as though spelled projieio. 
 
 * English idiom, tear with the Oermans, et«. 
 
 * See Suggestion XVI., (1). 
 « See Suggestion XIII., .4. 
 
 * In accordance with, etc. See 168, Rule XXII. 
 
 * English idiom, rx chnina. 
 
 * Id this connection dicere may be rendered plead. 
 
202 FOUR CONJUGATIONS, 
 
 253. Translate into Zatin, 
 
 1. If stones had been thrown against the wall, it would 
 have been stripped of soldiers. 2. Should stones be thrown 
 against the wall, the town would be taken. 3. If the gen- 
 eral were in the camp, the soldiei-s would not be daunted by 
 fear. 4. If the general is in the camp, we ought not to fear 
 danger. 5. If the war with the Helvetii should be finished, 
 ambassadors would assemble from the rest of Gaul. 
 
 6. If any crime has been committed by these men, let the 
 penalty be determined by the judge. 7. If our city had been 
 fortified, we should not see these j)eril8.* 8. If we approved 
 your plan, we should not have accomplished these things so 
 successfully.^ 9. After these things were accomplished,* peace 
 was made with the enemy. 
 
 LESSON LXXXVI. 
 
 FOUR CONJUGATIONS IN FULL, INCLUDING VERBS IN 
 lO. — RULE XLVI. 
 
 254. Lesson Ji'om the Grammar, 
 
 514. A concessive clause is one that concedes or admits 
 something, generally introduced in English by though or 
 although : • 
 
 Quamquam itlnere fessi erant, tamen procediint, although they were 
 weary with the journey y they still (yet) advanced. Sail. 
 
 1 Observe that in 7, the condition refers to past time, and the conclu- 
 sion to present time, while in 8 the condition refers to present tilhe, and 
 the conclusion to past time. 
 
 2 Use the Ablative Absolute. 
 
 • Concessive clauses bear a close resemblance to conditional clauses both 
 in form and in use. Si optimum est, Mf it is best,' is a condition; etst 
 optimum est, 'even if (or though) it is best,' is a concession; the one as- 
 sumes a supposed case, the other admits it. 
 
CONCESSIVE CLAUSES, 208 
 
 RULE XLVI. — Moods In Concessive Clauses. 
 
 515. Concessive clauses take — 
 
 I. Generally the Indicative in the best prose, when 
 
 hitroduced by quamquam : 
 
 Quamquam intellegunt, tamen nunquam dicunt, though they under- 
 stand, they never speak. Cic Quamquam festlnas, non est mora 
 longa, though you are in haste, the delay ia not long, Hor. 
 
 II. The Indicative or Subjunctive^ when introduced 
 by etsi^ etiamsi^ tametsl, or «i, like conditional clauses 
 with 8l. Thus — 
 
 1. The Indicative is used to represent the supposed case as a fact : 
 Gaudeo, etsi nihil sci6 quod gaudeam, I rejoice, though I know no 
 
 reason why I should rejoice. Plaut. 
 
 2. The Present or Perfect Subjunctive, to represent the supposed 
 case as possible : 
 
 Etsi nihil habcat in se gloria, tamen virtfitem sequitur, though glory 
 may not possess anything in itself, yet it follows virtue. Cic 
 
 3. The Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive, to represent the sup- 
 posed case as contrary to fact : 
 
 Etiamsi mors oppetenda esset, domi mallem, even \f death ought to 
 be met, I should pr^er to meet it at Ihome. Cic. 
 
 III. The Subjunctive^ when introduced by licet^ quam- 
 
 »r«, uty ni^ cum, or the relative qui : 
 
 Licet Irrideat, plus tamen ratiS valebit, though he may deride, reason 
 will yet avail more. Cic. Non tu possis, qnamvis excellus, you icould 
 not be able, although you excel. Cic. Ut desint vires, tamen est 
 iaudanda voluntas, though the strength fails, still the will should be 
 approved. Ovid. Ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est, 
 though pain may not be the greatest evil, it is certainly an evil. Cic, 
 Cum domi divitiae adfluerent, fuere tamen cives, etc., tfiough wealth 
 abounded at home, there were yet citizens, etc Sail. 
 
 266. Vocabulari/. 
 Aest&s, itis,/. summer, 
 
 Circummunio, Ire, ivi, itum, to wall around, encompast, surround. 
 Concilio, are, avi, atum, to win, secure, 
 
 Creber, bra, brum, frequent 
 
204 CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 Cupid, ere, ivi or il, Hum, to desire. 
 
 Curo, are, avi, atum, to care^ care for ; aliquid facienduia 
 
 curare, to hate anything done. 
 
 Etsi, conj. although. 
 
 Excursio, Onis, /. sally, sortie. 
 
 Exigo, ere, egi, actum, to complete j finish, end. 
 
 Exiguus, a, um, restricted, limited, scanty^ small, 
 
 Oraeous, a, um, Greek. Grecian. [bri^. 
 
 Iirnoro, are, avi, atuin, not to knoio. to be ignorant of. 
 
 Indicium, li, n. testimony, evidence. 
 
 Juvo, are, juvl, jutum, to aid. 
 
 Maturus, a, uni, early. 
 
 Orbis, is, m. circle, circuit; orbis terrurum, the 
 
 Ordo, inis, m. rank. [earth, world. 
 
 Perpetuus, a, um, perpetual, endless, uninterrupted. 
 
 Respicio, ere, spejci, spectum, to regard, look upon. 
 
 Tabula, ae,/. table, tablet ; doctunent, record. 
 
 Terra, ae,/. earth, land. 
 
 Transduco, ere, duxl, ductum, to lead across. 
 
 256. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Ea res Ilelvutils per indicium enuntiatur. 2. Caesar 
 pontem in^Arare faciendum curiivit* atque ita exercitum 
 transduxit. 3. In castris Helvetiorum tabulae repertae 
 sunt, litterls GraecTs coufectae. 4. Orgetorix dixit se suae 
 civitatis imperium obtenlurum esse. Is se suis copiis suoque 
 exercitu Castico Dumnorigique regna conciliaturum esse 
 confirmabat. 5. Si Lingones Helvetios frumento juvissent, 
 Caesar eos pro hostibus habuisset. 6. Ilostes pi*uno adventu 
 exercitus nostri crebras ex oppido excursiones faciebant; 
 postea valid circummunitl* oppido sese continebant. 7. 
 Eodem fere tempore Caesar, etsi prope exacta jam aestas 
 erat, tamcn in aliam gentem exercitum adduxit. 
 
 8. Exigua parte aestatis reliqua, Caesar, etsi in Gallia 
 maturae sunt hieraes, tamen in Britanniam contendit. 9. 
 
 1 English idiom, over. 
 
 * Literally, cared for a bridge to be made, i.e. attended to the making of 
 a bridge; render, had a bridge made. 
 « That is, by our works. 
 
DEPONENT VERBS. 205 
 
 <]t8l noiulum Britannorum consilia cognoverat, tamen pert- 
 culuni videbat. 10. Cum ea ita sint, tamen voblscum pacem 
 faciemus. 11. Cum priinl ordines hostium iuterfectl essent, 
 lamen reliqui fortiter pugiiabant. 12. Caesar su principera 
 Don solum urbis Homae, sed orbis terrarum esse cupiebat. 
 13. Si ea quae in aliis nationibus geruntur ignoratis, respicite 
 tlnitiraam Galliam, quae peri)etua premitur servitute. 
 
 257. Translate into Latin. 
 1. Althoiigh we see other lands distressed by slavery, our 
 country is free. 2. Although these things have been an- 
 nounced to the enemy,* they do not know what is done in 
 our cam]). 3. Although many very brave soldiers have been 
 slain,^ we desire to make peace with the enemy. 4. Although 
 a bridge has been made over the river,* the army has not 
 yet been led across. 
 
 5. What was found in the camp of the Helvetii ? Caesar 
 tells us what was found in their camp.* 6. Caesar regarded 
 them as enemies, in order that other nations might not assist 
 the Helvetii. 7. If a bridge had been made,* the array could 
 have been* led over. 8. Although they had made peace* a 
 few days before, they made frequent attacks upon the Roman 
 imp. 
 
 LESSON Lxxx\ar. 
 
 FOUR CONJUGATIONS. — DEPONENT VERBS. — 
 
 RULE xxvr. 
 
 258. Lesson from t/ie Grammar, 
 
 Deponent Verbs. 
 
 231. Deponent Verbs have in general the forms of the 
 
 Passive Voice with the signification of the Active. But — 
 
 1 In all these sentences we may use tlie Ablative Absolute, but a finite 
 Terb with a conjunction expresses more clearly the conctuive or eo*»» 
 U'.lionat force of the clause. 
 
 * An Indirect Question. * Render, would have been able to be led, 
 
206 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 1. They have also in the Active, the future infinitive, the par- 
 ticiples, gerund, and supine. 
 
 2. The gerundive generally has the passive signification; sometimes 
 also the perfect participle: Itortandus, to be exhorted; expertus, tried. 
 
 3. The Future Infinitive of the Passive form is rare, as the Active 
 form is generally used. 
 
 Note. — The synopsis of a single example will suflSciently illustrate 
 the peculiarities of Deponent Verbs. 
 
 232. Ilortor, I exhort. 
 
 1. Principal Parts. 
 
 hortor, hortdri, hortutus sum. 
 
 2. Present System ; Stem, hortd. 
 
 PAKTICtrLB. 
 
 hortans 
 
 INDICATITB. 
 
 
 lunn. 
 
 iitrixmrB. i 
 
 Pres. hortor^ 
 
 horter 
 
 hortare 
 
 hortari 
 
 Imp. hortabar 
 
 horturer 
 
 
 
 Fut. hortabor 
 
 1 
 
 hortitor 
 
 
 Gerund^ 
 
 hortandi. 
 
 Germ 
 
 idive, hortandus 
 
 3. Supine System ; Stem, hortdt. 
 
 hortatus esse thortutus 
 
 Perf. hortatus sum jhortatus sIm 
 Plup. hortatus eram hortatus essem 
 F. P. hortatus ero 
 Fut. 
 
 hortatunis esse 
 Supine, hortutum, hortatu. 
 
 hortatunis 
 
 RUL.E XXVI. — Ablative in Special Constructions.^ 
 
 421. The Ablative is used — 
 
 I. With utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vescor, and their 
 compounds : 
 
 1 The tenses are inflected regularly throughout : horlor, hortarls, hortatur; 
 hortamxir^ horldminl, hortantur. All the forms in this synopsis have the 
 active meaning, / ezkort^ I was ezJiorUng, etc., except the Gerundive, 
 which has the passive force, deserving to be exhorted, to be exhorted. The 
 Gerundive, as it is passive in meaning, cannot be used in iutransitive 
 Deponent Verbs, except in an impersonal sense; see 281, 301, 1. 
 
 ^ This Ablative is readily explained as the Ablative of means: thus, 
 utor, * I use,' 'I serve myself by means o/*; fruor, * I enjoy,' 'I delight 
 myself icith '; vescor, ' 1 feed upon,' * I feed myself icUh,' etc. 
 
DEPONENT VERBS. 207 
 
 PlurlmU rihua fruimur et utimur, toe enjoy and use very maxt 
 TuiNos. Cic. Magna est praeda potitus, he obtained oukat dooty. 
 Xep. Lacte et came vescebantur, they lived upon milk and Jleth, 
 Sail. 
 
 II. With Verbs and Adjectives of Plenty : 
 
 Villa abuiulat lacte^ cuseoy melle^ the villa abounds ix milk, cheese, 
 and uoNEY. Cic. Urbs referta copiia, a city Jilled -with supplies. 
 Clc. Virtute praeditus, endotoed with virtue. Cic. Deu8 bonis ex- 
 plevit mundum, God has filled the world with blessings. Cic. 
 
 III. With dignus, indignus/ and contentiis : 
 
 Digiii sunt amlcitid, they are worthy of friendship. Cic. Vlr 
 j>atre dignus, a man worthy op his fatiiku. Cic. Ilonore indlgnis- 
 simus, most unworthy of honor. Cic. Nutura parvO contenta, nature 
 content with little. Cic. 
 
 Note 1. — Transitive vcj-bs of rienty'' take the Accusative and 
 Ablative: 
 
 Annis naves onorat, he loads the shij^s icith arms. Sail. 
 
 259. Yocabulary. 
 
 Abundo, are, avi, utum, to abound, to be icell supplied 
 
 Arbitror, ari, utus sum, to think. [ioJtA. 
 
 Confido, ere, fisus sum,' to trust, have confidence in, rely 
 
 Conor, ari, atus sum, to try, attempt. [upon, 
 
 Contentus, a, um, content, satitfied. 
 
 Indignus, a, um, unworthy. 
 
 Intercludo, ere, clusi, clusum, to cut off. 
 
 Nullus, a, um, 46, 151, not any, no, none. 
 
 Persuadeo, ere, suasi, suasum, to persuade. 
 
 Potior, iri, itus sum, to gain posscMlon qf, take po*- 
 
 session of, obtain poueuion nf, 
 
 Privd, fire, ivi, fitum, to deprive. 
 
 Proficiscor, i, profectus sum, to start, set out. 
 
 1 The nature of Die Ablative with dh/nus and indif/nua is somewhat 
 nnccrtain. On etymological grounds it is explained as tnttrumentat ; see 
 Delbriick, p. 72; Corssen, ' Krit. Beitr.,' p. 47. 
 
 * Transitive verbs of plenty mean 'to fill/ 'to furnish with,* etc., M 
 cumvlS, compleo, impleo, imbuo, instrtio, onero, 6rn6, etc. 
 
 • Con/tdo is a semi-deponent, i.e. in the tenaoe for oompleted aotion It 
 has the forma of the pMsive rolce, with the meaning of the active. 
 
208 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 Trano, are, avi, fituDi, to swim across, 
 
 Tuto, adv. safely. 
 
 Tutus, a, um, safe. 
 
 IJllus, a, um, 45, 151, any, any one. 
 
 Utor, i, usus sum, to une. 
 
 Versus, us, m. terse. 
 
 Vis, vis, /. force, violence; pi, vires, virium, 
 
 Vulnus, eris, n. xioound. [strength, 
 
 260. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Ilelvetii do finibus suls cuiu omnibus copils proficIscS- 
 jantur. 2. Orgctorix Caslico* pereuadet ut regniim in clvi- 
 :ate sua occupet, itemque* Duranorigl ut idem conetur. 3. 
 Proditores banc urbem delere conantur. 4. Proditor nos 
 )mnes vita privare conatus est. 6. Tibf, Caesar, bonl viii 
 yratias agunt. 6. BellO confecto, oranes Galliae civitates 
 egatos ad Caesarem mlserunt. 7. Eo tempore Druides 
 jrraecls lltteris utebantur. 8. Druidus versQs suos litterls 
 ion mandant, cum in reliquis fero rebus Graecis litteris 
 ilantur. 
 
 9. Aedul i)r6 Bellovaeis rogabant ut Caesar sua dementia 
 n eos uteretur. 10. LabiGuus castrls hostium potltus est. 
 11. Hostes, commeata intercluso, sine tillo vulnere victoria 
 lotirl cupiunt. IllI, etsi se tuto pugnaturos existimabant, 
 :amen tutius' esse arbitrabantur, commeatu intercluso, sine 
 illo vulnere victoria potin. 12. Hostes ad flumen Rhenum 
 renerunt ; ibf pauci vlribus confisi tranare contenderunt. 13. 
 Vercingetorix equitata abundabat. Is niTlitibus quos antea 
 labuerat sG esse contentum dixit. 14. Milites extremam 
 Pamem sustinebant, nulla tamen vox est ab* ils audita, populi 
 Roraani gloria et superioribus ^^ct6riis indigna. 15. Galli 
 superiorem partem coUis castris suis compleverimt. 
 
 1 Indirect Object: the clause with ut is the Direct Object. 
 
 2 Item modifies persnadet. 
 
 8 What determines the gender of this predicate adjective ? 
 
 * The context here shows that ab should be rendered from, not by. 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE, 209 
 
 261. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Although the Gauls were well supplied with grain, 
 Caesar was cut off from supplies. 2. Gaul was filled with 
 very warlike nations. 3. We shall not obtain ])osse8sion of 
 the camp of the enemy without receiving* many wounds. 
 
 4. Many words which we hear are unworthy of wise men. 
 
 5. The Ilelvetii were not contented with their territor}', but 
 desired to obtain possession of the lands of their neighbors. 
 
 6. The general, relying on' the valor of his soldiers, has 
 determined to assault the town. 7. We shall attempt to set 
 out to-night.* 8. Caesar thought that he should use the sup- 
 j)lies of grain which were sent by the Aedui. 9. Do you 
 understand for what reason the Druids used Greek letters?* 
 
 LESSON LXXXVIII. 
 
 I-OUR CONJUGATIONS IN FULL. — RUXES LIU. AND LIV. 
 
 262. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 
 Indirect Discourse. — Ordtio Ohl'iqua, 
 522. When a writer or speaker expresses thoughts, whether 
 his own or those of another, in any otlier form than in the 
 original words of the author, he is said to use the Indirect 
 Discourse — OrdtiS OhUqua : * 
 
 Platonem ferunt in Italiain venisso, they say that Plato came into 
 Italy. Cic. Responded te dolorera ferre inoderate, / rej>ly that yon 
 bear the affiiction icith moderation. Cic Utilem arbitror esse scien- 
 llara, / think that knowledge is useftd. Cic. 
 
 1 In rendering, omit receiving. 
 
 * See 260, sentence 12. 
 
 * Render on this nif/hl. 
 
 < What kind of a clause ? See 127, S20. 
 
 » Thus, in the first example, Platonem in itoliam rentste is in the indi- 
 rect discourse ; in the direct, i e. in the original words o( tlioee who : 
 the statement, it would be Plat6 in ftallam venlL 
 
210 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 1. In distinction from the Indirect Discourse — Oratib Ohllqua^ 
 the original words of the author are said to be in the Direct Dis- 
 course — Or a (i3 Recta. 
 
 2. Words quoted without change belong to the Direct Discourse: 
 Rex 'duuniviros' inquit 'secundum legem facio,' the king «atd, '2 
 
 appoint diiumcirs according to laic.* Liv, 
 
 RULE LIII. — Moods in Principal Clauses. 
 
 523. The principal clauses of the Direct Discourse 
 on becoming Indirect take the Infinitive or Subjunctive 
 as follows : 
 
 I. When Declarative, they take the Infinitive with 
 
 a Subject Accusative. 
 
 Dicebat animos esse dlvinos, he ircw wont to say that souls are divine. 
 Cic. riatonem Tarentmn venisse reperiO, / Jind that Plato came to 
 Tarentum. Cic Catd mirari se aiebat, Cato was wont to say that 
 he wondered. Cic Hippias gloriatus est, anulum se sua manQ 
 confC'cisse,* Hippias boasted that he had made the ring with his own 
 hand. Cic. 
 
 II. When Interrogative, they take — 
 
 1. Generally the Subjunctive : 
 
 Ad postulata Caesarls respondit, quid sib! vellet,cur veniret,^ to 
 the demands of Caesar he replied, what did he wish, why did he 
 comet Caes. 
 
 2. Sometimes the Infinitive with a Subject Accusative^ 
 as in rhetorical questions : * 
 
 1 In the direct discourse these examples would read— (1) animi sunt 
 divini, (2) Plato Tarentum venit, (3) miror, and (4) dnulum m^a manii 
 confeci. Observe that the pronominal subjects implied in miror and cdn- 
 Jecl are expressed with the Infinitive, as mirari se, si confecisse. But the 
 subject is sometimes omitted when it can be readily supplied ; see second 
 example under 11., 2, below. 
 
 2 In the direct discourse this example would read — ^vid tib} ris? cur 
 venis? 
 
 8 A question used for rhetorical effect in place of an assertion is called 
 a Rhetorical Question, as num potest, * can he ? ' = non potest, * he can not ' ; 
 quid est turpius, * what is baser ?' = niAtZ est turpius, 'nothing is baser.' 
 
INDIRECT DISCOUnSE. 211 
 
 Docvbant rem esse tcstiraoniO, etc.; quid esse levius, etc., they 
 thowed that the fact wjcm a proof (for a proof), etc.; what wcu more 
 inconsiderate, etc. ? Caes. Kespondit, nuin meinoriam deponere 
 posse,* he replied, could he lay aside the recollection f Caes. 
 
 III. When Imperative,^ they take the Subjunctive: 
 
 Scribit Labieno cum legione veulat, he writes to Labienus to come 
 (that he should come) with a legion. Caes. Keddilur responsum, cas- 
 tris se tent-rent, the reply icas returned, that they should keep than' 
 selves in camp. Liv. Ainitt-s certiores facit^se reflcerent, he directed 
 the soldiers to refresh themselves. Caes. Orubant ut sibi aux ilium 
 ferret, they prayed that he icould bring them help. Caes. Niintius 
 venit, ne dubituret,' a message came that he should not hesitate. Nep. 
 
 RULE LIV. — Moods in Subordinate Clauses. 
 
 524. The subordinate clauses of the Direct Dis- 
 course on becoming Indirect take the Subjunctive : 
 
 Rcspondit se id quod in Xerviis fecisset factunmi,* he replied that 
 he would do what he had done in the case of the Nervii. Caes. Hip- 
 pius gloriatus est, anulura qucm habOret se sua manu confecisse,* 
 llippias boasted that he had made with his own hand the ring which 
 he icore. Cic. 
 
 526. In passing from the Direct Discourse to the Indi- 
 rect, pronouns of the firat and second persons are generally 
 changed to pronouns of the third person,' and the tiret and 
 
 Here belong many questions which in the direct form have the verb in the 
 first or in the third i)erson. As such questions are equivalent to declara- 
 tive sentences, they take the same construction, the Infinitive with ita 
 subject. 
 
 1 Direct discourse — (1) quid est levlu8= nihil est Icvius, and (2) num 
 memoriam deponere j>ossum=:memortam deponere non jwssum. 
 
 2 Imperative sentences include those sentences which take the Sub- 
 junrfive of Desire : see 114, 483. 
 
 « In the direct discourse these examples would read — (1) rt/m tfff1im€ 
 rrni, (2) castrls iw tenetc, (3) ids rrJicKe, (4) nobis auzilium fer, (5) nofi 
 dubHare. 
 
 < Direct, /a/? j«m \d quod In Kerr ils feci. 
 
 » Direct, anulum quern hnbeo med manH cdnffci. 
 
 • Thus — (1) P70 is chanfi^ed to sui, sib), etc., or to ipse; mens and ih)#. 
 ter to suus: (2) ta to is or lUe, sometimes to suf, etc.; tuus and vtMtrtt 
 suuM or to the Genitive of is ; and (3) hie and iste to iUe. 
 
212 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 second persons of verbs are generally changed to the third 
 
 person : 
 
 Gluriatiis est, anuluzn se sua nianfi confi'cissc,' he boasted thai he 
 had made the ring icith his vtcn hand. C'ic. Keddilur i-cspt^msum, ca»- 
 tris se tcnerent,- the reply icos returned that they nhonld keep them- 
 selcea in camp. Liv. Kespondit, sf obsides ab lis sibi dentiir, sestt 
 com iis pucein esse facturum,* he replied that if hostages were given 
 io him by tliem, he tcould make peace with them. Gam. 
 
 263. Vocabulary. 
 
 Appeto, ere« petivi or ii, itura, to seek ({fter, seek. 
 
 Artificiuni, ii, n. artifice. 
 
 Concilium, ii, n council^ meeting. 
 
 Creo, are, avi, atum, to create, elect, appoint. 
 
 Discedo, ere, cessi, cessum, to depart, wiUtdraw, awerce. 
 
 Polliceor, eri, itiis sum, to promise. {er ihan^ b^ore. 
 
 Prius, adv. comp., sup. prTmum, before^ sooner ; prius quam, soott' 
 
 Quisquam, quaeqiutm, quicquam, anyone^ anyUiing. 
 
 Responded, ere, spondl, sponsum, to answer. 
 
 264. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Ariovistus respondit se prius in Galliam venisse, quam 
 ))opulum Romanum.* Dixit omnOs Galliae civitales contra 
 se castra habuisso,* eas omnes copias a s5 uno proelio supera- 
 tas esse.* 2. Postero die, concilio convocato, Vercingetorix 
 dixit non virtute neque in aciC* vicisse Homaiios,* sed ar- 
 tificio quodam et scientia oppugn ation is.* 3. Aedui snmmo 
 in periculo sunt. AeduI dicunt se sumniO in j)erTculo esse.* 
 Dlxerunt se sumnio esse in j)erTculo. 4. AeduI summo in 
 
 1 Direct, amdum ego men manu confeci. -fc'/yo becomes ff, and meS, sna. 
 
 * Direct, castria v6s tenifte. Vi>* becomes tf, and teiiite, tenerent. 
 
 * Direct, si obsides a rt'ibis mih) dubtmivr, vftbUcuni pacem faciam. A 
 robis becomes ab iis; ni/AI becomes sib}; voblsmm, cum iis; and the 
 implied subject of faciam becomes sese, the subject of esse faclurxim. 
 
 * Give the Direct form corresponding to this Indirect Discourse. 
 
 * Castra habere, literally, to hare camp, may be rendered to encamp, 
 to take the field. 
 
 6 English idiom, skUl th assavlt. 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE, 218 
 
 periculo crant. Aedul dicunt sO summo fiiisse in porTo»»lo.» 
 DlxGnint se summo fuisse in periculo. 
 
 5. Liscus magistrutum gerObat. Hoc te!iii>ore duo inagis- 
 tratum gerunt. Aedui summo in periculo sunt quod duo 
 niagistratum gerunt. Aedui dicunt se summo esse in peri- 
 culo, quod duo magistratum gerant, et so uterque eorum 
 It'gibus crcatum esse dicat.^ Dixerunt so summo esse in 
 periculo, quod duo magistratum gererent, et se uterquo eorum 
 iC'gibus creatum esse diceret. 
 
 6. Nonne Orgetorix suae civitatis imperium obtinebit? 
 Dicit so suae civitatis imperium obtenturum esse.* 7. Im- 
 pei-tttor cum hostibus pacem faciet. Dicit si* obsides ab 
 hostibus sibi dentur, uti eos ea quae polliceautur facturoa in- 
 tellegat, sGsO cum ils pacem esse facturum.* 8. Caesar dixit 
 Ariovistum se consule' popull Roman! amicitiam appetisse;* 
 ciir Iiunc quisquam ab officio discessQrum jildicaret? 
 
 265. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Caesar says that Gaul was divided into three parts; 
 that the Belgac inhabited one of these, the Aquitani another, 
 and the Celts the third.* 2. lie said that a third i)art of 
 (Jaul was inhabited by those who called themselves Celts, 
 l)ut whom the Romans named Gauls.* He said that the 
 Ilelvetii were the bravest of the Gauls, and that they were 
 nearest to the Germans, with whom they were continually 
 waging war.* 3. The Ilelvetii said that if the Romans made 
 ]>eace with them, they would remain where Caesar desired ; 
 but that if iKjace was not made, the Romans would Ikj re- 
 LCarded by them as enemies.* Although they had attempted 
 to march through the province, they said that they wished 
 to make peace.* 
 
 ^ Give the corresponding Direct form. 
 
 » Wlmt form of condition in Direct Discourse ? 
 
 « Ablative Absolute, he being consul; render, in his consulship. 
 
 * Give the corresponding Direct form in English and in Latin. 
 
214 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 LESSON LXXXIX. 
 
 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS. — EXERCISE IN READ- 
 ING AT SIGHT. 
 
 266. Lesson from tJie Grammar, 
 233. The Active Periphrastic Conjugation, formed by 
 combining the Future Active Participle with suniy denotes 
 an intended or future action ; 
 
 AmutOrus sum, lam about to love, 
 
 mtCATTYS. SCIUCMCTrTB. 
 
 Prts, amaturus snm > amtttunis aim 
 
 Imp, amaturus eram amaturus essem 
 Fut, amaturus ero 
 
 Perf. amaturus fui amaturus fuerim 
 
 Plnp. amaturus fucram amaturus fuissem 
 F. P. amaturus f uerO * 
 
 tKTlVITITB. 
 
 amaturus esse 
 
 amaturus fnisse 
 
 234. The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation, formed 
 by combining the Gerundive with «/wj, denotes necessity or 
 duty, 
 
 Amandus sum, I must be loved.^ 
 
 Pres. 
 
 amandus sum 
 
 amandus sim 
 
 amandus esse 
 
 Imp, 
 
 amandus eram 
 
 amandus essem 
 
 
 FuL 
 
 amandus er5 
 
 
 
 Perf. 
 
 amandus fui 
 
 amandus fuerim 
 
 amandus fuisse 
 
 Plup. 
 
 amandus fueram 
 
 amandus fuissem 
 
 
 F.P. 
 
 amandus fuero 
 
 
 
 267. Jiead at Sight, examine carefuUy, and translate into 
 
 J^nylish, 
 
 Helvetil, auctoritate Orgetori^s permoti, constituenint de 
 finibus suis cum omnibus copils proficiscT, jumentorum et 
 carronim quam maximum numerum coemerc, sementes quam 
 mfiximas faccrc, cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam 
 confirmare. Ad eas res conficiendas biennium sib! satis esse 
 
 1 The periphrastic forms are inflected re^larly. The Future Perfect 
 is exceedingly rare. ^ Or, / deserve (ouglit) to be loved. 
 
PERlPURASriC CONJUGATIONS, 216 
 
 duxenint ; in tortium annum profcctioncm logo cunfirmavo* 
 i*unt. Ad eas res conficiendus Orgetorix delectus est. Is 
 sib! legatiOnem ad civitates suscepit. In eo itincrc per- 
 suasit Castico Sequano, ut regnuin in civitatc sua occuparct ; 
 itemque Dumnorigi Aeduo, ut idem conaretur persuasit. 
 Facile esse factu illis probavit conatus perficere; sO suae 
 civitatis imj)erium obtenturuni esse, et suTs coj/iis suoque 
 exercitu illls regna conciliatfirum confirmavit. Hac OratiOnc 
 adducti inter so fidom dedorunt. Ea res est Ilelvetils per 
 indicium enuntiata. MOribus suls Orgetorigcm ex vincfulis 
 causam dicere coOgerunt. 
 
 268. Translate into Latin. 
 
 1. Oi*getorix was intending to secure^ regal power in his 
 state. 2. There were many things to be accom[)lished* by 
 the Helvetii, if they wislied to set out from their territory. 
 3. In accordance with the customs^ of tlic Helvetii, Orgetorix, 
 who wa.s regarded by them as a traitor, was forced to plead 
 his cause in chains.* 4. It was announced to the Helvetii 
 what Orgetorix was attempting to accomplish. 5. He had 
 said that he would secure for these chieftains regal ]K)wer in 
 their states. To accomplish his attempt was not an easy 
 thing to do. He had pei-suaded the Helvetii to set out from 
 their territory with all their forces. 
 
 LESSON XC. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. — PoSSUm AND FerO. 
 
 269. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 289. A few verbs which have special irregularities arc called, 
 by way of preeminence. Irregular or Anomalous Verbs, 
 
 1 See 260, 233. s See 260. 334. 
 
 * In accordance with, etc., use the Ablative, auder 158, 413. 
 
 * See 208, sentence 14. 
 
216 
 
 POSSUM AND FERO. 
 
 290. Possum,^ posse, potuT, 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 SIXOULAB. 
 
 Pres. possum, potcs, potest ; 
 
 Imp. poteram;* 
 
 Put. potcro; 
 
 Perf. potul; 
 
 Plup. potueram; 
 
 F, P. potucro; 
 
 to be able. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 possumus, potestis, possuiit. 
 
 poteramus. 
 
 poterimus. 
 
 potuimus. 
 
 potucrumus. 
 
 potueiimus. 
 
 RUIJJl XCTIVE. 
 
 PrcB, possiin, possis, possit; 
 Imp. possem ; 
 Pcrf. potuerim; 
 Plup. potuissem; 
 
 INFINITITE. 
 
 Pres, posse. 
 Perf, potuisse. 
 
 292. Fer6,» fern?, tull, latum. 
 Active Voice. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 possimus, possitis, possint. 
 
 poasemus. 
 
 I)otaerImus. 
 
 potaissemtis. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Prc9. potens (as an atljective). 
 
 to bear. 
 
 SnCGCLAR. 
 
 Pres, fer6» fere, fort; 
 
 Imp, ferubam ; ^ 
 
 Fut, f erara ; 
 
 Perf, lull; 
 
 Plup, tulcram; 
 
 F, P. tulero; 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 ferimus, fertis,* feninL 
 
 ferebamus. 
 
 feremus. 
 
 tulimus. 
 
 tuleramus. 
 
 tulerlmus. 
 
 1 Possum is compounded of potis, ' able,' and ««m, ' to be.' In possum 
 observe — 
 
 1) That potis drops is, and that t is assimilated before s; possum for 
 
 JH>t8Um. 
 
 2) That the Perfect is potul, not potfut. 
 
 3) That the InfiQitive posse and Subjunctive possem are sliortened forms 
 for potesse and jyotessem. 
 
 * Inflected regularly through the different persons : poteram, poteraSt 
 poterat, etc. So also in the other tenses : potui, potuisti, etc. 
 
 8 Fcro has forms derived from three independent stems, seen in /ero, 
 tull, latum. 
 
 * Fer-s,fer-l, fer-tis, instead otferis,ferit,feritis. 
 
 * Inflect the several tenses in full : ferebam, ferebds, etc. 
 
FERO. 
 
 217 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Pres. feram; 
 
 teramus. 
 
 Imp. f errem ; 
 
 ferremus.1 
 
 Perf. tulerim ; 
 
 tulerliuus. 
 
 Plup. tulissem; 
 
 tuUssemus. 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Pres, fer;« 
 
 ferte. 
 
 Fut. ferto, 
 
 fertote, 
 
 ferto; 
 
 ferunto. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pres. ferrc* 
 
 Pres. ferens. 
 
 Perf. tulisse. 
 
 
 Fut. liitiirus esse. 
 
 Fut. laturus. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 Gen. ferendi, 
 
 
 Dat. fercndo, 
 
 
 Ace. ferendum, 
 
 Acc. latum, 
 
 All. ferendo. 
 
 AU. lata. 
 
 feror, 
 
 ferri, 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 liltus sum, 
 
 to he borne. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 8i:?OaLAB. PLUnAL. 
 
 Pres. feror, ferris, fertur; ferimur, ferimini 
 
 Lup. ferebar; ferebamur. 
 
 Fut. ferar; feremur. 
 
 Perf. latiis sura ; lati sumus. 
 
 Plup. latus eram; lati eraraus. 
 
 F. P. latus erO; lati crimus. 
 
 feruntur. 
 
 Pres. ferar; 
 Imp. ferrer; 
 Perf. lutua sim ; 
 Plup. latus 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 feramur. 
 ferremur. 
 lati simus. 
 UUiessemoB. 
 
 1 Ferrem, etc., lorfererem, etc.; ferre for ferere (« dropped). 
 * Fer tor fere ; ferto, ferte, fertOU, tor ferito, ferite, ferUdU, 
 
218 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Pres. ferre; 
 Fitt. fertor, 
 fcrtor; 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 Prc8. ferri. 
 Per/. lutusesse. 
 Ft(t. latum iri. 
 
 feriininL 
 
 fcruntor. 
 TARTICIPLK.. 
 
 Per/, latus. 
 Oer. fcrcndus. 
 
 LESSON XCI. 
 
 IRREGUJLAJl VERBS. — PoSSUm AND Fero. — EXERCISES. 
 270. Vocahidary, 
 
 Arrogantia, ae,/. 
 Avaritia, ae,/. 
 Classis, is,/. 
 Coercco, ere, ui, ituin, 
 Dolor, oris, m. 
 Fero, ferre, tuli, latum, 
 Juvcnis, is, m. 
 Nihil, ». indeclUiahl€f 
 Patieiiter, acZr. 
 Praetor, oris, in, 
 Privatini, adv. 
 Sententia, ae,/. 
 Statuo, ere, ui, utum, 
 
 arrogance. 
 
 azarice. 
 
 fleet. 
 
 to restrain, control. 
 
 pain. [ferre, to propose a law. 
 
 to bear, carry ; to endure; legem 
 
 youth, a youth, 
 
 nothing. 
 
 patiently. 
 
 praetor, a Roman magistrate. 
 
 privately, in a private capacity. 
 
 thought, plan, opinion, 
 
 to determine, decide. 
 
 271. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Hi elves plus possunt qiiam ipsi magistratus.* Liscus 
 dicit esse nonnullos, qui i)rlvatim plus possint quam ipsi 
 magistratus ; hos a so coereerl non posse. 2. Nonne hi 
 juvenes anna ferre possunt ? In Gallia arraa ferunt. 3. In 
 exercitu Caesaris erant multi qui arma in Italia tulerant. 4. 
 
 ^ After a comparative, quam is followed by the same construction 
 as that which precedes it. Magistratus is here the subject of jiossunt to 
 be supplied. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 219 
 
 Gives Roman! avaritiam practoris ferrc non potuerunt. 5. 
 Ea quae feni possunt fereiida sunt. C. Ferimua ea quao 
 sunt fercnda. 7. Nonne imperator finitirals civitatibus 
 auxiliura feret ? lis auxiliura ferrc non potcrit. 8. lihenus 
 per fines Ilelvetiorum fertur. 9. Ilaec lex feretur. 
 
 10. Bonae leges ferantur. 11. Multae leges latae sunt. 12. 
 (Jalli nostrorum mllituin impetum sustinerc non potuerunt. 
 1I>. Liscus (licit se quani (liQ potuerit tacuisse.* 14. Dolo- 
 lem paticnter feraraus. 15. Dolor patienter fercndus est. 
 16. Ariovistus tantam arrogantiani sQmpserat, ut fercndus 
 non videretur. 17. Nihil de corum scntentia dictilrus sura 
 • lul hostes timcnt. 18. Classis est exspcctanda. Caesar 
 Btatuit exspectandam esse classem. 19. Cum finitimis civita- 
 tibus pacem factilri sumus. 20. Hostes suam urbem altis- 
 simo mQro munitilri sunt. 
 
 272. Ti'anslate into Latin. 
 
 1. Wc can fortify all our cities with walls and with 
 moats. 2. If we are intending to bear^ aid to our 
 friends, our cities must be fortified.' 3. We liave decided 
 that we must await, in this place, the arrival* of our 
 friends. 4. If you cannot endure pain, you must make 
 peace * with your enemies. 
 
 5. If you had to endure the arrogance* of this general, you 
 would not be silent. 6. They are intending to set out* for 
 Gaul, to carry * arms against the Romans. 7. Good laws 
 should be proi)osed' by those who are regarded as the friends 
 of all the citizens. 8. To endure pain patiently is not an 
 easy thing to do.* 9. The soldiers must be warned' not to 
 fear the enemy. 10. In our state no citizens have greater 
 
 1 TacuXsse must hero be rendered, that he has kept silent, not that hs 
 kept Bilent. 
 
 * See 266. 233. • See 306, 23ft. 
 
 * Render as if the English were, the arrital mutt be aieaited, peoet 
 mu$t be made, arrof/ancc fiad to be endured. 
 
 * See 119, 497. • See 248, sentence 5. 
 
220 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS, 
 
 power than the magistrates. 11. All of us can carry arms 
 in defence of * our country. 
 
 LESSON XCII. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. — Volo, Noloy AND Mdlo, — 
 RULE VIL 
 
 273. Zesson from the Grammar, 
 293. Vol6,2 ^.(jII^j^ ^.qIjjI^ iQ i^ willing. 
 
 Nolo,' nolle, nolui, to be unwillipg^ 
 
 Malo," mulle, maluT, to prefer. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Pres. volo, 
 
 nolo, 
 
 malo, 
 
 VIS, 
 
 non vis. 
 
 mavis, 
 
 vult; 
 
 non vult; 
 
 ma vult; 
 
 voluraas, 
 
 nolumus, 
 
 malumus. 
 
 vultis, 
 
 non vultis, 
 
 ma vultis. 
 
 volunt. 
 
 nolunt 
 
 malunt 
 
 Imp. volebain.* 
 
 nolebam. 
 
 mfilebam. 
 
 Fut. vol am. 
 
 nolam. 
 
 malam. 
 
 Per/, volul. 
 
 nolui. 
 
 malui. 
 
 Plup. voluerara. 
 
 nolueram. 
 
 malueram. 
 
 F. P. voluero. 
 
 noluerO. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 muluero. 
 
 Pres. velim.' 
 
 nolim. 
 
 malim. 
 
 Imp. vellem.^5 
 
 nollera. 
 
 mallem. 
 
 Perf. voluerim. 
 
 noluerlm. 
 
 maliierim. 
 
 Plup. voluissem. 
 
 noluissem. 
 
 maluissem. 
 
 1 ' In defence of,' pro. 
 
 2 The stem of void is vol, with variable stem vowel, o, e, u. 
 
 * Nolo is compounded of ne or non and volo ; majjo, of magis and volo. 
 
 * Inflect the several tenses in full. 
 
 5 Velhn is inflected like sim, and vellem, like essem. 
 
 ^ Vellem and telle are syncopated forms for velercm, velere ; e is dropped 
 and r assimilated ; velerem, velrem, vellem ; velere, velre, velle. So nollem 
 and nblley for nolerem and nokre ; mallem and mdlle, for mdlerem and 
 mdlere. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 221 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 
 
 Pres. noli, nOlite. 
 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 noKto, nolllote, 
 nolitO, noluntO. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 velle. 
 
 
 nolle. 
 
 malle. 
 
 Per/. 
 
 voluisse. 
 
 
 nOlulsse. 
 PAETICIPLE. 
 
 muluisse. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 yolens. 
 
 
 nolens. 
 
 1 
 
 RULE VII. — Two Accosatlyes — Person and Tiling:- 
 
 374. Some verbs of asking, demanding, teaching, 
 and CONCEALING, admit two Accusatives — one of the 
 person and the other of the thing : 
 
 Me sententiam rogavit, he asked me iiY opinion. Cic. Philosophia 
 nos res cranes docuit, philosophy Jias taught us all things. CIc. 
 Auxilia regem orabant, they asked auxiliaries from the king. Liv. 
 Pacem te poscimus, we demand peace of you. Verg. Non te celavi 
 sermuneniy I did not conceal from you the conversation. Cic. 
 
 1. In the Passive the Person becomes the subject, and the 
 Accusative of the thing is retained : 
 
 Me sententiam rogavit, he asked mc my opinion. Cic. Ego sententiam 
 K^tos sum, / was asked my opinion. Cic. Artis cdoctus fuerat, he had 
 been taught thk akts. Liv. 
 
 LESSON XCIII. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. — VoMy XOloy AND Molo RULE 
 
 VII. — EXERCISES. 
 
 274. Vocahtdary. 
 
 Anctor, oris, m. 
 Credo, ere, dldi, ditum, 
 Cur, adr. 
 Ezuro, ere, ussi, ustum, 
 
 author t advocate. 
 
 to believe. (Followed by the Dative 
 why f [of the person believed). 
 
 to hum up, burn. 
 
222 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Flagito, ure, avi, utam, to demand, 
 
 Libcnter, adv. wUUnfjly^ tjladly. 
 
 Maleficium, ii, n. ini8chi(if, harm. 
 
 Malo, malle, mului, to prefer. 
 
 Nolo, nolle, nOlui, to be unwillingf not to be wiUing, 
 
 Perfcro, ferre, tuli, latum, to endure. [not to wish. 
 
 Pcmmncoi ere, mansi, niansum, to continue to remainf to remain, 
 
 Una, adv. together. 
 
 Unde, adv. whence^ from which place. 
 
 Vidcor,' eri, visus sum, to 8eemj appear. 
 
 Void, velle, Tolui, to wisti, to be wHling, 
 
 276. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Caesar de summis rebus cum Ariovisto, rege Germano- 
 rum, agere volGbat. 2. Nuin belli foilQnam tentare vultis ? 
 Patriam defcndere volumus. Nolite dubitarc^ libertateni 
 defendere. 3. Galba saepius* fortunam tentare nolebat. 4. 
 Faciam id quod vultis. 6. Cato esse bonus * volcbat. 6. Hi 
 elves videri bom volunt. 7. Cato esse quam* videri bonus 
 malebat. 8. Libenter homines id quod volunt credunt. 9. 
 Auctores* belli esse nolebamus. 10. Auctores" belli esse 
 nolemns. 11. Caesar montem a Labieno occupari voluit. 
 12. Consldius tiniore perterritus dicit montem, quem Caesar 
 u LabiGno oeeuparl voluerit, ab hostibus tenerl. 
 
 13. Per provinciam nostram iter facere conabuntur, profK 
 terea quod aliud iter babent nullum. 14. Imperator noluit 
 eum locum, unde Ilelvetii discesserant, vacare. 15. Dlxe- 
 runt sib! esse in animo sine ullo maleficio iter facere. 16. 
 Galli servitutem perferre nolebant. In libertate permanere 
 
 1 Videor is the passive of video, * to see,* but it is also used as a depo- 
 nent verb with a special meaning. 
 
 2 Literally, be vnwiUinf/ to hesitate ; render, do not hesitate, — a common 
 circumlocution in prohibitions instead of ni dubita, a form used in poetry 
 only; as in English, do not hesitate, instead of Iiesitate not. 
 
 8 The comparative sometimes has the force of too. 
 * A predicate adjective after esse, agreeing with Cat^, 
 5 Quam after maid may be rendered rather than, 
 « See 59, 362. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 228 
 
 quam servitutcra perfcrre mulebant. Rcliquls civitatibus 
 j)ersuttsc'riint ut in libertute |)erinanure quam scrvitQtcm 
 perfcrre mallcnt. 17. Judicem seiitentiain rogabiint. 18. 
 Cotldio Caesar Acduos frCiraentum flagitabat. 19. IlelvGtil 
 tres copiarum partes flumen Ararim* transduxerant. 20. 
 Rhodanus inter fines Ilelvetiorum et Allobrogum fluit. 21. 
 Mlobrogibus sesG persuasurOs esse exlstimiibant utT, oppidls 
 suis vIcTsque exustis,* ilua cum lis proficlscerentur. 
 
 276. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. You were unwilling to ask us our opinion.' 2. I do not 
 understand why you wish to ask this man his opinion.' Will 
 you tell nie why you wish to ask this man his 0})inion? .3. 
 How large an army is the general willing to lead across the 
 liver?* 4. He prefers to remain in camp rather than to 
 lead his soldiers across this river/ although a bridge has been 
 built* over it. 
 
 5. If the Aedui had not told Caesar that they would assist 
 him, be would not have demanded gi*ain of them.* 6. Are 
 you not willing to do that which I demand of you?* 7. 
 You preferred to ask his opinion,* in order that he might be- 
 lieve you to be his friend. 8. If you should persuade us to 
 remain, what should you wish us to do? 9. Do not wish' 
 that which cannot be done. 10. Those who are willing to 
 try the fortune of war must not fear danger. 11. All of us* 
 ought to be willing to defend our country. 
 
 1 A few compounds of tranSt circxim, aiul ad, admit two Accusatives, 
 dependent, the one upon the verb, the other upon the prepoeition. 
 5« See SuggesUon XVI., (3). 
 
 • See 273, 374. 
 
 < See 275, sentence 19. 
 
 A Use the Ablative Absolute. 
 
 « To ask his opinion «=» to ask him his opinion. 273, 374. 
 
 f See 275, senteuoe 2. 
 
 * In Latin, noi omnes, * we all,' or simply omniM, agreeing with the 
 ■abject implied in the ending of the verb. 
 
224 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 LESSON XCIV. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. — Flo AND Eo. — RULES X. 
 AND XXL 
 
 277. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 294. Flo, fieri, £actu8 sum, to become^ be made. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SIXOULAS. 
 
 
 TVOVJkU 
 
 Pres. fio, fis, ttt; 
 
 
 fimus, fitis, fiunt 
 
 Imp. fiebam;* 
 
 
 ficbumus. 
 
 FuL fiam; 
 
 
 fiOmus. 
 
 Perf. factus sum ; 
 
 
 fact! sumus. 
 
 Plup. factus cram; 
 
 
 fact! erumiis. 
 
 F. P. factus cro; 
 
 
 facti erimua. 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Prts. fiam; 
 
 
 ftumus. 
 
 Imp. fierem; 
 
 
 fierOmus. 
 
 Per/.' factus sIm; 
 
 
 facti simus. 
 
 Plup. factus essem; 
 
 
 facti essemns. 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Pres. fi; 
 
 
 file. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pres. fieri. 
 
 
 
 Perf. factus esse. 
 
 
 Perf. factus. 
 
 Fat. factum in. 
 
 
 Ger. faciendus. 
 
 295. E6, ire. 
 
 ivI, 
 
 itiim, to go. 
 
 
 INDIC 
 
 ATIVE. 
 
 Pres. eo, is, it; 
 
 
 imus, Itis, eunt. 
 
 Imp. ibam;i 
 
 
 ibamus. 
 
 Fut. ibo; 
 
 
 ibimus. 
 
 Perf. ivi; 
 
 
 ivimus. 
 
 Plup. iveraro; 
 
 
 ivenimus. 
 
 F. P. ivero; 
 
 
 iverlmus. 
 
 1 Inflect the several tenses in full. 
 
niREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 225 
 
 
 8UBJUNCTIVB. 
 
 Prcs. cam; 
 
 
 eumus. 
 
 Imp. irem ; 
 
 
 irOmus. 
 
 Perf. iverim; 
 
 
 iverlmus. 
 
 Plup. ivisscm; 
 
 
 ivissumus. 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE 
 
 . 
 
 Prcs. i; 
 
 
 ite. 
 
 Fut. itO, 
 
 
 itote, 
 
 ltd; 
 
 
 eunto. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Pies. ire. 
 
 Prea. 
 
 , iens, Gen. cuutis. 
 
 Perf. ivissc. 
 
 
 
 Fat. iturus esse. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 iturus. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 Gen. eundi, 
 
 
 
 Dat. eundo, 
 
 
 
 Ace. eundum, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ituni, 
 
 Ahl. eundo. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 itu. 
 
 RULE X. — Accusative of Limit. 
 
 380. The place to which is designated by the 
 Accusative : * 
 
 I. Generally with a preposition — ad or in: 
 LegionGs ad urbem adducit, he is leading the legions to or toward 
 
 THE CITY. Cic. In Asiam redit, he returns into Asia. Nop. 
 
 II. In names of towns without a preposition : 
 Xuntius Romam redit, the messenger returns to Kome. Liv. Fugit 
 
 Tarquinios, he fled to Tahquinii. Cic. 
 
 Notb. — Verbs meaning to collect, to come together, etc , — conveniUf 
 coifo, convoco, etc. — are usually treated as verbs of motion, and thus take 
 the Accusative, generally with a proposition; but verbs meaning to place 
 — loco, colloco, pono, etc-, — are usually treated as verbs of rcst,uxd thoa 
 take the Ablative (186, 425), generally with a preposition: 
 
 * Originally the place to tchich was uniformly designated by the Aooo> 
 sative icithout a preiMwition. Names of towns have retained the origimU" 
 construction, while most other names of pKiccs have assumed a prc{>oai- 
 tion. 
 
226 PLACE. 
 
 Unnm in locum convenire, to meet iir one placb. Caes. In altotfng 
 manu vitani pOnere, to place one's life is the hand of an Hher, Cic. 
 
 1. In the NAMES OF towns the Accusative with ad occurs — (1) to 
 denote to, (otoarJ, in the direction of, into the vicinity qf, and (2) in 
 contrast with a or ab : 
 
 Ad Zamam pervenit, he came to the vicinity of Zama. Sail. A 
 Diunio ad Sinopenj from Dianium to Sinope. Cic. 
 
 2. Like names of towns are used — 
 
 1 ) The Accusatives domum, domds, rOs : 
 
 Domum reductusest, Ilcioas conducted home. Cic. Domos abducti, 
 led to TUEin homes. Liv. Jiiis evolurc, to hasten into the coun- 
 try. Cic. 
 
 RULE XXI. — Place from wlilcli. 
 
 412. The PLACE from which is denoted by the 
 Ablative : 
 
 I. Generally tvith a preposition — a, ab, dC, or ex: 
 Ab vrbe proficTscitur, he sets out from the citv. Caes. De ford, 
 
 from the forum, Cic Ex Africa, /rom (out of) Africa, Liv. 
 
 II. In Names of Towns without a preposition:^ 
 
 riatoncm Athinls arcesslvit, he summoned Plato from Athens. 
 Nep. Fugit Corintho, hejiedfrom Corinth. Cic. 
 
 1. Many names of islandsy and the Ablatives, domo and riirej are 
 used like names of towns: 
 
 Domo proffigit, he fled from home. Cic Dcld proficlscitur, he 
 proceeds from Dei^s. Cic 
 
 LESSON XCV. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. — Fid AND Ed. — RULES X. AND 
 XXI. — EXERCISES. 
 
 278. Vocabulary. 
 
 Caedes, is,/. slaughter. 
 
 Cibaria, onim, n. pi. foody provisions. 
 
 Comburo, ere, bussi, bustum, to burn up, burn. 
 
 ^ Effero, ferre, extuH, elutum, to carry forth. 
 
 1 This was the original construction for all places alike. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 227 
 
 Egredlor, i, grcssiis sum, to go outy go forth y depart. 
 
 E6, ire, ivi or ii, Itum, to go, 
 
 Equester, tris, trc, equestrian ; equcstre proclium, a 
 
 cavalry engagement. 
 
 Exed, ire, il, Itum,' to go out^ go forth, depart. 
 
 Fio, fieri, factus sum, to he made ; to happen. 
 
 Lntctia, ac, /. Lutetia, a city in Gaul, now Paris, 
 
 Melodunum, i, n, Melodunumj a town of the 
 
 Senones. 
 
 Karb5, onis, m. Narbo, a town in southern Gaul. 
 
 Nihilum, i, n. nothing. 
 
 Patior, i, passus sum, to suffer, permit, 
 
 Peditatus, us, m. ir\fantry. 
 
 Plfinities, ei,/. plain. 
 
 Practerquam, adv. except. 
 
 Tolusa, ac, /. Tolosa, a town in southern GauL 
 
 TranseO, ire, ii,* itum, to go over, cross. 
 
 Vigilia, ae,/. watch,^ 
 
 279. Translate into English, 
 
 1. Helvetil e flnibus suTs cxibant. E finibus suis exire 
 ronabantur. Post Orgetorigis mortem nihilo' minus e fini- 
 l)us suis exIre conabantur. 2. Id quod constituenint facerc 
 couantur, ut G flnibus suTs excant. 3. Ilaec omnia contra 
 legem facta sunt. 4. lUud quod faciendum primum fuit 
 factum est. 5. Id quod vultis nullo modo fieri jx)test. 6. 
 NOlitc id velle, quod fieri non potest. 7. Caesar suum equi- 
 tatum contra hostem Ire jubet. 8. Omnes legiOnes contra 
 hostem ibant. 9. Fit equestre proclium in planitie ; Caesar 
 legiones pro castris constituit, ne qua irruptio ab hostium 
 ])editatu fiat; hostes fugae sesG mandant ; fit magna caedes; 
 nonnuUi fossam transire conantur. 
 
 10. Divitiacus auxilii rogandi causa Romam * ad scnatum 
 I)rofectus est. 11. Labienus cum quattuor legidnibns Lu- 
 
 * The compounds of ev take the contracted form II in the perfect. 
 
 ^ Among the Romans, the night, from sanset to sunrise, was dlTided 
 bito four tcatche* of equal length. 
 
 ' Ablative of Difiference: less by nothing. Bender, none the kss* 
 
 * See 277, 380. 
 
228 IRREGULAR VERBS, 
 
 tctiam proficlscitur. 12. E castiis tertia vigilia egrcsaos 
 Melodunum venit. 13. Galll per bugs fines nos ire pa- 
 tientur. 14. Imperatorem do his rebus certiorem faciuraus. 
 16. UbI do his rebus certiores fact! sunt, privata aedificia 
 incenderunt. 16. Legatos, nobilissimos civitatis, ad regem 
 miserunt. 17. Frdmentum omne, practerquam * quod secum 
 portatilrl erant, combusserunt. 18. Suebl, qui ad ripas RhenI 
 venerant, domum rcverterunt. 19. Dux Roman us multos 
 viros fortes Tolosa et Narbone* evocavit. 20. Ilelvetii 
 trium mensium cibaria sib! qucmque domof efifcrre jusserunt. 
 
 280. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. Orgetorix persuaded the Ilelvetii to go forth from their 
 territory. 2. We shall be informed what they carried from 
 home with them. 3. We shall go to Rome, and remain there 
 the whole winter. 4. We shall send^'ou letters often, that 
 you may be informed in what direction we are going.* 
 We have heard that you say that you have not been informed 
 by us in what direction we are going. Do you know in 
 what direction we have gone ? 
 
 6. Caesar was intending to go from Italy to Geneva with 
 five legions. 6. Having accomplished* this, Caesar orders 
 the Helvetii to return to their homes. 7. Do you prefer to 
 go home rather than to remain at Rome?* 8. The Helvetii 
 thought that they should persuade the Sequani to suffer 
 them to go through their territory. 9. Caesar thought that 
 peace should not be made with the Helvetii, unless they re- 
 turned home. 10. What did the Helvetii attempt to do 
 after the death of Orgetorix ? They attempted to persuade 
 their neighbors to bum all their towns, 
 
 1 The construction yf\\h practerquam is elliptical; we may supply after 
 it id frumentum non combusserunt. Of course the ellipsis need not be 
 supplied in translation. 2 See 277, 412. 
 
 8 What mood must be used in an Indirect Question ? 
 
 * Use the Ablative Absolute. 
 
 5 See 185. 425. 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 229 
 
 LESSON XCVI. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. — REVIEW OF RULE XLIII. — 
 RULE XIII. 
 
 281. Lesson from the Grammar. 
 
 298. Impersonal Verbs corres])ond to the English Imper- 
 sonal with it : licet, it is lawful ; oportety it behooves.* They 
 are conjugated like other verbs, but are used only in the 
 third person singular of the Indicative and Subjunctive, and 
 in the Present and Perfect Infinitive : 
 Decet, decuit, it becomes, Oportet, oportuit, it behooves. 
 
 Miseret, miseritum est, it excites Paenitet, paenituit, it causes regret,* 
 
 pity.* 
 
 300. Generally Impersonal are several verbs which desig- 
 nate the changes of the weather, or the operations of nature : 
 
 Fulminaty It lightens; grandinat, it hails; lucescitj it grows light; 
 pluit, it rains; rorat, dew falls; tonat, it thunders. 
 
 301. Many other verbs are often used impersonally: 
 
 Acciditj it happens; apparety it appears; cvristat, it is evident; 
 eontigity it happens; delectat, it delights; dolet, it grieves; interesty 
 it concerns; jurat, it delights; jyatet, it is plain; placet, it pleases; 
 I aestat, it is better; refert, it concerns. 
 
 1. In the Tarsive Voice intransitive verbs can be used only im- 
 personally. The participle is then neuter: 
 
 Mihl creditur, it is credited to me, I am believed ; tibi crcditur, you 
 are believed; creditum est, it was believed; certatur, it is contended; 
 curritur, there is running, people run; pugnatur. It is fought, they, 
 we, etc., fight; vhitur, we, you, they live. 
 
 2. The Passive Peripiiuastic Conjugatiox (266, 234) Is often 
 used impersonally. The participle Is then neuter: 
 
 Mihl scr'ibendum est, I must write; tibl scrlbendum est, you most 
 write; illi scrlbendum est, he must write. 
 
 ^ The subject is generally an infinitive or cUnse, but may be a noun or 
 pronoun denoting a thing, but not a person : hSc fieri oportet, that tbif 
 should be done is necessary. 
 
 * Me miseret, I pity; mi pwnitet, I repent 
 IC 
 
230 
 
 TWO DATIVES. 
 
 RULE XIII.— Two Datives— To wUicH and For wlilcli. 
 
 390. Two Datives — the object to which and the 
 oiUECT or END FOR WHICH — occur with a few verbs: 
 
 I. With Intransitive and Passive verbs : 
 
 Maid est hominibttB avariUa, avarice is an evil to mk.n liiuniUy 
 i8 TO MEN FOR AN EVIL). Cic. Est viifil curae, it i» A caiik to me. 
 Cic. Doimis dedecori domino fit, the houtte becomes A disorace to 
 ITS owner. Cic. Venlt Altlcis auxilio, he came to the assistance of 
 the Athenians. Nep. H6c illi tribuObutur ignuviae, this was imputeti 
 to him as cowardice (for cowardice). Cic. Eis subsidio missus est, 
 he was sent to them as aid, Nep. 
 
 II. With Transitive verbs in connection with the 
 Accusative : 
 
 Quinque cohortes castris praesidio reliquit, he l^t Jive cohorts for 
 THE defence of TUB CAMP (literally to the camp for a defence). 
 Caes. Pericles agros suds dono rdi publicae dedit, Pericles gave hit 
 hinds to the rej>HbUe as a present (literally, /or a present). Just. 
 
 282. Vocalmlart/, 
 
 Accido, ere, 1, 
 Athenac, arum,/. ;>/. 
 Atheniensis, is, »n. and/. 
 Atticus, i, IN. 
 
 Coicio,^ ere, cojeci, jectum, 
 Difficilis, e, 
 Impedimentum, i, n. 
 
 Infen'), ferre, intuli, illatum, 
 
 Insto, are, stiti, 
 
 Luna, ae,/. 
 
 Hetior, in, mensus sum, 
 
 Mult6,2 adv. 
 
 Novissimus, a, um, sup. qf 
 
 nevus, 
 Oportet, tire, uit. 
 
 to fall to, b^all ; accidit, it happens^ 
 
 Athens. [comes to pass. 
 
 an Athenian. 
 
 Atticus, a Roman name. 
 
 to cast, hurl, throw, 
 
 difficult. 
 
 hinderance, embarrassment; impedi- 
 menta, pi., hinder ances ; baggage 
 (of an army). [againsL 
 
 to bear into, bear against, wage 
 
 to be near, be at hand. 
 
 moon, 
 
 to measure, allot, 
 
 much, far. 
 
 newest; novissimum agraen, the rear. 
 it behooves, is proper ; one ought. 
 
 1 Pronounced as if spelled cojicid. 
 
 * Originally an Ablative of Difference; literally, by much. 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 281 
 
 Oniiiinentuin, i, n. ornament^ honor. 
 
 Plemis, a, urn, fulL 
 
 Subsiiiium, ii, n. aidy support^ reenforcemenL 
 
 Teluni, i, n. dart ; weapon. 
 
 Titus, i, m, Titus, a Koman name. 
 
 283. Translate into Emjlish. 
 
 1. Caesari nuntiatum est, cquitus AriovistI lapidGs telaque 
 in nostros coicerc. 2. Helvetils est in animo per agrum 
 AeduOrum iter facere. Caesari nantiatur, IlelvGtils esse in 
 nniniO i)er agrum Aeduorura iter facere. 3. GermanOs trans 
 Rhenum incolere dictum est. 4. Ea nocte accidit ut esset 
 iQna plena. 5. Ilelvetii undique loci natura continubantur. 
 Ilac re flebat ut minus facile finitimis bellum inferre pos- 
 sent. 6. Frumentum railitibus metlii oportet. Dies instat, 
 quo die' frumentum militibus metlrl oportebit. 7. Ea 
 res Gallls* magno ad pugnam erat impedimento.* 8. Legi- 
 ones duae in novissimo Sgmine praesidio* impedimentls^ 
 crant. 
 
 9. Erant itinera duo, qiiibus Helvetil domO exire possent ; 
 finum* angustum et difficile; mons autem altissimus im- 
 ])endebat ; alterum,* multO facilius. 10. Atticus Athenis 
 ita vixit, ut Atheniensibus esset carissimus. 11. Amicitia 
 popull KomanI mihl^ ornamento^ est. 12. Amicitiam popull 
 liomanl mihl^ omamento^ et praesidio'* esse oportet. 13. 
 Ariovistus dixit amicitiam popull KomanI sibl^ ornamento* 
 et praesidio* esse opoitere. 14. Legatis resi)ondearau8 
 1108 diem ad deliberandum sQmptQros esse. 15. Titus 
 Labiunus decimam legiOnem subsidio* nostrls* misit. 16. 
 (iialll oppidum NoviodQnum, nu cui^ esset Qsul' HOmanls,' 
 incenderunt. 
 
 ^ Qko is here an adjective agreeing with dit.. The antecedent is 
 expressed but once; here die may be omitted in rendering. 
 ^ See 281. 3!)0. 
 * Supply crat. 
 < C'ui is here the indefinite pronoun, agreeing with Mtii. 
 
232 IMPERSONAL VERBS, 
 
 284. TranslaU into LcUin. 
 
 1. In the towns of the Gauls were many things which 
 were of great use to the Komans.* 2. The friendship of the 
 general ought to be a safeguard to us.* 3. We should all live 
 in such a way, as not to be a grief to our friends.* 4. It often 
 happens, that what ought to be done is not easy to do. 5. It 
 is our intention to go to Geneva and to Rome ' this summer. 
 
 6. The friendsliip of the good is always an honor to us.* 
 7. It was announced to Caesar that the Helvetii had set out 
 from their territory, and that they were attempting to march 
 through the province. 8. It is stated by Caesar that the 
 TIelvetii were the bravest of the Gauls. 9. It was the in- 
 tention of Orgetorix to obtain possession of the sovereignty* 
 of all Gaul. 10. Let soldiers remain, to be a garrison to the 
 city. 11. The horsemen of Ariovbtus hurled stones and darts 
 upon the Romans. 12. Your friendship ought to be a safe- 
 guard to me.* 
 
 LESSON XCVIL 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. — RULE XX. 
 
 285. Lesson from the Chrammar, 
 RULE XX. — Accusative and Genitive. 
 
 409. The Accusative of the Person and the Geni- 
 tive of the Thing are used with a few transitive verbs : 
 
 I. With verbs of reminding^ admonishing : 
 
 Te amicitxae commonefacit, he reminds yon of friendship. Cic 
 Milites nccessitutis monet, he reminds the soldiers of the necessity. 
 Ten 
 
 II. With verbs of accusing^ convicting^ acquitting : 
 Viros sceleris argiiis, you accuse men of crime. Cic. Levitatis 
 
 eum convincere, to convict him of levity. Cic Absolvere injuriae 
 emn, to acquit him of injustice. Cic 
 
 1 See 281, 39a 'See 277, 38a > See 258, 421. 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 288 
 
 III. With miseret^ paenitet, pudet^ taedet^ and piget : 
 
 Edrum nos miserct, loe pity them (it moves our pity of them). 
 C\r. Consilil me paenitet, / repent of my purpose. Cic. M6 stultiliae 
 111' :it' putlct, I am ashamed of my folly. Cic. 
 
 Is'oTB 1. — The Genitive of the Thinrj designates, witli verbs of reminds 
 ing, etc., that to which the attention is called; with verbs of accusing, 
 etc., the crime, charge; and with miseret, paenitet, etc., the object which 
 produces the feeling; see examples. 
 
 NoTR 2. — The personal verbs included under this rale retain the Oeni 
 Uve in the Passive : 
 
 Accusatus est proditionis, he teas accused of treason. Nep. 
 
 286. Vocahidarij. 
 
 Acriter, adv. sharply ^ severely. 
 
 Anceps, cipitis, double, twofold ; undecided. 
 
 Beneficium, ii, n. benefit, favor. 
 
 Celeritas, atis,/. celerity, speed. 
 
 Communis, e, common ; communis res, the com- 
 
 Incrudibilis, e, incredible. ' [mon interest. 
 
 Ineo, ire, ii, itum, to go into, enter upon, begin, under- 
 
 Insimulo, are, iivi, atura, to accuse. \take. 
 
 Lenitas, atis,/. smoothness, gentleness. 
 
 Licet, ere, uit, it is lawful, is permitted; one may. 
 
 Necesse,* necessary. 
 
 Paenitet, ere, uit, it causes regret ; me paenitet, / 
 
 Peto, ere, ivi or ii, itum, to seek, request, ask. [repent 
 
 Proditio, onis,/. treason. 
 
 Prosequor, i, secutus sum, to follow up, pursue. 
 
 Prosplcio, ere, spexi, spectum, to look forward ; to look out for. 
 
 (In the latter sense followed by 
 
 the Dative. ) 
 
 287. IWinslate into Enf/Ksh. 
 
 1. Aiicipiti proelio diQ pugnatum est.* Ab hora septima ad 
 vespcrum fortiter pQpriiatum est. Ad multam noetem otiam 
 
 I Necesse\s an adjective used only in the Nominative and Accnsativa 
 Neuter Singular. 
 
 3 Observe in this sentence and the others in tills Lenou, that an lmper> 
 •onal verb can not be rendered literally. Thus, diik piyndtum est would 
 become in English, a long battle uku fought, the fighting went on for a 
 long time. 
 
234 ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE. 
 
 ad impedimenta pflgnfitum est. 2. Proelio equestri inter 
 duas acies contendebatur. 3. Caesar Titum Labienum cum 
 legidnibus tribus bostcs prosequi jussit : ad novissimum 
 figmen venlum est. El ad quos ventum erat fortiter impo- 
 tum Komanorum sustinuerunt. 4. U<*I frumentariae pro- 
 spiciendum est. 5. Caesar rel frQmentariae prospiciendum 
 esse existiraabat. G. De commflnl re in colloquio dicendum 
 est. 7. Vercingetorix proditionis Insimulatus est. 8. " Haec," 
 dixit Vercingetorix, "a me bencficia habC-tis, quern i>rodi- 
 tionis Insimulatis.^' 
 
 9. Flumen est Arar, quod in Uhodanum Influit incrCJibili 
 Icnitate, ita ut oculis in utram partem flunt judicarl nun pos- 
 sit. Caesar per cxploratdrcs certior factus est, trcs jam 
 copiarum partes Ilelvetios id flflmen transdQxisse. 10. 
 Gallos hujus consilil paenitebat. 11. Galli saejKj eonsilia 
 ineunt quorum eo« paenitet. 12. Saepc eonsilia inlmus quo- 
 rum nos i)aenitere necesse est. 13. Nobis concilium in diem 
 certam * indicere licet. 14. Vobis concilium in diem certam 
 indlcerc liceat. 15. Galll petierunt uti sib! concilium totlus 
 Galliac in diem certam indicere liceret. 16. Mllites ea* 
 celeritate ierunt ut hostes impetum legionum sustinere non 
 
 I MSM'llt. 
 
 288. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. The town was reached' by us an hour before sunset 
 2. A long and severe battle took place* near the camp. 3. 
 I have to speak * of things which you ought to wish to hear. 
 4. It should be stated • that the Gauls already repented of 
 their plan. 5. Caesar told the Gauls that they might' aj> 
 point a council. 
 
 G. You cannot bring the w^ar to an end, but you may* 
 repent of your j)lans. 7. It cannot be ascertained what 
 the enemy intend to do. 8. It was necessary to provide ' for 
 
 1 Dies, nsaally masculinet is feminine when it signiBes a day fixed or 
 appointed. * Literally, that ; render, such 
 
 "< In all these cases express tlie tliouglit impersonally in Latin. 
 
 J 
 
IMPERSONAL VERBS, 285 
 
 tlie protection of the camp. 9. Orgetorix (when) accused 
 of treason, was compelled to plead his cause in chains. 10. 
 Crimes should be repented of. 11. The rear of the enemy 
 was reached, and a severe battle took place. 12. Figliting 
 will go on from midday to sunset. 13. As so many have 
 been slain, we may judge how severe a battle has been 
 fought. 
 
 LESSON XCVIII. 
 
 IlEVIEW OF RULES LIIL, LIV., AND LV. — EXERCISE IN 
 READING AT SIGHT. 
 
 289. Head at Sight, examine carefully, and translate 
 into English. 
 
 Post Orgetorigis mortem nihilo minus Helvetii id quod 
 constituerant facere conabantur, ut G flnibus suTs * exirent. 
 UbI se * ad cam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua 
 omnia, vicos, privata aedificia incenderunt ; frflmentum omne, 
 praeterquam quod secum portatilrl erant, combusserunt. ut 
 paratiores ad omnia perlcula essent ; trium mensium cibaria 
 sib! quemque domo efferre jusserunt. Persuaserunt finitimis 
 utT, oppidls suTs vIcTsque exustis, una cum iis proficTsce- 
 rentur. 
 
 Erant itinera duo, quibus G flnibus suis exire possent: 
 iinum per SGquanos, angustum et difficile, inter montem 
 jQram et flumen Khodanum, mons autem altissimus impende- 
 bat ; alterum per provinciam nostram, multo facilius. AUo- 
 brogibus sGsG pei-suasQros esse existimabant, ut per suSs flneii 
 «o8 ire paterentur. Ob eas causus per provinciam nostram 
 iter facere conati sunt. 
 
 Caesar, his rebus audltis, maturuvit ab urbe proficTscI et 
 maximis itineribus in Galliam contendit. UbI de Gjus ad- 
 
 1 The pupil sliould ezerciae especial care in this EzerciM to detannioa 
 the antecedents of the pronouns wliifli «Kvur In it, particularly of nnig 
 and nd. 
 
236 GERUNDS. 
 
 vcnttt Helvetil ccrtiores facti sunt, legatos ad eum mlserunt, 
 qui dicerent, sibl esse in animo iter per ])roviiiciam facere. 
 Caesar lOgatls respondit, diem su ad dollberandum sftmp- 
 t&ram. 
 
 290. Translate into Zatin, 
 
 1. I shall lake lime for deliberation. 2. I wish to inform 
 you of my arrival. 3. I send you a messenger to inform you 
 of my arrival. 4. We intend to march through your coun- 
 try without (doing) any harm. 5. I intend to march through 
 the j>rovince, because I have no other route. 6. Ambassadors 
 were sent to Caesar to say what the Helvetii intended to do. 
 
 7. After hearing the words* of our friends, we shall set out 
 from this city, and hasten homo. 8. We attempted to set 
 out before. 9. I wish you to try to tell me what you intend 
 to do.* 10. Do you think that you will persuade me to tell 
 you what I intended to do?^ 11. Burn your towns and vil- 
 lages, and set out together with us. 12. You will never 
 persuade us to set fire to our towns. 13. Let us always be 
 prepared for danger. 14. We have burned all our grain, 
 ejfcept M'hat we carried with us. 15. Let each one take 
 with him from home provisions for six months. 16. IIow 
 many routes are there by which we can go ? 
 
 LESSON XCIX. 
 
 GERUNDS, GERUNDIVES, AND PARTICIPLES. — REVIEW 
 OF RULES LIX., LX., AND XXXII. 
 
 291. Lesson from the Grammar, 
 I. Gerunds. 
 541. The Gerund is a verbal noun which shares so largely 
 the character of a verb that it governs oblique cases, and 
 takes adverbial modifiers: 
 
 1 Use the Ablative Absolute. 
 
 2 Observe that this is an Indirect Question. 
 
GERUNDIVES. 287 
 
 Ju3 vocandi » seiiatum, the right of summoning the senate. LIv. 
 HeaUj Vivendi * cupiditus, the desire of living happily. Cic 
 
 54*2. The Gerund has four cases — the Genitive^ Datice^ 
 AcctisatiiiCy and Ablative — used in general like the same 
 cases of nouns. Thus — 
 
 I. The Genitive of the Gekund is used with nouns and adjec- 
 tives : 
 
 Ars Vivendi, the art of living. Cic. Studiosus erat audiendi, he teas 
 desirous of hearing. Nep. Cupidus te audiendi, desirous qf hearing 
 you. Cic. Artcm vera uc falsa dijiidicandi, the art of distinguishing 
 true things from false. Cic. 
 
 II. The Dative of the Gehund is used with a few verbs and 
 adjectives which regularly govern the Dative : 
 
 Cum solvendo nOu essent, since they were not able to pay. Cic. 
 Aqua utilis est bibendO, water is us^ul for drinking. Plin. 
 
 III. The Accusative of the Geuund is used after a few pro- 
 I)ositions : ^ 
 
 Ad discendum propensi surous, we are inclined to learn (to learning). 
 Cic. Inter ludendum, in or during play. Quint. 
 
 IV. The Ablative of the Gerund is used (1) as Ablative of 
 Means, and (2) with prepositions : 
 
 Mens discendO alitur, the mind is nourished by learning. Cic. Salu- 
 tem bominibus dando, by giving safety to men. Cic Virtutes cemuntur 
 in agendo, virtues are seen in action. Cic. Deterrere a scribendo, to 
 deter from writing. Cic. 
 
 II. Gerundives. 
 
 543. The Gerundive, like other participles, agrees with 
 nouns and pronouns : 
 
 Inita sunt consilia urbis delendae, plans have been formed for 
 destroying the city (of the city to be destroyed). Cic. Numa saccr- 
 dotibus creandis animum adjecit, Numa gave his attention to the 
 appointment of priests. Liv, 
 
 1 Vocandi as a Genitive is governed by Jus, and yet it governs the 
 Accusative scuatvm ', vivendt is govenied by cvpidttdt, and yet it takes 
 Die adverbial modifler beate. 
 
 * Most frequently aftf r ud ■ soinotimes after Inter and o6 ; very rarely 
 After ante, circa, and in. 
 
238 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 544. TIic Gerundive Construction may be used — 
 
 1. In place of a Gerund with a direct object. It then takes the 
 case of the Gerund whose place it supplies: 
 
 Libidd Ojus videndl (= lib'id6 eum videndi), the desire of seeing him 
 (literally, qf him to be seen). Cic. Platonis andiendi (= Platonem 
 audicndi) studiosus, fond of hearing Plato. Cic Legendis oratoribus 
 (= legendu oratores), by reading the orators. Cic, 
 
 2. In the Dative and in the Ablative with a preposition : 
 
 Locum oppido coudendO ceperunt, they selected a place for found- 
 ing a city. Liv. Teropora deuictendis fructibus accommodata, seasons 
 suitable for gathering fruits. Cic Brutus in liberandd patria est 
 interfcctus, Brutus was slain in liberating his country, Cic 
 
 III. Participles. 
 
 548. The Participle is a verbal adjective which governs 
 the same cases as the verb : 
 
 Animus s^ n6n videns alia cernit, the mind, though it does not see 
 itself (MienWy, not seeing its€{f)f discerns oUter tilings. Cic 
 
 549. Participles are often used — 
 
 1. To denote, Time, Cause, Manner, Means: 
 
 l*lat6 scribens mortuus est, Plato died while writing. Cic. Ituri 
 in proelium canunt, they sing ichen about to go into battle. Tac Sol 
 oriens diem cdnficit, the sun by its rising causes the day. Cic. Milites 
 reniintiant se perfidiara veritds revertissc, the soldiers report tltat they 
 returned because they feared perfidy (liaving feared). Caes. 
 
 2. To denote Condition or Concession : 
 
 Mendaci homini ne verum quidem dicenti credere non solemus, we 
 are not wont to believe a liar, even \f he speaks the truth. Cic. Scripta 
 tua jam diii exspectans, non audeo tamen flagiture, though I hare been 
 long expecting your work, yet I do not dare to ask for it. Cic 
 
 3. To denote Puri^ose: 
 
 Perseus rediit, belli casum tentatunis, Perseus returned to try (about 
 to try) the fortune of war. Liv. Attribuit nos tnicidandos Cethego, 
 he assigned us to Cethegus to slaughter. Cic 
 
 4. To supply the place of Relative Clauses : 
 
 Omnes aliud agentes aliud simulantes, improbi sunt, all who do one 
 thing and pretend another are dishonest. Cic. 
 
GERUNDS, PAUTICIPLES. 239 
 
 5. To supply the place of Piiincipal Clauses: 
 Clussein devictara cepit, he conquered end took the Jleet (took the 
 fleet conquered). Nep. 
 
 650. The Tenses of the Participle — Present, Perfect, 
 and Future — denote only relative time. They accordingly 
 represent the time respectively as present, past, and future 
 relatively to that of the principal verb : 
 
 Oculus se non videns alia cernit, the eye, thowjh it dora not see 
 itself (not seeing itself), discerns other th'uvjs. Cic. Plato scrlbens 
 raortuus est, Plato died while loriting. Cic. Uva muturata dulcescit, 
 the fjrape, when it has ripened (having ripened), becomes sweet. Cic. 
 Sapiens bona semper placitui-a laudat, the loise man jyraises blessings 
 lohich will always please (being about to please). Sen. 
 
 LESSON C. 
 
 GERUNDS, GERUNDIVES, AND PARTICIPLES. — REVIEW 
 OF RULES LIX., LX., XXXIL — EXERCISES. 
 
 292. Vocabulary. 
 
 Accipio, ere, cepi, ceptum, to receive. 
 
 Aggredior, i, gressus sum, to attack. 
 
 Ardeo, ere, ursi, ursum, to burn, to be ardent, be eager, 
 
 Concido, ere, I, to fall. 
 
 Concido, ere, cidi, cisum, to cttt down, destroy, slay. 
 
 Consido, ere, sedi, sessum, to settle, jiost one's self, encamp, 
 
 Crudeliter, adv. cruelly. 
 
 Depopulor, ari, atus sura, to ravage, lay waste. 
 
 Excrucio, Are, uvi, atum, to torture. 
 
 Frumentati6, onis,/. foraging, provisioning. 
 
 Grittulor, ftri, atus sum, to congratulate; to thank. (Followed 
 
 by the Dative. ) 
 
 Initlum, ii, n. beginning. 
 
 Insequor, i, secutus sum, to pursue, follow, 
 
 Moror, ari, atus sum, to delay, tarry. 
 
 Pcrfacilis, e, very easy. 
 
 Per\eni6, ire, veni, ventum, to arrive, come. 
 
 Sijpultura, ae,/. bttrial, intermenL 
 
240 GERUNDS, PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Subvenio, ire, veni, ventum, to come to the help qf, succoTf aid, 
 
 (Followed by the Dative.) 
 
 Triduum, i, n. ttpace of three days, three days. 
 
 Ulclscor, i, ulttis stini, to avenge one's »elf on^ punish ; to 
 
 take vemjeance. 
 
 293. Translate into J^nglish. 
 
 1. Divitiacus auxilii pctendi causa Romam ad senatum 
 profectus est. 2. AnimI KutnatiOruin ad ulclscendum urdO- 
 bant. 3. TitQrius in illO loco hicmandl causa cdnscdcrat. 4. 
 ReperiObat in quacrcndo Caesar initium fugae factum esse 
 a Dumnorigc. 5. Caesar equitatum ad cam regionem do- 
 ])opulandam mittit. G. FinitimI Icgatos ad Acduos mittunt 
 subsidium rogatum. ". Prlncipes Aeduorum ad Caesarem 
 veniunt oratum ut clvitatl subveniat. 8. Totius fere Galliae 
 legati,* prlncipes civitatum, ad Caesarem gratulatum' convo- 
 nOrunt. 
 
 9. Caesar e castrls profectus ad earn partem pervenit, quae 
 nondum flamen transierat. 10. Caesar Ilelvetios aggressus* 
 magnani eorum partem concldit. 11. Galll dicunt perfacilc 
 esse facta frQmentationibus Romanos prohibere. 12. Cen- 
 turio, multls vulneribus acceptis,* j>Qgnans* concidit. 13. 
 Legio deeima Gallos insequentes* tardavit. 14. Cfvcs Ro- 
 manos cnldcliter excruciatos* interfccerunt. 15. Caesar, hoc 
 proelio facto, j)ontem in Arare faciendum curat. 16. Ro- 
 man!, propter sepulturam occlsorum trlduuni moratl, bostcs 
 sequi ncn potuerant. 
 
 294. Translate into Latin, 
 
 1. One legion of Caesar's army retarded for three hours 
 the enemy (who were) pursuing. 2. After a beginning of 
 
 1 Literally, * ambassadors o/ Gaul'; render, 'from Gaul.' 
 * Supply iu English the object, him. 
 
 » See Suggestion XHI., 5. * See Suggestion XVI., (3). 
 
 fi In English the present participle in such a connection is usually 
 accompanied by xohUe. * See Suggestion XIII., 2. 
 
GERUNDS, PARTICIPLES. 241 
 
 fliglit had been made* by one division of the enemy, the rest 
 were easily conquered. 3. The Romans defeated the enemy 
 (who were) not informed of their approach. 4. Let us send 
 to our friends, to aslc aid against those who have come for 
 the purpose of ravaging our lands. 5. To conquer the brave 
 and the free is not an easy thing to do. 
 
 C. For the sake of crossing the river more easily, Caesar 
 had a bridge built over the lihine. 7. Our soldiers ought to 
 be prepared for setting out from camp, and for fighting with 
 the enemy. 8. In asking aid, the Aedui said that they were 
 eager to take vengeance.* 9. For defending the bridge 
 which had been made, Caesar stationed soldiers on each 
 bank of the river. 10. The Gallic chieftains said to Caesar: 
 " We have been sent to you by our states to congratulate 
 you." • 
 
 1 Use the Ablative Absolute. 
 
 2 Render, ' for {ad) taking vengeance.* 
 « See 166, 546. 
 
NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR. 
 
 THE EMIGRATION OF THE HELVETU, THEIR DEFEAT 
 BY THE ROMANS, AND THEIB RETURN TO THEUl 
 COUNTRY.* 
 
 The Inhabitants of GauL Tfie Valor of the ITelvetii, 
 
 I. Gallia est dlvlsa in partes trGs, quarum * flnam • incolunt 
 Belgae, aliam* Aqultanl/ tertiain* Galll.* IlelvOtil reliquos 
 GallOs virtflto* pracccdunt, quod fere cotldianis proelils* cum 
 Germanis contendunt. 
 
 Orffetorix and JBU Profect of Emigration, 
 
 II. Apud Ilelvetios nobilissimus et ditissimus fuit Orgo- 
 torix. Is,^ Messalla et Pisonc eonsulibus,' civitati • persuasit 
 ut do finibus suls exirent.'** Ilelvetii continentur una ex 
 parte " flumine Rheno, latissimo atquc altissimo, qui agrum 
 Ilelvetium a Germanis dividit ; altera ex parte monte Jura 
 
 1 From Caesar's " Commentaries on the Gallic War," I., 1-29. For 
 Suggestions on Exercises in I^tiu Composition, see page 300. 
 
 2 Partitive Genitive. 28, 397. * Supply partem as object of incolunt. 
 * Subject of incolunt. Observe that the term Gain is used in two 
 
 senses. It properly denotes the inhabitants of all Gaul, but it is often 
 used, as in this instance, to designate the inhabitants of the third division 
 of the country, i.e. of Celtic Gaul. « 231, 424. « 78, 420. 
 
 7 Is would not be expressed unless it were enphatic, as in English, ' it 
 was he who,' etc., i.e. it was Orgetorix who originated the project of 
 emigration. 8 240, 431. This was in the year ni B. C. 
 
 » 54, 3&4. C7rrta« is here used as a collective noun: * the citizens; ' 
 observe that this is shown by the number of ezirent. 
 
 w UO, 497; 491. n * On one side.' 
 
THE HELVE TIL 243 
 
 qui est inter Seqnanos et IIclvGtios ; tcrtia * lacQ Lemannd 
 ct fluminc lUiodano qui i)rovinciara ab Ilclvetils dividit. 
 His rebus* flebat \\t minus facile flnitimis* bellum Inferrc 
 j)OS8ent.* Pro' multitudine autem hominum et pro gloria 
 fortitQdinis angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur. 
 
 The Ilelvetii Prepare to Leave their Country, 
 
 III. His rebus adducti et auctoritatc • Orgetorigis ^ pcrmotl, 
 constituerunt ea quae ad proficlscendum pertinercnt* com- 
 j>arare. UbI jam se ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrall sunt,' 
 oppida sua omnia, vicos, reliquaque privata aedificia incen- 
 derunt; frumentum omne, praeterquam ^° quod secum porta- 
 turi erant, combusserunt, ut domum rcditionis spe subluta 
 paratiores ad omnia perlcula subeunda" essent." 
 
 Tlie Route Selected and tJie Day Ajtpointed, 
 
 IV. Erant omnlno itinera duo quibus ' domo " exirc pos- 
 sent ; tinum" per Sequanos, angustum et difficile, alterura per 
 provinciam, nmlto facilius, quod inter fines Helvetiorum et 
 Allobrogum Khodanus fluit, isque nonnullis locis" vado* 
 transitur." Extremum oppidum Allobrogum est proximum- 
 
 1 Supply rr^Kirfc. 3 158,413. « 64,384. 
 
 * 123, rXX). 8 Pro, ' in proportion to.' « 78, 420. 
 
 7 The secret purpose of Orgetorix was to possess himself of sovereign 
 power among the Ilelvetii, and tiien to use this valiant and warlike 
 nation, with the aid of a few other tribes, whose chieftains he had won to 
 his purposes, in bringing the whole of Gaul under his control. His treas- 
 onable plot was detected; but just Iwforo the time appointed for his trial 
 by the Helvetian authorities, he suddenly died, as it was suspected, by hte 
 own hand. The Helvetians did not, however, give up their project of 
 emigration. 
 
 » Quae . . . pertinerent, 'which would be requisite for their departure.* 
 
 123 503, 
 
 » 258, 231. w See 270, sentence 17. " 201. M4. " 110, 497. 
 " 277, 412. M Vnum, In apposition with itinera. 28, 36S, 
 
 " 186, 425, 2. 
 w Vado trantitur, • is creased by means of a ford,' I.e. * is fordable.' 
 
244 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR. 
 
 que Ilclvetiorum finibus' Gcnava. Ex eo oppido pons ad 
 Helvetios perlinct.* Allobrogibus sese vel pcreuasuros* ex- 
 Istimabant vel vl coactflros,* ut per siiOs fines eos Ire pato- 
 rentur.* Omnibus rebus* ad profectiOnera comparalls, diem 
 dlxerunt qua diO* ad ripam Hhodani omnes convenlrentJ 
 Ts dies erat ante diem quintum Kaleiidus Apriles,* Pisone, 
 ( iablnio* cOusulibus. 
 
 Caesar Hastens into Gaxd^ and Jieceives an Embassy 
 from the Jldoetii, 
 
 V. Caesarl cum nOntiatum esset* cos per provinciam iter 
 facere conarl,'* matQravit ab urbe " proficTscI, et ad Gen&- 
 vam" pervenit. UbI de ejus advenlQ Helvetil certidrfia 
 facti sunt, lOg&tos ad eum mlserunt qui dicerent," sibt esse 
 in animo iter per provinciam facere, propterea quod aliud 
 iter haburent nQlIum; rogare, ut ejus voluntate id sibf 
 facere liceret." Caesar, quod memoria tenebat" Lucium 
 
 1 141, 391. « Jcf . . . pertinet, Meadsover to the Helvetii.' 
 
 ■ 171, 5»». * 119, 498. » Ablative Absolute. 
 
 « 98, 429. 7 123, 600. 
 
 * Ante . . . AprUfi ; this whole expression may be regarded as an in- 
 declinable noun, in this instance a predicate nominative after erat ; 69, 
 862. It means ' the fifth day before the Calends (the first) of April,' %7hich 
 according to the Roman reckoning was not the 27th but the 28th day of 
 March. Tliis was in the year 58 B. C. » 1 19, 491. 
 
 10 £os . . . conarl: svibject ot nuntialum esset. 
 
 11 Ab wrfte, i.e. from Rome. 
 
 1^ Ad Gsnavam, * into the vicinity of Geneva; ' ' to Geneva ' would be 
 simply Genavam ; 277. 380. M Qui dlcerent, to say; 119, 497. 
 
 1* i>ib\ . . . licerety Indirect Discourse. In Direct Discourse, thus: 
 Nobis est in . . . facere, propterea . . . habenius nullum ; rogamus iit tud 
 voluntate id nobis facere liceat. Explain the changes of Mood, etc. 262, 
 523, 524. Observe that esse and rogare are the leading verbs in the prin- 
 cipal clauses, and that the subject of esse is the clause iter . . . facere.— 
 Rogare, * tliat they asked;' the subject, if expressed, would be se. — Ut 
 . . . liceret ; 119, 498. Liceret has id facere as its subject, and sibl as its 
 indirect object; 54, 384.— .^w* voluntate, 'with his (Caesar's) consent,' 
 15a 413. 
 
 15 Memoria tenebat: retained in (by means of) memory. 
 
 i 
 
THE ITELVETIL 245 
 
 Cassiiini cdnsulem occlsum, excrcitumquc ejus ab Helv5ttl8 
 pulsura. et sub jugum missum,^ concedcndum * non put&bat. 
 Tainen, ut spatium intercedere posset,* dum milites, quos 
 imperaverat, convenlrent, legatls respondit, diem* se ad 
 deliberandum sumpturum ; si quid vellent, ad Idus Apriies* 
 reverterontur.' 
 
 Caesar takes Measures to prevent t/ie March of the 
 Jlelvetn. 
 
 VI. Intcrca ca legioncj quam secum habebat, militi- 
 bus(jue,' qui ex prOvincia convenerant, a lacQ Lemanno ad 
 montem Juram, qui fines Sequanorum ab Ilelvetils dividit, 
 mllia' passuum decem novem murum fossamque perduxit. 
 Ub! ea dies, (juam constituerat cum legfills, venit, et lOgati 
 ad eum reverterunt, negavit so posse iter iilli i>er provin- 
 ciam dare,' et, si vim facere conarentur,^® prohibitflrura ** 
 ostendit. Ilelvetil peiTumpere conati, operis munitiOne et 
 militum telis repulsl, hoc conatu" destiterunt. 
 
 T/ie JIdvetii decide to March by a different liotite. 
 
 yU. Relinquebatur Qua per Sequanos via," qua, Sequanis 
 invitis, propter angustias ire non poterant. His cum sua 
 
 * Tliis defeat of the Roman army under Cassius occurred near the Lake 
 of Geneva, 107 B. C. * Concedendiim, i.e. the request of the HelvetU. 
 
 » 1 19, 407. * Diem, render time. 
 
 * Ad IdOs Apriles, on the Ides of April, i.e. on the 1.1th of April. 
 
 * SI . . . reverter entur: in Direct Discourse, si quid vultis . . . rtver- 
 timini, 262, .'i2.t, 524. ' Ablative of Means with perdQzit. 
 
 ^ MlUa, 98, ''^JI. These defences extended along the aouthern side of 
 the Rhone, from tlio I^ko of Geneva to Mount Jura, and commanded all 
 the fords of the Rhone by which the Ilelvetii could enter the Roman 
 province. 
 
 * Xeyavit . . . dare: said that he could not ffrant ; literally, denied that 
 he was able to f/ive. " 362, BM. 
 
 >i Prohihiturum, i.e. «* prohibiturum e$$e. " 158, 41.1. 
 
 ** Cna . . . via: only the way throur/h the Sequnnit I.e. llie narrow poM 
 along tlio north bonk of the Rhone, between the mountains and the river. 
 
 17 
 
• 
 
 246 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR. 
 
 Bpontc' persuadere non possent,* legatos ad Dumnorigem 
 Aeduum miserunt, ut eo deprecat^re • 3 S^quanls impetra- 
 rent.* Dumnorix apud Sequanos ])lurimum poterat,* et 
 Helvctils erat amicus, quod ex ea civitate Orgctorigis filiam 
 in niatrinionium daxerat.^ Itaquc rem suscepit' et a So- 
 (juauls impetravit, ut per fines suOs Helvetios Ire paterentur. 
 
 Ciiesar Marches Five Legions of Boman Soldiers into 
 
 Gaul 
 Vm. Caesarl rcnflntiatum est, Helvctils esse in animo per 
 agrum Sequanonim et Aeduonim iter in Santonum fiues 
 faeerc.* Id si ficret, intcllogebat magno cum j)erIculo pro- 
 \ iuciae futilrum.* Ob eas causas CI munitioiii, quam fecerat, 
 Titum Labienum legStum praefOcit; ipse in Italiam con- 
 tendlt duasque ib! legiones conscrlpsit, et tres, quae circura 
 A(}uilGiam hiemabant, ex hibenus edGxit, et in ulteriorem 
 G;dlijmi cum his quinquc legionibus ire contendit. 
 
 Caesar Surprises and Jiouts One Canton of the Ilclvetii 
 at the River Arar, 
 
 IX. Helvetil jam per angustias *• et fines Sequanonim suas 
 copias transdOxerant, et in Aeduorum fines j)ervenerant." 
 Flfimen est Arar, quod " per fines Aeduorum et SOquanorum 
 in Khodanum influit. Id Helvetil transibant." UbI Caesar 
 certior f actus est, tres jam copiarum partes" Helvetios id 
 llQmen " transdnxisse, quartam vero jiartem citra flumen ** 
 
 1 Stid spontfy of themaelves. ^ See suggestion xvii, 2. 
 
 • Ed diprecatore, by his intercession ; literally, he beiiu/an intercessor. 
 
 * 119, 497. * PlUrimum poterat: had very great influence. 
 
 • In matrimonium diixerat: had married. 
 ^ Rem suscepit: he undertook the service. 
 
 * Facere: subject of esse. ® Supply esse. 
 1® The narrow pass between the Jura and the Rhone. 
 
 ^ *Had come/ i. e. during Caesar's absence. 
 
 " The antecedent is flumen. 
 
 18 Observe the force of the tense: * were crossing.' 
 
 ^* See 275, sentence 19. 
 
 ^ Citrd flumen: on this side of the river, i.e. on the east side. , 
 
THE HELVETtl. 247 
 
 Ararim rcliqu.im esse, cum legionibus tribus G cnstrls profec- 
 lus, :ul eain imrtom pervuiiit, quae nOiulum flumen triinsierat. 
 lOos aggressus mtigTiam eoriim partem conculit ; reliqui fugae 
 sOso mandanmt. Is piigus appellabatur Tigurinus; nam 
 omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagos divisa est. lUo 
 pfigiis Qniis, patnira nostrorum memoria,* Liiciiim Cnssium 
 coiisulem iiiterfocerat, et ejus excrcitum sub jugum mlserat. 
 Ita quae pars civitatis llelvetiae insignera calamitatcm pop- 
 ulO ItomanO intulerat, ea'^ princeps poenas pei-solvit." 
 
 Caesar Crosses the Arar, and Heceives a Second Embassy 
 from tlie Ilelvetii. 
 
 X. Hoc proelio facto, reliquas copias Helvetiorum ut con- 
 - -quT posset, j)ontem in Arare faciendum curavit, atque ita 
 t xercitum transduxit. Helvetii ejus adventii comraOti, lega- 
 tos ad eum miserunt, cujus legationis Divico princeps fuit. 
 Is ita cum Caesare egit:* Si pacem populus HOmanus cum 
 Helvetils faccret, in earn partem itQros atque ibt futuros* 
 Helvetios, ubl eos Caesar esse voluisset; sin bello ]>ersequl* 
 perseveraret,^ reminlsceretur et veteris ineommodi" i>opulI 
 Komanl et prlstinae virtutis Helvetiorum. Caesar respondit : 
 ^T* obsides ab ils sib! darentur, uti ea," quae jwllieC'rentur, 
 ; acturos intellegeret, sese cum ils pacem esse facturum. Di vicfl 
 
 1 Patnim . , . memorid: within the memory of our fathert; 03. 429. 
 ^ Render as if it read, ea pars civitatis Helvetiae quae > . . intulerat. 
 
 * Princeps persolvit: was the first to pay. 
 
 * Ita eyit: discoursed as follows. The words following. Si . . . Helvi' 
 tiorum, are in Indirect Discourse. The Direct Discourse would be: M . . . 
 
 tt'iet, . . . ibunt . . . erunt Ilelvetii, xtbl cos esse volucrU; sin . . . per- 
 . I'erdbis, reminlscere, etc. Explain the changes; 202> 523, 524. 
 
 * Ibl futuros: would remain there. Supply esse. 
 
 • Perstqul : supply cos. ' The subject Is Caesar. 
 
 • Ineommodi populi, etc. This refers to the def«"at of Cassias. 
 
 • 5i . . . factQrum is in Indirect Discourse. The Direct Dlsooana 
 would be: Si , . . mihl dabuntur . . . poUieeantur, . . . inteUegam, 
 {ego) . . . faciam ; 262, 523, .'i24. 
 
 '0 Kn : object of f acturos (c««e), Uio subject of which Is (cm), rofttrrlng 
 to tlie ilelvetii. 
 
248 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR. 
 
 re8[K)n<lit: HclvGtios a majoribua suls institQtds esse, utf 
 ob^ides accipere, non dare, consuesscnt ; ^ ejus rel populum 
 Ivumaiium esse testetn.^ Hoc respunso ' datO disccssit. 
 
 77ie Jlelvetii proceed an their March, foliowed by the Roman 
 Army, A Cavalry Skirmish^ in tohic/i t/te Jlelvetii are 
 tSuccessfiU. 
 
 XL Posters die castra ex eo loc6 moverunt.* Idem fdcit 
 C'uesar, equitatumquc omncm praemisit, qui viderent,* quaa 
 ill partes hostes iter facerent.' Qui cupidius^ novissiinuin 
 agiuen InsccQtl, alienO loco* cum equitutil IlelvetiOruni 
 proelium commlserunt, et pauci d6 nostrls* ceciderunt. 
 Quo proelio^ sublati Ilelvetil, quod quingoMtls equitibus'* 
 tantam muItitOdinem equitum propulerant," audacius sub- 
 sistcre, nonnflnquam ex novissimo Sgmine proelio nostros 
 lacfssore coe|K*runt. Caesar suos a proelio continObat, ac 
 satis halxibat" in praesentia hostem raplnis," pabulationibus, 
 ])opu]ati6nibusque prohibere. Ita dies" circiter quindecim 
 iter fecerunt, uti inter novissimum hostium ac:men et nostrum 
 primum ^ non amplius ** quinls aut scnis milibus " passuum 
 interesset.** 
 
 1 Consuf**ent, contracted from cdnguevistent. In this verb the Perfect 
 lixs the senae of a Present, and therefore the Pluperfect of an Imperfect. 
 - Ejus . . . testem : that the Roman people were tcitnesses of this, al- 
 luding to the hostages given by the survivors after the defeat and deata 
 ♦>f Cassius. 
 
 » Ablative Absolute. * The subject is llehetn to be supplied. 
 
 * 119, 4fl7. • 127, 529. ^ See 275, sentence 3. 
 
 « 185, 425, 2. 
 
 » Paucl di nostrU : a few of ottr men; see 126, sentence 8. 
 w 78, 420. 
 
 " Is this the reason of Caesar, or of the Helvctii? 
 " The object is the clause ?iostem . . . prohibere. ^ 158, 413. 
 
 " 98, 379. " Primum: supply agmen^ our van. 
 
 5' Amplius : subject of interesset. 
 
 17 QninU milibus; 88, 417. The Distributive implies that the stat* 
 ment is true for each of the fifteen days; 97. 172. 
 ^ 123.500. 
 
THE UELVETIL 249 
 
 Caesar Plans an Attack upoti the Camp oftfie Ildoetii. 
 
 XII. Caesar ab cxplOratoribiis ccrtior factus/ hostes sub 
 monte cOnsedisse nillia * passuiim ab ipKfus castrls octo, do 
 tertia visifilia Titiiin Labiemim, legatuni, cum duabus legiOui- 
 bus sumniuni ju2:um montis ascendere jussit. Ipse de quanta 
 vii^ilia eodcin itinere, quo hostes icraut, ad eos contendit. 
 Publius ConsTdius, qui rci inilitaris • perltissiinus habcbdtur, 
 cum explOratoribus praemissus est. 
 
 C 'aesar's Plan Defeated by tJie Mistake of Considius. 
 
 XIII. Prima luce,* cum smnmus mens a Tito Labieiiu 
 toiu'retur, ij>se ab hostium castrls non longius mllle et quln- 
 t,a'i)tis passibus abesset,* neque aut ipstus adventus aut 
 LabiOnl cOgiiitus esset/ Considius equo admisso ad eum 
 accurrit, dixit montem, quem a Labieno occupari voluisset,* 
 ab hostibus teneri ; id se a Gallicis armis cognovisse. Caesar 
 suas copias in proximum collem subdflxit, aciera instruxit. 
 Labienus, ut erat el praeceptum ' a Caesarc, nu proelium com- 
 initteret, nisi ipsfus copiae' prope hostium castra visao 
 osscnt,' ut undique uno tempore in hostes impetus fieret, 
 monte occupato nostros exspectabat proelioque abstinebat. 
 Multo denique die* per exploratores Caesar cognovit, et 
 montem a suls teneri, et Ilelvetios castra movisse, et 
 Consldium timore perterritum, quod non vidisset, pro viso 
 nibl renuntiasse.^® Eo die, quo consuerat intervallo," hos- 
 
 > Seo certus, vocabulary. * 08, 370. « See vocabulary. * 03, 429. 
 
 ft Ahrs^et and cognitits esset, as well as teniretur, depend upon eum, 
 
 « 127, 529, II. 
 
 ' The subject of erat praeceptum is the clause ni . . . committerett 
 which also expresses purpose ; 110, 4f)7. 
 
 8 Ipshis copiae: his own (Caesar's) /orw*. 
 
 » AfuUo die: late in the day, though only relatively to primA tier. 
 
 w Qt/od . . . rcnuntidsse: had reiwrted to him tchat he had not wvii, n» 
 if Men, literally, /or seen. The antecedent of quod is the omittad object 
 of renintidsse. 
 
 11 Quo . .. intrrvallo *> intervals quo eontueraL' ai tk$ «nia< iitUmce, 
 Sec above, XI., last line. 
 
250 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR. 
 
 tes sccutftB est, et nnlia passuum tria ab eorum castris castra 
 Bua posuit. 
 
 To secure Supplies^ Caesar turns aside from the Pursuit of 
 the Ileloetii. The JIdvetii change t/ieir Jioute and foUmo 
 the liotnan Army. 
 
 XrV. Postrfdie, quod a Bibractc, oppidd Aeduorum copi- 
 6si88im5, non am pints niUibus passu um octodecim aberat, 
 rei frQinentariae prospiciendum existimavit,^ iter ab Ilel- 
 vetiis avertit, ac Bibracte* Ire contendit.* Ea res per 
 fugitives hostibus nflntiatum est. Helvetil, seu* quod timore 
 perterritos Homands discedere a se existimarent, sive quod 
 r«* Mmentaria interclfldi posse* conflderent, itinere con- 
 verso, nostros^ a novissiino agniine* Iiiscqui ac lacesscre 
 ooeperuiit. 
 
 Caesar Prepares for a General Engagement. 
 
 XV. Postquam id animadvertit, copias suas Caesar in 
 ]>ruxiniuin collem subduxit, equitatuinque, qui sustineret* 
 hostium iinpetum, misit. Ipse interim in colle medio ^® tripli- 
 cem aciem InstrQxit legionura quattuor vetcranarum ; sed 
 in summo jugo duas legiones, quas in Gallia citeriore con- 
 scrlpserat, et omnia auxilia collocari jussit. Ilelvetii, cum 
 omnibus suls earns seciiti, impedimenta in unum locum con- 
 tulerunt ; ipsi confertissima aciu, rejecto nostro equitatu, 
 phalange facta, sub primam nostram acieiu successerunt. 
 
 1 Rei . . . exUtimavit: he thovffht that he ought to provide supplies. 
 With prospiciendum supply esse ; 281, 301; 54, 'Mi. 
 
 * 277, 380. 
 
 8 Avertit ac contendit: no conjunction is expressed, counecting these 
 verbs with ezistimavit ; we may supply and accordingly. 
 
 * Sen . . . conflderent: eitJier because tliey thought, etc., or because 
 they trusted, etc. 
 
 6 158, 413. 
 
 ® Posse : supply eits, referring to the Romans. 
 
 " See 125, sentence ». ^ A . . . ugmine : on the rear. 
 
 ' 119, 497. " In . . . medio : mulway vp the hill 
 
THE HELVETJL 251 
 
 In a fierce liattle the Ilelvetii are totally Defeated and put 
 to Flight, 
 
 XVI. Caesar coliortutus suos proelium commTsit. MlHtea, 
 e loco superiore pilis missis, facile hostium phalangem pcr- 
 frcjjC'iunt. Ea* disjecta, gladiis destrictls in eos' im|)ctum 
 feccrunt. Diu atque acriter pugnatum est.' Nam hoc totd 
 proelio,* cum* ab hora septima* ad vesperum pugnatum 
 tsset, aversura hostera videre nem5 potuit. Ad multam 
 iioctem' etiam ad impedimenta pugnatum est, propterea 
 • juod pro vallo carros objecerant, et e loco supcriore in nos- 
 iros venientus ' tela coiciebant, et nonnulli inter carros 
 rotasque mataras ac tragulas subiciebant, nostrosque vulnera- 
 Iwnt. Diu cum esset pugnatum,® impedimentis " castrlsque 
 iiostri potiti sunt. Ex eo proelio circiter milia hominum 
 centum et tiiginta superfuerunt, eaque tota nocte continenter 
 ierunt ; nullara partem " noctis itinera intermisso, in fines 
 Lingonum die quarto pervenerunt, cum, et propter vulnera 
 mllitum et propter sepulturara occisorum nostri triduum " 
 moratl, eos sequi non potuissent.'^ Caesar ad LingonOs 
 litteras nuntiosque misit, ne eos frumento neve alia re juva- 
 rent; qui si juvissent,*' se eodem loco, quo Ilelvetios, hal>- 
 itfirum.** I))se, trlduo intermisso, cum omnibus copiis cos 
 sequi coej)it. 
 
 J Ea refers to phalangem. ^ Eos refers to ho$tium. 
 
 » Puyndtum est : Uicij fouffht , 281.301. 
 
 * 186, 426, 1. 6 254, 515. 
 
 « As the Itomans divided the day from sunrise to sunset into tweWo 
 liours, the seventh hour would bo about one o'clock. 
 
 ' Ad . . . noctem: far into the nvjht. 
 
 ^ In , . , venientes: against our nien who were advancing, 
 
 » 281,301. w 258. 421. 
 
 " 98, 379. ^ With cum, denoting cause. 
 
 »' Qui si juvissent : xj Ihcy should aid ; 127, 529, IT. 
 
 X .Se . . . habitirum : ' that he should regard them as in the same situ- 
 ation as the Ilelvetii.' Si habitirum (esse) depends upon the verb Im- 
 plied in litteras . . . misit. Supply, as the object of habttHrum, eus, 
 referring to Lint/ones. Ilelvetios is tho objoi t of i...h.r. / (o be supplied. 
 
252 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR, 
 
 The JTelvetii submit to Caesar^s Terms, and return to their 
 C&imiry, One Canton unsuccessfully Attempts to take 
 Itefuge in Germany. 
 
 XVII. Ilelvetii, omnium n'rum inopifi addurti, lOgatos do 
 ddditionc ad cum miserunt. Caesar obsides, arma, servos, 
 qui ad eOs jMjrfQgissent,* poposcit. Duin ea* conqulruntur 
 et confcruntur, nocte intcrmissa,' circiter* hominum milia 
 sex ejus pagl, qui Verbigcnus appellatur, give timore perter- 
 riti,* no armls traditls supplicio adficerentur,* sive 8pe salfi- 
 tis induct!, prima nocte' ex castrls IlelvOtiorum egressi, 
 ad Rhunum flnesquc Germanorum contenderunt. Quod 
 ubl Caosar resciit,* quorum* per fines ierant, hls^ uti 
 conqulreront et redpcerent imi^ravit; reductos in hoa- 
 tiura nuraero habuit;" reliquos omnes, obsidibus, armis, per- 
 fugls traditls, in duditionem accepit. Ilelvetios in fines suos, 
 unde erant profecti, reverti jussit, et Allobrogibus imperavit, 
 ut ils frQmenti c6])iam facerent ;" ipsos** oppida vicosque, 
 quos incendcrant, restituere jussit. Id ea maxiinO ratione " 
 fecit, quod nohiit eum locum, unde Helvetii discesserant, 
 vacare, no propter bonitatem agrorura German!, qui trans 
 Hhcnum incohint, e suis finibus in Helvetiorum fines trans- 
 irent, et finitimi Galliae provinciae essent. 
 
 1 123, 503. a Eai <^<e, — literally, th^se, thinr/s. 
 
 * 240, 431. * Circiter : an adverb, modifying sex. 
 
 * Perterritl agrees with milia by a construction according to sense. 
 
 * JSV . . . aci/icerentur depends upon timore. * with te&rlest,' etc.; 119, 
 407. 
 
 T See 101, foot-note. » Wfien Caesar ascertained this. 
 
 ^ Quonnn : the antecedent is his. 
 
 !•' His depends on imperavit ; 64, 384. 
 
 ^1 Reductos . . . habuit : when they were hrour/Jit bark^ he treated them 
 nemies: literally, had them in the number of enemies. They were 
 probably sold as slaves. 
 
 ^2 Ut . . ./acerent. to furnish a syipply, etc.; 110,498. 
 
 ^^ Ipsos: them, emphatic, in distinction from AUohroffibus. 
 
 ^* Ed . , , ratioiie: principaltij for this reason, Qxplainedhy quod ntHuit, 
 etc. 
 
INVASION OF BRITAIN. 258 
 
 The Xumbcrs of the Ildoetii before aiul after tlieir DUob- 
 trott3 Enterprise. 
 
 XVIII. In castrls Helvetiorum tabulae repertae sunt 
 quibus in tabulTs ratio confecta erat, qui numerus* doinO* 
 exisset.* Suninia erat Helvetiorum nrilia ducenta et sexa- 
 j^inta tria. Eorum, qui donium redierunt, censQ habitd, 
 repertus est nuraerus milium centum et decem. 
 
 Caesar's First Invasion of Britain, 55 B. C* 
 Caesar* s Beasons for tJie Exj^dition. 
 
 I. Caesar in Biitanniam proficlsci contondit, quod omnibus 
 fere Gallicis bellis* hostibus nostris inde submiuistrata • 
 auxilia intellegebat ; et si tempus anni ad bellum gerendum ' 
 deticeret,* tamen magnO sibi usui* fore ^'^ arbitrabatur, si modo 
 lusulam adisset' et genus hominum perspexisset, loca, ])ortfi8, 
 aditus cognovisset; quae omnia fere Gallis erant incognita. 
 Neque enim temere praeter mercatores illo adit quisquam, 
 neque his ii)sis " quicquam, praeter Oram maritimam atque 
 eas regiOnes, quae sunt contra Gallias, nOtum est. Itaque 
 vocatis ad se undique mercatoribus," neque quanta esset ^ 
 Trisulae magnitudo, neque quae aut quantae nationes incole- 
 rent, neque quem ilsum belli haberent, neque qui ossent ad 
 navium multitQdinem idonei portils, repcrlre poterat. 
 
 Preparations for the Expedition, 
 
 II. Ad haec cognoscenda' Gaium Volusenum cum navl 
 longa praemisit. Huic mandavit, uti oxploratis omnibus 
 
 1 Rati6, qui numerus: an account $howing what number. 
 
 3 212. 412, 1. 
 
 » Qui . . . exiMet is in apposition with rata ; 127, R29, 1. 
 
 • From Caesar's " Commentaries on the Gallio War," IV., ^2f\-:Vi. 
 
 • 93. 429. • Supply e»te. » 291. M3. • 127. 529. II. 
 
 • 281, 300. w 140, 204, 2. " Ills ipsls, i.e. mercatoribut. 
 M Vocatis . . . mrrrdtoribus. Ablative Absolute; althoutih he sum 
 
 etc. u QuaiUa essel : object of reperlrt ; 137. S39, 1. 
 
254 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR, 
 
 rebus ^ ad so quam prlrnum * reverterctur.' Ipse cum om- 
 nibus copils in Morinos profcctus est, quod inde erat brevis- 
 simus in Britanniam trajcctus. Hue navOs 4indi(iue ex 
 finitimis regionibus et, quam* superiore aestatc effecerat, 
 classera jussit convenlre. VolusGnus, i>erRpectis regionibus * 
 omnibus, quinto diC* .Id Caesarem revertit, quaeque ibi J)lt- 
 spexisset* renuutiavit. 
 
 Caesar crosses tfie CJianneL 
 
 III. Caesar naotus idoneam ad navigandum • tempestatem, 
 tertia fere vigilia' solvit, et hora die! eirciter quarta* cum 
 prlniTs navibus Britanniam attigit, atque ibI in omnibus colli- 
 bus ex])ot>itas hostium copias armatas conspexit. Cujus loci 
 haec erat natura, uti ex locls superioribus in litus teluni adigi 
 posset.* llunc ad egrediendum* nequaquam idoncum locum 
 arbitratus, eirciter milia *^ passuum sejjtem ab eo loco jiro- 
 gressus, ai)erto ac piano litore naves constituit." 
 
 77ie JBritofis Oppose tJie Landing of the Romans, 
 
 IV. At barbarl, praemisso equitatu ' et essedariis, reliquTs 
 copiis subsecuti, nostros navibus egredi prohibebant. Quod 
 ubt Caesar animadvertit, naves longas, quarum species erat 
 barbarls inusitatior, paulum remover! ab onerarils navibus, et 
 rem!s incitarl, et ad latus apertum " hostium constitui, atque 
 inde fundls," sagitt!s, tormentis, hostes propelli ac submoveri 
 
 I Ablative Absolute. * Quam primvm: as soon as possible. 
 * 119.497. * Quam: the antecedent is c/assem. 
 ^ 127, 520, I. 6 201, 542. 7 93, 420. 
 
 8 About ten o'clock in the morning, probably on the 2Gth of August. 
 See page 201, foot-note 6. 
 
 » 123, 500. 10 08, 370. 
 
 II Aperto . . . constituit : he anchored off an open and level shore; prob- 
 ably on the coast of Deal; 185, 425, 1. 
 
 13 The exposed flank \ras the right flank, as the shield was carried on the 
 left arm. 
 1* 78, 420. 
 
INVASION OF BRITAIN 255 
 
 jussit : quae res magno Qsn! nostrls ^ fuit. Nam et navium 
 ligfira' et rernorum motu et inusitutO genere tormentdrum 
 ))orinOti, bail mil cOnstiterunt ac pauliini j)e(lem rettulerunt. 
 Atque nostrls militibus • cunctarttibus, maxime propter alti- 
 tudinem maris, qui* deciinae legionis acjuilam * ferObat : " DG- 
 sillte," iuquit, "commilitOnes, nisi viiltis aquilam hostibus 
 jnOtlere:* ego certe meiim rei publicae atque impcratorl ofti- 
 ciuin praestitero." Hoc cum magna voce dixisset,' so ex 
 nuvi projecit atque in hostes aquilam ferre coepit. Turn 
 nostri univci*si ex navi desiluerunt. lIOs item ex proximis 
 navibus cum conspexissent,' subsccuti hostibus aj»propTn- 
 quarunt. 
 
 77ie Homans Effect a Lmuling^ and put the Britons to 
 Flvjht. 
 
 V. Pugnatum est ab utrlsque acriter. Nostn tamen, quod 
 neque ordines servare neque firmiter insistere poterant,' 
 nulgno opere pcrturbabantur. Hostes vero, notis omnibus 
 vadls,' ub! aliquos singulares ex navi egrcdientes conspexe- 
 rant,' incitatis equTs,* adoriebantur ; plilres *® paucos circnm- 
 sistebant ; alii in uni versos" tela coiciebant. Quod cura 
 animadvertisset' Caesar, scaphas longarum navium militibua 
 eomjilerl jussit, et quos laborantes conspexerat, his subsidia 
 Bubmittebat. Nostri simul* in arido constiterunt, in hostes 
 impetum fecerunt atque eos in fugam dederunt. 
 
 The Britons /Site for Peace. 
 
 VI. Hostes, proclio" superati, statim ad Caesarem legatds 
 de pace miserunt. Caesar obsides imperavit, quSrnra illl 
 
 ^ 281, 390. a 168, 413. * Ablative Absolute. 
 
 ^ Qnt, he, who. * The eagle was the standard of the legion. 
 
 * The loss of the eagle vras regarded as a great disgrace. 
 7 Temporal clause. * Caesar's reason. * Temporal olaose. 
 w Pluria: several, i. e. of the enemy. 
 
 i> In inivcrsos: ayaiiut oxir atMtnbled forces, opposed to aliquos singu* 
 r.res. »^ 186. 42.\ 1. 
 
256 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR. 
 
 pnrtcm Btatim dedOrunt, partem paacis dicbus^ seso datQros 
 <llxerunt. 
 
 The Boman Fleet seriaustt/ Damaged by a high Tide and 
 a Storm, 
 
 VII. Ills rObiis ]»acc' confirmatfi, post dicra quartum, 
 <(uam* est in Hritanninni ventum/ accidit, ut esset luna 
 plena,* qnl dies* maritimos aestQs maximos in OceanO efficere 
 consuovit ; nostrlsquc id' crat incognitum. Ita Ono tempore* 
 ct longas naves, quas Caesar in aridum sub<lQxerat, aestus 
 
 •inplehat, et onerarias, quae ad ancoras erant deligatae, 
 trmpestus adfllctabat. Coinplaribus navibus* fractis, magna 
 totlus exercitOs perturbatid facta est. Keqiie enim navds 
 (■rant aliae, quibus re)K>rtarI possent,* et, quod omnibus con- 
 st fibat hiemarl in Gallia oportere,' frilmcDtum his in locis in 
 hiemem prOvisum nun erat. 
 
 Tfte British Chiejlains 2>iot a Benewal of Hostilities, 
 
 VIII. Quibus rebus * cOgnitls, principes ** Britanniae, cimi 
 equites et naves et f rQmcntum Romanis deesse intellegerent," 
 < t paucitatem mllitum ex castrorum exiguitate cognoscerent, 
 i>ptimum facta " esse dQxerunt, rebellione * facta, frumento ^ 
 commeatuque nostros prohibOre, et rem in hiemem produ- 
 cire," quod, his * superatis aut reditu** interclQsTs, neminera 
 
 1 03. 429. * Ablative Absolute 
 
 ■ Post , . . quam: on the fourth day after; diem is in the Accusative 
 witti the preposition po$(, and qvam is here used as a conjunction with 
 the force of postquam ; literally, after the fourth day, after, etc. 
 
 ^ 281. 901. 6 This was on the 30th of August 
 
 6 Qui dies: tohivJi period, or a period tchich. 
 
 ' Id: that = this fact, i.e. the fact expressed in ^ut . . . consuevU. 
 
 * 123, 500, I. 
 
 8 CvnMahat . . . oportert: hiemarl, used impersonally, is the subject 
 uf oportere ; 281, 301; oportere is the subject of constabat. 
 
 1° Subject of duxerunt. 
 
 " Observe mood. " 246. 547. " 158, 413. 
 
 ^ Rem . . . producere : to protract the war. 
 
 1 
 
INVASION OF BRITAIN, 257 
 
 posted belli infercndP causa in Britanniam transitdruin ' 
 cOnfidubant. 
 
 Caesar Suspects the Plot of the Britons^ and Prepares to 
 Meet it, 
 
 IX. At Caesar, etsi nondum eOrum consilia cognoverat, 
 tamen fore' id, quod accidit, suspicabatur. Itaquo ad 
 cranes casus subsidia comparabat. Nam et friimcntum ex 
 agris cotldic in castra conferubat, et quae gravissiraG adfllctac 
 erant naves, earum^ materia* atquc acre ad rcliquas re- 
 ficiendas ^ utebatur, et quae ad eas res erant flsuV ex con- 
 tinent! comportari jubebat. Itaque, duodecim navibus 
 amissis, reliquis ut navigarl posset,' effecit. 
 
 The Britons Surprise a Boman Foraging Party. Caesar 
 Hastens to tJie Bescue, 
 
 X. Dura ea geruntur,^ legione una fruraentatum* missS, 
 ncquc ulia ad id terapus belli suspTcionc interposita, ii, qui 
 pro portTs castrorum in statione erant, Caesarl niintiaverunt 
 pulverem majorera, quam consuetudo ferret," in ea parte 
 videri, quam in partem ^^ legi6 iter fecisset. Caesar suspi- 
 catus aliquid novi a barbarls initura consilil," cohortes, quae 
 in stationibus erant," secum in cam partem proficlsci, ex 
 reliquis duas in stationera cohortes succedere," reliquas ar- 
 
 1 201, M3. s Supply esse. * See 140. 201, 2. 
 
 * Quae naves, cdrum = edrum ndvium, quae. • 258. 421. 
 
 " 281. 390; one of the two Datives, as here, is often omitted, when it 
 would be some word like alicui, to any one. 
 
 7 L't . . . posset is the object of effecit, 'he made it poosible to aail with 
 the rest '; 123. SOI. Suviuari, used impersonally, is the subjeot of poMel ; 
 281. ^iOl. > Render by imperfect. * 166, 546. 
 
 »* Quam consuetudo ferret : than usual ; literally, than custom bore, 
 
 n Quam in partem ; render as if it were in qvam, 
 
 13 Aliquid . . . cdnsllii; aliquid is subject of initum{eue); ednsUii is 
 Partitive Genitive after aliquid ; 28, 397. 
 
 ^ One cohort guarded each of the four gates of a Roman oamp. 
 
 ^* Ez . . . succidere: two of the other (six) cohorts to tak« their pUm on 
 juard, lie could spare only two, instead of foar, to guard the i 
 
2.')8 NARRATIVES FROM CAESAR. 
 
 niarl et confestim sesc subsequT jussit. Cum paulo longius & 
 islris prOccssissct,' suds' ab hostibus prcml, atquc aegrS 
 sustinOre animadverlit. Nam quod, omnI ex reli<|uT8 parti- 
 bus demessO frumonto,* pars una* erat reliqua, su8j)icati hos- 
 tr-s hac nostrOs esse venttlrds, noclQ in silvis delituerant; 
 I Jim dispcrsos,* depositis armls,* in metendo* occupatos subito 
 ndortl, paucis mterfcctis, rcliquos perturbaverant ; simul 
 {uitatd atquc essedls circumdcdcrant. 
 
 TTie Use of War-chariots by the Britons, 
 
 XT. Genus bflc est ^ ex essedls pflgnae: prTm5 per omnes 
 partes pereqnitant et tela coiciimt, atquc ipso terrore equ5- 
 nim' et strepitii rotarum ordines plerumque perturbant, et 
 cum so inter equitum turmas Insinuavcrunt,* ex essedls do- 
 siliunt et pedibus proeliantur. Aurigae interim pauiraim ex 
 proelio excedunt, atquc ita currfls collocant, ut, si illi " a mul- 
 titQdine hostium premantur," expeditum ad suos* receptura 
 habeant.** Ita mobilitatem equitum, stabilitatcm peditum 
 in prot'lils pniestant. 
 
 Caesar Ilescites his Foraging Party, Storms interfere 
 vsith Military Operations. 
 
 XII. Quibus rebus " perturbatls nostris* tempore" oppor- 
 tilnissimo Caesar auxilium tulit ; namquc ejus adventil " nos- 
 tri' se ex timore receperunt. Quo* facto, ad committendum 
 
 1 Temporal claofle. * See 126, sentence 8. * Ablative Absolute. 
 
 * Pars una : only oiie part^ i.e. only one place from which grain could be 
 obtained. 
 
 ^ Dispertds ; this participle, like occupatos, agrees with iwstrds, to be 
 supplied as the object of adortl ; while scattered, etc. 
 
 ^ 291, 542. ^ Hdc est: ts as follows. 
 
 « Ipso . . . equorum : by the very terror caused by their horses. 
 
 • Teuii>oral clause. 
 
 1' nil, i.e. the warriors, in distinction from the drivers, aurigae, J^ 
 " 127, 529, II. ^ 123, 500, II. « 
 
 13 78. 420. " 93, 429. 
 
 ^ 185, 425, 1. 
 
INVASION OF BRIT A 11^. 259 
 
 proc'lium* alienum esse terapiis arbitratus, brevi tempore* 
 intcnnisso in castra legiones redaxit. SecQtae sunt con- 
 tinuos complurGs dies' tempestates, rpiae et nostros in ca». 
 iris eoiitinerent,* et hostera u pugnu prohibOrent. 
 
 T/ie Britons Combine^ and March ttpon the Roman Campy 
 but Suffer a total Defeat. 
 
 XIII. Interim barbari nflntios in omnes partes dimiserunt, 
 paiicittttemque nostrorum mllitum suis praedicaverunt, et 
 quanta in perpctuuni sui liberandi * facultas darOtur,* si 
 KOniunos castris' expulisscnt,® dcMnonstraverunt. Ills re- 
 bus* celeriter magna multitudine^ peditatiis equitatflsque 
 coactii, ad castra venerunt. Caesar legiones in acio pro cas- 
 tris constituit. Commisso proelio,' nostrorum mllitum impe- 
 tum hostes ferre non potuerunt, ac terga verterunt. Quos 
 secutT, complures ex iis occiderunt ; deinde omnibus longO 
 lateque aedificiis ^ iucensis, se in castra receperunt. 
 
 The Britons Sue for Peace. Caesar Returns to the 
 Continent. 
 
 XIV. Eodem diu^** legati ab hostibus missT ad Caesarem 
 de pace venerunt. Ills " Caesar numerum obsidum, quem 
 antea imperaverat, duplicavit eosque in continentem addflci 
 jussit. Ipse idoneam tempestatem nactus naves solvit, quae 
 omnes incolumes ad continentem pervenerunt. 
 
 » 201. M3. « Ablative Abeoluta. 
 
 » 08, 379. 4 123. fiOO. I. 
 
 * Hut liberandi : of freeinf/ themselrea; literally, o/ t/ie /reeint/ of them- 
 selves. Svi is in the Genitive plural after liberamii, according to Kul« 
 XVI., 28, 395. The Gerund usually govenis the same case as the verb, 
 but sometimes, by virtue of its substantive nature, it governs the Oenitivr, 
 especially the Genitive of personal pronouns, met, nostri, tui, vettri, and 
 sui. 
 
 « 127, .•J2«), I. ' 163, 413. • 127. TiSO. 11. 
 
 » 78, 41.U »•» 93. 429. »» 64, 3»4, 11. 
 
260 * LATIN COMPOSITION. 
 
 Suggestions on Exercises in Latin Composition. 
 
 No exercises for Translation into Latin are given in con- 
 nection with these passages of connected narrative, but it is 
 not intended that this important subject should be neglected. 
 The pupil may now begin Part II. of the " Introduction to 
 Latin Composition " ; but an exercise as often as once a 
 week or once a fortnight is recommended, to be prepared 
 by the teacher^ and based upon some passage of the Latin 
 which the pupils have read. At first the pupils may be per- 
 mitted to make their translation with the aid of the Latin, 
 but the plan should be adopted early, of assigning the pas- 
 sage to be committed to memory by the pupil, and then 
 requiring the translation into Latin within the hour assigned 
 for the exercise, witli no aid but the pupil's memory and the 
 knowledge that he has acquired of the language. The fol- 
 lowing exercise, based upon j)aragraph II., page 282, is given 
 simply as an illustration. 
 
 Tramlate into Latin, 
 
 Caesar says that in the consulship of Messala, Orgetorix, a 
 chieftain (pr'mceps *) of very high birth and of great wealth, 
 persuaded the Helvetii to emigrate from their country. The 
 ten*itory of this tribe (yens) was very limited for its popula- 
 tion, and it was separated from the adjacent countries (terra) 
 by high mountains and deep rivers. The Khine hemmed 
 them in on one side. Mount Jura on another, and on a third 
 the Lake of Geneva and the Rhone. Thus (itaque) the war- 
 like (beUicOsus) Helvetii were not able readily to carry on 
 war against their neighbors. 
 
 1 Words not occurrinj:: in the Latin passaj^e may be furnished to the 
 pupil, but in general he should be expected to give familiar words without 
 aid. 
 
SUGGESTIONS TO THE LEAliNEli. 
 
 I. The preparation of a reading lesson in Latin involves: 
 
 1 . An exact comprehension of the thought expressed in 
 the orii^inal. 
 
 2. An appropiiate expression of that thought in an Eng- 
 lish translation. 
 
 Meaning of the Latin. 
 ir. In preparing your lessons take special note, from the 
 outset, of the more obvious difference between the Latin and 
 
 the English. 
 
 IIL The Latin gives new names to persons and things 
 already familiar to you. Therefore store your memory as 
 rapidly as possible with these new names. Learn the vocalv 
 ularies so thoroughly that you will be able, not only to give 
 with promptness either the English for the Latin or the 
 Latin for the English, but also, what is of supreme impor- 
 tance, to recognize the full meaning in the Latin word it- 
 self, without any thought of the English. It is not enough 
 to find English equivalents for Latin words. In yonr vo- 
 cabulary, Latin nouns must represent not m^e words, but 
 real peraojis and t/iings ; agricola, not the English word 
 husbandman, but the IinshtDidman InniMlt\ not the name, 
 luit the man. 
 
 TV. Remember that the full meaning of an inflected 
 word can seldom be ascertained from the dictionary alone. 
 Every word of this kind has a significant ending, which 
 18 261 
 
262 SUGGESTIONS. 
 
 gives it an important part of its meaning. Therefore make 
 yourself so familiar with all the endings of inflection, 
 whether in declension or conjugation, that you will readily 
 distinguish not only the different parts of speech, but also 
 the different forms of the same word. 
 
 V. But these endings of inflection should not only enahlo 
 you to distinguish the parts of speech, should not only tell 
 you the cases of noun a, and the voices^ moods^ tenses^ mim- 
 Ursy and persons of verbs^ but they should also give you the 
 exact meaning; of all these forms. The meaning is what you 
 must have. It will be of little use to you to know that a 
 verb is in the Imperfect tense, for instance, unless you also 
 know what that tense really means, what it really tells you 
 ;il)out the action of the verb. 
 
 VI. Again, the dictionary and the grammar combined 
 often fail to meet the needs of the student. If I tell you 
 that riffes is the first word in a sentence, and then ask you 
 to give me its full and exact meaning, I require an absolute 
 impossibility. The most learned Roman that ever lived 
 could not answer the question. The dictionary can only tell 
 you th.it the general idea is that designated by our word 
 A*m<7, while the grammar infonns you that reffes is in the 
 plural number, and that the form may be found in the Nom- 
 inative, Accusative or Vocative. It will also tell you that, 
 if it is in the Nominative, it may be the subject of an action, 
 an appositive, or a predicate Nominative ; that if it is in 
 the Accusative, it may be the object of an action, an appos- 
 tive, a predicate Accusative, or the subject of an infinitive; 
 and that, if it is in the Vocative, it is used as a form of 
 address; but neither the dictionary nor the grammar can tell 
 you which case it is, or which one of these numerous mean- 
 ings it actually has. How, then, can you ever ascertain what 
 it really means? Simply by the light which the subsequent 
 words in the sentence will cast upon it. 
 
 I 
 
SUGGESTIONS. 208 
 
 I now give you tho second word in the sentence, unteiu 
 tiantt and you have reges aententiam. Can you tell the 
 meaning of these words, or of either of them? iSerUentiam 
 must be an Accusative, but as that case may be variously 
 used, its special force in this sentence is still uncertain. The 
 Accusative sententia?n, however, makes it probable that 
 reges is not an Accusative, but either a Nominative or a 
 Vocative. I add probant and thus complete the thought : 
 Jieges seniefUiam probant. Notice now the effect of this 
 last word upon the meaning of the sentence. It shows that 
 the Accusative sententiam^ which of itself might have 
 various meanings, is here simply the oV>ject of the action 
 and that regcs^ which at first covered such a variety of cases 
 is simply the subject of the action. We .are now prepared 
 to translate : The kings app7'ove the opinion. 
 
 VII. From the example just given, observe to what an 
 extent the meaning of a word is determined by the connec- 
 tion in which it is used. Standing alone it may perhaps be 
 any one of three or four cases but as soon as it is combined 
 with other words in a sentence, it stands revealed in the 
 clearest light as a single case with a definite and distinct 
 meaning. Accordingly, in all your reading, as each succes- 
 sive word meets your eye, let it be your unfailing rule to 
 study its effect upon the meaning of the sentence, to observe 
 the light which it throws upon the words that precede it 
 and the light which it in turn will derive from those which 
 are to follow ; to observe, in fine, how the thought is grad- 
 ually unfolded. 
 
 VIII. In taking up a Latin sentence remember that your 
 object is not j>rimarily to translate it, but to und^stand and 
 ajyfyrea'ate the thought in the original. This should be done, 
 not only without translating it, but even without thinking 
 of the corresponding English words. To this end, you 
 will find it helpful to read over your Latin ♦■v.r.won, 
 
264 SUGGESTIONS. 
 
 especially the longer passages, somewhat frecjiiently, with 
 the special purpose of appreciating and enjoying the thought 
 in its original form. Under this treatment, the Latin con- 
 structions so strange to the beginner, will soon be found to 
 be entirely simple and natural, and the language will in time 
 become a second vernacular, and you will then enjoy fine 
 thoughts in Latin as you enjoy them in English. 
 
 IX. But if you would fully appreciate the thoughts of a 
 Latin writer, you must take his words in the order in which 
 he wrote them. The arrangement of the words is an essen- 
 tial part of a Latin sentence and one of the means by which 
 its meaning may be most successfuly reached. The Latin 
 order, more flexible than the English, allows a much larger 
 sco|)e for emphasis, and thus shows the relative importance 
 of the several words. In general the subject and its verb, 
 so essential to the thought, are assigned important places, 
 the former at the beginning and the latter at the end of the 
 sentence, yet other words when especially emphatic may 
 occupy either of these positions. 
 
 X Finally, never attempt to translate a Latin sentence 
 until you clearly comprehend the exact thought in the orig- 
 inal. The habit of starting off blindly to render separate 
 words without any conception of the thought which they are 
 intended to express is fatal to all high scholai*ship. There- 
 fore, make it your first and chief object to ascertain the 
 exact thought contained in the sentence. To accomplish 
 this object, you will need to attend to the following partic- 
 ulars: 
 
 1. The general meaning of the several words as given in 
 the vocabulary. 
 
 2. Their more definite meaning as determined by their 
 
 endings. 
 
 3. The exact sense which they assume in consequence of 
 
 the connection in which they are used. 
 
SUGGESTIOXS. 265 
 
 XI. In the use of the Dictionary, remember that you are 
 to look, not for the particular form which occurs in tho son* 
 tence, but for the Nominative Singular of nouns, adjectives, 
 nnd pronouns, and for tho First Person Singular, Present 
 Indicative Active of Verbs. Therefore 
 
 1. In Pronouns, make yourself so familiar with their de- 
 clension that any oblique case will at once suggest the Nom- 
 inative Singular. 
 
 2. In Nouns and Adjectives, make yonrself so familiar 
 with the case-endings, that you will be able to drop that of 
 the given case, and substitute for it that of the Nominative 
 Singular. 
 
 3. In verbs, change the ending of the given form into 
 that of the First Person Singular of the Present Indicative 
 Active. 
 
 Translation. 
 
 XII. In translating, render as literally as possible with- 
 out doing violence to the English. 
 
 In many important idioms of the I^tin, a literal translation not 
 only would fail to do justice to the original, but also would be a groat 
 perversion of the mother-tongue. The following suggestions are in- 
 tended to aid the pupil in disposing of such cases; but even In these, 
 it is earnestly recommended that he sliould first construe literally, In 
 order that he may be made to feel the force of the Latin construction 
 before attempting a translation. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 XIII. These arc mnch more extensively u.sed in Latin than 
 in English ; hence the frequent necessity, in translating them, 
 of deviating from tho Latin construction. They may gm- 
 erally be rendered in some one of the following ways* (291, 
 r>49). 
 
 1 Tho pnpil mnst early loam to dotormino from the context the appro. 
 
 priuto rcuderin^ iu exich iiistauoe. 
 
266 SUGGESTIONS. 
 
 1. Literally: 
 
 Pyrrhus proelld fusus h Tarento recessit, Pyrrhns having heen de- 
 feated in battle withdrew from Tarentum, 
 
 2. By a Relative Clause : 
 
 Omnes aliuil agent«s, aliud siroulantes itnprobi sunt, all who do one 
 *hi:\g and pretend another are dishonesL 
 
 3. By a Clause with a Conjunction : 
 
 1) With a Conjunction of Time, — whiles tt/ien, after^ etc. 
 Uva maturaU dulceacit, the grape when it liae ripened (having 
 
 ripened), becomes sweeL 
 
 2) With a Conjunction of Cause, Reason, Manner, — cw, 
 /or, sincej etc. 
 
 MiliUJs perfidlam reriti Te?ertenmt, the «o/(/'>**«» ''''"mcdy bccauee 
 thnj feared perfidy, 
 
 3) With a Conjunction of Condition, — ij\ 
 Accusutus daninabitur, {f he is accused he will be condemned. 
 
 4) With a Conjunction of Concession, — thmigfiy allhougK 
 Urbem aoerrime defensam eepit, he look the city, though it was 
 
 9idiantly defended, or though taliantly d^ended, 
 
 4. By a Verbal Noun : 
 
 Ad Romam condit&m, to the founding of Rome; literally, to Some 
 founded. Ab urbe condita, /rom Ute founding of the city. Post regvA 
 esactos, qfler the expulsion uf the kings. 
 
 5. By a Verb : 
 
 Rex ei bonigne recepto filiam dedit, the king received him kindly 
 and gave him his daughter; literally, gave his daughter to him kindly 
 cived, 
 
 XIV. Participles with non or nihil are sometimes best 
 rendered by Participial nouns dei>en<lont ui>on tcithout: 
 
 Non ridens, without laughing. 
 
 XV. Future Participles are sometimes best rendered by 
 Infinitives^ or by Participial ^owu with ^ar t?ie purpose of: 
 
 Kediit belli casum tentaturus, he returned to try {about to try) the 
 fortune of war. 
 
SUGGESTIONS. 267 
 
 XVI. The Ablative Absolute is sometimes best rendered 
 (1) by a Clause icith — w/ien^ ic/iiley q/ler^ for^ since, if, 
 thoughy etc., (2) by a Noun with a Preposition^ — t/i, dur- 
 inffy after, by, fiom, ihrougliy etc., or (3) by an Active 
 Participle witii its Object: 
 
 Servio regnante, while Servius reigned, or in the reign qf Servius 
 (literally, Servius reigning). Duce Fabio, under the command of 
 Fabius (litfirally, Fabiua being commander). 
 
 Sometimes, as in the last example, a word denoting the doer of an 
 action can be best rendered by the word which denotes the thing done. 
 Thus, instead of comnutndery con8ul, king^ we have command^ con- 
 suUhipt reign. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 XVII. This n)ay be rendered as follows : 
 
 1 . With the Potential signs, mayy mighty tcotddy should, 
 or with let. 
 
 Forsitan quaeratis, perhaps you may inquire. H5c nem5 dixcrit, 
 710 one would sag this. 
 
 2. By the English Indicative. This is generally tlio Ixst 
 rendering 
 
 1) In clauses denoting Cause or Time, as after cuni, quod, 
 quia, quoniam, etc. 
 
 Cum vTta metus plena sit, since life is full of fear. Cum Rumam 
 vGnissct, when he had come to Home. 
 
 2) In Indirect Questions (127, 529, I.) : 
 Quaeritur, cur dissentiant, it is asked why they disagree. 
 
 3) In the Subjunctive in Indirect Clauses (127, 520, II.) : 
 Vereor, ne, dum minuerc vclim labftrcm, augcam, / fear I thall 
 
 increase the labor ^ while I tcinh to diminish iL 
 
 4) In the Subordinate Clauses of Indirect Discourse (262, 
 524): 
 
 Hippi&s gloriatus est unnlum qtiom halW'ret sT* sua manu conft^isM*, 
 Uiitpias boasted that he had made witfi his own hand the ring which 
 he wore (had). 
 
 5) In Relative Clauses defining indefinite antecedenU*, and 
 •omctimes in clauses denoting rejttit (123, 503, 500, 501) : 
 
208 SUGGESTIONS, 
 
 Sunt qui putcnt, there are $ome who think, lu vixit ut Athft- 
 niensibus esset carissimus, he so lived, that he was very dear to the 
 
 Athenians, 
 
 6) Sometunes in Conditional and ConccsHive clauses, and 
 in clauses with Quln and Quominus (250, 5G0, 254^ 615, 
 123, 5U0, II., 119, 497, II.) : 
 
 Dum mctuant, if only (provided) they fear, SI voluisset, diml- 
 ciisset, if he had wished, he would have fouyhL Ut desint vires, 
 Umen est laudanda volunti*, thouyh the strength fails, still the will 
 should be approved, Adest Deuiu, quin videat, Uiere is no one present 
 who does not see, 
 
 3. By the Infinitive.* Tliis is often the best rendering 
 
 1) In Clauses denoting Puri)08e (119, 497) : 
 
 Contendit ut vincat, he strives to conquer (that he may conquer). 
 Decemviri creiiti sunt qui leges 8crii)erent, decemvirs were appointed 
 to prepare the laws (who should prepare). 
 
 2) In Clauses denoting Result : hence after dlfputs, in- 
 dlf/mtSy idonetis, aptua^ etc. (123, 500, 503) : 
 
 Non is sum qui his iitar, / am not such a one as to use (he who may 
 u«e) these things. Fabulae dignae sunt qiuie legantur, the fabhs are 
 worthy to he read (which, or that they, sliould be read). 
 
 Injinitice. 
 
 XVIII. The Infinitive has a much more extensive use in 
 Latin than in English. The following points require notice. 
 
 1. The Infinitive with a Subject is rendered by a Finite 
 verb with that: 
 
 Dixit se regem vidisse, he said that he had seen the king, 
 
 2. The Historical Infinitive' is rendered by the Imperfect 
 Indicative: 
 
 Tram pater dissimulfire, the father concealed his anger, 
 
 1 Obflerve, however, that the Infinitive here is not the translation of 
 the Subjunctive alone, but of the Subjunctive with its subject and con- 
 nective ; ut vincat, to conquer (literally, that he may conquer); qui utar, 
 as to use (literally, u:ho should or may use). 
 
 2 In lively descriptions the Present Infinitive is sometimes used for the 
 Imperfect or the Perfect Indicative. It is then called the Historical In- 
 finitive, and, like a finite verb, has its subject in the Nominative. 
 
SUGGESTIONS. 209 
 
 3. Tlie Infinitive is sometimes best rendered by a ParticU 
 pHtl noun with of, wit/t, etc. 
 
 Insimulutur mysteria violusse, he is accused of having violated the 
 vnjsteries. 
 
 Miscellaneous Idioms. 
 
 XIX. The following Miscellaneous Idioms are added : 
 
 1. Certiorem facere should be rendered, to inform^ and 
 certior fieri, to be informed: 
 
 Caesar certior factiis est, Caesar was informed. 
 
 2. Inter «5, literally between theinsehes, is often best ren- 
 dered, from each other, from one another, to each other, to 
 i>ue another, together. 
 
 OmnC'S inter se differunt, they all differ from one another. 
 
 3. N'e — quidem, with one or more words betwocn l]je 
 l>arts, should be rendered, not evefi, or even — not: 
 
 Ne nomen quidem, not even the name. 
 
 4. When two or more verbs stand together in the same 
 compound tense, the coj)ula (s^nm) is generally expressed 
 with the last only, but in rendering, the copula should be 
 expressed with the fii*st only : 
 
 Captus ct in vincula eojcctus est, he was taken and thrown into 
 chains. 
 
 5. Qua n to — tanto, literally, bt/ as much as — by so much, 
 is often lx*st rendered before comparatives, the — the: 
 
 Quanto diutlus considero, tanto res videtur obscurior, the longer 
 thy as much as the longer) I consider the subject, the more obscure 
 ^hy so much the more obscure) does it appear. 
 
 G. A Clause with qndmimis, *by which the less,' or *tljat 
 the less,' may generally be rendered by a Clause with tfutt, 
 by the Infinitive, or by a Participial noun with from. 
 
 Per eum stetit quominus dimlcurC'tur, it was owing to him (stood 
 through him) that the engagement was not made. Non recusavit 
 quominus poenam subiret, he did not refuse to submit to punishmenL 
 Krgeni inipediit quominus pugnaret, he prevented the king from 
 fighting. 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 «M. 
 
 ahlatlvc 
 
 m. masculine. 
 
 ace. 
 
 accusative. 
 
 n. neuter. 
 
 a.lj. 
 
 adjective 
 
 nom. nominative. 
 
 adv. 
 
 adverb. 
 
 p. page. 
 
 comp. 
 
 comparative. 
 
 part, participle. 
 
 conj. 
 
 conjunction. 
 
 pen. personal. 
 
 f. 
 
 feminine. 
 
 pi. plural. 
 
 g<»n. 
 
 genitive. 
 
 po8. positive. 
 
 itnpers. 
 
 impersonal. 
 
 prep, preposition. 
 
 Indef. 
 
 indefinite. 
 
 pron. pronoun. 
 
 interj. 
 
 interjection. 
 
 sing, singular. 
 
 InteiTog 
 
 . Interrogative. 
 
 sup. superlative. 
 
 lit 
 
 literally. 
 
 w. with. 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 A, ah. prep. w. all. From ; hijj 
 in the direction of; on. 
 
 Abeo, ire, ii, itiiin. To go atcay, 
 depart. 
 
 Abstineo, ere, ui, tentum. To ab- 
 stain, refrain. Abstain. ^ 
 
 Absum, esse, Hfui. To be absent j 
 distant. Absent. 
 
 Abundo, are, avi, fitiim. To 
 abound, to be well mpplicd 
 with. Abound. 
 
 Ac, conj. And. 
 
 Acceptiis, a, um, part and ac(}. 
 Acceptable. Accept. 
 
 Accido, ere, i. To fall to, befall, 
 happen ; accldit, it happens, 
 comes to pass ; 281, 301. Ac- 
 cident. 
 
 Accipio, ere, cGpi, ceptnm. To 
 accept, receite, take, admit. 
 
 ACCEIT. 
 
 AccommcKlutns, a, nm, part, and 
 ailj. Fitted, adapted. Ac- 
 commodate. 
 
 AccuiTo, ere, curri and cucurri, 
 eureum. To run to, hasten to. 
 
 Accusatiu, onis, /. Accusation. 
 
 Accusator, oris, m. Accuser. Ac* 
 
 CUSATION. 
 
 Aceuso, are, avi, attim. To accuse, 
 
 cenmre, vpbraid. Accuse. 
 Acer, acris, acre. Sharj), severe. 
 Acies, ei, /. Edge, line ; line qf 
 
 battle ; aciem instruere, to form 
 _ the line of battle. 
 Acriter, adv. Sharply, briskly, 
 
 severely, vigorously, violently, 
 
 harshly ; acriter pugiiatur, a 
 
 severe battle is fought; 281, 301. 
 Aciitus, a, uro, part, and a((/. 
 
 Sharpened, sitarp. 
 Ad, prep. w. ace. To, toward, 
 
 for ; at, on, near, in the vicinity 
 
 of; according to. 
 Adaino, are, avi, atum. To be 
 
 greatly pleased with, to like 
 
 very much. 
 Adduce, ere, dfixT, ductum. To 
 
 lead to, lead, bring, induce. 
 
 Adduce. 
 Aded, ire, li, Itum. To go to, 
 
 arrive at, reach, visit. 
 Adequitu, are, avi, atuiu. To ride 
 
 toward, ride. 
 Adficio, ere, feci, fectnni. To qf- 
 
 feet, visit. ArrECT. 
 
 » The words thus added to the definition in small capitalii are 
 •us from their form readily suggest the corrusiwuding Latin word. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 Adfinitas, sUis,/. Connection, re- 
 lationship. Affinity. 
 Adflicto, are, avi, atuin. To 
 
 trouble ; to strand. Afflict. 
 Adfligo, ere, flixi, flictum. To 
 
 crushy damage. Afflict. 
 Adhiic, adv. Uitherio^ as yet, 
 
 thus far. 
 Adigo, ere, egi, actum. To drive, 
 
 impel, hurl, throw. 
 AditiLs, us, m. Approach, 
 Adjungo, ere, jQnxi, jdnctnm. 
 
 To Join, add, unite. Adjoin. 
 AdmiuistrO, are, avi, atuin. To 
 
 administer, nianaije, execute, 
 
 direct, perform, Administkiu 
 Admitto, ere, ralsi, missum. To 
 
 send to, send on, let go, admit ; 
 
 to commit ; equo adniisso, toith 
 
 his horse at full speed. Admit. 
 Adorior, in, ortus sum. To rise 
 
 upon, attack. 
 Aduatuci, onim, m. pi. The 
 
 Aduatuci, a tribe of northern 
 
 Gaul. 
 Adulescens, cnti€, m. and f. 
 
 Youth, young man, young wo- 
 man. Adolescence. 
 Adventus, iis, m. Approach, ar- 
 
 rivaL Ada'ent. 
 Aedificium, ii, n. Building, house. 
 
 Edifice. 
 Aedifico, are, avi, atum. To build. 
 
 Edifice. 
 Aedui, orum, m. pi. The Aedui 
 
 or Aeduans, a tribe of central 
 
 Gaul. 
 Acduus, a, um. Aeduan; Aeduus, 
 
 1, m., an Aeduan, one of the 
 
 Aediu. 
 Aegre, adv. With difficulty, 
 
 hardly, scarcely. 
 
 Aequltas, atis,/. Fairness, calm 
 
 ness, kindness. Equity. 
 Aes, aeris, n. Bronze, copper, 
 Aestas, atis, /. Smnmer. 
 Aestus, us, m. Tide. E8TUAR\ 
 Aetas, atis, /. Age* 
 Agedincum, i, n. Agedincum, 
 
 town in central Gaul. 
 Ager, agri, m. JField; agri, pi 
 
 fields, lands, country. 
 Aggredior, i, gressus sum. 7 
 
 attack, assail. Aggression. 
 Agmen, inls, n. Army on th 
 
 march, line qf march; extri 
 
 mum &gmen, the extremity c 
 
 the line, the rear ; novissimui 
 
 agmen, the rear; primum &{ 
 
 men, the van. 
 Ago, ere, egi, iictum. To leai 
 
 drive ; to do, act, perform ; t 
 
 treat, plead, discourse, argue 
 
 gratias agere, to return thanh 
 
 thank. Act. 
 Agricola, ae, m, Husbandmai 
 
 farmer. Agriculture. 
 Alces, is, /. Elk, 
 Alesia, ae, /. Alesia, a town i 
 
 central Gaul. 
 Alienus, a, um. Anotlier^s ; w 
 
 favorable, unsuitable. Aliej 
 Aliquamdiu, adv. For a time. 
 Aliquis, qua, quid and quod. Ani 
 
 any one. 
 Alius, a, ud. 45, 151. Other, aj 
 
 other. AxiAS. 
 AUobroges, um, m. pL, sint 
 
 Allobrox, ogis. The Alli 
 
 broges, a tribe of southeaster 
 
 Gaul. 
 AJO, ere, alui, alitum and altun 
 
 To nourish, support. 
 Alpes, ium, /. ;)i. Alps. 
 
VOCABLLAUl. 
 
 273 
 
 Alter, tcra,tcruin. 46,151. The 
 other of two, stcond. 
 
 Altitudo, inis, /. Jlc'ujht, depth. 
 
 Amicltia, ae, /. Friaidshlp. 
 
 Amicus, a, ura. Friendly; ami- 
 cus, i, ?H., friend. Amicable. 
 
 Ainitto, ere, misi, missiun. To 
 lose. 
 
 Amo, are, uvi, utum. To love. 
 
 Amor, oris, m. Love. 
 
 Ainplus, a, urn. Ample ^ much. 
 Ample. 
 
 An, con}. Or. 
 
 Aucops, anclpltis. Douhlc, two- 
 fold ; doubtful, undecided. 
 
 Ancora, ae, /. Anchor. 
 
 Angustiae, arum,/, pi. Narrow- 
 ness ; narrow pass, defile. 
 
 Angustus, a, um. Narrow ; lim- 
 ited, contracted ; steep. 
 
 Animatlverto, ere, i, sum. To 
 turn the attention to, observe, 
 notice. ANiMADVEirr. 
 
 Animal, alis, n. Animal. 
 
 Animus, i, m. Mind, heart, souL 
 
 Annus, i, m. Year. Annual. 
 
 Annuus, a, um. Annual, yearly, 
 annually, for a year. Annual, 
 
 Ante, adv.f and prep. w. ace. 
 lief ore ; ante diem quintum 
 Kalendils Apriles, the SSth qf 
 ^farch. 
 
 An tea, adv. Before, formerly, 
 previously. 
 
 Antcf^uam, cor^. Before. 
 
 Antifiuus, a, um. Ancient, old, 
 former. Antique. 
 
 Analus, i, m. Jiinff. 
 
 Aportus, a, um, part, and atlf. 
 Open, exposed. 
 
 Appello, are, avi, aturo. To call. 
 Appeal. 
 
 Appeto, ere, ivi or li, itum. To 
 seek lifter, seek. Ai»petitb. 
 
 AppropinquO, arc, avi, alum. To 
 approach. 
 
 Aprilis, e. Of April; ant« diem 
 quintum Kalendaa AprilJs, the 
 gSth of March. 
 
 Apud, prep. w. ace. In the pres- 
 ence of, near, among, in, with, in 
 the vicinity of; in the works of. 
 
 Aquila, ae, /. Earjle, the stand- 
 ard of the legion. 
 
 Aquileia, ae,/. ylr/taVe/o^ a town 
 in noithcm Italy. 
 
 Aquilifer, eri, m. Standard- 
 bearer. 
 
 Aquitani, onim, m. pi. The Aqui- 
 tani or Aquitanians, the In- 
 habitants of the southwestern 
 division of GaiU. 
 
 Arar, aris, m. 12a The Arar, a 
 river in southeastern (iaul, now 
 the Saone. 
 
 Arbitror, ari, atus sum. To Uiink. 
 Akbitkate. 
 
 ArcCsso, ere, sivi or sii, situm. To 
 summon, invite. 
 
 Ardeo, ere, arsi, arsum. To burn ; 
 to be ardent, be eager. AniK)ii. 
 
 Aridum, I, n. Dry land. A kid. 
 
 Ariovistus, i, m. Ariovistus, a 
 king of the Germans. 
 
 Anna, Crura, n. pi. Arms. 
 
 Armo, are, avi, atum. To arm. 
 
 An), are, avi, iitum. To plough. 
 
 Arrogantia, ae, /. Arrogance. 
 
 Arte, at/p. Closely; soundly. 
 
 Artemisia, ae, /. Artemisiaf 
 queen of Caria. 
 
 Artiflcium, li, n. Artifice. 
 
 Arvenii, drum, m. pL The Ar- 
 wrni, a tribe of southern Gaul. 
 
274 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 
 Arx, arcls,/. Citadel [cend, 
 
 Asccndo, ere, i, ct-nsum. To aa- 
 
 At, conj. Butf yet. 
 
 Athenac, arum, /. pi. Athena, 
 
 AtliC'iiiensis, is, in. and/. Athenian. 
 
 Atque, coT\f. And. 
 
 Atticus, 1, in. AtticuSf a IU)man 
 name. 
 
 Attingo, ere, tigl, tactum. To 
 touchy reach. 
 
 Auctor, Oris, in. Author ^ ad- 
 vocate. 
 
 Aucloritas, alls, /. Authority j 
 ii\fluencet reputation. 
 
 Audacia, ac, /. Audacityt bold- 
 n€88. Audacity. 
 
 Audact4ir, ado. Boldly. Auda- 
 city. 
 
 AikIco, ere, ausus sura. To dare, 
 rrnlure. 
 
 Audio, ire, ivi or ii, itum. To 
 heart hear qf. Audience. 
 
 Aiigcu, ere, auxi, auc-tuni. To 
 augment^ increase. 
 
 Aureus, a, urn. Golden^ gold. 
 
 Auriga, ae, in. Charioteer ^ driver. 
 
 Aunim, i, n. Gold, 
 
 Aut, cot^J. Either^ or; aut . . . 
 aut, either . , , or. 
 
 Autem,^ conj. But 
 
 Auxilium, ii, n. Aidy help; aux- 
 ilia, pl.f auxiliaries. 
 
 Avuritia, ae, /. France. 
 
 Averto, ere, i, sum. To turn 
 asidc^ turn aicay; aversus, turn- 
 ed away, in retreat, retreating. 
 
 AVEBT. 
 
 Avis, is, /. Bird. 
 Avus, i, in. Grandfather. 
 
 B. 
 
 Barbanui a, um. Barbarou, 
 
 rude; barbarus, i, m., a ba\ 
 
 barian. Babbarous. 
 Beatus, a, um. Blessed, hajypi 
 
 prosperous. 
 Belgae, arum, m. pi. The Be 
 
 gae or Belgians, the inhabitan 
 
 of tlie nortliern division < 
 
 Gaul. 
 BellicOsus, a, nm. Warlike. 
 Bello, are, avi, atura. To wa: 
 
 wage war, carry on war. 
 Bellovaci, orum, in. pi. The Be 
 
 lovaci, a tribe of nortliwestei 
 
 Gaul. 
 Bellum, i, n. War, 
 Beneficium, ii, n. BeneJlt,favQ 
 
 Benefice. 
 Bibracle, is, n. Bibracte, tl 
 
 chief town of the Aedui. 
 Bibrax, actis, n. Bibrax, a tow 
 
 of the Bemi. 
 Biennium, ii, n. Tico years, spat 
 
 of two years. Biennial. 
 Bituriges, um, m, pL The Bit 
 
 riges, a tribe of central Gaul. 
 Boil, onim, in. pi. The Boii, 
 
 tribe of cential Gaul. 
 Bonitas, atis, /. Goodness, exce 
 
 lence. 
 Bonus, a, nm. 86, 105. Good 
 Brevis, e. Short, brief. 
 Brevitcr, adv. Briefly. 
 Britanni, omm, m. pi. Britons 
 Britannia, ae, /. Britain. 
 Brutus, i, in. Brutus, a Komn 
 
 name. 
 
 1 Avtem is postpositive, i. e. it is placed after one or more words in i 
 clause. 
 
VOCABULARY, 
 
 275 
 
 Cabillunuin, i, n. CabillonwUf a 
 town m eastern Gaul. 
 
 Cado, ere, cecidi, casum. To/all. 
 
 Caedes, is, /. Slaughter. 
 
 Caesar, aris, m. Caesar, the cele- 
 brated general, statesman, and 
 author. 
 
 Calaniitas, atis,/. Calamity, dis- 
 aster. Calamity. 
 
 Cantium, ii, n. Kent. 
 
 Cantus, us, m. Sinying, song. 
 
 Capillus,i,»». Ilair. Capillauy. 
 
 Capio, ere, cepi, captura. To take; 
 consilium capere, to take coun- 
 sel, form a plan. 
 
 Captivus, i, m. Captive. 
 
 Caput, itis, n. Jlead. Capital. 
 
 Caria, ae, /. Caria, a country in 
 Asia Minor. 
 
 Carina, ae, /. Keel, bottom of a 
 vessel. 
 
 Caro, carnis,/. Flesh. Carnal. 
 
 Carrus, i, m. Cart, wagon. 
 
 Carus, a, urn. Dear. 
 
 Cassius, ii, m. CassiuB, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 Castellum, i, n. Bedoubi. Cas- 
 tle. 
 
 Casticus, i, m. Castlcus, a Sc- 
 quanian chieftain. 
 
 C'astra, orum, n. i^l. Camp. 
 
 Casus, us, m. Accident, occur- 
 rence, emergency, vicissitude, 
 fortune. 
 
 Catena, ae,/. Chaiu. 
 
 Cato, Onis, )u. Cato, a Itoman 
 name. 
 
 Causa, ae, /. Cause, reason. 
 Cause. 
 
 L\*cidi. Sec cadu. 
 
 Celeritas, ails,/. Celerity, speed* 
 Cklebity. 
 
 Celeriter, adv. QMickly, speedily. 
 Celkuity. 
 
 Celtac, urum, m. pi. Celts, the 
 inhabitants of the central di- 
 vision of Gaul. 
 
 Census, us, m. Census, enumeror 
 tion. 
 
 Centum, indeclinable. Hundred. 
 
 Centurid, onis, m. Centurion. 
 
 Certe, adv. Certainly, at least. 
 Cektaix. 
 
 Certus, a, um. Certain, fixed, 
 appointed ; certiOrem faccre, to 
 make more certain ; to inform. 
 Certain. 
 
 Cevenna, ae, m. Cecenna,a moun- 
 tain range in southern Gaul, 
 now the Cevennes. 
 
 Cicero, onis, m. Cicero ; (1) the 
 celebrated orator; (2) a lieuten- 
 ant mider Caesar. 
 
 Circiter, adv., and prep. to. ace. 
 About. 
 
 Circuni, prep. w. ace. Around, 
 about, near, in the vicinity cf. 
 
 Circumdo, are, dedi, datum. To 
 place around ; to surround. 
 
 Circummunio, ire, ivi, itura. To 
 wall around, to surround. 
 
 Circumsisto, ere, stiti. To stand 
 around, surround. 
 
 Cis, prep. w. ace. On this side qf. 
 
 Citcrior, us, comp. adj., sup. citl- 
 ■mus. jVfnrer ; Gallia citerlor, 
 the Roman province qf Gaul^ 
 south qf the Alps, Cisalpine 
 Gaul. 
 
 Citru, prep. to. ace. On this side 
 
 ¥' 
 Civb, is, m. and f. Citizen. 
 
27G 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Civitis, iUfl, /. StaU ; cUUens ; 
 citizenship. 
 
 Cldmito, are, avi, Mum. To ex- 
 clainif cry out. 
 
 Clamor, oris, nu ShouL 
 
 Clarus, a, iim. Clear ; ilhtstriouSt 
 renowned. Clear. 
 
 Clttssls, l8, /. Fleet. 
 
 Claudo, ere, si, sum. To close, 
 ahut. Close. 
 
 Ch'inenlia, ae, /. Clemency, 
 mercy. Clemenct. 
 
 Cliens, enlis, m. and f. Client, 
 dependant Client. 
 
 Coeiiio, ere, eini, emptuin. To 
 buy up, buy, purchase, obtain 
 by purchase. 
 
 Coepi, Isse.* To begin. 
 
 Coerced, ere, ui, itiun. To re- 
 strain, control. Coerce. 
 
 Cognosce, ere, novi, itum. To 
 ascertain. 
 
 Cogo, ere, egi, actum. To drive 
 together, bring together, col- 
 lect ; to force, compel, 
 
 Cohors, ortis, /. Cohort, a tenth 
 of a legion. 
 
 Cohortatifi, onis,/. Exhortation, 
 encouragements 
 
 Cohortor, ari, atiis sum. To ex- 
 hort, encourage. 
 
 Coicio,^ ere, jeci, jectum. To 
 throw, hurl, cast. 
 
 Collis, is, m. JJill. 
 
 CollocO, are, avi, atuin. To place, 
 station. Collocate. 
 
 Colloquium, ii, n. Conrersaiion, 
 conference, interview. Collo- 
 quy. 
 
 Colonla, ae, /. Colony. 
 
 Comburo, ere, ussi, ustum. To 
 bum up, bum. Combustion. 
 
 Comes, itis, m. and f. Com- 
 panion. 
 
 Commeatus, uSy m. Supplies, prO" 
 visions. 
 
 Commemoratid, onis, /. Men- 
 tioning, mention, retnember' 
 ance. Commemoration. 
 
 CommcmorO, are, avi, atum. To 
 mefition ; to speak. Commemo- 
 rate. 
 
 Commeo, are, avi, atum. To go 
 back and forth, resort. 
 
 Comuiilit^, onis, m. and f. Fel- 
 low-soldier. 
 
 Committo, ere, misi, niissum. To 
 commit ; proelium committere, 
 to engage in battle. 
 
 Commius, ii, m. Commius, a 
 chieftain of the Atrcbates. 
 
 Commoveo, ere, movi, moturo. 
 to mote, disturb, alarm. Com- 
 motion. 
 
 Communis, ire, ivi or ii, itum. 
 To wall around, encompass, 
 surround. 
 
 Communis, e. Common, general ; 
 communis res, common in- 
 terest. 
 
 Comparo, are, avi, atum. To pre- 
 pare, raise. 
 
 Compello, ere, puli, pulsum. To 
 drive. Compel. 
 
 Corapleo, ere, evi, etum. To Jill, 
 cover. Complete. 
 
 CompluK'S, plura or pluria. Very 
 many, many, several. 
 
 1 Not used in the Present system. 
 '- i'rououuced as if spelled cojieio. 
 
VOCABULAUr. 
 
 277 
 
 Comporto, are, uvi, atuin. To 
 bring togetherj gather. 
 
 COnitus, us, m. Undertakingy 
 attempt, purpose. 
 
 Concedo, ere, cessi, cessimi. To 
 concede, grant, jyermit. Con- 
 cede. 
 
 Concido, ere, i. To fall. 
 
 Concido, ere, i, sum. To cut down, 
 destroy, kill, slay. 
 
 Concilio, are, avi, alum. To win, 
 secure. Conciliate. 
 
 Concilium, ii, n. Council, meet' 
 ing. Council. 
 
 Conclamo, are, avi, atum. To 
 shout, call out. 
 
 Concursus, us, m. Bunning to- 
 gether, running about, running 
 to and fro, agitation, CoN- 
 
 CX)UItSE. 
 
 CondOnO, are. avi, atum. To con- 
 done, pardon, forgive. Con- 
 done. 
 
 Conduco, ere, dflxi, ductura. To 
 lead together. Conduct. 
 
 Confero, ferre, contuH, collatum. 
 To carry together, bring to- 
 gether, gather, collect. Con- 
 fer. 
 
 COnfertus, a, um. Dense, crowd- 
 ed, compact. 
 
 Confestim, adc. Hastily, speed- 
 ily. 
 
 Conficlo, ere. feci, fectum. To 
 make out, make, complete, ac- 
 complish, finish, bring to a 
 close. 
 
 Confido, ere, fisus sum.* To trust, 
 be confident ; to have confidence 
 in, rely upon. Confide. (Fol- 
 
 lowed by the Ablative or by the 
 
 Dative.) 
 Coiifirmu, are, avi, atum. To 
 
 confirm, strengthen, establish, 
 
 assure, fix ; to coir\fort. Con- 
 firm. 
 Confligo, ere, flixi, flictum. To 
 
 contend, fight. Conflict. 
 Conjungo, ere, jQnxi, jQnctum. 
 
 To Join, unite. Conjoin. 
 ConjQnx, ugis, m. andf. Spouse; 
 
 husband ; wife. 
 Conjurati6, oais, /. Consjiiracy. 
 ConjurO, are, avi, atum. To con- 
 spire. 
 Conor, ari, atus sum. To attempt, 
 
 try. 
 Conquiro, ere, sivi or sli, situm. 
 
 To search for, seek. 
 Conscius, a, um. Conscious, a- 
 
 ware. Conscious. 
 Conscribo, ere, scripsi, scriptum. 
 
 To enrol, enlisL Conscript. 
 Consequor, i, secutus sum. To 
 
 pursue, follow, overtake. 
 C6nser\'6, are, avi, atum. To 
 
 sate, preserve, spare. Con- 
 serve. 
 Considlus, ii, m. Considius, an 
 
 officer in Caesar's army. 
 Consido, ere, sedi, sessum. To 
 
 sit down, settle, post oiie'a 8e{f, 
 
 er.camjy. 
 Consilium, ii, n. Counsel, plan. 
 
 Counsel. 
 Consimilis, e. Similar, like. 
 Consisto, ere, stili, stltum. To get 
 
 a footing, stand firm. Consist. 
 Conspectus, us, wi. Sight, tieic. 
 
 Conspicuous. 
 
 i See 250. 
 
 J9 
 
278 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 
 COnsplciO, ere, spexi, 8i>ectiim. 
 To behold. Conspicuous. 
 
 Cunstanter, ads. ConMstently, 
 untformly. Constant. 
 
 Constantia, ae, /. Corutancjff 
 stea'JfastnesB. Constancy. 
 
 CunstituO, ere, ui, utum. To tta- 
 tiorif place ; to determine f de- 
 cide. CONSTTTUTK. 
 
 Cunsto, are, stiti, statiim. To 
 gland firm ; to be eatabtUhed^ 
 be evident, be plain^ be mani- 
 fest, be admitted. Constant. 
 
 ConsuCrsco, ere, suevi, suetuin. 
 To become aecustbmed ; con- 
 suevi, / have become accus- 
 tomed, I am accustomed. 
 
 C6nsuetud5, iiiis, /. Custom, 
 usage. 
 
 Consul, ulls, in. Consul, one of 
 the two presidents of the Ro- 
 man commonwealth. 
 
 Coiisulo, ere, ui, sultum. To con- 
 sult 
 
 Consulto, are, uvi, atum. To con- 
 sult. 
 
 Consul tarn, i, n. Decree, 
 
 Contendo, ere, i, tentum. To 
 contend ; to hasten. Contend. 
 
 Contentus, a, um. Content, con- 
 tented, satined. Content. 
 
 Continens, entis, /. Continent, 
 mainland. Continent. 
 
 Continenter, adv. Continually, 
 incessantly. 
 
 Contineo, ere, iil, tentran. To 
 retain, restrain, confine, keep, 
 enclose, sitrround. Contain. 
 
 Continuus, a, um. Continuous, 
 successive. Continuous. 
 
 Contra, adv., and prep. w. ace. 
 Against, contrary to, over 
 
 against, opposite, in oppoH 
 
 tion. Contkary. 
 Contraho, ere, traxi, tractum. 
 
 To contract, 
 Controversia, ae, /. Con trotersy, 
 
 dispute. Controversy. 
 Conveniu, ire, vuni, vcntum. To 
 
 come together, meet, come. 
 
 Convene. 
 Conventus, us, in. Convention, 
 
 meeting, assembly, council. 
 
 Convention. 
 Converto, ere, i, sum. To turn, 
 
 change. Convert. 
 Convoco, are, avi, atum. To call 
 
 together, assemble. Convoke. 
 Copla, ae,/. Abundance, supply, 
 
 number; pi., supplies; forces, 
 
 troops. Copious. 
 Copiosus, a, um. Well-supplied, 
 
 wealthy. Copious. 
 Corona, ae, /. Crown, gailand. 
 
 Crown. 
 Cotidianus, a, nm. Daily. 
 Cotidie, adv. Daily. 
 CotU, ae, m. Cotta, a lieutenant 
 
 under Caesar. 
 Crassus, i, m. Crassus, a Roman 
 
 name. 
 Creber, bra, brum. Frequent. 
 Credo, ere, didi, ditnm. To be- 
 lieve. Creed. (Followed by 
 
 the Dative. ) 
 Creo, are, avi, atum. To create, 
 
 make, appoint, elect. Create. 
 Crudelis, e. Cruel. 
 Criideliter, adv. Cruelly. 
 Culpa, ae,/. Fault, blame. Cuiy 
 
 pable. 
 Cultus, us, m. Cultivation, re- 
 finement, civilization. 
 Cum, prep. w. abl. With, 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 279 
 
 Cum, eonj. TITicn, while; «incc, 
 as; although. 
 
 Cunctor, uri, utus sum. To hesi- 
 tate. 
 
 Cupitle, adv. Eagerly. 
 
 Cu;)iJus, a, urn. Desirous. 
 
 Cupio, ere, ivi or ii, ituin. To 
 desire. 
 
 Cur, conj. Why. 
 
 Cura, ae, /. Care. 
 
 Curo, are, avi, atiim. To care, 
 care for ; aliquid faciendum 
 euro, to have a thing done. 
 
 Currus, us, m. Chariot. 
 
 CusUkHo, ire, ivi or ii, itum. To 
 guard. Custody. 
 
 Cyrus, i, m. Cyrus, king of Per- 
 sia. 
 
 D. 
 
 De, prep. w. abl. Of, from; 
 about, in regard to, concern- 
 ing ; in the course of; for. 
 
 Debeo, ere, ui, itum. To owe; 
 ought. Debt. 
 
 Decem, indeclinable. Ten; de- 
 cern noveni, nineteen. 
 
 DecernO, ere, crevi, cretum. To 
 decide, decree. 
 
 Decerto, are, avi, atum. To con- 
 tend, struggle, Jight. 
 
 Decimus, a, um. Tenth. Deci- 
 mal, [sion. 
 
 Decretura, i, n. Decree, deci- 
 
 I>ed:ti6, 6nls,/. Surrender, 
 
 Dt'Iuco, ere, diixi, ducium. To 
 I ad forth, conduct. Deduce. 
 
 Defcndo, ere, i, fensum. To de- 
 fend. 
 
 Defensor, 6rls, m. Defender. 
 
 Defessus, a, um. Tired, exhaust- 
 ed, weary. 
 
 Deficio, ere, feci, fectum. To 
 fail, to be insufficient, Defi- 
 
 CIEXT. 
 
 Dei ml e, adv. Then, in the next 
 place. 
 
 DelectO, are, avi, atum. To de- 
 light, please. 
 
 Deleo, Ore, evi, etum. To destroy. 
 
 Delibero, are, avi, atum. To de- 
 liberate. 
 
 DeligO, ere, legi, lectum. To 
 choose, elect, select. 
 
 DeligO, are, avi, atum. To fasten, 
 moor. 
 
 Delitesco, ere, litui. To hide. 
 
 Dumeto, ere, messui, messum. To 
 cut down, reap. 
 
 Deminuo, ere, ui, utum. To di- 
 minish, lessen, 
 
 DemOnslro, are, avi, atum. To 
 demonstrate, show. Demon- 
 
 8TKATE. 
 
 Demum, adv. At length. 
 
 DC'nique, adv. Finally, at length. 
 
 Depono, ere, posui, positum. Tc 
 lay down, lay aside. Depose. 
 
 Depopulor, ari, atus sum. To 
 ravage, lay waste. Depopu- 
 late. 
 
 Deprecator, oris, m. Pleader, 
 spokesman, agent ; eo depreca- 
 tore, by his intercession. Dep- 
 recate. 
 
 Designo, are, avi, utum. To 
 designate, indicate. Desig- 
 nate. 
 
 DesillO, ire, ul, sultum. To leap 
 out, leap forth, leap down. 
 
 D£'sist6, ere, stiti, stitum. To 
 desist, cease. Desist. 
 
 Destringd, ere, strlnxi, strictum. 
 To unsheathe, draw. 
 
280 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 
 Desum, esse, fui. To be tcant- 
 infjy to fail, (Followed by the 
 Dative. ) 
 
 Deterreo, ere, ul, itum. To deter. 
 
 DetineO, ere, uI, tentum. To de- 
 tain. 
 
 DCtrimentum, i, n. Detriment, 
 lo9»y disadvantage. Det«i- 
 
 MENT. 
 
 Dico, ere, dlxi, dictum. To tay, 
 speak, mention, state ; to ap- 
 point ; causam dicere, to plead 
 a cause, make a defence. 
 
 Dies, el, m. Bay; time; multodie, 
 long after sunrise; ante diem 
 q 111 n turn Kalendas Aprlles, the 
 28th of March. 
 
 DiflScilis, e. Difficult. 
 
 Difficultas, atis, /. Difficulty. 
 
 Diligcnter, adv. Diligently, air 
 tentively. Diligext. 
 
 Diligentia, ae,/. Lilijence, care- 
 fulness. DiUOENCE. 
 
 Dionysius, ii, m. Dionysius, 
 tyrant of Syracuse. 
 
 Discedo, ere, cessi, cessura. To 
 witlidraic, depart, swerve. 
 
 Disci pul us, i, wi. Pujnl. Dis- 
 ciple. 
 
 Disicio,^ ere, jeci, jectura. To 
 break asunder, separate. 
 
 Dispergo, ere, si, sum. To scatter, 
 disperse. Disperse. 
 
 Dissentio, onis, /. Dissension, 
 disagreement. Dissension. 
 
 Distineo, ere, tinui, tentum. To 
 keep apart, separate. 
 
 Diu, adv., comp. diutius, sup. 
 diutissime. Long, for a long 
 time ; quam diu, as long as. 
 
 Dives, itis, comp. dlvitlor or ditlor, 
 8u;). divitissimus or ditissimus. 
 Bich, vcealthy. 
 
 DivicS, onis, m. Ditico, an Hel- 
 vetian chieftain. 
 
 Divido, ere, visi, visum. To di- 
 vide, separate. Divide. 
 
 Divinus, a, um. Divine, religious. 
 Divine. 
 
 Dlvitiacus, i, m. Dicitiacus, an 
 Aeduan chieftain. 
 
 Do, dare, dedi, datum. To give ; 
 in fugam dare, to put to flight. 
 
 Doceo, ere, ui, doctum. To teach^ 
 inform, 
 
 Doctrina, ae, /. Learning. Doc- 
 trine. 
 
 Doctus, a, um, part, and adj. 
 Learned. 
 
 Dolor, oris, m. Pain, grief. 
 
 Domus, us, /. House; home; 
 domi, at home. 
 
 Dono, are, avi, alum. To present. 
 
 Donura, i, n. Gift, present. 
 
 Dormio, ire, ivi or ii, itum. To 
 sleep. Dormant. 
 
 Druides, um, m. pi. Druids, the 
 priests of the Gauls. 
 
 Dubito, are, avi, atum. To doubt, 
 hesitate. 
 
 Ducenti, ae, a. Tiro hundred. 
 
 DQco, ere, duxi, ductum. To lead. 
 Duct. 
 
 Dum, conj. Tlliile ; until. 
 
 Dumnorix, igis, m. Dumnorix, 
 an Aeduan chieftain. 
 
 Duo, ae, o. 97, 175. Two. 
 
 Duodecim, indeclinable. Twelve. 
 
 Duodequadraginta, indeclinable. 
 Thirty-eight. 
 
 1 Pronounced as if spelled di^icio. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 281 
 
 Duplex, Ids. Double. 
 
 Duplico, are, avi, atum. To double. 
 
 Duplicate. 
 Dux, ducis, in. and /. Leader. 
 
 E, prep, w, abU See Ex. 
 
 £iluco, ere, dQxi, ductum. To 
 lead out. Educe. 
 
 Efferalno, are, avi, atum. To effem- 
 inatej enercate. Effeminate. 
 
 Efficio, ere, feci, fectum. To 
 make, constructj effect, pro- 
 duce, occasion, briny about. 
 Effect. 
 
 Ego, mei, pera. j^ron. 102, 184. 
 
 _ /, myself. 
 
 Egredior, i, gressus sum. To go 
 out, go forth, depart, disem- 
 
 _ bark. Eoress. 
 
 Egregie, adc. Excellently/. Eore- 
 
 _ oious. 
 
 E|[n*egius, a, uiu. Distinguished. 
 
 EOREGIOUR. 
 
 Eicio,^ ere, jeci, jectum. To coat 
 out, drive out, expel. Eject. 
 
 Enim,^ coi\}. For. 
 
 Enuntio, are, avi, atum. To an- 
 nounce, report, disclose. 
 
 E6, ire, ivi or ii, itum. 277, 285. 
 Togo. 
 
 Epistula, ae, /. Letter, epistle. 
 Epistle. 
 
 Equcs, itis, m. Horseman ; pi., 
 horsemen, cavalry. 
 
 Equester, tris, tre. Equestrian; 
 equestre proclium, cacalry en- 
 gagement. 
 
 Equltatus, us, m. Cavalry. 
 
 Eqiuis, i, m. Horse, 
 
 Eram. See Sum. 
 
 Erigo, ere, rexi, rectum. To erect, 
 raise; se erigere, to lij't one's 
 self, rise. Ekect. 
 
 Erudio, ire, ivi or ii, itum. To 
 instruct. Ehudite. 
 
 Esseda, ae, /. War-chariott 
 chariot. 
 
 Essedarius, ii, m. Chariot-fighter, 
 a warrior who fought iu a war- 
 chariot. 
 
 Et, cor^. And; et . . . et, both 
 . . . and. 
 
 Etiam, adv. Also, even, 
 
 Etsi, conj. Although, 
 
 EvocO, are, avi, atum. To sum- 
 mon forth, call out. Evoke. 
 
 Ex, e, prep. w. abl. Out of, from, 
 
 Excedo, ere, cessi, cessum. To 
 tcithdraw. • 
 
 Excito, are, avi, atum. To excite, 
 arouse. Excite. 
 
 Excnicio, are, avi, atum. To tor- 
 ture. EXCIIUCIATIXO. 
 
 Excursid, onis, /. Sally, sortie. 
 Excursion. 
 
 Excuse, are, avi, utum. To ex- 
 cuse. 
 
 Excmplum, i, n. Example. 
 
 Exeo, ire, ii, itum. To go out, go 
 forth, depart. Exit. 
 
 Exercitus, us, m. Army. 
 
 ExigO, ere, vgi, actum. To com^ 
 pltte, finish, end. Exact. 
 
 Exiguitas, atis, /. SmallnesSf 
 small size. 
 
 1 Pronounced as If spelled ejicio. 
 
 * Enim M posiposiUve ; see page 274, foot-note. 
 
282 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ExigTius, a, ura. liestrictedt lim- 
 ited^ scanty^ smallj bri^, 
 
 £xistiin<%are,avi,atuiu. To think. 
 
 Expeditu^ a, uin, part, and a(l}. 
 Unemharrawedj ready^ quick. 
 Expedite. 
 
 Ixpello, ere, pull, pulstim. To 
 rxpel, drice out. Expkl. 
 
 l::.\pl6rator, oris, m. Hcout. Ex- 
 plorer. 
 
 Explore, are, avi, atiim. To ex- 
 plore^ intestiyate. Explokk. 
 
 Expono, ere, posul, positiim. To 
 expose t arrange. Expose. 
 
 Expugno, are, avi, atuni. To take 
 by storm f storm. 
 
 Exspecto, are, avi, atum. To ex- 
 pect, await. Expect. 
 
 Exsix>li6, are, avi, atum. To rob, 
 deprive. 
 
 Exsul, ulis, m. and f. Exile. 
 
 Exterus, a, uin, comp. exterior, 
 sup. extremus and extiiniis. 
 Outer ; extremus, extreme ; 
 outermost extremity of. 
 
 Extra, prep. w. arc. Beyond, 
 outside of. 
 
 Exuro, ere, ussi, ustum. To bum 
 up, burn. 
 
 F. 
 
 Fabius, ii, m. Fabius, a cele- 
 brated general. 
 
 Fabula, ae,/. Fable, story. Fa- 
 ble. 
 
 Facile, adv. Easily. Facile. 
 
 Facilis, e, comp. facilior, sup. 
 facillimus. Easy. Facile. 
 
 Facinus, oris, n. Misdeed, crime. 
 
 Facio, ere, feci, factum. To do, 
 make; iter facere, to march; 
 Tim facere, to use force. Fact. 
 
 Facultas, atis, /. Ability, op" 
 portunity, means ; pi., means, 
 wealth. Faculty. 
 
 Falsus, a, ura. False. 
 
 Fames, is,/. Ilunrjer. 
 
 Familiaris, e. Domestic, private ; 
 res familiaris, private property. 
 
 Faveo, ere, favi, fautum. To favor. 
 (Followed by the Dative.) 
 
 Feliciter, adx). Happily, success- 
 fully. Felicitous. 
 
 Felix, icis. Happy, fortunate. 
 
 Ferax, acU. Productive, fertile. 
 
 Fere, adv. Almost, nearly. 
 
 Fero, ferre, lull, latum. 269, 292. 
 To bear, carry, present, bring ; 
 to endure ; l^em ferre, to pro- 
 pose a law. 
 
 Ferlilis, e. Fertile. 
 
 Fertilitas, atis, /. Fertility. 
 
 Ferus, a, um. Fierce, savage. 
 
 Fidells, e. Faithful. Fidelity. 
 
 Fides, fii, /. Faith, confidence, 
 trust ; pledge. 
 
 Fid us, a, ura. Faithful. 
 
 Figura, ae, /. Figure, form, 
 shape. Figure. 
 
 Filia, ae, /. Daughter. Filial. 
 
 Filius, ii, m. 3S^ 51, 5. Son. 
 Filial. 
 
 Fingo, ere, finxi, fictura. To 
 form, fashion ; vultum tingere, 
 to control the countenance. 
 
 Finio, ire, ivi or ii, itura. To 
 bound, limit, end. Final. 
 
 Finis, is, m. and f. End, limit ; 
 fines, m. pL, boundaries ; terri- 
 tory. 
 
 Finitimus, a, nm. Neighboring. 
 
 Tib, fieri, factus sum. 277, 2^. 
 To be made ; to happen, come 
 to pass. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 283 
 
 Finciter, adv. Firmly. 
 
 Flaccus, i, wi. Flaccua, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 Flaglto, are, avi, atum. To de- 
 mand. 
 
 Fluctus, us, in. H'aec. Fluctu- 
 ate. 
 
 Fluraen, inis, n. Stream, river. 
 
 Huo, ere, fluxi, fluxuiu. To 
 Jlow. 
 
 Fore. See 140; 204, 2. 
 
 Forsitan, adv. Perhaps. 
 
 Fortis, e. Brave. 
 
 Fortiter, comp. fortius, 8tip. fortis- 
 sime, adv. Bravely, valiantly. 
 
 Fortitude, inls, /. Fortitude^ 
 courage. Fortitude, 
 
 Fortuna, ae, /. Fortune. 
 
 Fossa, ae, /. Ditch, moat 
 Foss. 
 
 Frango, ere, fregi, fructuin. To 
 break, cruah, wreck. Fiiaut- 
 
 VRE. 
 
 Fruter, tris, m. Brother. FllA- 
 
 TERNAL. 
 
 I Vemltus, us, m. Din^ noise. 
 
 ' I t'tus, a, uiu. Belying on, trust- 
 ing to. 
 
 Frunientarius, a, uni. Pertain- 
 ing to grain ; res fruiucularia, 
 grain, supplies. 
 
 Frumentiitld, onis, /. Foraging, 
 provisioning. 
 
 Frumentor, ari, atus sum. To 
 gather grain, forage. 
 
 Friimentum, i, n. Groin. 
 
 Fuga, ae, /. Flight ; in fugam 
 dare, to put to fiight. 
 
 Fugitivus, V, in. Runaway, deser- 
 ter. Fugitive. 
 
 Fuuda, ae, /. bling. 
 
 Futunji, a, um. See 8utn, 
 
 Gabinius, ii, m. Gabinius, a Ro> 
 man name. 
 
 Gaius, ii, m. Gaius, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 Galba, ae, m. GalbOf a lieuten- 
 ant under Caesar. 
 
 Gallia, ae, /. Gaul. 
 
 Gallicus, a, um. Gallic. 
 
 Gallus, i, m. Gaul, a GauL 
 
 Gemma, ae, /. Gem. 
 
 Genuva, ae, /. Geneva. 
 
 (iener, eri, m. Son-in-law. 
 
 Gens, gentis, /. BacCf tribes na- 
 tion. 
 
 Genus, eris, n. Kind, class. 
 
 Germunia, ae, /. Germany. 
 
 German us, a, um. German ; 
 German us, i, m., a German. 
 
 Gem, ere, pessi, gestum. To 
 bear, conduct, carry on, wage, 
 do ; to hold. 
 
 Gladius, ii, m, Steord, 
 
 Gloria, ae,/. Glory. 
 
 Gnaeus, i, m. Gnaeus, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 Graecia, ae, /. Greece. 
 
 Graecus, a, um. Greek, Grecian. 
 
 Gratia, ae, /. Gratitude, favor; 
 pi., thanks. Grace. 
 
 Gratulor, ari, atus sum. To con- 
 gratulate; to thank. (Followed 
 by the Dative. ) 
 
 G rat us, a, um. A cceptable, ple<u- 
 ing. 
 
 Gravis, e. Heavy, •evert, grate. 
 Grave. 
 
 Graviter, adv. Severely, gHet- 
 ously. 
 
 Gubemator, dris, m. Pilot. Gu- 
 
 BERNATORIAI.. 
 
284 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 H. 
 
 Habed, ere, ui, ituin. To Aaee, 
 holdf regardy regard as. 
 
 Habito, are, avi, alum. To re- 
 sidCf lit€y dwell. 
 
 Hannibal, alls, m. Hannibal, a 
 celebrated Carthaginian gen- 
 eral. 
 
 Ilarudes, um, tn. pL The Haru- 
 dea, a tribe of southwestern 
 Germany. 
 
 Ilelvetii, orum, m. pi. The lleU 
 vein or Helvetians^ a people in- 
 habiting Switzerland. 
 
 Helvetius, a, um. Helvetian. 
 
 Ilereditas, atis, /. Inheritance. 
 
 Herodotus, i, m. Herodotus, a 
 Greek historian. 
 
 llibcma, drum, n. pi. Winter 
 quarters. 
 
 HTc, haec, h5c. 102, 18fi. This, 
 this one, the latter, he, she, it. 
 
 Hiemo, are, avi, atum. To win- 
 ter, pass the winter. 
 
 Hieras, eniis, /. }yinter. 
 
 Ilistoria, ae,/. History. 
 
 lIora5, inis, m. and f. Man, hu- 
 man being, person. 
 
 nouor, oris, in. Honor. 
 
 llora, ae, /. Hour. 
 
 Hortor, ari, atus sum. To exhort, 
 urge. 
 
 Hospes, itis, m. and f. Guest ; 
 host 
 
 Hostis, is, in. and f. Enemy. 
 
 Hue, adv. Hither; to this 
 place. 
 
 Huinanitas, atis, /. Culture, re- 
 finement. Humanity. 
 
 Humanus. a, um. Humane; civil- 
 ized. Humane. 
 
 IM, adv. TJiere. ] 
 
 idem, eadeni, idem. 102, 18tU] 
 Same, the same. • 
 
 Iduneus, a, um. Suitable, fii^l 
 proper. \ 
 
 fdus, uum, /. pL Ides, the 15th i 
 of March, May, July and Octo»i 
 ber ; In other months the 13th. | 
 
 leram, ii. See Ed. 
 
 Igitur, coi\}. Ther^ore. \ 
 
 Ignis, Is, m. Fire. 
 
 Ignoro, are, ivi, atum. Not to\ 
 know, to be ignorant of. \ 
 
 Ignosco, ere, novi, notum. To\ 
 pardon, forgive. | 
 
 Hie, a, ud. 102, ISO. That, thai\ 
 one, the former, he, she, it. 
 
 H16, adv. Thither, to that place,\ 
 
 Impedimentum, i, n. HinderanceA 
 embarrassment ; pi, hinder"] 
 anees; baggage. 
 
 Impedio, ire, ivi or ii, itinn. To' 
 impede, hinder, embarrass. Im- 
 pede. \ 
 
 Impeditus, a, um, part, and adj, -, 
 Impeded, hindered, embar"^ 
 rassed; entangled. Impeded. j 
 
 Impended, ere. To orerhang,^ 
 Impend. (Followed by thel 
 Dative. ) 1 
 
 Imperator, oris, m. General, comi^- 
 mander. \ 
 
 Imperatum, i, n. Order, bidding,] 
 command; imperatum facerc,| 
 to do one's bidding, execntd 
 one's order. I 
 
 Imperitus, a, um. Unskilful,] 
 ignorant. ^ 
 
 Imperiura, ii, n. Command, sway,-, 
 government, empire. I 
 
VOCADL'LARY, 
 
 285 
 
 Iinpero, are, avi, utum. To order ^ 
 command. 
 
 Impetro, are, avi, utum. To ob- 
 tain one's request. 
 
 Impetus, us, m. Attackf charge. 
 Impetuous. 
 
 Importo, are, avi, utum. To Mng 
 in, import. Impout. 
 
 Improbus, a, um. Wicked^ un- 
 principled. 
 
 luiprovisus, a, um. Unforeseen^ 
 unexpected ; de improvise, un- 
 expectedly, suddenly. 
 
 In, prep. lo. ace. and abl. ; see 
 page 58, foot-note 1. In, into, 
 to ; for ; oner, across. 
 
 Incendium, ii, n. Fire, burn- 
 ing, conflagration. Incendi- 
 
 AUV. 
 
 Incendo, ere, i, c*"nsum. To set 
 on fire, fire, burn. Incense. 
 
 Incito, are, avi, utum. To im- 
 pel, urge on, urge foricard. 
 Incite. 
 
 Incognitus, a, um. Unknoien. 
 
 Incolo, ere, ul, cultum. To in- 
 habit, dwell. 
 
 Incolumis, e. Unharmed, safe. 
 
 Incommodum, i, n. Mi^ortune, 
 disaster, defeat. 
 
 Incredibllis, e. Incredible. 
 
 Inde, adv. Thence, from that 
 place. 
 
 Indico, ere, dixi, dictum. To 
 appoint. 
 
 Indignus, a, nm. Unworthy. 
 
 Indued, ere, duxi, ductura. To 
 lead into, lead on, induce. In- 
 duce. 
 
 Inco, ire, Ii, iium. To go into, 
 enter upont begitit initiatef un* 
 dertake. 
 
 Inermus, a, um. Unarmed. 
 
 infelix, icis. Unhappy, Uiifortu- 
 nale. 
 
 infero, ferre, intuli, lllatum. To 
 bear into, wage into, wage 
 against, wage upon, wage; to 
 inflict upon, inflict. 
 
 inficio, ere, feci, fectum. Tostain^ 
 color, dye. 
 
 Influo, ere, fluxi, fluxum. To 
 flow into, empty, flow. 
 
 Ingratus, a, um. Ungrateful, un- 
 pleasant, disagreeable. 
 
 Ininiicus, i, lu. Enemy, per- 
 sonal enemy. 
 
 Iniquus, a, um. Unequal; tin- 
 fair, unjust ; unfavorable, dis- 
 advantageous. 
 
 Initium, ii, n. Beginning. Ini- 
 tiate. 
 
 Injuria, ae, /. Ihjurtj, wrong. 
 Injury. 
 
 Inopia, ae, /. Lack, want, need, 
 scarcity. 
 
 Inquam.» / say ; inqiiit, present : 
 he says ; perfect : he saidf said 
 he. 
 
 insequor, i, secutus sum. To fol- 
 low close upon, follow up, fol- 
 low, pursue. 
 
 insignis, e. Marked, $lgnal, re- 
 markable. 
 
 insimulo, lire, iivi, iitura. To ac' 
 cuse. 
 
 insinu6, ire, avi, atum. To in- 
 troduce, insinuate ; se iiisin- 
 
 » Inquam is a defective verb. It U asod in a few parte only of the 
 active voice. 
 
286 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 uare, to make one's leay, force 
 one*8 self. Insinuate. 
 
 Insisto, ere, stitf. To standi get 
 a foothold. Insist. 
 
 Instituo, ere, ui, lilum. To be- 
 g illy proceed; to trains inHrucL 
 Institute. 
 
 Iiistd, are, stiU, stutiim. 7b 
 6c near^ be at hand. In- 
 st ah T. 
 
 instruo, ere, struxi, structura. To 
 construct^ draw «/), array; 
 aciem instrtiere, to form the 
 line of battle. 
 
 f nsitetus, a, uro. Unaccustomed. 
 
 Insula, ae, /. Island. 
 
 Inle^ritus, atis, /. Integrity^ up^ 
 riyhtness. Inteouity. 
 
 IntcHego, ere, lexi, lectiim. To 
 understand. Intellect. 
 
 Inter, prep. w. ace. Among ; In- 
 ter se, among themselves ; with 
 each other y with one another, 
 together; inter se dare, to ex- 
 change. 
 
 Intercedd, ere, cessi, cessiim. To 
 come between, intervene. In- 
 tercede. 
 
 Intercludd, ere, si, sum. To cut 
 off. 
 
 Intenlicd, ere, dixi, dictum. To 
 forbid, prohibit, exclude. In- 
 terdict. 
 
 Interea, ado. Meantime, in the 
 meanwhile. 
 
 Intereo, ire, li, itum. To perish. 
 
 Interficio, ere, feci, fectura. To 
 kill, slay, put to death. 
 
 Interim, adv. Meanwhile, in the 
 mean time. 
 
 Interior, us, comp. ac^j. 86, 166. 
 Interior, inner. 
 
 Intermittd, ere, misi, missumi 
 To send between; to inter* 
 mit, interrupt; pass., to be 
 brought between, to intervene* 
 Intermit. • 
 
 Interpdno, ere, posui, positum. To 
 interpose, suggest, present. lN<i 
 terpose. 
 
 Intersum, esse, ful. To be b&t 
 tween, intervene ; interest, itn' 
 personal, it interests, concerned 
 
 INTEREST. 
 
 Intervallum, 1, n. Interval, space 
 between. 
 
 Inusitatus, a, um. Unwonted, un/i 
 familiar, strange. j 
 
 Inutilis, e. Useless. i 
 
 In Vitus, a, um. Unwilling. 
 
 Ipse, a, um. 102, 186. Se{f, he^ 
 sJie, it ; ille ipse, that very. \ 
 
 Iracundus, a, urn. Passionate^ 
 violent. 
 
 Irruinpo, ere, rupl, ruptum. Te 
 break in, rush in. 
 
 Irrupti6, on is, /. A breaking in^ 
 an attack. Irkuption. i 
 
 Is, ea, id. 102, 186. That^ 
 this, that one, this one, Ae» 
 she, it. 
 
 Iste, a, ud. 102. 186. That of 
 yours, that, that one, he, 
 she, it. 
 
 Ita, adv. So, in such a way, 
 Utus. 
 
 Italia, ae, /. Italy. 
 
 Itaque, conj. And so, there- 
 fore. \ 
 
 Item, adv. Also, likewise. 
 
 Iter, itineris, n. March, Jour- 
 ney ; way, route ; magna itin- 
 era, /orced marches; iterfacere, 
 to march. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 287 
 
 Jacid, ere, jeci, jactum. To throw. 
 
 Jam, adv. Already, now. 
 
 JubeO, tjre, jussi, jussum. To 
 order^ command. 
 
 J lidex, icis, m. and /. Judge. 
 
 Judicium, ii, n. Judymenty de- 
 cision. 
 
 Judico, are, avi, atnm. To judge. 
 
 Jugum, i, n. Yoke ; ridge, height. 
 
 Jumentum, i, n. Draught ani- 
 mal, beaut of burden. 
 
 Jura, ae, m. Jura, a mountain 
 range in western Gaul. 
 
 Jussi. Heejubed. 
 
 Jusliiia, ae, /. Justice. 
 
 Juvenis, is, m. and f. Youths a 
 youth. Juvenile. 
 
 Juvo, are, juvi, julum. To aid^ 
 help, assist. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kalendac, anim, /. pi. Calends, 
 the first day of the month ; ante 
 diem quintum Kalendas Apriles, 
 the S8th of March. Calendar. 
 
 KarthagS, inis, /. Carthage. 
 
 L. 
 
 Labii'nns, i, m. Labienus, a lllu- 
 tenant under Caesar. 
 
 I^bor, oris, in. Labor, toil, ef- 
 fort, exertion. 
 
 I^boro, are, avi, alum. To lahor^ 
 struggle, to be in trouble. La- 
 bor. 
 
 Lac^sso, ere, sivi or sil, situm. 
 To harass, provoke, assail, at- 
 tack. 
 
 Lacrima, ae, /. Tear. 
 
 Lacrim6, ire, kv'i, itum. To 
 weep. 
 
 Lacus, OS, m. Lake. 
 
 Lapis, Idis, m. Stone. 
 
 Largior, iri, itus sum. To bestow, 
 make gifts. 
 
 Largiler, adv. Largely, widely, 
 extensively ; largiler posse, to 
 have extensive influence. 
 
 Late, adv. Widely; longe late- 
 que, far and wide. 
 
 Latinus, I, m. Latinus, king of 
 the Laiirentiaus in central It- 
 aly. 
 
 Latinus, a, um. Latin. 
 
 Latitiidu, inis, /. Width, breadth. 
 Latitude. 
 
 Latrd, Onis, m. Robber, brigand. 
 
 Latus, a, um. Broad, wide, ex- 
 tensive. 
 
 Latus, eris, n. Side. 
 
 Laudo, are, avi, atum. To praise. 
 Laud. 
 
 Lavinia, ae, /. Laeiiiia, daugh- 
 ter of King Latinus. 
 
 Legalid, onis,/. Embassy. 
 
 Legatus, i, wi. Ambassador ; lieu- 
 tenant. Lkoate. 
 
 Legi6, dnis,/. Legion. 
 
 Lego, ere, legi, lectura. To read. 
 
 Lemannus, I, m. Lemannus, Le- 
 man. Lake of Geneva. 
 
 Lenitas, atis,/. Smoothness, gen- 
 tleness. 
 
 Led, onis, m. Lion. 
 
 Levitas, v^s, f. Levity, fickle- 
 ness, impulsiveness. Levitt. 
 
 Lex, legis,/. Law. 
 
 Libenter, adv. Willingly, gladiy. 
 
 Liber, bri, wi. Book. 
 
 Liber, era, erum. Free. 
 
 Liberalltas, itis,/. Liberality. 
 
288 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 LIberi, firuin, m. pL Children, 
 
 Libero, are, avi, atum. 2o Uber- 
 ate^free. Liberate. 
 
 Liberlus, atis, /. Liberty^ free- 
 dom. LiUERTY. 
 
 Liceor, eri, itus sum. To bid at 
 auction. 
 
 Licet, ere, licult, impera. It 
 is lawful, is permitted, one 
 may. 
 
 Ligarius, il, m. Llgariun, a 
 prominent Roman in whose 
 behalf Cicero pleaded before 
 Caesar. 
 
 Liger, is, m. The Ligcr, a river 
 in southwestern Gaul, now the 
 Loire. 
 
 Lingones, um, m. pL The 
 Lingones, a tribe of central 
 Gaul. 
 
 Lingua, ae, /. Tongue^ language. 
 
 Liscus, 1, m. LiscM, a chieftain 
 of the Aedui. 
 
 LiUvicus, i, m. Litacicus, an 
 Aeduan chieftain. 
 
 Littera, ae, /. Letter; pi., let- 
 ters ; a letter, epitstle. 
 
 LUus, oris, n. Shore. 
 
 Locus, i, m., pi. loca, 6rum, n. 
 Place, position. Local. 
 
 Longe, adv. Long, far, by far. 
 Long. 
 
 Longinquus, a, um. Distant, re- 
 mote. 
 
 Longus, a, imi. Long. 
 
 Lucius, ii, m. Lucius, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 Luna, ae,/. Moon. Lunar. 
 
 Lutetia, ae,/. Lutetia, a town in 
 central Gaul, now Paris. 
 
 Liix, liicis, /. Light, daylight; 
 prima lux, daybreak. 
 
 M. 
 
 Magistratus, us, m. Magistracy 
 
 magistrate. 
 Magnitudfi, inis,/. Sixfi, magni 
 
 tude, height. Magnitude. 
 Magnus, a, um, comp. major, sup 
 
 maximus. Great, large ; num 
 
 erous; loud; mujores, m. a/K 
 
 /. pi., elders; ancestors, fore 
 
 fathers. 
 Maleficium, ii, n. MischieJ 
 
 harm. 
 Maid, malle, malui. 273, 203. T 
 
 prefer. 
 Mando, are, avi, atum. To com 
 
 mission, order, entrust, con 
 
 sign, commit, betake. Mas 
 
 DATE. 
 
 Maned, ere, mansi, m&nsum. T 
 
 remain. Manse. 
 Manus, us, /. Hand ; band ; ii 
 
 manibus, in hand ; at hand 
 
 close at hand. 
 Marcus, i, m. Marcus, a Romai 
 
 name. 
 Mare, is, n. Sea. 
 Maritimus, a, um. Maritime 
 
 pertaining to the sea ; on 
 
 maritima, sea-coast. Mabi 
 
 TIME. 
 
 MaUra, ae, /. Jatelln, pike, i 
 Mater, tris, /. Mother. 
 Materia, ae, /. Timber. Ma 
 
 TEUIAI« 
 
 Matisco, onis, m. Matisco, a 
 
 town in southwestern Gaul. 
 Matrimoniura, ii, n. Marriage, 
 
 in matrimonium ducere, tc 
 
 marry. Matkimony. 
 Mature, adv. Early, promptly. 
 
 Mature. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 Mainro, are, uvi, utum. To 
 hasten. Matlice. 
 
 \iriiurua,a,um. Early. Mature. 
 
 M;ius6lus, i, m. MawioluSf king 
 of Caria. 
 
 Muxline, aup. adv. Most, very 
 greatly, chiejly, especially. 
 
 Muximus, a, um. See maynus. 
 
 Medius, a, um. Middle^ middle 
 of; 191, foot-note. 
 
 Melodunum, i, n. Melodunumf 
 a town in central Gaul. 
 
 Memoria, ae, /. Memory, recol- 
 lection. Memoicv. 
 
 Menapli, orum, m. pi. The Me- 
 napii, a tribe of northern Gaul. 
 
 MC'ns, mentis, /. Mind, intellect. 
 Mental. 
 
 Mensis, is, m. Month. 
 
 MercHtor, oris, Hi. Merchant^ 
 trader. 
 
 leridies, el, m. Midday ^ noon. 
 Meuidian. 
 
 Merito, adv. Deservedly. Merit. 
 
 Messiilla, ae, nu Messala, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 Metior, Iri, menstis sum. To meas- 
 ure, allot. 
 
 Meto, ere, messul, messum. To 
 reap, harvest, gather grain. 
 
 Mens, a, um. 185. My, mine. 
 
 Miles, itis, m. and f. Soldier. 
 Militia. 
 
 Mililurls, e. Military: res mill- 
 taris, military affairs. 
 
 MlUe, pi. milla, ium, n. 247, foot- 
 note. Thousand ; mllle pasaus, 
 a thousand paces^ a (Roman) 
 mile. 
 
 Minus, eomp. adv. Less ; sup. 
 minime, leasts very little, by no 
 means. 
 
 Mitto, ere, misi, missum. To 
 send. M188IUN. 
 
 Mobilitus, atis, /. Mobility^ ra- 
 pidity. Mobility. 
 
 Modeste, adv. Modestly. Mod* 
 
 EST. 
 
 Modo, ado. Only. 
 
 Modus, i, «i. Measure ; manner. 
 
 Moleste, adv. IVith trouble ; mo- 
 
 Icste ferre, to be vexed cU, an- 
 
 noyed at. 
 Moneo, ere, ui, Itum. To adoUe, 
 
 warn. 
 Mons, montis, in. Mountain, 
 
 Mount. 
 Morini, drum, m. pi. The Morinl, 
 
 a tribe of northern Gaul. 
 Moror, ari, atus sum. To tarry, 
 
 delay, wait. 
 Mors, mortis, /. Death. Mor- 
 tal. 
 Motus, us, »i. Movement, motion. 
 
 Motion. 
 Moved, ere, movT, motum. To 
 
 move, remove. Move. 
 Mulier, eris, /. Woman. 
 Multitudo, inis, /. Multitude; 
 
 the multitude, common people, 
 
 populace. Multitude. 
 Multo, adv. By much, by far. 
 Multum, adv., comp. plus, sup, 
 
 plurimum. Much. 
 Multus, a, um, comp. plus, n. (p/. 
 
 pi u res, pi lira), sup. phi rim us. 
 
 Much : many ; multd die, long 
 
 after day break. 
 Munio, ire. ivi or li, ilum. To for- 
 
 t[fy. Munition. 
 Muniti6, onis, /. Fortification ; 
 
 opus munitionls, /ort^cd work 
 
 Munition. 
 Murua, i, m. WaU, 
 
290 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 
 N. 
 
 Nacttu, a, nm. See %xanci9cor. 
 
 Nam, namque, conj. For ; for 
 indeed. 
 
 Nanciscor, i, nactus sum. Toyclt 
 obtain^ secure. 
 
 Narbo, onh, m. ^arbOf a town 
 in southern Gaul. 
 
 Nalid, onis,/. Sation, 
 
 Ntttura, ae,/. yalure, 
 
 Nauta, ae, m. Sailor, 
 
 Nttvulis, e. yaval. 
 
 Niiviglum, li, n. Tew^/, ffiip. 
 
 Navigo, are, avi, alum. To sail. 
 Navigate. 
 
 Navis, is, /. Ship, vessel ; navls 
 longa, ship of war ; navis onera- 
 ria, transport vessel, transporL 
 Navy. 
 
 -Ne, conj. Interrogative particle. 
 See 106. 351, 1 and 2. 
 
 Ne, adv. and conj. With the Im- 
 perative or the Subjunctive of 
 Desire, not ; with the Subjunc- 
 tive of Purpose, that not, lest ; 
 after words of fearing, lest, 
 that. 
 
 Necesse, 286. Necessnrjf. 
 
 Neglego, ere, lexi, lectum. To 
 neglect, disregard. 
 
 Nego, are, avi, atum. To deny, 
 refuse ; to say not. 
 
 Negotiura, ii, n. Buf<ines», occu- 
 pation ; neijotinm daro, to en- 
 trust a task or enterprise. 
 
 Nemo,' inis, m. and f. JVo one, 
 nobody. 
 
 Nepos, Otis, m. Grandson. 
 
 Nequaquara, ade. By no means 
 Neque, coi\). Neither, nor, am 
 
 not ; ncque . . . neque, nci 
 
 ther , . . nor. 
 Nervii, Orum, m. pi. The Nervii 
 
 a tribe of northern Gaul. 
 Neve, coT\f. Nor, and noL 
 Nex, necis, /. Death, putting U 
 
 death. 
 Nihil, indeclinable, nihilum, 1, n 
 
 Nothing. 
 Nisi, conj. Unless, 
 Nobilis, e. Noble, of high birth 
 
 Noble. 
 Nobilitas, atis, /. Nobility; th 
 
 nobility, nobles. Nobility. 
 Noclu, adv. By night. 
 Noctumus, a, um. Nocturnal, bi 
 
 night. Noctuknai.. 
 Nolo, nolle, nului, 273, 20:L T 
 
 be unwilling, not to be willing 
 
 not to wisti. 
 NOmen, inis, n. Name; b\\< 
 
 nomine, on his own accouni 
 
 NOMIXAI^ 
 
 Nomino, are, iivi, atum. T 
 
 name. Nominate. 
 Non, adv. Not. 
 Xondum, adv. Not yet. 
 Nonne, conj. Interrocrative pai 
 
 tide. Notf See 106, 351 
 
 note 2. 
 Nonnulli, ae, a. Some. 
 Nonnunquam, adc. Sometimei 
 Xonus, a, um. Ninth. 
 Nosco, ere, novT, notum. To h( 
 
 come acquainted icifh : novi 
 
 / hare become acquainted wit 
 
 = I knoio. 
 
 1 Xemii generally wants the Genitive and Ablative; they are sjpplie 
 by these cases of nQllus 
 
VOCABULARY, 
 
 291 
 
 Noster, tra, trum. 102, 185. Otir, 
 our», 
 
 Notus, a, um, part, and adj. 
 Knoicn. 
 
 Novein, indeclinable. Sine ; 
 decern novem, nineteen. 
 
 Noviodiinum, i, n. Noviodu- 
 numy a town of north weslera 
 Gaul. 
 
 Novus, a, um. Neio ; res novae, 
 change of affairs, revolution; 
 novissinium agmen, rear. 
 
 Nox, noctis, /. yiyht. 
 
 Niibes, is, /. Cloud. 
 
 Nubo, ere, nupsi, nuptum. To 
 veil one's self ; to assume the 
 bridal veil for = to marry. 
 Nuptial. (Followed by the 
 Dative.) 
 
 Nudo, arc, avi, atum. To bare, 
 expose, strip. 
 
 Kullus, a, um. 46, 151. Not 
 any, no, none. 
 
 Num, conj. Interrogative par- 
 ticle. For meaning in direct 
 questions, see 106, 3ol, 1, note 
 3; in indirect questions, wheth- 
 er. 
 
 Numa, ae, m. Numn, the sec- 
 ond of the legendary kings of 
 Rome. 
 
 Numerus, ?, m. Number. 
 
 Nunc, adv. Now, at this time, 
 
 Xunquara, adv. Never. 
 
 Nuntio, are, avi, atnm. To an- 
 nounce. 
 
 Nuntius, ii, m. Messenger ; tid- 
 ings. 
 
 Vuper, adv. Recently, of late, 
 
 Nutrix, ids,/. Nurse. 
 
 o. 
 
 Ob, prep. w. ace. On account 
 of, for, 
 
 Obicio,' ere, jeci, jcctura. To 
 throw against, throw up. Ob- 
 ject. 
 
 Ob8er>'6, aire, avi, atum. To ob- 
 serve, keep, comply with. Ob- 
 serve. 
 
 Obses, idis, m. andf. Hostage, 
 
 Obsideo, ere, sedi, sessum. To 
 besiege. 
 
 Obsidio, onis,/. Siege, blockade. 
 
 Obsignu, are, avi, atum. To seal, 
 sign and seal. 
 
 Obtiueo, ere, ui, tenlum. To ob- 
 tain, hold. Obtai.v. 
 
 Occasus, us, VI. letting ; soils 
 occasus, sun-set. 
 
 Occido, ere, i, sum. To kill, slay. 
 
 OccultO, are, avi, atum. To hide. 
 Occult. 
 
 Occupo, are, avi, atum. To occupy, 
 seize, take possession of; to 
 busy. Occupy. 
 
 Oceaniis, i, i/i. Ocean, the At- 
 lantic Ocean, 
 
 Octavus, a,um. Eighth. Octave. 
 
 Octo, indeclinable. Eight. 
 
 Octodecim, indeclinable. Eigh- 
 teen. 
 
 Octodums, i, m. Octodurun, a 
 town in Gaul, now Martigny. 
 
 Oculus, i, HI. The rye, sight. 
 
 6di, Isse. To hate, detest, 
 
 Offlclum, ii, n. Duly, allegiance. 
 Office. 
 
 Omnino, adv. In all, only, 
 
 Omnis, e. All. 
 
 Pronounced as if spelled objtcid. 
 
292 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Onerurius, a, uni. Pertaining to 
 
 burden8f carrying cargoes ; 
 
 oneraria navis, a transport 
 
 vessel, transport. 
 Opera, ae, /. Work; operam 
 
 dare, to take pains, endeacor. 
 Oporlet, ere, ult, impers. It be- 
 hooves^ is proper, is necessary, 
 
 is fitting ; one ought, 
 Oppidum, I, n. Town. 
 Opportunus, a, um. Opportune, 
 
 appropriate. Opportune. 
 Oppugndti5, onis, /. Assault, 
 
 attack. 
 Oppugno, are, &vi, atum. To 
 
 assault, attack, 
 Optimus, a, um. See bonus. 
 Opus, eris, n. Work, task ; art ; 
 
 operis munltiS, fortified work ; 
 
 magno opere, greatly. 
 Ora,ae,/. CoasL 
 Oratifi, dnis, /. Oration, speech. 
 
 Oration. 
 Orator, oris, m. Orator, 
 Orbis, is, m. Circle, circuit; 
 
 orbis terrae, orbis terrarum, the 
 
 world. Orb. 
 6rd5, inis, m. liank. Order. 
 Orgetorix, igis, m. Orgetorix, an 
 
 Ilelvetian chieftain. 
 Omamentum, i, n. Ornament, 
 
 honor. Ornament. 
 Oro, are, avi, atum. To ask, beg, 
 
 plead, 
 Ostendo, ere, i, tentum or tensum. 
 
 To show, explain, make known, 
 
 declare. 
 
 PabulatiS, onis,/. Foraging. 
 Pabulum, i, n. Fodder. 
 Paene, ado. Almost y nearly. 
 
 Paenitet, ere, nit, impers. I 
 
 causes regret; me paenitet, , 
 
 "epent, 
 Pagus, 1, m. Division, canton. 
 Pur, paris. Equal, a match for 
 Parutus, a, um, part, and adj 
 
 Prepared, ready. 
 Parco, ere, peperci, parsum. T 
 
 spare, (Followed by the Da 
 
 tive. ) 
 Pareo, ere, ui, ilum. To obey 
 
 (Followed by the Dative.) 
 Par6, are, avi, atum. To prepare 
 Pars, partis, /. Part, division 
 
 quarter, direction. Part. 
 Passus, us, m. Pace ; mille pas 
 
 BUS, a (Roman) mile ; duo mill; 
 
 passuum, two miles. 
 Pastor, oris, m. Shepherd. 
 Pater, tris, m. Father, Pateii 
 
 NAL. 
 
 Patienter, adv. Patiently. 
 Patior, 1, passus suiu. To suffei 
 
 permiL 
 Patria, ae, /. Native country 
 
 one's country, country, , 
 
 Pauci, ae, a. Few. 
 Paucitas, atis,/. Fewness, S7nal 
 
 number, 
 Paulatim, adv. Little by little 
 
 by degrees, gradually. 
 Paulo, adv, A little. 
 Paulum, adv. A little, somewhat 
 Pax, pacis, /. Peace, 
 Pedes, itis, m. Foot-soldier ; pL 
 
 foot-soldiers ; infantry. 
 Peditatus, us, m. Infantry. 
 Pedius, ii, m. Pedius, a lleuten 
 
 ant under Caesar. \ 
 
 Pellis, is,/. Skin. 
 Pello, ere, pepuli, pulsum. Ti 
 
 drive, rout. 
 
VOCABCLARV. 
 
 293 
 
 Pendo, ere, pependi, p^nsura. To 
 
 veigh ; to pay. 
 Per, prep. vo. ace. Through, by, 
 
 oter, by means of ; on account 
 
 Perduco, ere, dilxi, duclura. To 
 lead through, extend, con- 
 struct. 
 
 Perequito, are, avi, atuiu. To 
 ride through, ride. 
 
 Pei-facilis, e. Very easy. 
 
 Perfero, ferre, tuli, latum. To 
 endure. 
 
 Perficio, ere, feci, fectuni. To 
 accomplish. Perfect. 
 
 Perfringo, ere, fregi, fractum. To 
 break through. 
 
 Perfuga, ae, m. Deserter, fugU 
 tite. 
 
 Perfugio, ere, fugi. To fiee for 
 refuge, fiee, escape. 
 
 Periculosus, a, um. Perilous, 
 dangerous. Perilous. 
 
 Periculura, i, »i. Peril, danger. 
 Peril. 
 
 Peritus, a, lira. Skilful, skilled, 
 expert: with gen. skilled in. 
 
 Permaneo, ere, niansi, mansum. 
 To continue to remain, to re- 
 main. Permanent. 
 
 Permoveo, ere, niovi, motiim. To 
 move, induce, influence ; to dis- 
 turb, daunt, alarm. 
 
 Perpetuus, a, um. Perpetual, 
 endless, uninterrupted ; in per- 
 petuum, /or euer. Perpetuai- 
 
 Pemimpo, ere, rupi, niptum. To 
 break through, force a passage, 
 force one's way. 
 
 Persequor, i, secutus sum. To 
 follow up, pursue, persecute ; 
 to atenge. Persecute. 
 20 
 
 Perscvero, are, avi, atiim. To 
 persevere, persisL Pehse- 
 
 VERE. 
 
 Persolvo, ere, i, solutum. To pay. 
 
 Perspicio, ere, spexl, siiectum. 
 To examine, investigate, per- 
 ceive. Perspicuous. 
 
 PersuadeO, ere, si, sura« To per- 
 suade. 
 
 Perterreo, ere, ui, itum. To terrify 
 greatly, terrify, frighten. 
 
 Pertineo, ere, ui, tentum. Toper- 
 tain, tend; to extend, reach. 
 Pertain. 
 
 Perturbatid, onis,/. Disturbance, 
 agitation. Perturbation. 
 
 Perturbo, are, avi, atuiu. To dis- 
 turb, throw into confusion. 
 Perturb. 
 
 Pervenio, ire, veni, ventum. To 
 arrive, come, reach. 
 
 Pes, pedis, m. Foot ; pedibus, on 
 foot : pedem referrc, to retreaL 
 Pedal. 
 
 Peto, ere, ivi or ii, itum. To seek, 
 request, ask. 
 
 Phalanx, angis, /. Phalanx, line. 
 
 Pilum, i, n. Javelin, spear. 
 
 Pisistratus, i, m. Pisistratus^ 
 tyrant of Athens. 
 
 Pis5, onis, in, Piso, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 Plareo, ere, ui, Itum. To please. 
 (Followed by the Dative.) 
 
 Planities, ei,/. Plain. 
 
 Planus, a, uin. Flat, level. 
 Plane. 
 
 Plato, onis, m. Plato, a cele- 
 brated Greek philosopher. 
 
 Plebs, 6bi8, /. The common peo- 
 ple, populace. Plebeian. 
 
 Planus, a, um. Full 
 
204 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 
 Pleromque, adt. Aa a general 
 thing t generally. 
 
 Plerusque, nque, uraque. The 
 larger or greater part, the moat. 
 
 Plus, pluris, n., pi. plures, plura, 
 comp. of multus. More; set- 
 eral. Plural. 
 
 Plus, adp., comp. o/ multum, •i/p. 
 pliirimuni. More; plus posse, 
 to have greater power or in^ 
 fiuence; plurimiiro posse, to 
 hate tery great power or in/lu' 
 ence. 
 
 Po«na, te, /. Penalty, puniah- 
 mentj aati^actton. 
 
 Poeta, ae, m. Poet. [iae. 
 
 Polliceor, eri, itus sum. To prom' 
 
 Ponipeius, li, TO. Pompey, a cele- 
 brated general and statesman. 
 
 Pond, ere, posui, positmn. To 
 place; castra ponere, to ptYcA a 
 campf encamp. 
 
 Pons, pontis, m. Bridge. 
 
 PopulAtifi, onis,/. Bataging, de- 
 vaatatingf laying waate. 
 
 Populus, i, m. People, a people. 
 
 Porta, ae,/. Gate. Poktal. 
 
 Porto, are, avl, atum. To carry, 
 bring, take. 
 
 Portorium, ii, n. Tax, toll, duty 
 on imports or exports. 
 
 Portos, us, m. Port, harbor. 
 Port. 
 
 Posco, ere, poposci. To demand. 
 
 Possum, posse, potul. 269, 290. To 
 be able ; can ; multum posse, to 
 have great power or influence. 
 
 Post, adv. After, afterxcard. 
 
 Post, prep. w. ace. After, be- 
 hind. 
 
 Postea, adv. Afterward. 
 
 Posteaquam, coi\f. After. 
 
 Postents, a, um, comp. posterior 
 anp. postrerous and postumua 
 Subaequent, following, next 
 
 Postquam, coi\i. After. 
 
 Postrldie, adv. On the following 
 day. 
 
 Postulo, are, avi, atum. To d« 
 mand. ^ 
 
 Potens, entis. Powerful. Potent, 
 
 Potentatus, us, m. Power, domin- 
 ion, control. 
 
 Potentia, ae,/. Power, influence. 
 Potency. 
 
 Poteram. See poasunu 
 
 Potestas, atis,/. Power. j 
 
 Potior, in, itus sum. To gain — 
 take — obtain poaaeaaion of, tt 
 obtain. 
 
 Potul. See poaaum. ' 
 
 Praecedo, ere, cessl, cessum. Ti 
 aurpaaa. Precede. 
 
 Praeceps, Ipitis. Precipitate, 
 headlong. Precipitate. 
 
 Praecipio, ere, cepi, ceptum. Tc 
 enjoin upon, direcL Precept. 
 
 Praecipito, are, fivl, alum. Tc 
 precipitate, throw, hurl. Pre- 
 cipitate. 
 
 Praedico, are, ivi, atum. To a»- 
 aert, atate. Predicate. 
 
 Praeficio, ere, feci, fectum. To 
 place in command of, in charge 
 qf, over. (Followed by the 
 Dative. ) 
 
 Praemitto, ere, misi, missum. To 
 aend on — ahead —forward — 
 in advance. 
 
 Praemium, ii, n. Reicard. Pre- 
 »nuM. 
 
 Praepono, ere, posui, positum. To 
 place over or in command of., 
 (Followed by the Dative.) 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 295 
 
 Praesens, entls. Present. 
 
 Praesentia, ae, /. Presence ; in 
 praesentia, at present, for the 
 present. 
 
 Praesidiuin, ii, n. Garrison, de- 
 fence, guard, safeguard, pro- 
 tection. 
 
 Praesto, are, stiti, stitiim or sta- 
 tum. To stand b^ore, excel ; 
 to furnish, discharge, fulfil, 
 present, manifest, show, j>uf 
 forth. 
 
 Praesuin, esse, fiii. To be in 
 charge or command of, to super- 
 intend. (Followed by the Da- 
 tive. ) 
 
 Praeter, prep. to. ace. ExcepL 
 
 Pi-aeterquain, adt. Except. 
 
 Pi-actor, oris, m. Praetor, a Ro- 
 man inasistrate. 
 
 Preiiio, ere, pressi, pressum. To 
 press, press hard, disttress. 
 
 PltKSS. 
 
 Pretiosus, a, ura. Precious^ valu- 
 able. Pkecious. 
 Pretium, ii, n. Price. 
 I'rimo, ado. First, at first. 
 
 PltlME. 
 
 Priinum, sup. adc.,pos. wanting, 
 comp. prius. Firxt. Prime. 
 
 Primus, a, ura, sup., pos. wanting, 
 comp. prior. First ; the first 
 part of; primum agnien, the 
 ran; prima lux, daybreak. 
 
 PltlME. 
 
 Princeps, ipls. First; princcps, 
 ipis, m., leader, chief, chieftain. 
 
 PUINCIPAU 
 
 Princlpalus, us, m. Sovereignty, 
 dominion. 
 
 Prior, us, comp. adj., pos. want- 
 ing, sup. primus. Fortner. 
 
 Pristinus, a, um. Ancientf prU* 
 tine. Pkisti.nk. 
 
 Prius, comp. adv., pos. toantinj, 
 sup. prinmm. Before, sooner; 
 prius quam, sooner than, be- 
 fore. 
 
 Priusquam, conj. B^ore. 
 
 Prjvatim, adv. Privately, In a 
 private capacity. Pkivate. 
 
 Privatus, a, um, part and adj. 
 Private; privatus, i, m., pri- 
 vate citizen. Privatk. 
 
 Priv6, are, avi, atum. To deprive. 
 
 Pro, prep. w. abl. For ; in pro- 
 portion to, considering ; be- 
 fore. 
 
 Probo, are, avi, fitum. To prove ; 
 to approve. Probate. 
 
 Procedo, ere, cessi, cessum. To 
 proceed, advance. Proceed. 
 
 Procillus, i, m. Procillus, a prom- 
 inent Gaul. 
 
 Pr6diil6, onls,/. Treason. 
 
 Proditor, oris, m. Traitor. 
 
 Prodo, ere, didi, dituin. To be- 
 tray. 
 
 Protluco, ere, dfixi, ductum. To 
 lead forth, lead on ; to pro- 
 tract. Prodi'CE. 
 
 Proelior, ari, atus sum. To fight. 
 
 Proelium, Ii, n. Battle, engage- 
 ment. 
 
 Prefect io, on Is, /. Departure, 
 starting, setting out. 
 
 Proficld, ere, feci, fectum. To 
 accomplish, effect. 
 
 Proficiscor, i, profectus sum. To 
 start, set out, depart^ proceed. 
 
 Prof uglo, ere, f ugi. To flee away, 
 flee, escape. 
 
 Pr6j»redior, i, gressuH sum. To go 
 forward, advance. Proghess. 
 
296 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Proliibco, ere, ui, itura. To pro* 
 hibil, check f prevent^ keep. 
 
 PROUIUIT. 
 
 Proicio,* ere, jeci, jectum. To 
 cast forth, throw forward, 
 throw dowiu Project. 
 
 Pruiiiissus, a, um, part, and a((/. 
 Hanyiny down, long. 
 
 PrOuuutio, are, avi, alum. To 
 proclaim, state. Pbonounck. 
 
 Prope, ado., comp. propius, ««p. 
 proxime. JVear. 
 
 Prope, prep. w. ace. Near. 
 
 Prupellu, ere, uli, ulsum. To drioe 
 forward, repuUe, rouL Propel. 
 
 Proplor, us, comp. a<^/., pos. want- 
 ing, sup. proximus. Hearer. 
 
 Propono, ere, posui, post turn. To 
 set forth. Propose, 
 
 Propter, prep. w. ace. On account 
 
 Propterea, adc. For this reason ; 
 propterea quod, /or this reason, 
 that ; because. 
 
 Propulso, are, avi, atnm. To 
 repulse. 
 
 Prora, ae,/. Prow. 
 
 Prosequor, i, secutus sura. To fol- 
 low w/), pursue. Prosecute. 
 
 Prospicio, ere, spexi, spectum. 
 To look forward ; to look out 
 for. (Followed by the Dative.) 
 Prospect. 
 
 Provided, ere, vidi, visum. To 
 look out for J provide. (Fol- 
 lowed by the Dative.) Pro- 
 vide. 
 
 Provincia, ae,/. Province. 
 
 Proxime, sup. adc, pos. prope. 
 Most recently^ last. 
 
 Pr6xirous, a, um, sup. adj., po9^: 
 
 wanting, comp. propior. year*^: 
 
 est, next, at^jacent. 
 Publicus, a, um. Public. 
 Piiblius, n, m. Publius, a Ro*^ 
 
 mau name. ] 
 
 Pudor, oris, m. Shame, respecU^ 
 Puella, ae, /. Girl. ^ 
 
 Puer, cri, wi. Boy. Puerile. < 
 Pugna, ae, /. Fight, fighting,] 
 
 battle. I 
 
 Pugno, are, avi, atum. To flghLl 
 Pulcher, chra, cbrum. BcauttfuU 
 Pulsus, a, um. See pello. 
 Pulvis, eris, m. Dust. : 
 
 Puto, are, avi, atum. To thinkJ 
 
 Q. 
 
 Qimero, ere, sivi or sii, sitnm. T* 
 inquire, ask, seek. Quest. 1 
 
 Quam, ado. How; w. sup., a« 
 ... as possible ; quam prinuuu,< 
 as soon as possible. j 
 
 Quam, couj. Than. 
 
 Quantus, a, um. Uow great ; ad 
 great. 
 
 Quare, conj. Wlierefore, why. 
 
 Quartus, a, um. Fourth ; quaivj 
 tus decimus, fourteenth. ' 
 
 Quattuor, indeclinable. Four, j 
 
 -Qjie, conj. enclitic. 103. And.< 
 
 Queror, i, questus sum. To co»i-i 
 plain. 
 
 Qui, quae, quod. 106, 187. Who, 
 that, which. '\ 
 
 Quldam, quaedam, quiddam or' 
 quoddam. 106, 190. A certain^ 
 a certain one, some. i 
 
 Quin, covj. That not, but, that, ] 
 
 * Pronounced as if spelled projicio. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 297 
 
 Quindecitu, indeclinable. Fif- 
 teen. 
 Qulngcnti, ae, a. Five humlred. 
 Qiiiiil, ae, a. 97. 172, 3. Fice by 
 
 five^five eachyfite. 
 Qiiinque, indeclinable. Fice. 
 Quintus, a, um. Fifth ; ante diem 
 
 quintum Kalendas Apriles, Ute 
 
 esth day of March. 
 Quintus, i, m. iiuintus, a Roman 
 
 name. 
 Quis, quae, quid, interrog. pron. 
 
 106. 188. Who, lohaty which f 
 Quis, quae, quid, ind^f. pron. 106, 
 
 190. One, any one, amjthing. 
 Quisquam, quaequam, quicquam, 
 
 indef. pron. Any, anyone. 
 Quisque, quaeque, quodque and 
 
 quidque, indef. pron. Each, 
 
 every, each one, every one. 
 Quo, adv. Whither, to which 
 
 place, to what place. 
 Quo, coi\}. That ; quo minus, 
 
 that not, 80 that not. 
 Quoad, conj. Until. 
 Quod, coi{j. That ; because. 
 Quoque, adv. Also. 
 Quot, indeclinable. How many. 
 
 R. 
 
 Rapina, ae, /. Robbery, pillag- 
 ing. Rapink. f 
 
 Rati6,6nis,/. Reckoning, reason ; 
 account, reckoning; method, 
 way. 
 
 Rebellio, onis, /. Rebellion. 
 
 Receptus, us, »». Retreat. 
 
 Recipio, ere, cOpi, coptum. To 
 recover, retake, betake ; to re- 
 
 ceive ; se recipere, to retire, 
 
 return, betake one's self. 
 Reciiso, are, avi, utum. To reject. 
 Reddo, ere, didi, ditum. To give 
 
 back, restore, return. 
 RedeO, ire, ii, itum. To go back, 
 
 return. 
 Redimo, ere, emi, emptum. To 
 
 buy up, buy, purchase. Re- 
 deem. 
 Rcditid, dnis, /. Going back, re- 
 turn. 
 Rcditus, us, m. Return. 
 Redueo, ere, duxi, duclum. To 
 
 lead back. 
 Refero, ferre, rettuli, relutum. 
 
 To draw back, bring back ; 
 
 pcdem referre, to retreat. 
 RefieiO, ere, feci, fectum. To 
 
 repair. 
 Refugio, ere, fiigi. To flee back, 
 
 flee. Refuge. 
 Regina, ae, /. i^ueen. 
 Regi6, onis,/. Direction ; region. 
 
 Region. 
 Regno, are, avi, alum. To reigUf 
 
 rule. Reion. 
 Regnum, i, n. Kingdom, regal 
 
 power. Reign. 
 Rego, ere, rcxi, K*clum. To rule. 
 Reicio,* ere, jeci, jeclum. To 
 
 drive back, repulse. Reject. 
 Relinquo, ere, liqui, llctum. To 
 
 leave. Relinquish. 
 Reliquus. a, um. Remaining, the 
 
 rest of, the other, l^t. 
 Remaneo, ere, munsi, mansuro. 
 
 To remain. 
 Remi, ortmi, m. pi. The Remi, a 
 
 tribe of northern Gaul. 
 
 Pronounced as If spelled rejtcio. 
 
298 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Remlnlscor, i. To remember. Re- 
 
 MIMSCKNCK. 
 
 llcmoveo, ere, luOvi, uiOluin. To 
 remote, 
 
 Remus, i, in. Oar, 
 
 Uenovo, are, uvi, utum. To renew. 
 Kknovatk. 
 
 ReDuntiO, are, avi, utuiu. To re- 
 port. Kknounce. 
 
 Repellu, ere, reppttli, repuUum. 
 To drice back^ rtpelt repuUe. 
 Repel. 
 
 Reperiu, ire, repperi, rci>ortum. 
 To Jlndt dincooer. 
 
 Repeto, ere, ivi, or ii, iuua. To 
 seek^ exact. Repeat. 
 
 Reporto, arc, avl, atutu. To carry 
 hack. REPuur. 
 
 Res, rfii, /. Thin'j, affair ; rea- 
 son ; res mililaris, military 
 affairs. 
 
 Resc'isco, ere, scivi or scii, scitum. 
 To learn^ aacertaliu 
 
 RespiciO, ere, spexi, spcctuin. 
 To reyard, look upon. Re- 
 spect. 
 
 RciponUco, ere, i. sponsuin. To 
 antticer. Respond. 
 
 Restituo, ere, ui, utum. To re- 
 store. Restitution. 
 
 Reiineo, ere, ui, tentum. To re- 
 tain, keep. Retain. 
 
 Rettuli. See r^ero. 
 
 Reverter, i, reverti, reversum.^ 
 To return, Revekt. 
 
 Rex, r§gis, wu King. Regal. 
 
 Rhenus, i, m. The Rhine. 
 
 Riioilanus, i, m. The Rhone. 
 
 Ripa, ae, /. Bank. Riparian. 
 
 Robur, oris, n. Oak. «1 
 
 Kogu, are, avi, alum. To ask, 
 R(>ma, ae, /. Home, 
 Ruiui'inus, a, um. Roman; R6« 
 
 manus, i, m., a Roman. 
 Romulus, i, m. Romulus^ tlit 
 
 legendary foiuider of Rome. 
 Rota, ae, /. Wheel. Rotate. \ 
 Humor, orb, m. Rumor, reporU.\ 
 Rursus, ado, Ayain, 
 
 s. ^ 
 
 Sabiuus, I, m. Sabinus, a Hea* 
 
 tenant under Caesar. 
 Sacritlcium, ii, n. iiacr{fice. I 
 8aei>e, ado. Often, ' 
 
 Sagitla, ae, /. Arrow. \ 
 
 Saltis, utiS| /. iii{fety, saloatiofip 
 
 escape, \ 
 
 Sautoues, um, m. pi. The San^ 
 
 tones or Santoni, a tribe of 
 
 central Gaul. i 
 
 Sanus, a, um. Soii/it/, sanej^ 
 
 Sane. 
 Sapiens, entis. H'(«e. j 
 
 Sapienter, adc. Wisely. i 
 
 Sapientia, ae, /. Wisdom. ^ 
 
 Satis, ado. Enough ; satis bar 
 
 be re or ducere, to regard it aa 
 
 sufficient. 
 Scapha, ae, /. Skiff, boat. 
 Schola, ae, /. School. j 
 
 Scientia, ae, /. Knowledge, skllL] 
 
 Science. 
 Sci5, ire, ivi or ii, itura. To 
 
 know. 
 Scribo, ere, scripsi, scriptum. To 
 
 write. Sckibe. 
 
 » Rpi^ertor is deponent in the present system, 
 the active voice. 
 
 The other forms are io 
 
VOCABULARY, 
 
 209 
 
 SecunJus, a, um. Second. 
 
 Sctl, cot{). liul. 
 
 SC'dcs, is, /. iSeatf aljode ; locus 
 
 viC scd^St place qf abode. Seat. 
 Seditiosus, a, uui. Heditioua. 
 JSogusiiini, oriim, m. pi. The Se- 
 
 yusianif a tribe of soutbeastem 
 
 Gaul. 
 SOnientis, Is, /. Sowinf/t planting, 
 JSeiuper, adc. AUcays, ecer, 
 SSenutus, us, m. Senate. 
 Senl, ae, a. 97, 172, 3. Six by slXj 
 
 8ix each, six, 
 Senones, uiu, m. pi. The Senoneaf 
 
 a iribe of ceuli-al Gaul. 
 Senteulia, ae,/. ThoHyht, opinion^ 
 
 plan. tJENTKNCE. 
 
 Seutiu, ire, seusi, sensuni. To 
 
 think. Sense. 
 Septeni, indeclinable. Srten, 
 Seplinius, a, uin. Secenth, 
 Sepultura, ae,/. liurUiL Sepul- 
 
 TUKE. 
 
 Sequani, onim, m. pi. The Se- 
 qitani or Seqnanians, a tribe of 
 eastern Gaul. 
 
 SOquanus, a, um. Seqnanlan ; 
 Sequanus, i, m., a Sequaniaut 
 one of the Sequani. 
 
 Sequor, i, secfitus sum. To fol- 
 low. SEt^UENCE. 
 
 Senin% ouls, m. D/sfOi/rse, con- 
 versation. Sermon. 
 
 Servio, ire, Ivi or li, itum. To 
 serve, subseree, be denoted to. 
 Serve. 
 
 Servllus, utis,/. Sertltude, slav- 
 ery. Servitude. 
 
 Servo, are, uvi, utum. To keep, 
 preserve. 
 
 Servus. i, m. Slave. Serve. 
 
 Sese. Sec 102. 134, 4. 
 
 Seu, coi^J, Or [f; sea . . . live, 
 either , , , or. 
 
 Severus, a, um. Severe, 
 
 Sex, indeclinable. Six, 
 
 Sexugiutu, indeclinable. Sixty, 
 
 Sextus, a, um. Sixth, 
 
 Si, cot\). If, 
 
 SIcilia, ae, /. Sicily, 
 
 Sigiiifico, are, uvi, atum. To 
 Biunify, indicate. Signify. 
 
 Signum, i, n. Standard ; signa 
 ferre, to carry the standards » 
 to advance. Sign. 
 
 Sllva, ae, /. IVoud, forest. Syl- 
 van. 
 
 Similis, e. Like. Similar. 
 
 Simpliciter, adv. Sitnply. 
 
 Simul, simul atque, cot\}, A» 
 soon as. 
 
 Sin, conj. lint if. 
 
 Sincere, adv. Truthfully. Sin- 
 cere. 
 
 Sine, prep. ir. abl. WithouL 
 
 Singularls, c. Siuyle, singly, in" 
 dividual, separate ; singular, 
 remarkable. Singular. 
 
 Sive, conj. Or if; sive . . . 
 filve, either , , , or, 
 
 Socer, eri, uu Father-in-law, 
 
 Socrates, is, m. Socrates, a cele^ 
 bratetl Greek philosopher. 
 
 Sol, soils, VI, Sun. 
 
 Solum, adv. Only, alone, 
 
 Solvo, ere, i, sol utum. To loose ; 
 with naves expressed or under- 
 stood, to set saiL Solve. 
 
 Spatlum, ii, n. Space, interval, 
 distance; time. Space. 
 
 Species, ei,/. Look, appearance, 
 
 Spes, spfii,/. Hope. 
 
 Spiritus, ui, in. Breath ; pi, airs, 
 haughtiness. SiMRIT. 
 
300 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Spolio, ire, &vi, atum. To de- 
 spoilf rob, deprive. Spoil. 
 
 Spons, spontis, /. Used in gen. 
 and all. ainy. only. Sponte, sua 
 sponte, by one's own agency t ^ 
 one* 8 self, unawisted. 
 
 suibilitas, atis,/. Stability, firm- 
 nexs. Stability. 
 
 sutiui, ado. Immediately. 
 
 SUtid, onis, /. Station, post, 
 guard. Statiox. 
 
 Statuo, ere, xu, utum. To deter- 
 mine, decide, 
 
 Siipendium, ii, m. Tax, tribute. 
 Stipend. 
 
 Sto, are, stetl, stAtum. To stand, 
 
 Strepitus, us, m. Din, noise. 
 
 Studeo, 6re, ui. To desire. Study. 
 (Followed by the Dative.) 
 
 Studium. il, n. Desire, zeal. 
 Studv. 
 
 Sub, prep. w. aec. and abl. Un- 
 der, up to, towards. 
 
 Subdued, ere, duxi, ductum. To 
 draw up; to toithdraw, lead 
 off. 
 
 Subeo, ire, il, Itum. To undergo. 
 
 Subldo,* ere, jeci, jectum. To 
 throw under, cast under, throw, 
 thrust ; to subject. Subject. 
 
 Subito, adv. Suddenly. 
 
 Subliitus, a, um. See toll 6. 
 
 SubleVo, are, avi, atura. To assist, 
 support. 
 
 Subministro, are, avi, atum. To 
 furnish, supply. 
 
 Submitto, ere, misi, missum. To 
 send up to, send. Submit. 
 
 Submoveo, ere, movi, motum. To 
 remove, dislodge. 
 
 Subsequor, i, secutus sum. To\ 
 follow close upon, follow. Sui*-^ 
 
 8E<iUENT. 
 
 Subsidiuni, ii, 91. Support, re'en* 
 
 forcement, aid. Subsidiauy. \ 
 Subsisto, ere, stiti. To make a\ 
 
 stand; audacius subsistere, to, 
 
 make a bolder stand. Subsist. 4 
 SubveniO, ire, veni, veutum. To\ 
 
 come to the help of, succor, aid, \ 
 Succedo, ere, cessi, cessuin. To\ 
 
 go up, come up, approach, sue* I 
 
 ceed. Succeed. 
 Sudes, is, /. Stake. 
 Suebi, Orum, m. pi. Tfie Suebi,! 
 
 Suevi or Suabians, a powerful | 
 
 German tribe. ' 
 
 Suessiones, um, m. pi. TJie Sues* i 
 
 siones, a tribe of nortliern Gaul. \ 
 Sui. 102, 184. Of hiuiscy, of^ 
 
 herself, of itself, of themselves, { 
 
 qf him, of her, of it, of them. 
 Sulla, ae, m. Sulla, a celebrated j 
 
 Roman general and statesman. ] 
 Sulpicius, ii, m. Sulpicius, aj 
 
 lieutenant under Caesar. 
 Sum, esse, fui. 140. 204. To be. I 
 Summa, ae, f. Sum, sum total, ■, 
 
 total. Sum. ] 
 
 Summus, a, urn, sup. of superus. ] 
 
 nighest, greatest ; the summit \ 
 
 of, top of. ] 
 
 Sumo, ere, sumi)si, sumptum. To * 
 
 take. I 
 
 Sumptus, us, m. Expense. ^ 
 
 Superbus, a, um. Proud. Su-- 
 
 PERB. 
 
 Superior, us, comp. of superus. ^ 
 Upper, higher ; superior ; pre- \ 
 vious. 
 
 1 Pronounced as if spelled stibjicio. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 801 
 
 Supero, are, avi, atum. To sur- 
 pass ; to conquer. 
 
 Supersum, esse, fui. To sur- 
 vite. 
 
 Supenis, a, uin, comp. superior, 
 sup. suprunms and sumnius. 
 Upper. See superior and sum- 
 mus. 
 
 SupplicatiS, on is, /. Thanksgiv- 
 ing. 
 
 Suppllcium, il, n. Punishment. 
 
 8upra, adv. Above. 
 
 Suscipio, ere, cepi, ceptuin. To 
 take up, undertake. 
 
 Suspicid, 5nis,/. Suspicion. 
 
 Suspicor, ari, atus sum. To sus- 
 pect. 
 
 Sustineo, ere, ui, tentum. To s^is- 
 tain, resistf withstand. Sus- 
 tain. 
 
 Suus, a, um. His, her, hers, its, 
 their. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tabula, oe,/. Table, tablt, rec- 
 ord, document. Tablk. 
 
 Taceo, ere, m, itum. To be silent, 
 to keep silent. Tacit. 
 
 Tain, adv. So, to such an ex- 
 tent 
 
 Tamen, adv. Yet, still, neverthe- 
 less. 
 
 Tamesis. is, m. TJiames, 
 
 Tametsi, co)\j. Although. 
 
 Tantus, a, uni. So great; as 
 great. 
 
 TardO, are, avi, atum. To retard, 
 check, hinder, impede. Tardy. 
 
 TC'luin, T, n. Dart, iceapon. 
 
 Temcrarlus, a, nin. Rash. 
 
 Temere, adv. Rasfily, unneeeB- 
 sirily. 
 
 Temperantia, ae,/. Temperance, 
 self-control. Temi»eranck. 
 
 Tempestas, atis, /. Weather; 
 tempest, storm. Tempest. 
 
 Templum, 1, n. Temple. 
 
 Tenipus, oris, n. Tiute. [restrain. 
 
 Teneo, ere, ui, tentum. To hold, 
 
 Tento, are, avi, atum. To try. 
 
 Tenuis, e. Thin ; feeble. 
 
 Tergum, i, n. Back ; terga ver- 
 tere, to turn the back = to re- 
 treat, flee. 
 
 Terra, ae,/. Earth; land. 
 
 Terree, ere, ui, itum. To terrify ^ 
 frighten. Terror. 
 
 Terror, oris, m. Terror, dread. 
 
 Tertlus, a, um. Third. 
 
 Testamentum, i, n. Will. Tes- 
 tament. 
 
 Testis, is, in. andf. Witness. 
 
 Tigurinus, i, m. Tigurinus, one 
 of the four cantons of the Uel- 
 vetii. 
 
 Timed, ere, ui. To fear. TrMiD. 
 
 Timor, oris, in. Fear. TiMin. 
 
 Titarius, ii, m. Titurius, a lieu- 
 tenant under Caesar. 
 
 Titus, i, m. Titus, a Roman 
 name. 
 
 ToUo, ere, sustulT, sublatum. To 
 lift up ; to remove, take away ; 
 to exalt, encourage. • 
 
 Tolosa, ae, /. Tolosa, a town in 
 southern Gaul. 
 
 Tormentum, i, n. A militnry 
 engine for throwing heavy mis- 
 siles. 
 
 Totus, a, mn. 45, 151. AH, the 
 whole of. Tot A I.. 
 
 Trado, ere, didi, dituro. To give 
 up, surrender. Traoitiok. 
 
 Tragula, ae,/. Javelin, darL 
 
302 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Triijectus, us, m. PasHige, croft- 
 ing, 
 
 Tr&n6, ire, avi, atum. To twim 
 across. 
 
 Trans, prep. w. ace. Across^ over, 
 beyond. 
 
 Transduce, ere, dQxi, ductum. To 
 lead across, lead, conduct. 
 
 Transeo, ire, H, itum. To go oter, 
 
 cross. TUAN81T. 
 
 Tninslcio,* ere, jeci, jectum. To 
 
 pierce^ traiujix. 
 Ininspoito, are, ivi, atum. To 
 
 carry ozer, take over, bring 
 
 orer, transporL Transpokt. 
 Tres, tria. 97, 175. TUree. 
 Treveri, urum, m. pL The Treteri, 
 
 a tribe of northeastern Gaul. 
 Tribunns, i, iii. Tribune, one of 
 
 the six principal officers of the 
 
 legion. 
 Triduuni, i, n. Three days, space 
 
 of three days. 
 Triglnta, indeclhwftle. TJiirty. 
 Trini, ae, a. 97, 172, 3. Three 
 
 by three, three each, Uirei^old, 
 
 triple, three. 
 Triplex, icis. TItreefold, triple. 
 
 Thiple. 
 Tfi, tui. 102, 1S4. TJiov. you, 
 Tullia, ae, /. TuUia, a Roman 
 
 name. 
 Turn, adv. Then. 
 Turma, ae, /. Troop, 
 Turris, is, /. Tower, 
 Tuto, adv. Safely. 
 Tutus, a, urn. Safe. 
 Tniis, a, nra. 102, 185. Thy, 
 
 thine, your, your.n. 
 T3rrannus, i, «i. TV^aii^. 
 
 u. 
 
 Ubf, culv. and coi\}. Where; 
 when. 
 
 Ubii, orum, m. pi. The Ubii, a 
 tribe of western Germany. 
 
 Ulclscor,i,uItussum. To take ven- 
 geance on, punish ; to avenge. 
 
 Ullus, a, um. €5, 151. Any, any 
 one. 
 
 Ulterior, us, comp. adj. 86, 166. 
 Farther ; Gallia Ulterior, Far- 
 liter Gaul, Transalpine GauL 
 
 Una, adv. Together, 
 
 I'nde, adv. Whence, from which 
 place, from which. 
 
 Undecinius, a, um. Eleventh, 
 
 Undique, adv. On every side, 
 on all sides ; from every side, 
 from all sides, 
 
 Universus, a, um. All, all to- 
 gether, U.NIVEKSK. 
 
 Unquam, adv. Eter^ at any time, 
 
 Unus, a, um. 97, 175. One, 
 single. U.mt. 
 
 Urbs, urbis, /. City, Urbane. 
 
 Usipetes, um. m. pi. The Usipe- 
 tes, a tribe of northwestern 
 Germany. 
 
 Usque, adv. Even, 
 
 Usus, us, in. Use, usage, experi- 
 ence ; advantage. Use. 
 
 Ut, uti, coi\). That, in order 
 that. 
 
 Ut, adv. An. 
 
 Uter, tra, tnira. 45, 151. Which 
 (of two). 
 
 Uterque, utraque, utrumque, in- 
 flected like uter. Each ; both. 
 
 Utilis, e. Useful. Utility. 
 
 I Pronounced as if spelled tran^icio. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 803 
 
 UliliUis, atis, /. Un^ulneM ; in- 
 teresty cxpedienci/. Utility, 
 
 Utinaiu, iuu*rj. O that! would 
 that ! 
 
 Utor, i, USU3 sum. To use. 
 
 Utruiu, coiij. Whether ; utrum 
 . . . an, whether . . . or. 
 
 Uxor, oris, /. W{fe. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vaco, are, iivi, atuin. To Ite with- 
 out, be free f^om ; to he vacant^ 
 empty, unoccupied. Vacatk. 
 
 Vacuus, a, uni. Vacant^ einptijy 
 deserted, abandoned. 
 
 Valium, i, n. Ford ; shoal. 
 
 Valeo, ere, ui, itum. To avail, 
 prevail, have force or ii\flucnce. 
 
 Vallum, i, n. Hampart. 
 
 Vasto, are, avi, atum. To lay 
 waste. 
 
 -Ve, coi\J. enclitic.^ Or. 
 
 Vectigal, alls, n. Tax ; revenue. 
 
 Vel, conj. Either ; or ; vel . . . 
 vel, either . . . or. 
 
 Vellem. See tolH. 
 
 Veneti, oriun, m. pi. The Venett, 
 a tribe of weslerii Gaul. 
 
 Venetia, ae, /. Venetia, the 
 country of the Veneti. 
 
 Venio, ire, veni, ventum. To coiMf 
 arrive. 
 
 Ventus, i, m. Wind. 
 
 Ver, veris, »i. Spring. Vkr- 
 
 NAI- 
 
 Veracjri, orura, m. pi. The Ver- 
 o'/ri, a tribe of southeastern 
 Gaul. 
 
 Verblgenus, i, m. VerbiyenuSf 
 
 one of the four cantons of the 
 
 llelvetil. 
 Verbum, i, n. Word. Vkub. 
 Verciugelorix, igis, m. Vercinf 
 
 getorix, a Gallic chieflaliu 
 Vergobretus, i, »/i. Vergobretus^ 
 
 the title of the chief magislrale 
 
 of the Aedui. 
 Vcro, adv. and cottj. In truths 
 
 indeed ; but. 
 Versor, uri, utus sum. To be 
 
 busied f occupied f engciged, 
 
 Veksei). 
 Verto, ere, i, sum. To turn ; 
 
 terga vertere, to turn the back 
 
 = to retreat, Jlee. 
 Verum, i, n. Truth. 
 Verus, a, urn. True. 
 Vesontid, onis, m. Vesontio, a 
 
 town in eastern Gaul, now Be- 
 
 sani;on. 
 Vesper, eri, m. Erminrj. 
 Veater, tra, triun. 102, IS5. Your, 
 
 yours. 
 Vestio, ire, ivi or ii, itum. To 
 
 clothe. 
 Vetemnus, a. um. Veteran. 
 Vetus, erls. Old, ancient; former. 
 Via, ae, /. Way. 
 Viator, oris, m. Traveller. 
 Vicis, gen., noni. wanting, f. 
 
 Turn ; In viccni, in turn, 
 Victor, oris, m. Conqueror. 
 Victoria, ae,/. Virtory. 
 Victoria, ae,/. Victoria. 
 Vicus, I, in. Village. 
 VUleo, ere, vldi, visum. To see. 
 Vidoor, eri, visus sum.* To seem. 
 Viffllla, ae./. Watch.* Yum.. 
 Viglnti, Indeclinable. Twenty. 
 
 ^ See 103, foot-note 2. 
 
 « See 274. 
 
 • See 276- 
 
304 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Vinclo, ire, vinxi, vinotuiu. To 
 
 bind, confine, 
 Viuco, ere, vicl, victuin. To con- 
 quer. 
 Vinculum, i, n. Feller, bond, 
 
 chain, 
 VinUex, icis, in. and/. Dtfender, 
 Vlr, viri, Mu Man. 
 Vlrgd, liiis,/. Maiden, Virgin. 
 Virtus, utis, /. Virlue, valor, 
 
 courage, bravery, Virtuk. 
 Vis, vis,/. Force, violence ; vim 
 
 facere, lo use violence; vires, 
 
 ium, i>/., »lrength. 
 Visas, a, urn. See video. 
 Vita, ae,/. Life, Vital. 
 Vito, are, ivi, alum. To avoid, 
 
 shun. 
 Vitrum. i, n. Wood, a plant used 
 
 for dyeing blue. 
 
 Vivo, ere, vizi, victum. To live, 
 VocO, are, avi, atum. To call, 
 
 summon, 
 Volo, velle, volui. 273, 293. To 
 
 wish, to be wiUing. 
 Voluutiis, atis, /. Wish, good- 
 
 icill, consenL Vollntauy. 
 Volusenus, i, m. Volusenus, an 
 
 officer In Caesar*s army. 
 Vox, vocis, /. Voice, utterance. 
 
 Voice. 
 Vulgu, adv. Commonly, as a 
 
 general Uiing, unitersully, 
 Vulnero, are, avi, atum. To 
 
 wound, 
 Vulnus, eris, n. Wound. 
 Vultls. See told. 
 Vultus, us, m. Countenance, 
 
 face ; vultum fingere, (o con^ 
 
 trol the countenance. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABTJLAllY. 
 
 A. 
 
 A. See page 18, foot-note 4- 
 Able, to be able. Po««u»i, poMC, 
 
 polui. 269, 290. 
 About, concerning. De, prep. w. 
 
 abl. About, around, drcunit 
 
 prep. w. ace. 
 Above. Supra, adv. 
 Acceptable. GratuSy a, urn ; ac- 
 
 ceptus, a, tun. 
 Accomplish. Perficio, ere, feclf 
 
 fectum ; cotijlciuf erCy /ecij fee- 
 
 turn. 
 Accordance, in accordance with. 
 
 Often expressed by the Abla- 
 tive. 158, 413. 
 Accuse. Accuso, arey acZ, alum ; 
 
 hisiinuloy arCy uct, atum. 285. 
 Across, over. Jn,w. abl. To lead 
 
 across, transdvcoy et-c, Cuxiy 
 
 ductum. See 275, 19. 
 Adopt. Capioy ere, ceply captvm ; 
 
 inedy tre, it. Hum. 
 Advance, to advance. SignaferOy 
 
 ferre, tuliy latum ; proyrtdiorf 
 
 *t progressua suni. 
 Ailvise. Monedy ere, «e, ituitu 
 Aedui. Aeduly onim, m. pi. 
 Affair. i?e», r?i, f.; mlllUry af- 
 fairs, ret milituriM, 
 
 After. Posty adv.; posteaquamf 
 
 postquairiy conj. 
 Against. Contrdy prep. w. ace.; 
 
 iriy prep. w. ace; to wage 
 
 against, h\feruy ferrCy iniuliy 
 
 illatum. 
 Ahead, to send ahead. Prae- 
 
 mittOy ere, misi, misaum. 
 Aid. Auxiliuniy fi, n. To ail, 
 
 juvoy arCy Juvly Jutum. 
 All. OmniBy e; totusy a, um, 
 
 45, 151; unicerBuSy a, urn; on 
 
 all sides, undtque. 
 Alone. Soluniy adv. 
 Already. Jam, adv. 
 Also. Etiamy adv. and conj.; 
 
 qitoqucy adv. 
 Although. Etsiy tametsly conj. 
 
 254. 515. 
 Always. Sempery adv. 
 Ambassador. LegutuSy t, ni. 
 Among. Apudy prep. w. ace. ; fit, 
 
 prep. w. ace. and abl. 
 An. See page f5, foot-not^ I. 
 Ancient. PrUtinu8y a, un»; an- 
 
 tiqu^^y a, uiru 
 And. Et ; quey 103; atque, de ; 
 
 conj. 
 Animal, .^nfmaf, alU, n. 
 Announce, yuntloy are, Avi, 
 
 atiifit. 
 
305 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Answer. Respondedf trei t, spdn- 
 
 sum. 
 Any. UUuSj a, wm, 46, 151 ; any- 
 
 tliing, n. of quis or aliquis^ 
 
 106,100. 
 Appoint. Indlcoj ere, dlxlf dic- 
 tum. 
 Approach. AdvcntuSj t(«, m. To 
 
 approach, auecidof ere, cesal, 
 
 ceaaum. 
 Approve. Probo, t'tre^ «cZ, ntum. 
 Aquitani. Aquitanly Ornmj id. 
 
 pi. 
 Arar. Arar^ arls^ m. 12& 
 Ariovistus. AriovUtua^ I, m. 
 Amis. Arma^ brum, n. pi. 
 Amiy. Kxerciiuay tia, m. 
 Arouse. Excitd^ dre^ (itlj utum. 
 Arrival. Adventuat ua, m. 
 Arrogance. Arrogantia, ae, f. 
 Art, work. Op imi, eri«, n. 
 Artemisia. Arteiniaia^ ae, f. 
 As. Ut ; as not to, u( non, 123, 
 
 500; as soon as, aUnul, almul 
 
 a/guf, conj. 
 Ascend. AacendOf ere, i, «cen- 
 
 awn. 
 Ascertain. COgnoaco, ere, noct, 
 
 nitum. 
 Ask. Bogo, are, avl, atum; to 
 
 ask for, ro^o. 
 Assail. AggredioTj f , greaaus aum. 
 Assault. Oppugnoy dre^ Civi, atum. 
 Assemble, come together. Con- 
 
 renk>, ire, rent, ventutn. 
 Assist. JuvOf arejjuvtyjutum. 
 Assure. Cbnfirmby are, «c<, atum. 
 At. Ady prep. w. ace; tn, prep. 
 
 w. abl. ; often expressed by the 
 
 Locative or by the Locative 
 
 Ablative, 185, 425; at length, 
 
 dtmum, adv. 
 
 Attack. Impetus, us, m. To at- 
 tack, oppugnO, are, aci, utum ; 
 aggredior, i, grtaaua aum. 
 
 Attempt. Conatua, ua, m. To 
 attempt, conor, art, atua auiru 
 
 Audacity. Audacia, ae, f. 
 
 Authority. AuctOritda, atla, f. 
 
 Avail. Valeo, ere, ul. Hum. 
 
 Avoid. VitO, are, act, atum. 
 
 Avenge. Peraequor, i, aecutua 
 aum. 
 
 A waiu Ex*pecto, are, act, utum. 
 
 B. 
 
 Back, to lead back. Reduco, ere, 
 dttxl, ductum; to drive back, 
 repellb, ere, reppuli, repulaum ; 
 repulaO, are, dci, atum. 
 
 Band. Manus, ua, f. 
 
 Bank. It'tpa^ ae, f. 
 
 Barbarian. Jiarbarua, I, m. 
 
 Barbarous. Barbarua, a, um. 
 
 Battle. Proelium, it, n. ; pugna, 
 ae, f. ; line of battle, adea, ei, f . ; 
 a battle takes place, pugndtur. 
 
 Be. Sum, eaae, fvi, 140, 204; to 
 be able, possum, posse, potui, 
 269, 290; to be eager, drdeo, 
 ere, arsl, arsum; to be free 
 from, raco, are, avl, otum ; to 
 be from, to be distant from, 
 abstim, abesse, afm ; to be 
 greatly pleased with, adnmo, 
 are, dti, atum ; to be in com- 
 mand of, praesum, esse,fui ; to 
 be silent, taceo, ere, ui, itum ; 
 to be unwilling, nolo, nolle, 
 nolui, 273, 293; to be well sup- 
 plied, abundo, are, dvt, atum ; 
 to be willing, volo, velle, volul, 
 273,293. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 807 
 
 Bear. Fero^ ferre, tuViy l&tum. 
 
 269. 2t>2. 
 Hoautiful. Pulcher, chra^ chrum. 
 Hecause. (^itod, conj. 
 Before. Ante, adv., and prep. 
 
 w. ace; pro, prep. w. abl. ; 
 
 antequam, priusquam, con- 
 junction. 
 Beg. Oro, 6re, avi, atuin; royoy 
 
 are, ucl, atum. 
 Beginning. Initium, ii, n. 
 Beliind. Post, prep. w. ace. 
 Belgae, Belgians, lielyae, druw, 
 
 m. pi. 
 Believe, Credo, ere, didl, ditum. 
 
 (Followed by the Dative of the 
 
 person. ) 
 Besiege. ObaldeOf ere, sedl, «f«- 
 
 sum. 
 Betake one's self. 8e mando, 
 
 are, avi, dtum ; se recipiu, ere, 
 
 cepl, ceptttm. 
 B«*yond, across. Trans, prep. w. 
 
 ace. 
 Bid. Liceor, er\, itus sum. 
 Bird. Avis, is, 1. 
 T?iiurlges. Biturigrs, vm, m. pi. 
 Blame. Culpa, ae, f. 
 Book. Liber, hrt, in. 
 Boundary, natural boundaries. 
 
 Natura loci. 
 Boy. Puer, er'i, m. 
 Brave. Fort is, e. 
 Bravely. For tiler, adv. 
 Bravery. Virtvs, fit is, f. 
 Hridtje. Pons, ponfis, m. 
 Bring. Porto, ore, ari, filum ; 
 
 to bring over, trnnsporto, ore, 
 
 avi, Atum ; to brinsj to an end, 
 
 eor{flci6, ere, feci, fectum. 
 Britons. Britanni, iirum, m. pi. 
 Brothei-. Friiter, tris, m. 
 
 Baild. Aedifieo, are, ari, 6tum ; 
 
 to make, j'aciOt ere, feci, fae- 
 
 turn. 
 Bum. Exitro, ere, ussi, fistum ; 
 
 comburb, ere, ussi, vstum ; to 
 
 set on fire, incendO, ere, i, cen- 
 
 sum. 
 But. A utem , conj. , see foot-note, 
 
 p. 316; sed, conj. 
 Buy up. Redlmo, ere, emi, emp- 
 
 turn. 
 By. A, ab, prep. w. abl.; oftrn 
 
 expressed by the Ablative alone; 
 
 78, 420; by far, lonffi, muUo, 
 
 adv. 
 
 c. 
 
 Caesar. Caesar, aris, m. 
 Calamity. Calamitds, dtlt. f. 
 Call, name. Appetlo, are, avi, 
 
 atum ; nomino, are, avi, atitm ; 
 
 to call together, coiicoco, are, 
 
 avi, dtum. 
 Camp. Castra, arum, n. pi. 
 Can. Possum, posse, potui. 269, 
 
 290. 
 Canton. Pdgns, i, m. 
 Captive. Capt'ivus, i, m. 
 Carry, take. Porto, are, avi, dtum; 
 
 to bear,/er6,/fTre, tuli, Idtum; 
 
 to carry over, trdnsporto, are, 
 
 avi, dtutn, 
 Carthage. Karthdgo, inks, f. 
 Cassius. Cassius, li, m. 
 Cause. Causa, ae, f. 
 Cell*. Celtae, drum, m. pi. 
 Censure. Acruso, dre, «ri, dtum. 
 Centurion. Centurio, onis, m. 
 Check. Tardo, dre, dvi, dtum. 
 Chief. Prineeps, ipis ; summus, 
 
 a, urn ; a chief, chiefuln, pria- 
 
 mm, tnl.t. ni. 
 
308 
 
 rocABCLAnr. 
 
 Cicero. Cleerd, dniSf m. 
 Citizen. Civis^ is, m. 
 City. Vrbs, urbis, f. 
 Civilization. Uumanltas, aiiB, f. 
 Civilized. Uumanus, a, uin. 
 Close. ClaudOf ere, »», sum. 
 Clothe. rr^< ' fci or i<, 
 
 Uum. 
 Cloud. Nubtn, m, i. 
 CollecL C6j/o, ere, co^i, coac- 
 
 tum. 
 Come. VeniOf ire, vent, rendtm. 
 Command. Jubedfere.Jussi.Jus- 
 
 sum ; imperot dre, act, dtum ; 
 
 to be in command, praesum, 
 
 *'ftse,ful ; to place in command, 
 
 . raeficiOj ere, feci, fectum; 
 
 under onc*8 command, dux in 
 
 Ablative Absolute. 
 Commander. Imperutor, oris, m. 
 Commit. Admitto, ere, misi, 
 
 misaum. 
 Companion. Comes, His, m. and f. 
 Compel. Cofjo, ere, coeyl, co- 
 
 detum. 
 Concerning. De, prep. w. abl. 
 ConducL Deduco, ere, duxl, due- 
 
 twiu 
 Confidence. Fides, ?i, f. 
 Congratulate. Gratulor, art, atus 
 
 sum. ( Followed by the Dative. ) 
 Conquer. Supero, are, dpi, atum ; 
 
 vinco, ere, vici, vtctum. 
 Conqueror. Victor, oris, m. 
 Consider, think. Puto, are, avi, 
 
 atum ; arbitror, arl, atus sum ; 
 
 existimo, are, art, atum. 
 Conspire. Coi^iird, are, avi, 
 
 atum. 
 Consul. Consul, ulis, m. 
 Consult. Consulo, ere, ui, suU 
 
 turn. 
 
 Contented. Conlenttts, a, itm. 
 
 Continually. Continenter, adv. 
 
 Contrary to. Contrd, prep. w. ace 
 
 Convention. Conventus, us, m. 
 
 Conversation. Sermd, Onis, m. 
 
 Council. Concilium, it, n.; con- 
 ventus, US, m. 
 
 Counsel Consilium, ii, n. 
 
 Country. Terra, ae, f. ; fields, 
 ayri, drum, m. pi. ; one's coun- 
 try, native country, patria, 
 ae, f. 
 
 Courage. Virtus, utis, f. 
 
 Crassus. Crassus, i, m. 
 
 Crime. Facinus, oris, n. 
 
 Cross. Transeo, ire, ii, itum, 
 
 CrowTi. Corona, ae, f. 
 
 Custom. Mos, moris, m. 
 
 Cut off. Intercludd, ere, si, sum* 
 
 D. 
 
 Daily. Cotidie, adv. 
 Danger. Periculum, l, n. 
 Dare. Audeo, ere, ausus sum. 
 
 See 259, confido. 
 Dart. Telum, i, n. 
 Daughter. Filia, ae, f. 
 Daunt. Perterreo, ere, ul, itum. 
 Day. Dies, ei, m. and f. 
 Daybreak. Prima lux. 
 Daylight. Lux, lucis, f. 
 Dear. Car us, a, urn. 
 Death. Mors, mortis, f. ; to put 
 
 to death, interficio, ere, feci, 
 
 fectum. 
 Decide. Constitud, ere, ul, utum ; 
 
 statud, ere, ui, utum. 
 Defeat Supero, are, dvi, dtum ; 
 
 vinco, ere, vici, vtctum. 
 Defence, in defence of. Pro, prep. 
 
 w. abl. 
 
VOCABULARY, 
 
 809 
 
 Defend. D^endu, ere, i, fen- 
 
 tnun. 
 Deliberate. Delibero, ure, acJ, 
 
 Cttum. 
 Deliberatiou. Gerund of t/i/(6er6. 
 Delight. Dilecto, Ore, «pi, utum. 
 Demand. Postido, are, act, utitin; 
 
 Jldgito, are, aci, utum. 
 Deserter. Fuyiticiis, i, m. 
 Deservedly. Meriiu, adv. 
 Desire. Studium, it, n. To de- 
 sire, studeO, ere, ui (fonowc<l 
 
 by the Dative); citpiO, ere, ivi 
 
 or ii, itittn. 
 Desirous. Cujndus, a, inn. 
 Detain. JJetinco, ire, tit, tentum. 
 Deter. Ditcn-ed, ere, ui, itwn. 
 Determine. Conatituo, ere, ui, 
 
 it t inn. 
 Detest. 6di, i»fte. 
 Devastate. Vasto, are, uti, uttiiu. 
 Dimculty. Difficullaa, utia, f. 
 Diminish. Leintnud, ere, i, utitm. 
 Direction. Para, partis, f. 
 Disix>sition. Animus, i, m. 
 Distant, to be distant. Abaum, 
 
 ease, a/ui. 
 Distress. Premb, ere, pressi, 
 
 pressum. 
 Disturb. Perturbo, iire, dci, 
 
 (ttum; comnioveo, ere, movi, 
 
 inotum. 
 Divide. Ditido, ere, ual, rlaum. 
 Divine. Dittnus, a, urn. 
 Division. Pars, partis, f. 
 Divitiacus. Divitiacus, t, m. 
 Do. Facii), ere, feci, factum ; 
 
 gero, ere, gessi, gestum. 
 Double. Duplex, ids. 
 Doubt. Vubito, are, art, alum. 
 Draw up. Instruo, ere, strQzl, 
 
 structunK 
 
 Drive back. HepeUo, ere, reppuli, 
 
 rejmlsuin; to drive out, e/cfo, 
 
 ere, Jeci, Jectutii. 
 Druids. Druidea, urn, m. pi. 
 Dumnorix. Dumnorix, iyia, m. 
 \ During. Usually expressed by the 
 
 Accusative. SB, 379. 
 Dwell. Incolu, ere, ui, euUum; 
 
 habitO, are, avi, atum. 
 
 E. 
 
 Each. Uterque, traque, trumque, 
 
 inflected like uter, 45, 151 ; with 
 
 each oilier, inter se. _ 
 Eager, to be eager, ArdeO, ere, 
 
 urai, uraum. 
 Easily. Facile, adv. 
 Easy. Facilis, e ; very easy, per- 
 
 facilis, e. 
 Eight. Octo, indeclinable. 
 Eighth. Octavus, a, ttm. 
 Either. Aut, conj. ; either . . . 
 
 or, aut . . . auL 
 Embassy. Legatid, oiiia, f. 
 Enclose. Contined, ere, tii, ten- 
 turn. 
 End, to bring to an end. Con- 
 
 JiciO, ere, feci, fectum. 
 Endure, f ero, fcrre, tuft, latum, 
 
 269, 202. 
 Enemy. Ilostis, is, m. and f.; 
 
 inimicus, i, m. 
 Enervate. H^mittOf are, cloi, 
 
 atutn. 
 Enlist, enrol. CoiwmfcO, «re, 
 
 scripsi, scriptttm. 
 Entangled. Impeditus, a, tun. 
 EsUblUb. COi^mw, are, fivi, 
 
 atum. . 
 Even. Etiatn, adv. 
 Ever, always, fiemper, adv. 
 
 21 
 
810 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Excellently. Eyregil'^ adv. 
 Except. Praeterquamf adv. Sec 
 
 279, sentence 17. 
 Exchange. Inter st do, dare, dc- 
 
 dif datum. 
 Exile. Exsul, uliSy m. and f. 
 Expect. ExspectOy are, act, utiim. 
 Expense. Sumptus, us, m. 
 Kxperience. UniSf t/«, m. 
 Explore. Exploro, (ire, aci, atum. 
 Expose. NudOf are, avlf atum. 
 
 Faithful. FlduSf a, um ;fidtUs, e. 
 False. FalsuSf a, um. 
 Far. Longe, adv. 
 Father. Pater, tris, m. 
 Father-in-law. Socer, erl, m. 
 Favor. Gratia, ae, f. To favor, 
 
 faced, ere, fuvi, fautum. (Fol- 
 lowed by the Dative. ) 
 Fear. Timor, oris, m. To fear, 
 
 timeo, ere, ui. 
 Fertile. Fertilla, e. 
 Fertility. Fertilitas, utis, f. 
 Few. Pauci, ac, a. 
 Field. Ager, gri, m. 
 Fierce. Ferus, a, um. 
 Fifth. Qulntua, a, um. 
 Fight, Pugnb, are, art, alum ; 
 
 fighting goes on, pugnatur ; 
 
 281,301. 
 Fill. Compleo, ere, eci, Hum. 
 Find. Beperio, ire, repperl, re- 
 
 pertum. 
 Finish. Coi\fici6, ere, feet, fee- 
 
 turn. 
 Fire. Ignis, is, m; to set on fire, 
 
 incendo, ere, t, censum. 
 First. Primus, a, um. 
 Five, i^inque, Indeclinable. 
 
 Flight. Fuga, ae, f. 
 
 Flow. Fluo, ere, JlQxi, fluxunu 
 
 Foe. Inimicus, i, m. 
 
 Follow. Sequor, i, secQtus suiti. 
 
 Foot. Pes, pedis, m. 
 
 Foot-soldier. Pedes, itis, m. 
 
 For. Pro, prep. w. abl. ; ad, prep, 
 w. ace. ; for, on accoiuit of, ob, 
 prep. w. ace. ; for is c^ten ex- 
 pressed by the Datite, 54, 384; 
 for, during, per, prep. w. ace ; 
 often expressed by the Accusa- 
 tive alone, 98, 379; to ask for, 
 rogo, are, art, atum; to wait 
 for, exspeclo, are, act, atum. 
 
 Force. Cogo, ere, cotgi, coactnm. 
 
 Forced marches. Magna itinera. 
 
 Forces. Copiae, arum, f. pi. 
 
 Forest. St7ca, ae, t. 
 
 Fonn line of battle. Aciem in" 
 struo, ere, struxt, striictunu 
 
 Formerly. Antea, adv. 
 
 Forth, to go forth. Exed, ire, 
 ft, itum ; to lead forth, edQco, 
 ere, duxi, ductum. 
 
 Fortification. I^unttio, onis, f. 
 
 Fortify. JIunio, ire, id or ft, 
 itttm. 
 
 Fortune. FortHna, ae, f. 
 
 Forward, to send forward. Prae^ 
 mitto, ere, mlsi, missum. 
 
 Fourteenth. Qudrtus decimus, 
 quarta decima, quartum deci- 
 mum. 
 
 Free. Liber, era, erum ; to be free 
 from, taco, are, art, atum. To 
 free, Ubero, are, avi, atum. 
 
 Freedom. Liber tas, atis, f. 
 
 Frequent Creber, bra, brum. 
 
 Frequently. Saepe, adv. 
 
 Friend. Amicus, ?, m. 
 
 Friendly. Amicus, a, unu 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 311 
 
 Friendship. Amlcitia, Of, f. 
 Fi-om. A, abj di; prep. w. abl.; 
 
 to be distant from, abaum, €»ae, 
 
 qful. 
 Front, in front of. Pro, prep. w. 
 
 abl. 
 Future. lieliquum tempus; for 
 
 the future, in futm-e, in reli- 
 
 quum temjma. 
 
 Galba. Galba, ac, m. 
 Ciarrison. Praesidlum, <i, n. 
 Gate. Porta, ae, f. 
 (Jaul, the counti7. Gallia, ac, f. 
 
 Gaul, a Gaul, Gallua, i, in. 
 Gem. Gemma, ae, f. 
 General. Lnperutor, oris, m. 
 Geneva. Genuta, ae, f. 
 German. Germdnus, i, m. 
 Gift. Donum, i, n. 
 Girl. Pnella, ae, f. 
 Give. Do, dare, dedl, datum; 
 
 to give up, trudo, ere, didi, 
 
 ditum ; reddo, ere, didi, ditum. 
 Glory. GU'tria, ae, f. 
 Go. Eo, ire, ivi or ft, itum, 277, 
 
 205; to go forth, exed, ire, it, 
 
 itum : fighting goes on, piigm't' 
 
 tur, 281, 301. 
 Gold. Aunim, i, n. 
 Golden, gold. Aureus, a, tim. 
 Good. Bonus, a, um, comp. 
 
 melior, sup. optimus. 
 Grain. Frumeutum, i, n. 
 Grandson. Nepos, Otis, m. 
 Great. Mdfjnns, a, tun ; so great, 
 
 tanlus, a, um. 
 Greatly, to be greatly pleased 
 
 with. Adamo, are, «ci, atum. 
 Greece. Graecia, ae^ f. 
 
 Greek. Graecus, a,um; sl Greek, 
 
 Graecus, t, m. 
 Grief. Dolor, oris, m. 
 Guard. COatOdiOt tre, iti or fi, 
 
 itum. 
 Guest. HospeSf itis, m. and f. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hand. Manns, vs, f. 
 
 Happen. Fio, fierif foetus sum, 
 277, 204. 
 
 Happily, niiciter, adv. 
 
 Harbor. Partus, us, m. 
 
 Harm. Jdalvjicium, it, n. 
 
 Hasten. Contendo, ere, i, turn ; 
 muturb, are, ati, atum. 
 
 Have, llabeb, ere, ui, itum ; to 
 liave power, possum, posse, 
 potui, 269, 200; to have to, 
 qftcn expressed by the Gerund- 
 ite, 266, 234. 
 
 He. Is, ea, id ; ille, ilia, illud ; 
 hic, haec, hoc, 102, I8C; often 
 only implied in the ending of 
 Uie verb. 
 
 Hear. A udib, ire, iti or it, itwn. 
 
 Height. AltitUdo, inis, t. 
 
 Help. ylirzi7itmi, tt, n. To help, 
 Jucb, are, JUti, Jutum. 
 
 Helvetii. UclvHii, orttm, m. pi. 
 
 Hesitate. Dubito, are, urt, atum. 
 
 High. Altus, a, um. 
 
 Hill. Collis, is, m. 
 
 Himself. Sui, 102, 184; ipse, a, 
 um, 102. 180. 
 
 His. Suus, a, um ; sometimes ex- 
 pressed by the genitive of is or 
 ille; sometimes not expressed 
 in Latin. 
 
 Hold. Teneo, ere, t»i, tentum ; to 
 regard, habed, ere, ui, itum. 
 
312 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Home. Domus, us, f. ; at home, 
 doini, 185, 420; hoiiu'"-r-' 
 home, domum, 277, 380. 
 
 Honor, ornament. Omamcnium, 
 t, n. 
 
 Hope. SpeA, apeiy f. 
 
 Uorse. EquM, i, m. 
 
 Horseman. Eques, it is, m. 
 
 Hostage. ObseSf idtM, in. :ui<I f. 
 
 Hour. JIdra, ae, f. 
 
 How. Quam, adv.; liw.* iaige, 
 quant us, a, wm ; how many, 
 7Uo/, indeclinable. 
 
 Hundred. Cen/iim, indeclinable. 
 
 Hurl. Coicio, ere, Jiei, Jectum, 
 
 I. 
 
 I. Ego, met. 102, lai. 
 
 If. Si, conj. 250^ 507. 
 
 Implore. Implbro, (ire, aci, aftrni. 
 
 Import. Importo, dre, art, attim. 
 
 In. In, prep. w. ace. and abl.; 
 in front of, pro, prep, w, abl. ; 
 in regard to, de, prep. w. abl. ; 
 in the vicinity of, ad, apud, 
 circum, prep. w. ace. ; to plead 
 in cliains, ex vinculis ; In auch 
 a way, ita, adv. 
 
 Incessantly. Contlnenter, adv. 
 
 Inflict, infero, ferre, intuli, ilia- 
 turn ; to Inflict punishment, 
 sumo, ere, sumpsi, sumptum, 
 with supplicium ; literally, 
 to take punishment. 
 
 Inform. Certiorem facia, ere, 
 feci, factum ; to be informed, 
 certior fieri. 
 
 Inhabit. Incolo, ere, %ti, cultum ; 
 hahito, are, aci, atum. 
 
 Inhabitant. 7s qui incolitf liter- 
 ally, tie voho inhabits. 
 
 Inquire. Quaerb, ere, slvi or aii, 
 situm. 
 
 Intend, in antmo esae, w. Dative; 
 I intend, mih\ in animo est; 
 to intend is qften expressed by 
 the future active participle, 
 266,233. 
 
 Intention, it is my intention* 
 Mihl in animo esL 
 
 Interest, to be for one's interest. 
 Interest, esse, fuit. 281.301. 
 
 Interior of. Interior, us, in agree* 
 ment with noun. 
 
 Into. In, prep. w. ace. 
 
 Island, insula, ae, f. 
 
 IL la, ea, id ; Hie, a, xtd ; hlc, 
 hate, hOc ; 102, 186; often only 
 implied in the ending of the 
 verb. 
 
 Italy, flalia, ae, f. 
 
 Its. 8uus,a,um; sometimes ex- 
 pressed by the genitive of is or 
 Hie; sometimes not expressed 
 in Latin. 
 
 Judge. Judex, icis, m. and f. To 
 
 judge, Jiidico, are, utl, atum. 
 Justice. Jusiitia, ae, f. 
 
 K, 
 
 Keep. Teneo, ere, ul, tentum; 
 contineo, ere, ui, tentum; re- 
 tineb, ere, ul, tentum ; haheb, 
 ere, ul. Hum ; to prevent, prO' 
 hibeb, ere, ul, itum. 
 
 Kent. Cantium, il, n. 
 
 King. Bex, regis, m. 
 
 Know. Scio, ire, ivl or it, Itum; 
 intellegb, ere, lexl, ledum. 
 
 Knowledge. Scientia, ae, f. 
 
VOCADULAHY. 
 
 i.; 
 
 Lake. Lacus, «s, m. 
 
 Land. Terra, ae, f. ; lands, fields, 
 agri, oruniy m. pi. 
 
 Large. MCvjnus, a, «m, comp. 
 major, sup. mujciinuH; how 
 largo, quanlus, a, nm. 
 
 Last, nearest. PrOxhnus, a, urn. 
 
 Latlnus. Latinu8, f, ni. 
 
 Lavinia. Ldvinia, ae, f. 
 
 I>aw. Lex, legls, f. 
 
 Lay waste. Fasfo, are, aci, «<»m. 
 
 lA-ad. Dfico, ere, dfixi, duclum ; 
 to lead across, frdusduca, ere, j 
 Jtlxi, ductuin ; to lead back, 
 redjico, ere, duxt, ductuin ; to 
 lead out, etiuco, ere, tZuxl, duc- 
 tum. 
 
 Leader. Prlnceps, i>/«, in. and f. ; 
 dux, ducts, m. and f. 
 
 I^earning. Doctrlna, ae, f. 
 
 Leave. Relinquo, ere, liqulf lie- 
 turn. 
 
 Legion. Legio, onis, f. 
 
 Lemannus. Lemannus, }, m. 
 
 Length, at length. Dmwm, adv. 
 
 Letter of the alphabet. Lxttera, 
 ae, f. ; letter, epistle, epinttda, 
 ae, f. ; Uiterac, arum, f. pi. 
 
 Liberty. L'lbertaa, dtis, f. 
 
 Lieutenant. Legatus, i, ra. 
 
 Life. Vila, ae, f. 
 
 Like very much. AdamOf are, 
 uvl, dtuni. 
 
 Line. Aciis, it, f. ; line of battle, 
 acics ; line of march, Qgmcn, 
 inix, n. 
 
 Listen to. Audio, ire, to! or ii, 
 itum. 
 
 L.ive. Fioo, ere, vhn, victum. 
 
 Long. Longit adv. ; a long time, 
 
 diu, corap. dtu(iuj, sup. diuttS' 
 siiiie, adv. 
 Love. Amor, oris, m. To love, 
 amo, are, uoi, dtum. 
 
 M. 
 
 Magistrate. Magistrdtus, us, m. 
 
 Make. Facio, ere, feci, factum ; 
 to make tear, gerO, ere, gessi, 
 gestum; inferb, ferret intuti^ 
 illdtum. 
 
 Man. Ilomo, inis, m. and f.; 
 vir, virl, m. 
 
 Many, much. MuUus, a, um ; 
 how many, quot, indeclinable. 
 
 March. Iter, itineris, n. ; forced 
 marches, magna itinera ; line 
 of march, agmen, inis, n. To 
 march, iter /acio,/acere, fret, 
 factum, 
 
 Marcus. Marcus, i, m. 
 
 Match, a match for. Par, parts. 
 
 May. Licet, ere, licuit,2Bl,30\. 
 
 Menapii. Menapii, drum, m. pi. 
 
 Merchant. Mercdtor, oris, m. 
 
 Messenger, Nuntius, it, m. 
 
 Midday. Meridies, H, m. 
 
 Mile, mile passus ; 247, foot- 
 note. 
 
 Military. Milildris, e; military 
 affairs, res milildris. 
 
 Mind. Animus, i, ra. ; m(ns, 
 metitis, f. 
 
 Moat. Fossa, ae, t. 
 
 Month. Mtnsis, is, m. 
 
 Mother. Mdtfr, tris, f. 
 
 Mountain. Afons, montis, m. 
 
 Much, to like very much, adamu, 
 are, act, dtum. 
 
 Must. Often expressed by the 
 Gerundive. 266.234. 
 
314 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 My. Meu», a, um. 102, 185. 
 Myself. Kfjo, mei, 102f l^; ipstf 
 a, ton, 102, ISO. 
 
 N. 
 
 Name. NominUf are, ciri, utum. 
 
 Nation. Gtns, gentiSy f. ; ndtio, 
 oniitf f. 
 
 Natural boundaries. Natura locL 
 
 Nature. Ifaturaf ae, f. 
 
 Navigate. JVciciyo, arCt oci, dtum. 
 
 Navigation. Gerund of nuriyo. 
 
 Near. Apud^ adf prep. w. ace. 
 
 Nearer. Propior, wa. 
 
 Nearly. Fere, adv. ; paene^ adv. 
 
 Neighbor. FiniUmttSy i, ra. 
 
 Neighboring. FlniiimuSt a, w/n ; 
 prOximuB^ a, um. 
 
 Nervii. Nertii, orwm, m. pi. 
 
 Never. JViinguawj, adv. 
 
 New. A'oru*, a, wm. 
 
 Next. Prdxhmis, a» wni. 
 
 No. JVu/fu*, o, wm, 45, ir>1 ; «<7ii7 
 w. Partitive Genitive, 28; 397. 
 
 Noble. NobiliSy e. 
 
 Not, Nolly adv. ; w. imperative or 
 subjunctive of desire, ii<% adv. ; 
 not? nonnef con j., interroga- 
 tive particle; not yet, noncZuwi, 
 adv. 
 
 Number. NumeruB, t, m. 
 
 Obey. Puredy ere, ui, Hum. (Fol- 
 lowed by the Dative. ) 
 
 Obser>e. 06serc6, drey uth atum. 
 
 Obtain possession of. PotioTy iri, 
 xtus sum ; 258, 421; to obtain 
 one's request, impctroy are, dci, 
 dtum. 
 
 Occupy. Occupoy arCy aoi, atuni. 
 Octodurus. OctoduruSy i, m. 
 Of. Di-y ty exy prep. w. abl. ; out 
 
 of, e, ex ; in front of, pro, prep. 
 
 w. abl. 
 Off, to cut off. Intcrcludoy ere, 
 
 si, sum. 
 Often. SaepCy adv. 
 Ou, at Ady prep. w. ace.; in. 
 
 prep. w. abl.; on the side of, 
 
 ci, aby prep. w. abl. ; on all sides, 
 
 undiquCy tu\y. ; lighting goes on, 
 
 pugnatur, 281, 301. 
 One. UnuSy a, um ; 97, 175; that 
 
 oncy iSy eoy id ; Ule,ay%id; 102^ 
 
 186. 
 Open. AperiuSy a, um. 
 Opinion. Sententiay at*, f. 
 Or. Auty conj. ; in questions, an, 
 
 conj. 
 Oration. OruUOy Onls, f. 
 Orator. Orator, orw, m. 
 Order. Impcrdy ore, «r», d(wm ; 
 
 JubeOy ircy jussiy jussum; in 
 
 order that, ut, conj. 119^ 407. 
 Other. AliuSy OyUd; 45, 151 ; the 
 
 remaining, reliquusy o, um; 
 
 with each other, inter se. 
 Ought. Dibcoy IrCy t/i, i7um ; 
 
 often expressed by the Gerund- 
 ive, 266, 234. 
 Our. Nosier, tra, trum. 
 Out of. EXy e, prep. w. abl. ; to 
 
 lead out, edUcd, erCy duxi, duc- 
 
 tum ; to set out, projiciscory ?, 
 
 profectus sum. 
 Over. Per, trunSy prep. w. ace ; 
 
 a bridge over, in, prep. w. abl. ; 
 
 to bring over, carry over, trans- 
 
 portOy arey dvi, dtum. 
 Owe. Debeoy ere, wi, i7um. 
 Own. Situs, a, um. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 815 
 
 Pain. Dolor, oris, m. 
 
 Part. Pars, partis, f. 
 
 pjiss the winter. IJiemo, arc, act, 
 alum. 
 
 Passionate. Irucundus, a, um. 
 
 Patiently. Patienter, adv. 
 
 Peace. Pax, pads, f. 
 
 Pedius. Pedius, it, ni. 
 
 Penalty. Poena, ae, f. 
 
 People. Populus, i, m. 
 
 Peril. Periculum, i, n. 
 
 Perilous. Periculosus, a, um. 
 
 Persuade. Persuaded, ere, suasi, 
 suusum. (Followed by the Da- 
 tive of the person. ) 
 
 Pisistratus. Plsistratus, i, m. 
 
 Place. Locus, i, ra., pi. loca, 
 drum, n. ; a battle takes place, 
 piigndtur. To place, pond, 
 ere, posui, positum ; coUoco, 
 are, ati, dtnm ; constituo, ere, 
 ui, utum ; to place in command, 
 praeficidy ere, fid, fectum. 
 
 Plan. ConsiUunif ilj n. ; sen- 
 tentia, ae, f. 
 
 Plato. Plato, onis, ra. 
 
 Plead. Dlco, ere, dtxi, dictum; 
 afjd, ere, egi, actum. 
 
 Pleasetl, to be gi*catly pleased with. 
 Adamo, are, av'i, dtum. 
 
 Plough, ylru, tire, tici, utum. 
 
 Poet. Poita, ae, ni. 
 
 Pompey. Pompeius, it, m. 
 
 Populace. PU'bs, plibis, f. 
 
 Position. Locus, i, m., pi. loca, 
 drum, n. • 
 
 Possess. Uabed, ere, u», Hum; 
 sum, esse, ful in w. abl. ; he poe- 
 aesses wisdom, sapicniia in eo 
 esL 
 
 Possession, to obtain pooMsIon 
 
 of. Potior, iri, Itua sum, 258, 
 
 421; to talce possession of, oc- 
 
 cupdf are, uvi, utum. 
 Power. Potentia, ac, f. ; regal 
 
 power, rignum, t, n. ; to hav« 
 
 power, possumt possCt potui, 
 
 269, 290. 
 Pi-aise. Laudd, are, acF, a(Mw. 
 Prefer. J/u/6, ma//e, ma/ui. 273, 
 
 293. 
 Prepare. Pard, are, avl, dtum ; 
 
 compard, are, aci, atum. 
 Prepared. Parutus, a, «»n. 
 Present. Ddnd, are, avi, dtum. 
 Present, for the present /« prae- 
 
 sentid. 
 Prevail. Valed, ire, mi, ttuin. 
 Prevent. Prohihed, ere, ui, ituuu 
 Previously. Anted, ad?. 
 Price. Pretium, it, n. 
 Propose a lata. Ferd,/erre, tuli, 
 
 latum, 269. 292. 
 Protect, fortify. Minid, ire, Itl 
 
 or u. Hum, 
 Protection. Praesidium, il, n. 
 Provide. Prdtpicid, ere, sprxi. 
 
 spectuin ; provided, ire, tidl, 
 
 visum. (Followed by the Da- 
 tive.) 
 Province. Prdvincia, ae, f. 
 Provisions. Cibdria, drum, n. pi. 
 Punishment. Supplicium, ii, n. 
 Pupil. Discipulus, i, m. 
 Purpose. Cdnsilium, ii, n. ; con«- 
 
 tus, us, m. ; for the purpose of, 
 
 causa w. Genitive. 
 Pursue. Sequor, i, secutu* aum ; 
 
 insequor, i, secutut sum; per- 
 
 sequor, i, aecutus sum. 
 Put to death. Interficid, ere,feci^ 
 
 fectum ; occtdd, ere, i, $um. 
 
316 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quarters, winter quartent. Ill- 
 
 bemOf drum, n. pi. 
 Queen. Jilginaf ae, f. 
 Quickly. Celeritcr, adv. 
 
 R. 
 
 Kanipart. Vallum, t, n. 
 Kash. Temerariu»f a, um. 
 Rather than. Quamj con J. 
 Ravage. Depopulor, on, atia 
 
 sum, 
 Ii4*ach, arrive at, AdeOf ire, it, 
 
 Hum ; venio, ire, veni, centum ; 
 
 pertenio, Ire, tenl, venium ; to 
 
 extend, p^-r''"-'"'. --^ •-, t^n- 
 
 tum. 
 Read. Ley(», nr, itjij ucmnu 
 Readily. Facile, adv. 
 Ready. ParatuM, a, um. 
 Rear. Novisaimum dgmen, novU- 
 
 shnl 6(jminls, n. 
 i Unison. Cau8a^ ae, f.; res,rfi, f. 
 Recollection. Meuwrta^ ae, f. 
 Reference, with reference to. De, 
 
 prep. w. abL 
 J%efinenient. CuUua, U8, m. 
 Regal power. litgnum, I, n. 
 ll<>irard, to regard as. I I abed, ere, 
 
 ni, Hum pro w. abl.; in regard 
 
 to, dt, prep. w. abl. 
 Jagion. Jicyid, onis, f. 
 Reject. liecuso, are, del, utiun. 
 Rely upon. COi\fidO, ere, fisus 
 
 sum. ^ See 259. 
 Remain. Maneo, ere, mansi, 
 
 inansum; permaneo, ere, mansi, 
 
 vidnsum; remaned, €r€,indn9t, 
 
 manaum; to remain silent, 
 
 taceo, ere, w7, Hum. 
 
 Remember. lieminiacor, u 269, 
 231. 
 
 Remi. Bemi, drum, m. pL 
 
 Remove. Moved, ere, mdvi, mo* 
 tum; removed, ere, mdvi, mo* 
 tutn. 
 
 Renew. lienovd, are, dtt, dtum. 
 
 Renowned. Clarua, a, unu 
 
 Repent. Paenitet, ere, uit ; I re- 
 pent, tne paeniUL 281, 301; 
 285,400. 
 
 Import. Humor, dris, m. To re- 
 port, nuniid, are, dpi, dtum; 
 enunlid, are, act, dtum. 
 
 Repulse. Prdpulad, are, dvl, 
 dtum; repelld, ere, rcppuli, 
 repuUum. 
 
 Reputation. Auctdritdi, alls, f. 
 
 Request, to obtain one's request. 
 Jmpetrd, are, dvi, dtnnu 
 
 Reside. Uabitd, are, dri, dtum. 
 
 Rest of. Reliquua, a, um. 
 
 Restore. Hestltud, ere, ui, utum. 
 
 Retain. Retined, ere, ui, tentum. 
 
 Retard. Tardd, are, dvi, dtum. 
 
 Return. Reded, ire, ii. Hum; 
 retertor, i, retert'i, retersum, 
 deponent in present system. 
 
 Revenue. Vectigal, dlis, n. 
 
 Revolution. Re8 novae. 
 
 Rhine. Rhenus, i, m. 
 
 Rlione. Rhodanus, i, m. 
 
 Ride toward. AdequUd, are, dvi, 
 dtum. 
 
 River. Flumen, inls, n. 
 
 Roman. Rdmdnus, a, vm ; a 
 Roman, i^omdnus, I, m. 
 
 Rome. Roma, ae, f. 
 
 Romulus. Romulus, i, m. 
 
 Route. Iter, itineris, n. 
 
 Rule. Rego, ere, rexi, rectum. 
 
 Rumor. Rumor, oris, m. 
 
VOCAlWLAJi) 
 
 817 
 
 Safe. Tutus, a, ttni. 
 Safeguard. Praesidiumy ii, n. 
 Safety. Saliis, ulis, f. 
 Same. Idem, eadenif idem. 102, 
 
 180. 
 Saiitoiies. Santones, ttm, lu. pi. 
 Say. Dico, ere, dixl, dictum. 
 School. Schola, «e, f. 
 Scout. Exploratory or/«, hi. 
 Sea. Mare, is, n. 
 Second. Secundus, a, urn. 
 Secure, win. ConciliOj are, aei, 
 
 a turn. 
 See. Fi<7e6, ere, vldi, visum. 
 Seek. Pcto, ere, ici or it. Hum ; 
 
 quaero, ere, siti or sii, situm. 
 Seize. Occupo, are, dpi, alum. 
 Select. Delifjo, ere, legi, tectum. 
 Senate. Senatus, us, m. 
 Send. Mitto, ere, misi, missum ; 
 
 to send ahead, send forward, 
 
 praemilto, ere, misi, missum. 
 Separate. Divido, ere, tisi, visum. 
 Servitude. Servitus, vtis, f. 
 Set fire to. Incendo, ere, i, een- 
 
 sum. 
 Set out. Projlclscorj i, profectua 
 
 sum. 
 Setting. OccasuB, us, m. 
 Setting out, Profectio, onis, f. 
 Settle. Considu, ere, sedi, sessum. 
 Seventh. Septimus, a, um. 
 Several. Compluri'S, a or ia, lum. 
 Severe. Acer, cris, ere ; sever us, 
 
 a, um. 
 Severely. Acriter, adv. ; gravlter, 
 
 adv. 
 Shepherd. Pastor, oris, m. 
 Slilp. yacis, is, f.; naviglum, 
 
 ii, n. ; ship of war, longa ndvis. 
 
 Shut in. t'onlintu, ere, tii, tet^ 
 
 lum. 
 Side, pait. Pars, partis, f.; on 
 
 all sides, undique, adv. 
 Sight. Conspectus, us, in. 
 Signal, insignis, e. 
 Silent, to be silent, to remain 
 
 silent. Taceo, ere, ui, itum. 
 Since. Cum, conj. 
 Singing. Cantus, us, ra. 
 Single, one. Unus,a,um. 97,173. 
 Six. .Sex, indeclinable. 
 Sixlh. Sextus, a, um. 
 Skilful. Peritus, a, um. 
 Skin. PelUs, is, {. 
 Slave. Servus, i, m. 
 Slavery. Sertitiis, utls, f. 
 Slay. Occido, ere, i, sum ; inter- 
 
 ficio, ere, feci, fectum. 
 Sleep. Dormio, ire, ivi or /•, 
 
 itum. 
 Small. Parvus, a, um. 86. 165. 
 So, to such an extent. Tarn, 
 
 adv. ; in such a way. Ha, adv. ; 
 
 so great, tantus, a, um. 
 Soldier. Miles, His, m. and f. 
 Son. Filius, ii, m. 32,r>l, .'*. 
 Son-in-law. Gener, eri, m. 
 Soon, as soon as. Slmul, stmul 
 
 atque, conj. 
 Soul. Animus, i, m. 
 Soundly. Arte, adv. 
 Sovereignty. Prineipiilua, us, m. 
 Space. Spatium, ii, n.; loeus^ 
 
 i, m. 
 Spare. Parco, ere, peperci, par- 
 sum, (Followed by the Dative.) 
 Speak. Died, ere, dlxi, dictum. 
 Speedily. CeUriter, atlv. 
 Spirit. Animus, i, m. 
 Slate. CivH^8,atis,i. To state, 
 
 say, died, ere, dixi, dictum. 
 
318 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Station. CollocOf arc, dvi, atu$n ; 
 
 conatUuOf ere, wi, iitum. 
 Stouc. LajiiSf Idis, ui. 
 Slorin. Tettipe8tu8, utiSf f.; to 
 
 take by storm, expuynOf are, 
 
 doi, atutn, 
 Story. FdbuUt, ae, f. 
 Stricken with fear. Ttmore per- 
 
 territus, a, urn. 
 Strip. NudOf are, aci, (Wumi. 
 Successfully. FetlcUer, adv. 
 Successive. Contfnuua, a, trnu 
 Sucli, so great Tantun, a, um ; 
 
 In such a way, ita, adv. 
 Suebi. Suebif drum, m. pi. 
 Suffer. Potior, i, paasuB aunu 
 Summer. Aeatds, uiis, f. 
 Summon. Voco, are, avl, 6tum. 
 Sun. Sol, adlis, m. 
 Sunset. 86lis occasus, iis, m. 
 Supplied, to be well supplieil. 
 
 Abundo, (Ire, dpi, utum. 
 Supply, supplies. Commeiitus, tis, 
 
 m. ; supply of grain, supplies, 
 
 res frumenidria. 
 Support Aid, ere, ui, alilum 
 
 and altum. 
 Surpass. Praecedo, ere, eeasi, 
 
 C€88um ; praesid, are, jtUi, 
 
 Btitum and stdtum. 
 Surround. Contined, ere, ui, 
 
 tentum. 
 Suspicion. Suspicio, dnis, f. 
 Sustain. Sustineo, ere, ui, ten- 
 tum. 
 
 Take. Capid, ere, cepi, captum ; 
 sumo, ere, siimpai, sumptum; 
 to carry, porto, are, dvi, dtum ; 
 to take by storm, expdgnd, are, 
 woi, dtwn; to take possession 
 
 of, occupd, are, dti, dtum ; to 
 take from, ^ero, ferre, extuCi, 
 eldtum ; to take vengeance on, 
 ulciscor, i, uUua sum ; a battle 
 takes place, puffnuiwr, 281. 801. 
 
 Teach. Doced, ire, ui, ddctunu 
 
 Tell. Died, ere, dlxi, dictum. 
 
 Temple. Teutplum, t, n. 
 
 Ten. Decern, indeclinable. 
 
 Tend. Pertined, ire, ui, tentum. 
 
 Tenth. Decimua, a, um. 
 
 Terrify. Terred, ire, ui. Hum; 
 to terrify greatly, perterred, 
 ere, ui, itum. 
 
 Territory. Fines, ium, m. pi. 
 
 Tliames. Tamesis, i», m. 
 
 Than. Qnam, conj. 
 
 That llle, a, ud; is, ea, id; 
 102, 186; tliat of yours, iste, a, 
 ud, 102, 186; that, relative, qui, 
 quae, quod, 106, lb7; that, re- 
 peatinga previous noun, is often 
 not to be renderctl into Latin; 
 tliat, in order that, ut, qud, 
 qudminus, conj. 119, 407. 
 
 The. See page 25, foot-note 1. 
 
 Their. Suua, a, um ; sometimes 
 expressed by the genitive of is 
 or i7/e, 102, 186 ; sometimes 
 not expressed in Latin. 
 
 Then. Turn, adv. 
 
 lliere. Ib't, adv. 
 
 Tlierefore. Ifjitur, conj. 
 
 Thing. Bes, rei, f. 
 
 Think. Putd, are, dvi, dtum; 
 arbitror, dri, dtus sum; exis- 
 timd, are, dvi, dtum. 
 
 Third. Tertius, a, um. 
 
 This.. II Jc,haec, hoc. 102,186. 
 
 Thou. Tu, tut. 102, l&i. 
 
 Three. Tres, tria. 97, 175. 
 
 Through. Per, prep. w. ace 
 
VOCABULAUY, 
 
 819 
 
 Throw. Jacioy ere, Jeclt Jactum, 
 
 Tidings, yuntiust ilj m. 
 
 Time. Tempus, oriSy n. ; diea, c«, 
 f. (although, wlieu meaning 
 day, usually masculine); for a 
 long time, difi^ comp. diutius, 
 sup. difitisniini', adv. 
 
 To. ^(Z, prep. w. ace. ; often ex- 
 pressed by the Dative, 54, 3S4; 
 with reference to, de, prep. w. 
 abl. ; to set fire to, incendOy ere, 
 i, ce)t«um. 
 
 Together. Una, adv.; to call to- 
 gether, contoco, are, «cj, a(«m. 
 
 Top of. Summus, a, um. 
 
 Toward. Ad, prep. w. ace. 
 
 Tower. Tnrris, is, f. 
 
 Town. Oppidum, i, n. 
 
 Traitor. Proditor, oris, m. 
 
 Traveller. Viator, 6ri«, m. 
 
 Treason. Proditw, onia, f. 
 
 Tribe. Gins, f/entis, f. 
 
 Tribinie. TribiinuSf i, m. 
 
 Triple. Triplex, icis. 
 
 True. Verua, a, um. 
 
 Truth. Verum, i, n. 
 
 Try. Tento, are, dci, utum. 
 
 Tullia. Tullia, ae, f. 
 
 Two. Z)«o, (IP, 0, 97, 175. 
 
 Tyrant. Ti/rannus, t, m. 
 
 u. 
 
 Under. Sub, prep. w. ace. and 
 abl.; under the command of, 
 dux, in the Ablative Absolute; 
 under the conuuaud of Caesar, 
 Caesare duce. 
 
 Understand. Intellego, ere, text, 
 lirtum. 
 
 Undertake. Suscipio, ere, cepi, 
 ceptum. 
 
 Unfortunate. InJtliXj ic/j. 
 Unite. Conjunyu, ere, JUnxlf 
 
 JUncluin, 
 Unless. Nisi, conj. 250; 507. 
 Unskilled. IinperUus, a, um. 
 Until. Duni, quoad, conj. 337, 
 
 510. 
 Unwilling, to be unwilling. Nolit, 
 
 nolle, notut. 273, 293. 
 Unworthy. Jndojnus, a, nm. 
 Up, to draw up. Instrud, ere, 
 
 struxi, struclum; to give up, 
 
 trudo, ere, didi, ditum. 
 Upbraid. Accuao, are, avi, iitum. 
 Upon. In, prep. w. ace. and abl. ; 
 
 against, in, contra, prep. w. ace 
 Urge. Jlortor, dri, utus sum. 
 Use. ifatts, t/«, m. To use, utor, 
 
 i, fisus sum. 
 Useful. Utilis, e. 
 Usipetes. Usipetes, um, m. pi. 
 
 Valor. Virtus, utis, t. 
 Valuable. Pretiosus, a, um. 
 Veneti. Veneti, drum, m. pi. 
 Vengeance, to take vengeance on. 
 
 UlcUcor, i, uUus sum. 
 Vergobretus. Verfjohretus, I, m. 
 Very. Often expressed by Vte 
 
 sup. ; very easy, perfaeilia, e ; 
 
 to like very much, adatno, are, 
 
 dti, alum. 
 Vessel. Ifaris, is, f. 
 Vicinity, in the vicinity of. Apud, 
 
 ad, circum, prep. w. ace. 
 Victoria. Victoria, ae, f. 
 Victory. Victoria, ae, f. 
 Village. Vicus, i, m. 
 Virtue. VirtHs, utis, t. 
 Voice. Vox, tocU, f. 
 
820 
 
 VOCABULAHY. 
 
 w. 
 
 Wage. G'ero, ere^ yesBl^ gestuni ; 
 
 to w»ge against, tn/irro, /tire, 
 
 intulif motum, 
 Walt for. Exttpecto, are, itvl, 
 
 a turn. 
 Wall. Muru$, i, lu. 
 Want. Inopia, ae, f. 
 War. JitlUtinf i, n. ; ship of war, 
 
 nutis lontja. 
 Warlike. JldlicotuM, a, tim. 
 Warn, l/oneo, rr*, mi, j(uiii. 
 Waste, to lay waste. Vtmtn, are, 
 
 (lei, utum* 
 Way, In such a way. //<i, udv. 
 Weaken. I^fhninO, are, «r7, 
 
 fKtim. 
 Well, to be well suppltetl. Ah- 
 
 ti»j(7o, Are, nri, oftiiii. 
 What ? Q»i», quae^ quid ; qui, 
 
 quae, quod. 106^ 188. 
 When. Cm Ml, conj. 
 Whether. Nuin, in a single ques- 
 tion; utrum, in a double ques- 
 
 Uon. 
 Which, who. Qui, quae, quod, 
 
 106k 1S7; which? who? quia, 
 
 quae, quid; qui, quae, quod; 
 
 106.188. 
 Whole. Omnia, e ; totus, a, um, 
 
 45, 151 ; unicersus, a, um. 
 Why. Quare, eur, adv. 
 Width. Lntltudo, inis, f. 
 Willing, to be willing. Volo, 
 
 telle, tolui, 273, 2a3. 
 Winter. //<>»», emis, f. ; winter 
 
 quarters, hlberna, drum, n. pi. 
 
 ?fJ 
 
 To winter, pass the winter, 
 
 hicmo, are, dvi, atum. 
 Wisdom. Sapientia, ae,f. 
 Wise. Sapiens, ends. 
 Wish. Cupio, ere, ici or ii, 
 
 Uum ; rofo, telle, tolui. 273^] 
 
 203. 
 With. Ctim, prep. w. abl. ; amon 
 
 apud, prep. w. ace; with ref 
 
 crcnce to, de, prep. w. abl.;! 
 
 with each other, with one an-! 
 
 other, inter si; to be greatly i 
 
 pleased with, adamo, are, det;| 
 
 fUunu j 
 
 Withdraw. Subdued, ere, dfiji^j 
 
 duetum ; rcduco, ere, dUxi, duc^ 
 
 turn ; deduco, ere, dUxi, (fwc-j 
 
 iunt. 
 Without. Sine, prep. w. abl. 
 Wit; ' Suatlneo, ere, vl^ 
 
 t< I 
 
 Witness. Testis, U, m. and f. j 
 Worth Verhum, i, n. i 
 
 Would that. Utinam, Interj. ll^y 
 
 483,1. ^ 
 
 Wound. Vulnui, erls, n. Td: 
 
 wound, tulnero, are, ari, atum. 
 Write. Scribo, ere, scrips'i, scrtp' 
 
 turn. ^ 
 
 Wrong. Injuria, ae, f. 
 
 Y. I 
 
 Yet, not yet JVonJi/w, adv. ; 
 Yoke. Jugum, i, n. \ 
 
 You, thou. Tit, tm. 102, 184. ! 
 Your, y ester, tra, trum ; thy,- 
 tuus, a, wn. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 GENERAL RULES OF SYNTAX 
 
 Given hero in a body, for convenience of reference, in the order and 
 form in which they occur in the standard edition of IlarUnoss's Latin 
 CritAMMAR, togcthcr with the numbers of sections in which the Rules arc 
 given respectively in this Volume, and their grauunatical reference num. 
 bers. 
 
 A(iREEME\T OF NoUNS. 
 
 RUIX L-Predicate Notms (59). 
 
 362. A noun predicated of another noun denoting tbo 
 banic person or thing agrees with it in case : 
 
 BrQtus cQstr»s llbertatis fuit, Bruttu teat the guardian of libm^y. 
 
 RUIX U.-Appositive8 (28)* 
 
 363. An aj)positive agrees in cask with the noun or pro- 
 noun which it qualifies : 
 
 Clnllius rCx moritur, CluUiut tJu king diet. 
 
 Nominative. — Vocative. 
 
 RULE III.-SubJect Nominative (18). 
 
 368. The Subject of a Finite verb i"* i>ut in the Nomina- 
 tive : 
 
 Sorvius rSgn&vlt, Sertixia reigned. 
 
 RULE IV.-Case of Address (190). 
 
 369. The Name of the person or thing addressed is put 
 in the Vocative : 
 
 Pcrgc, Lncll, proceed^ LaeUtu, 
 
822 APPENDIX, \ 
 
 ACCUBATIVK. \ 
 
 RULE T.-Direet Object (16 ). 
 871. The DiKECT Object of an action is put in the Ao* 
 
 cnsative : 
 
 Deus mundum aodificAvit. God mad4 (boUt) tJU world. A 
 
 BUIX VI.— Two ^ociiwatlTW Hamn Person (168). 
 873. Verbs of making, cuoosinq, calling, begarding, 
 
 SHOWING, and the like, admit two Accusatives of the same 
 
 person or thing : 
 
 Ilamilcarem imperfltOrem /^otnint, tk*y mads Jhmilcar commandsr, I 
 
 RUIiE VH.— Two AccoMttiTee— Penon and Thln^ (873). ] 
 
 374. JSome verbs of asking, demandim;, teaching;, ana 
 
 COKCRALINO admit two Accusatives— one of the 2)erson and 
 
 the other of the thing: ,, 
 
 Ma sentcntiom ro^vit, h* <ut*d me my opinion, 
 
 BnL£ Vm.— Accusative of Specification. 
 
 378. A verb or an adjective may take an Accusative to 
 define its application : 
 
 Ca{^te veUmnr, «r« hm4 our ioadi tHUd, 
 
 BUI<E IZ.— Accusative of Time and Space (98). 
 
 379. Duration op Time and Extent of Space are ex- 
 pressed by the Accusative : 
 
 Septem et titginU rCgnAvit ftanOs, He reiyned thirttf-ttwn ynrt. Qalnquo 
 milk pMsatun ambulftre^ to walijke mil4$, 
 
 BUIX X.— Accusative of Limit (277). j 
 
 380. The Place to which is designated by the Accusa- 
 tive : 
 
 I. Generally with a preposition — ad or in : 
 
 "LegibniB ad urbcm addQcit, he it leading the UgioM to or toward the cit'j. j 
 
 II. Li names of towns without a preposition : < 
 NOntius BOmam redit, the meseenger returns to Home. \ 
 
 BUUB XI.— Accusative in Exclamations. ^ 
 
 381. The Accusative, either with or without an interjeo- 
 tion, may be used with Exclamations : 
 
 Hcu me miserum, oA tiM «nAa/>py/ 
 
RULES OF SYNTAX, 823 
 
 Dative. 
 RUIX Xn.— DaUve with Yerbs (64). 
 384. The Indirect Object of an action is put in the 
 Dative. It is used — 
 
 I. With IxTRXMsiTiTic and Passitk Tcrb0 : 
 Tib! scrviO, / am detoted to you. 
 
 II. With TRANsrrirE vcrbiii, in connection with the Direct Oojict: 
 AgrOs plabi dedit, h4 gavt land$ to the common peopU. 
 
 BinLE XHL— Two Datives— To which and For which (881). 
 
 390. Two Datives — the object to which and the ob- 
 ject or END FOR WHICH — occuT with a few verbs : 
 
 L With Intraksitive and PAgsirs rcrbs : 
 Mal6 est hominlbus avaritia, avarice u an tvil to m*M. 
 11. With TftANsmTB verbs in connection with the Accusatits: 
 Quinque cohortCs castrb pracsidiO rollquit, A« l^ Jiv eohorU /or Ike d^ 
 fence of the camp. 
 
 •RJTLB XIV.-Dative with AcUecUves (141). 
 
 391. With adjectives, the object to which the quality 
 is directed is put in the Dative : 
 
 Omnibus cdrum cat, it w dear to all. 
 
 BUIiE XV.— Dative with Noons and Adverfos. 
 
 392. The Dative is used with a few special nouns and 
 adverbs : 
 
 L With a few nouns from verbs which take the Dative : 
 jQstitia est obtcraporutid ICgibus, Jtutice i$ obedience to law. 
 II. With a few adverbs from adjectives which Ukc the Dative: 
 Congrucntcr nitflrae vivcro, to lite in accordance tcitk nature, 
 
 Gexitive. 
 
 RULE XVI.-GeniUTe with Nouns {28)* 
 396. Any noun, not an Appositive, qualifying the mean- 
 ing of another noun, is put in the Genitive : 
 Catonis 6rftti6n&8, Cato^e oratione. 
 
324 APPENDIX. 1 
 
 BUIiE XYII.— Genitive with Adjectives. 
 
 399. Many adjectives take a Genitive to complete their i 
 meaning : 
 
 Avidas laudis, dairoui of praise. 
 
 RULE XVHI.— Predicate Genitive. 
 401. A noun predicated of anotiier noun denoting a dif- 
 ferent person or thing b put in the Genitive : 
 Omnia boelium erant, all thingt bdonged to lh4 enemy. 
 
 BULE ZIZ.-QeiiitiTe with Special Verbs. ^, 
 
 406. The Genitive is used— i 
 
 I. With misoroor and mlMriioO: \ 
 MiBcr^^ro lob<irum, pUj the labor*. 
 
 II. With rsoordor, meminlj raainiBOor, and obUviacor: \ 
 Mcininit practcritOrum, 1U renumben the paei, j 
 
 III. With rifnrt and intersst : 
 Inters omnium, it it the inUrtd of all. 
 
 BUL£ XX.~-Aeeiisative and Genitive (285). \ 
 
 409. The Accusative of the Person and the Genitive \ 
 of the Thing are used with a few transitive verbs : 
 
 I. With Tcrbs of reminding^ admomehing : \ 
 
 Td amicitiae oommonefacit, A^ remind* you offriendskip, 
 TL With verba of aceunng, convieting^ aequiUing : * 
 
 Virte sceleris orguis, you aceuae men of crime. 
 
 III. With wii*frrf, paenUct^ pudd^ taedet, andpiffet: ] 
 
 EOrum nOs miaerot, we pity tJUm, j 
 
 I 
 Ablative Proper. 
 
 BUIiE XXL-Place from which (277). 
 412. The Place from avuich is denoted by the Abla-» 
 tive : 
 
 L (xencrally trith a pre/x)sUi'm—S.f ab, d5, or ex: j 
 
 Ab urb6 profidscitur, he ette out from the cit>j. 1 
 
 n. In Naxss of Towns without a preposition : 
 
 Platdnem AthCnls arccsslvit, he summoned Plato from Athens. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
RULES OF SYNTAX. 825 
 
 RUI^ XXn.— SeparaUon, Source, Cause (168>. 
 
 413. Separation, Source, and Cause are denoted by the 
 Ablative icith or toithout a j^repoeition : 
 
 Cacdem & vubl« dOpellO, / ward of $laughi<T from you. Ih'ic audlvl da 
 parento meO, 1 heard thit from my father. Are QtiliUto laudltur, an art m 
 froistd hecauM of its tu^ulaest. 
 
 BJTLE XXIII.-AblatiTe with Comparatives (88). 
 417. Comparatives without quam are followed by the 
 Ablative : 
 
 Nihil est amftbilius virtQte, nothing it mor$ lovdy than viHu$. 
 
 Instbumental Ablativb. 
 
 RUIiE XXIV.— Ablative of Accompaniment. 
 
 419. The Ablative is used — 
 
 I. To denote Accompaniment. It then takes the preposition cumt 
 Vlvit cum BulbO, hs lives with Balbus. 
 
 II. To denote Cbaracteristic or Qdalitt. It is theu modified bj an 
 Adjective or by a Genitire: 
 
 8amm& virtato adulCscins, a youth qf the highat virtvs. 
 
 III. To denote Maxnul It then takes the prepositkm cnm| or is iDodi> 
 fied by an Adjective or by a Genitive : 
 
 Cum virtQte vixit, he Heed virtuously. 
 
 RUIiE XXV .—Ablative of Means (78). 
 
 420. Instrument and Means arc denoted by the Ab- 
 lative : 
 
 Comibus taurt s£ tOtantur, bulls d^end thsmselces with th^r horns. 
 
 RUIiE XXVI.— Ablative in Special Constructions (868). 
 
 421. Tlie Ablative is used — 
 
 I. With utor, fruor, fiingor, potior, vescor, and their compounds : 
 PlQrimls r£bu8 fVuimur et Qtunur, we enjoy and use tsry many thing$, 
 
 II. With Verbs and AojECTmcs or Plxntt : 
 
 Villa abundat lacte, oflse6, mellc, the villa <Aounds in mili^ 
 \onsy. 
 
 in. With dXgnus, indXgnos, and contentni t 
 Dlgnl sunt amlcitia, they ars worthy of friendship. 
 22 
 
326 APPENDIX. 
 
 RULE XXVIL-AbUkUTe of PHce. 
 
 422. Price is generally denoted by the Ablative : 
 
 VCndiJit aurO potriam, A« 9old M*$ eofuntry for gold. 
 
 RULE XXVOL-AblaUve of Difference .236). 
 
 423. The Measure op Differrncx is denoted by the 
 Ablative : 
 
 CqO die longtorem mCnscm, f«dunt, tluy makt t\$ monik mm iay longar, 
 
 RXTLE XXIX.— Spedflcaiion (281). 
 
 424. A noun, adjective, or verb may take an Ablative to 
 define its application : 
 
 Nomine, nOn potcsUte, fiiit r£x, h$ wu king in imsm, not inpoictr. 
 
 Locative Ablatitb: 
 
 RUIX XXX.-PUee in which (laS). 
 425. The Place in which is denoted — 
 
 I. Generally bj the Locative Ablative trith the prepotition in: 
 Hannibal in Italia fuit, Hannihal iro* in Aaly. 
 
 II. In Names or Towns bj the Locative^ if audi a form exists, otherwise 
 bj the Locative Ablative: 
 
 ROmae fait, iU toae at Rome. 
 
 RUIX XXXL— Time (08). 
 429. The Time of an action is denoted by the Ablative : 
 
 OotOgiaimO onnA est mortuus, h4 ditd in kit eightUth ytar. 
 
 BUIX XXXII.-AbUtiTe Absolate (240). 
 
 431. A noun and a participle may be put in the Ablative 
 to add to the predicate an attendant circumstance : 
 
 Servio rSgnante viguerunt, tk*y flourithed in tke reign of Serviue. 
 
 Cases with Prepositions. 
 
 RUUB XXXm.— Cases with PreposiUons (64). 
 
 432. The Accusative and Ablative may be used with 
 prepositions : 
 
 Ad amicum, to a friend. In Italia, in Raly. 
 
RULES OF SYNTAX. 827 
 
 Agbeement op Adjectives, Pronouns, and Verbs. 
 
 BUL£ XXXIV.— Ag^reement of Adjectives (43). 
 438. An adjective agrees with its noun in geicdeb, kum- 
 BEB, and CASE : 
 
 FortQna caeca est, foiiuns is blind. 
 
 BUIJB XXXV.— Agreement of Pronoona (107). 
 
 445. A pronoun agrees with its antecedent in ubitdbb, 
 
 NUMBER, and PERSON I 
 
 Anima], quod sanguincm habot, an animal wkick ka» blood, 
 
 RULE XXXVT.— Agreement of Verb with Snbjeet (12). 
 460. A finite verb agrees with its subject in numbeb 
 and PERSON : 
 
 Ego regSs ^ecl, Ikav4 banished kingt. 
 
 Use of the Indicative. 
 BIJIX XXXVXL— Indicative (118). 
 
 474. The indicative is used in treating of facts : 
 Peus mundum acdific&vit, God madt (built) the icorUL 
 
 Moods and Tenses in Principal Clauses. 
 BUUB XXX V ill.— Subjunctive of Desire, Command (114). 
 
 483. The Subjunctive is used to represent the action not 
 
 AS real, but AS DESIRED : 
 
 Volcant cIvCs, may iht eitiunt b4 wM, 
 
 BULE XXXIX.— Potential Subjunctive. 
 485. The Subjunctive is used to represent the action not 
 
 AS REAL, but AS POSSIBLE '. 
 
 Illo quacrat quispiam, k*r« tome ont may inquire. 
 
 BUIX XIm— Imperative (114). 
 487. The Imperative is used in commands, exoorta- 
 tions, and entreaties : 
 
 jQstitiam colo, practiciJudiM* 
 
328 APPENDIX. 
 
 Moods akd Tenses in Sitbordinate Culvsxb. 
 
 RULJE: XlX—Sequence of Tenses (110). 
 
 491. Principal tenses depend upon principal tenses ; bis- 
 torical upon historical : 
 
 £nltitur ut vincat, kt drvem to eonfutr, 
 
 RUIiE XLIL-ParpoM (110). 
 497. The Subjunctive is used to denote Pubpose — 
 
 I. With the relative qtil, and with relatirc adverbs, as iihl| imde, etc. : 
 ICisal sunt qui (s u/ H) cOnsulercnt ApoUincm, ttuy tt^n $uU to contuU 
 
 ApoUo. 
 
 II. With nt, ni, qinOf qufialmti 
 
 £nltitur at viocai, h4 $trivm thai k* mmff eonfiur, 
 
 BUIJE: XLm.— Result (128). 
 600. The Subjunctive is used to denote Result — 
 
 L With the relative qui, and with relative adverbSi as ubl^ unde, cdr, 
 etc: 
 
 Non is sum qui (s «| g^) his Qtar, I am noi tueh a on* <u to vm tksm 
 t\ing9. 
 
 II. With at, nt nOn, qaXn: 
 
 Ita vixit ut Athcnitoaibua aaaet cirisidmus, k* to Umd that he tea* terj/ 
 d4(tr to tkt Atkinian*. 
 
 RULE XLIV.— Conditional Sentences with si, nisi, nl, sin 
 (850). 
 
 607. Conditional sentences with si, nisi, ni, sin, take — 
 
 I. The Indicative in both clauses to <utume the supposed case: 
 6l splritum dodt, x-lvit, if Tie hreatha^ A« is alive. 
 
 II. The Prebkmt or PumecT Sr:BjnxcnTB in both clauses to represent 
 the supposed case m pouibie : 
 
 Dies defidat^ si velim causam defendere, the day would fail me, \f /should 
 wul to defend tke cause. 
 
 III. The iMTiBncT or PLUPiRrKcr ScaniNcnvK in both clauses to rep- 
 resent the supposed case as contrary to fad: 
 
 Plaribus verbis ad t£ scrlberem, si r^s verba dSsIder&ret, I should write to 
 you more/uUy (with more words), (^ the case required words. 
 
RULES OF SYNTAX, j^op 
 
 RUIX XLY.— CondiUonal CTUkusea with dam, modo, Ac A, 
 ut si, etc 
 
 513. Conditional clauses take the Subjunctive — 
 
 I. With dum, modo, dummodo, 'if only/ 'provided thtt'; damai, 
 modo n$j dummodo n5, ' if only not/ ' provided that not ' : 
 
 Mnnciit ingcuin, modo pcrmancat industria, mental potcert rtmain^ if onfy 
 indiutry remain*. 
 
 II. With So sX, ut Bl, quam ■!, quasi, tanquaaa, tanquam il, velut, 
 ▼elut Bl, ' as if/ ' than if/ involving an ellipsis of the real conclusion : 
 
 Perindc hab{;bd, &o si scrlpeiaste, / tkaU rtgwrd UJud at (^ (L e., as I 
 should if) yoH had xcritUn. 
 
 RUUE: XliVI.— Moods in Concessive C l a ns e s (854). 
 615. Concessive clauses take — 
 
 I. Generally the Indicative in the best proee, whoi introduced by 
 quamqtuim : 
 
 Quamquam intell^;unt, though the*/ und«rdand. 
 
 II. The Indicative or Subjunctive when introduced by «eH, tffMmM, 
 tametal, or «i, like conditional clauses with si ; 
 
 EtsI nihil scid quod gaudeam, though fknota no rtaton why I tkomld r^oiet. 
 
 III. The SuBJu.HcnvE when introduced by /tcW; quamvU^ «<, nJ, ewn, or 
 the relative qttl : 
 
 Lioct imdeat, tkougk hs may deride. 
 
 RULE XLVIL — Moods with quod, quia, qnoniftm, tfjamaAo 
 
 516. Causal clauses with qnod, quia, quoniam, quandO, gcn« 
 erally take — 
 
 L The Indicative to assign a reason positively on one^$ own mUhority: 
 Quoniam 8uppliciti6 dCcrC'ta est, nnce a thanitgicing hat bp$n doermd, 
 II. The Subjunctive to assign a reason doubtfully^ or on anotker^t om- 
 
 thority : 
 
 SOcrotis accOsfttus est, quod corrumporet juventOtem, Socratm tpw 9ccumj^ 
 
 heeaut4 he corrupted the youth. 
 
 BUIiE XliVm.— Oaosal Clauses with cum and qui. 
 
 517. Causal clauses with cttm and qttl generally take the 
 Subjunctive in writers of the best period : 
 
 Cum vita mctos plfina sit, nnce life if full of fear. 
 
330 APPENDIX. 
 
 RULE XLIX.— Temporal Clitases with postquam, etc. 
 
 618. In temporal clauses with po8tquam, postedqnam^ 
 ubt, uty simul atquCy etc., * after,' * when,' * as soon as,' the 
 Indicative is used : 
 
 Poetquam vidit, etc., castra posuit, 1u pUeUd hi* eamp, afttr he mv, etc. 
 KULE L.— Temporal Clauses with dum, ete. 
 
 619. I. Temporal clauses with diauy donee, SLud quoad, 
 in the sense of aviiilk, as long as, take the Indicative : 
 
 Haec f^cl, dum licuit, J did thi* vhiU it vas aUcwtd. 
 II. Temporal clauses with dum, ddnec, and quoad, in the 
 sense of until, take — 
 
 1. The Ikoicitive, when the action is viewed as an actual pact ; 
 Ddlbcra h6c, dum ego redcO, contider this until Irtturn. 
 
 2. The SuDJCMCTiTi, when the action is viewed as something desirio, 
 PRorosEO, or conceited : 
 
 Differant, dum dtfen'tscat Ira, Itt than dtftr it till their anger cools. 
 
 BUIX UU— Temporal Clauses with antequam and prius- 
 quam. 
 
 620. In temporal clauses with antequam and prius- 
 quam — 
 
 L Any tense except the Imperfect and Tluperfcct is put— 
 
 1. In the Indicatite, when the action is viewed as an actual fact: 
 Priusquam iQcet, adsunt, they are present before it i* light. • 
 
 2. In the Scdjunctite, when the action is viewed as sourrniNG de- 
 sired, PROPOSED, or COSCEIVKD : 
 
 Antequam dC rfi pQblicA dicam, h^ore 1 (can) speak of the republic. 
 II. The Imperfect and Pluperfect are put in the Subjunctive : 
 Antequam urbem capcrent, before they tooh the city. 
 
 BUIjE liEL— Temporal Clauses with cuzn. 
 
 621. In temporal clauses with cum — 
 
 I. Any tense except the Imperfect and the Pluperfect is put in the In- 
 dicative : 
 
 Cum quiesount, probant, ichile they are silent j they approve, 
 
 II. The Imperfect and Pluperfect are put — 
 
RULES OF SYNTAX, 881 
 
 1. In the Ikdicatitx, when the teroporal cUuso unxn AH ■itroucAi. 
 fact: 
 
 Paniit cam neceue erat, A< dl>*y«d wKen U was n«cm$ary. 
 
 2. In the SuBJUNCTiTK, when the temporal daoM simplj vatsu m 
 TiMK of the principal action : 
 
 Ciim cpistulam complicdrcm, trAt^ I wa$ folding the UtUr, 
 
 RUL£ LIII.-MoodB in Principal Clauaes (268). 
 
 523. The principal clauses of the Direct Discourse on 
 becoming Indirect take tho Twivitive or Subjunctive as 
 follows : 
 
 I. When Declaratitk, thcj take tho InJinUivt mth a Sidqtd AecMmHm: 
 Dlct'hat anim6s ease dIvInOa, he was wont to my thai touU ar$ divine, 
 
 II. When Intekrooatitx, they take — 
 
 1. Generally the Subjunctive: 
 
 Ad postul&ta Cacsaria rcspondit, quid aibl vellet, cQr venlret, to the i*- 
 tnandi of Caetar he repUed, what did he wish, why did he comet 
 
 2. Sometimes the Inftutive with a Subjett Acauativc^ as in rhetorical 
 questions : 
 
 Doc4ibant rem esse tcstim6ni6, etc. ; quid ease leviua, they ehowed that ths 
 fact teas a proof, etc ; what t«i# more ineonsideraie f 
 
 III. When IiiPERATiVK, they take the Subjunctive: 
 
 Scrlbit LabiCn6 cum IcgiOne veniat, he writes to Labienus to come (that he 
 should come) with a legion. 
 
 RUIiE LTV.— Moods in Subordinate CHanses (868). 
 
 524. The subordinate clauses of the Direct Uiscoi r.sk, 
 
 on becoming Indirect, take the Subjunctive : 
 
 Rcspondit b« id quod in Ncrvils ftciaset factaruro, he replied that he tcculd 
 do what he had done in the ease of the Nertii. 
 
 RUIX LV.— Moods in Indirect cnauaes (187). 
 529. The Subjunctive is used — 
 
 I. In indirect questions : 
 
 Quaeritur, cOr doctisshni hominto diasentiant, U is a quesition^ why the 
 most learned men disagree. 
 
 II. Often in clauses dependent upon an Infinitive or upon another Sub- 
 junctive : 
 
332 APPENDIX. 
 
 Nihil indlgniuB «t quam euro qui culpi oue«i Bupplicio ii6n car^re, no^i- j 
 ing U mort tham^ul than that h* toho ufrufrom fault should not 64 tsumpt \ 
 from puniehmtnt. j 
 
 Intixititb. 
 
 RULE Lyi.-InllnitiTe (18S). 
 688. Many verbs admit an Infinitive to complete or 
 qualify their meaning : 
 
 Uacc vlUro oupimus, «m dmi r t to noid tkm§ Mmg$. \ 
 
 BX7IX LYU.— AocQsatiTe and InflnitiTe (171). ' 
 
 634« Many transitive verbs admit both an Accusative j 
 
 and an Infinitive : | 
 
 Td Mpero docet, ki tMchm you to h$ wist, \ 
 
 BUUE: I«YIII.-8abject of InflniUve (171). 
 638. The Infinitive sometimes takes an Accusative as its i 
 subject : ■. 
 
 PlatAncm Tareotum vCniiM repexio, J^ad that Plato eanu to Tartntum, 
 
 Supine. 
 
 RULE LCC- Supine in Urn (166). ^ 
 
 646. The Supine in um \^ used with verbs of motion to i 
 express purpose : j 
 
 L^U ven^runt rts repeUtum, deputUt eame to demand rcdUution, 
 RULE LX.— Supine in a (246). 
 
 647. The Supine in u is generally used as an Ablative of i 
 Specification : i 
 
 Quid C8t tarn jQcundum audita, tehat is so agrteahU to hear (in hearing) ! ] 
 
 Adverbs. '.. 
 
 RULE LXL— Use of Adverbs (70). 1 
 
 661. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjecttves, and other ad- j 
 
 V KRBS : ! 
 
 I 
 Sapient^ i^llciter vlTunt, the wise live happily. 
 
TABLE 
 
 BHOWINO THE ARTICLES IN THIS BOOK CONTAININO ▲ItTICLKS 
 FROM THE LATIN GRAMMAR. 
 
 am. La 
 -4 . . 
 
 -14 . . 
 -18 . . 
 
 t. Course. 
 . . 1 
 . . 2 
 
 Oram. 
 
 211 . . 
 
 212. . 
 
 217,218 
 
 219. . 
 
 231,2.32 
 
 233,234 
 
 289-292 
 
 293. . 
 
 294,295 
 
 298. . 
 
 300,301 
 
 346-349 
 
 351-35;^ 
 
 356,357 
 
 362. . 
 
 363. . 
 
 368. . 
 
 369. . 
 371. . 
 
 373. . 
 
 374. . 
 376. . 
 
 378. . 
 
 379. . 
 
 380. . 
 
 381. . 
 334. . 
 385,2 . 
 390. . 
 391 . . 
 392 . . 
 
 Lat. Coune. 
 
 ... 227 
 
 ... 235 
 
 ... 246 
 
 250 
 
 31 . . 
 
 . . 1 
 
 ... 258 
 
 ... 266 
 
 ... 269 
 
 073 
 
 -42 . . 
 
 • • g 
 
 
 . . 8 
 
 ... 277 
 ... 281 
 . . 281 
 
 ■48 . . 
 
 . . 10 
 . . 35 
 
 ■58 . . 
 
 . . 49 
 . . 53 
 
 ... 14 
 106 
 
 61 . . 
 ^ . . 
 4 . . 
 
 . . 68 
 . . 63 
 . . 63 
 . . 64 
 
 ... 14 
 
 ... 59 
 
 ... 31 
 
 20 
 
 
 . 64 
 
 . 190 
 
 
 . 64 
 
 . 25 
 
 
 . 92 
 
 . . . 153 
 
 
 . 92 
 
 ... 278 
 
 151 . 
 154 . 
 157 . 
 1(52 . 
 106 . 
 
 . 42 
 
 . 82 
 . 86 
 . 86 
 . 86 
 86 
 
 . . 275,19 
 . . . 299 
 . . . 96 
 . . . 277 
 . . . 299 
 54 
 
 172 . 
 177 . . 
 
 . 97 
 
 . 97 
 
 17, f. n. 
 
 . 97 
 
 . a32, f. n. 2 
 
 . . . 281 
 
 . . . 141 
 
 . . .'J03 
 
 186 . . 
 UK) . . 
 195 . . 
 . . 14 
 
 . 102 
 . 106 
 . 14 
 \nd 111 
 . 14 
 . 140 
 . 152 
 
 395. . 
 397. . 
 399. . 
 401 . 
 
 . . . 31 
 
 . . . 31 
 
 ... 307 
 
 307 
 
 200 . . 
 204 . . 
 
 406. . 
 409. . 
 
 412. . 
 
 413. . 
 415 . . 
 
 ... 307 
 
 ... 285 
 
 277 
 
 
 . 170 
 
 158 
 
 
 . 181 
 . lai 
 
 158 
 
 
 417. . 
 419. . 
 
 . . . 88 
 
 
 . 207 
 
 . . . 314 
 
 . . . . 
 
 . 214 
 
 420. . 
 
 . . . 78 
 
 Gram. Lal.OovM. 
 
 421 . . . 
 
 . . Sfe 
 
 421' . 
 
 . 814 
 
 42;; 
 
 . 288 
 
 424 . . . 
 
 . 231 
 
 425,426 . 
 
 . . 1S6 
 
 429. . . 
 
 . . 98 
 
 481 . . . 
 
 . . 240 
 
 432 . . . 
 
 . . 66 
 
 438. . . 
 
 . . 48 
 
 440, NN. land 2 
 
 
 191, f. n. 
 
 445. . . 
 
 . . 107 
 
 4oJ», 1 . . 
 
 . 324, 10 
 
 400 .. . 
 
 . . 20 
 
 465, N. 2 . 
 
 259, f. n. 
 
 467. 4 . . 
 
 . 839,10 
 
 474 . . . 
 
 . . 112 
 
 48.3 . . . 
 
 . . 114 
 
 4sry . 
 
 . 322 
 
 487 
 
 . 114 
 
 48}) . 
 
 275,2 
 
 491-493 . 
 
 . . 110 
 
 497,498 . 
 
 . . 119 
 
 600,501 . 
 
 . 128 
 
 608. . . 
 
 . 128 
 
 606,607 . 
 
 . 260 
 
 618. . . 
 
 . 880 
 
 614,616 . 
 
 . 264 
 
 616,517 . 
 
 . 834 
 
 .'>18,519 . 
 
 . 387 
 
 520,521 . 
 
 . 341 
 
 622-^24 . 
 
 . 268 
 
 626. . . 
 
 . 262 
 
 629. . . 
 
 . 127 
 
 683. . . 
 
 . 188 
 
 634. .. . 
 
 . 171 
 
 686. .. . 
 
 . 171 
 
 641-544 . . 
 
 . 291 
 
 546. .. . 
 
 . 166 
 
 547. . . 
 
 . 246 
 
 648-000 . . 
 
 . 291 
 
 651. .. . 
 
 . 70 
 
Latin Text-Books. 
 
 ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D., LL. D. 
 
 k Complete Latin Course for the First Year. 
 
 Progressive Exercises in Reading and Writing LMtin, wUh 
 Frequent Practice in Reading at Si^t. 
 
 An Introductory Latin Book. 12ino. 
 
 A Latin Grammar. Edition of 1874. I2ax>. 
 
 A Latin Or am mar. Standard cditioo of 1881. 12nia 
 
 The Elements of Latin Grammar. Hmo. 
 
 A New Latin Reader. 12mo. 
 
 A Latin Reader. 12nio. 
 
 A Latin Reader. With Excrdaea in Latin Compoaltlon. ISmo. 
 
 A Practical Introduction to Latin Composition. ISmo. 
 
 Caesar's Commentaries on the Gallic War, 12n»o. 
 
 Cicero's Select Orations. 12mo. 
 
 Cicero's Select Oration <: With Kxplanntory Xotea and a Spcdal 
 Dictionary. 12mo. 
 
 Sallust's Catiline. With Explanatory Notiss and a Special Vooalm- 
 lary. 12mo. 
 
 Preparatory Course of Latin Prose Aut/wrs. Urge 8to. Coo- 
 taina Four Books of OaBaar^a Gommentariea, Sallaat*« Catflina, and 
 Eight of Cioero's Orations. 
 
 D. APPLETON A CO., Publishers, 
 
 NEW YORK, BOSTON, CHICAGO, SAN FRANOSOa 
 
STANDARD LATIN SERIES, 
 
 Harkness's Standard Latin Grammar. 
 
 **The most complete, philosophical, and attractive Grammtr 
 written." Adapted to all grades. 12mo. Introduction price, $1.12. 
 
 Harkness's New Latin Reader. 
 
 Especially adapted for ufle with the '* Standard Latin Grammar." 
 12mo. Introduction price, 8? cents. 
 
 Harkness's Complete Course in Latin for the First 
 Year. 
 
 Comprising an Oatlinc of Latin Grammar and Prop^ressire Exercises 
 in Beading and Writing Ladn, with Frequent Practice in Reading 
 at agbl Designed to eenre as a complete bitroductorj boolc in 
 Leti]i--no granunar being required. I2ma IntroductioB price, 
 $L12. 
 
 Harkness's Caesar's Commentaries. 
 
 New Pictorial Edition. With full Dictionary, Life of CsBsar, Uap 
 of Gaul, Plans of Battles, Outline of the Roman Militery System, 
 etc., and Notes to the author's Standard Latin Grammar. Containing 
 numerous (»lored plates, showing the movements of armies, military 
 uniforms, arms, standards, etc, which, in point of beauty, arc supe- 
 rior to any edition of Ciesaryet pnblisbed. 12mo. Introduction 
 price, $1.20. 
 
 Harkness's Cicero's Orations. 
 
 With full Notes, Vocabulary, etc. 12mo. Introduction price, $1.22. 
 
 Harkness's Course of Latin Prose Authors. 
 
 New Pictorial Edition. With full Notes and Dictionary. Tlic 
 work conUins four books of " Ca»ar's Commentaries," the " Cati- 
 line" of Sallust, and eight of Cioero*s Orations. 12mo. Introduc- 
 tion price, $L40. 
 
 Frieze's Editions of Vergil. 
 
 THE ^NEID, with Notes only. 12mo. |1.40. 
 
 THE JiNEID, with Notes and Dictionary. 12mo. $1.80. 
 
 SLX BOOKS OF THE J^NEID, GEORGICS, AND BUCOLICS, 
 
 with Notes and Dictionary. 12mo. S1.30. 
 VERGIL COMPLETE, with Notes and Dictionary. 12rao. |1.60. 
 
 Sallust's Jugurthine War with full Explanatory Notes. 
 References to Harkness's Standard Latin Grammar, and 
 a copious Latin-English Dictionary. By Charles Gkorgk 
 Herbermak. 12mo. Introduction price, $1.12. 
 
 (SXS HXZT FAOE.) 
 
STANDARD LATIN SER\ES— Continued. 
 
 Cornelius Nepos. 
 
 Prepared expressly for the Use of StuJcnta Learning to Read al 
 Sicrlit. With Notes, Vocabulary, Index of Proper Names, and Rx- 
 nt i-.'H for Translation into Latin. IllustrutiHl by numerovt Cnta. 
 liy Thomas li. Lindsay, Ph. D., Professor of I^tin in the Boatoo 
 University. 12rao. Introduction price, |1.22. 
 
 Tub Same, for Sight-Keading in Scliools and CoUecea, with Ene- 
 lish-Latin Exercises and Index of Proper Names, fij TuomaS B. 
 Lindsay. 12ino. Introduction price, $1.00. 
 
 Selections from the Poems of Ovid. 
 
 With Notes. By J. L. Lincoln, LL. D., Professor of Latin in 
 Brown University. The text is very carefully annotated and refer- 
 ences made to Barkness's Standard Grammar. 12ma Introduction 
 price, $1.00. 
 
 Tub Samb. With Notes and Vocabulary. 12mo. Introduc- 
 tion price, $1.22. 
 
 Livy. 
 
 Si^'loctions from the First Five RocK , f ii tho Tvxrnty Brat 
 
 and Twcntv-second Hooks entire; ^^ :. ^ i i > ■ i K.i . , ' Mip of 
 the Pas.-:at.''e of liannibal, and Engli>!i Nut f r tli-- I -. ..t Shoola. 
 By J. L. LiKCOur, LL. D. 12mo. Introduction price, $1.22. 
 
 Horace. 
 
 With English Notes, for the Use of Schools and Gollegca. By J. U 
 Lincoln, LL. D. 12mo. Introduction price, $1.22. 
 
 Sallust's Jugurtha and Catiline. 
 
 With Notes and a Vocabular}-. By Noblb Butlce and Miiiabo 
 Stcroijs. 12mo. Introduction price, $1.22. 
 
 Germania and Agricola of Tacitus. 
 
 With Notes, for Colleges. By W. S. Tyler, Profeasor of the Greek 
 and Latin Languages in Amherst College. 12roo. Introductioo 
 price, 87 cents. 
 
 Mailed, ^-^xtid, /or examinatum, at intrwhtelkm pric€$. Stnd /or 
 
 /vll de$eripttv€ ctrcuhrt. 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers, 
 
 How York, Boston, Ghicjigo, Atlanta, Ban Fraadaoo. 
 
PROFESSOR LINCOLN'S LATIN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Selections firom the Poems of Ovid. With Notes. By J. L. Lin- 
 coLN, LL. D., Professor of Latin in Brown University. 12ino. 288 
 pages. 
 
 Thla edition of Orid wm pr«pftred At the reqaett of inanT teschera o( Latin 
 who renrd the poetry of Orid more •aiuhle for the a«e of bviriDDerfl than that 
 of Vcr^nl, an opinion that gorerna the coar»e pon^ned In the Raropean bcHooIs 
 generallf . The text la rery carefUIy Annotated, and references are made to Uark- 
 neea'a Standard Grammar. 
 
 tkNDe aelectiona from the "Amoref.** the "Faati," and tlie " Trlatla," have 
 heen added to those made firom the *' Metamorphoeea.'* not only on account of 
 the intercatinx themaa of which they treat, hat alau for the sake of faring the 
 student an opportunity of becoming acquainted with Latin elegiac Terse, of 
 which. In LaUn poetry, Ovid is the acknowledged master. 
 With Notes and Vocahalary. 
 
 Horace. With English Notes, for the Use of Schools and Colleges. 
 I2rao. 675 pages. 
 
 Selections from the First Five Books of Livy, to{»cthcr with 
 the Twenty.fir^t anJ Twenty-second Books entirt' ; with a Plan of 
 Rome, a Map of the Passage of Hannibal, and English Notes for the 
 Use of Schools. 12mo. 829 psges. 
 
 PROFESSOR LINDSAY'S LATIN TEXTBOOKS. 
 
 Cornelius Nepos. Prepared expressly for the Use of StudenU Learn- 
 
 ing to Read at Sight With Notes, Vocabulary, Index of Proper 
 
 Names, and Exercisea for Translation into Latin. Illustrated by 
 
 numerous Cuts. By Tbomas B. Ijxdsat, Ph. D., Assistant Professor 
 
 of Latin in the Boston University. 12mo. 857 pages. 
 
 Among the characterlatle featurea of this new edition of " Cornelias Nepos '* 
 
 are the fuIlowinK: The orthographical accuracy of the text, the results of the 
 
 investigations of Fleckeisen, Bramhach. and others having been kept carefully 
 
 m view. The notes have heen prepared with apecial reference lo tlie training of 
 
 the student in tiaht-r«adi$ig^ and to aaalst him in grasping the main idea of the 
 
 sentence. The Bngliah-Latlu ezerciaes make Immediate use of the words and 
 
 idioms of the text, thus fixing them firmly in the mind. The marking of the 
 
 long vowels and the relation of derivatives to a common root ars among the 
 
 special features of the vocabulary. It is a valuable eupplemenlary reading-book. 
 
 where the curriculum does not admit of its introduction into the preacribed 
 
 course. 
 
 *' Comeliua Nepos ** la one of the authors regularly read in the German Gym- 
 nasia. The cleamesa of his style and the interest of the subjects treated by bim 
 are aspecially adapted to engage the attention of the etudent, and make his study 
 of Latin a pleasure rather than a task. 
 
 The Saihs, for Sight- Reading in Schools and Colleges, with English- 
 Latin Exercises and Index of Proper Names. r2rao. 
 
 Thi* edition contains the Text, the English-Latin Exercises, and the Histori- 
 cal and Geographical Index, and is designed to meet the wanta of students that 
 desire in addition to the regular coarse to read a Latin anthor at tight. 
 
 D. APPLETON d CO., Publishers, 
 
 NEW YORK. BOSTON. CHICAGO, SAN FRANCISCa 
 
RECENT PUBLICATIONS 
 
 FOR THE STUDY OF GREEK 
 
 Hadley's Greek Grammar. Revised, and in part rcwriiten, b? 
 FiancRicK De Foitrsr Allkn, Pb. D., Profesaor of ClassiaU Pbilol- 
 
 ogy in Harvard University. 
 
 This irranmur not only pretentt ih« latest and beat reaalta orar««k ttodlea, 
 bat aUo treats the laoffnasv iu tbe lijtbt received fiom comparailre pbllol<i|ry. 
 Ttie wurk in clear in its langnage, accorate In ita daflntttona. jodidoua in Iu 
 arrangement, and sufficiently comprehenaivo for all parpoaea, wbile It ta tte* 
 from cumbruus details. Ii is simple enough for the beglBD«r,«ad eonprtb«nai?a 
 enouicb fur the must advanced stadants. iSmo. 405 pagea. lotrodnctorj prUsa, 
 
 Greek Lessons. Prepared to occoropanj the Grammar of Hadlcy and 
 Allen. By Robkrt P. Keip, Ph. D., Principal of the Norwich (Con- 
 necticut) Free Academy. 
 
 An elemrntary Greek book intended to serve as a eompaBloo aad avlde to 
 the Grammar, and as an iotroductiou to the rtody of Zciiopooo. Tha poblisliera 
 ccmmeiia this work to American teacbera witb jn^eai oootdaaoa that It will lia 
 found to possess iroporUnt advantai{ea above otber books of ita claaa. Itow. 
 
 Introductory price, |1.«). 
 
 Elementary Lessons in Greek Syntax, dc^isned to acoomnany 
 the reading of Xcnophon*8 Anabasia. By S. R. Wincbjcll, A. ll. 
 
 A series of lessons on Attic Greek Syntax, desicrned to follow about nna 
 year's study of the ctymolosry of the lantruage. It comprises lesions on tbe last 
 half of tbe Grammar, with ezerci<>e8 and vocahnlaries. all arransed with a rivw 
 of making the pupil familiar with the fundamental prlnciplea uf Greek syoiaz. 
 It is Intended as an introdociion to a ihomoKb and comprebenalTe traatlaooB 
 Greek prose composition. Iniroduclorjr price, 64 centa. 
 
 Harkness's First Greek Book. Comprising an Outline of tha 
 Forms and Inflections of the LanKusgo, a complete Analytic Syn- 
 tax, and an Introductory Greeli Reader. With Notes snd Vocabu* 
 laries. 
 
 Revised and rewritten by the antbor. Desifnied especially to 
 Allcn-lladley's Greek Grammar, with references also to Goodwin's and Croaby a 
 Greek Grammars. 12mo. 276 pages. Introductory price, 9I.OG. 
 
 Three Months' Preparation for Beading XenophoxL By 
 James Blonnis Whiton, Ph. D., author of WhitonV "Hrft Leaaona 
 in Greek," and Mary IUutlktt Whiton, A. U., loatructor in Greek 
 in Packer Collegiate Institute, Brooklyn. 
 
 A concise and practical new introdactorv Greek book, deelgnad to aeeooA^ 
 
 Efiny Allcn-IIadlej s Greek Grammar. ConUininj; refsrencea al»o to Uoodwia's 
 I reck Grammar. l3mo. 94pa;;ea. Introductory price, 48 canta. 
 
 Sample copiet,/or examination, uni to leaehtn of Oreek^ pott-paid, /or 
 $xamination, on receipt ofUu introductory priet. 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers, 
 Nbw York, Doston, Chicago, Atla.nta, Sa.n FaAiiciaoOti 
 
STANDARD GREEK TEXTS. 
 
 Xeaophoa's iwhart^ t with Explanatory Notes for Uie o( Schoob 
 and Colkcet in the United States. By James R. Boiac, Ph. D. (TA- 
 faincai), LL. D., ProTcMr of Greek in the Unimiitjr of llich^u. 
 lama ygn paco. Introdoctioo price, fi^^o. 
 
 The Ffarsi Fo«r Books of Xtaopkoali iwhoatg t with Ex- 
 pUnetofj Nolce with f f immafirml raferaoocs to Hadtey-AUen's. Good* 
 win*^ and other Greek Granunan ; a oopioos Greek-Encliih Vocabo- 
 larjr ; and Kiepeit's Map ai the Route ol the Ten Thousand. By 
 jAMtt R. BoiSB. taoMX 451 peeea. Introduction price, |I^sa. 
 
 ThifworictalBMthapkweof the Tkrm B4(^ toA Fivt S^k vdaOatrndl 
 the Anabaeie heralofofu 1 
 
 TuK Sams. Without Vocabufauy. laoKk. y^ p«cc«. latroductkm 
 pck3e« %t,<A, 
 
 Vho FIrol Ti a oo Boota of Boomt^ mod* according to the Text 
 oT Diodorf ; with Revised Notes, Critical and Explanatory, and Refers 
 cnces to Hadley^AUen**, Crosby's, and Goodwin's Greek Grammars. 
 By IUhby Clark Johhson, A. M., LL. & lamo. iSo pacca. In- 
 troduction price, $1.13. 
 
 The Same. With Vocabulary. laoMk. {Imfrtts,) 
 
 naltetloui firom Harodotnst compri sln c mainly such Piortioiis as 
 five a Connected History of the East, to the Fall of Babykm and the 
 Death of Cyras the GrsaL By HsaMAii 11. Joiisaov. D. D., Pi o f essor 
 of Pld hiao |j li y and EafUsh l.ilareruw in Did dn soo CoOcgu, lano. 
 185 pafSB. Introductioa price, $1.05. 
 
 The a^dipus Tyraanos of Sophoeloo f with Encliib Notes. By 
 JIuWAKU Crosby, D. D., formcriy P ro fe ssor of Greek Lanfiuac* and 
 Literature in Rutgers College, and P rof es sor in the Unirersity of the 
 City of New York. Rerised editkm, with Notes to Hadley-AUen's and 
 Goodwin's Greek Grammars, izmo. Introduction prke, $1.05. 
 
 The Grook P lno poolHo— , Studied from their Original Meanings as 
 I> n <g n ations of Space. By F. A. Adams, Ph. D. A short but oom- 
 prdiensive treatise 00 the meanings of the veibs as compounded with 
 the prcpositioas. ixmo. 131 pages. Introduction price, 60 cents. 
 
 Sp^dtmtm €9pitt of thi mtmm hooks^ ftr examimmHm^wia ht tent, post' 
 paid^ to touchers 0/ Crook, om rocoipt ofitUroductwrn price. 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO.. Pnblishers, 
 New York, Boston, Chicago, Atlanta. San Franciscot 
 
Standard Classical Text-Books, 
 
 Arnold, T. K. Ore«k ProM ConpotiUon. By Sfsmukb. ISmo. 
 
 8«cood Greek Pro»e CompoaiUon. Bj Spsvobb. 12ino. 
 
 Greek Reading Bo<ik. By Spxncse. ISmo. 
 
 Blake, Clarence £. Lexicon of the First Three Bookt of the Iliad. 
 
 Boise, James E. Kxerciaes in Greek Prose Compoaltloo 12mo. 
 
 Th<> Firnt Pour Books of Xenophon*s Anabasis. With Notes and Vo- 
 
 cabalary. l^mo. 
 
 8ame, with Notes only. Itmo. 
 
 Xcnopkoo's Anahaafs. Complete with Notea, and Kiepert't Map. ISmo. 
 
 Obamplin. J. T. Short and Compreheosire Greek Grammar. Umo. 
 
 Coy, Edw ^d 0. Mayor's Greek for Becinoers. 
 
 Crosby Howard. (Eiipas Tyranuos of Sophocles. With Notea, etc. ISmo. 
 
 CyropflBdia. See OwkK. 
 
 Demosthenes. See Smbad. 
 
 Greek Orammar. See Abmold, Cha -not. Got, EUolit, Habkkbss, Rxh- 
 
 imirK. Km SYR, 8I13RR, and Wbitox. 
 Greek OUendirft See Kbnouck. 
 Greek Header. See Arxolo. Uabxxsss, and Own. 
 Greek Testament. See Habn. 
 Hackett, H. B., ind Tyler, W. 8. Piatarch on the Delay of the Deity in Pan- 
 
 iflhinj; the Wicked. With Notea. etc. Berisad edition. ISmo. 
 Hadley-Allen*8 Greek Grammar (1884). 
 Hadley, Jamef. Greek Grammar. 
 
 Elements of Greek Grammar. 
 
 Greek Verbs. Paper corer. 
 
 Habn, An^astni. Novum Testamentnm Graeee. Notes by Robinso!! . ISmo. 
 Harkneif, Albert First Greek Book. With Reader, Notes, and Vocabalary. 
 
 ISmo. 
 HerodotoB. See Jobwson, H. M. 
 Homer. See Johmmm, D. C , and Ownr. 
 Iliad. See Johnson, H. C. and OwKK. 
 
 Johnson, Henry C. Homer's Iliad. First Three Books. Notes and References. 
 Johnson, Herman M. Heroduti OrienUlia Antiqaiora. Revised edition. 
 
 12mo. 
 Keap, Robert P. Greek Lessons. 
 Kendrick, Asahel C. Greek Ollendorff. ISmo. 
 Kahner. Raphael. Greek Grammar. Translated by Edwards and Tatlor. 
 
 Kevised edition. 8vo. 
 Memorabilia of Xenophon. See Robbins. 
 Odyssey. See Owen. 
 (Ediptts Tyranntis. See Orosbt, H. 
 Ollendorff, Greek. See Kexdkick. 
 
 Owen, John L. Acts of the Apostles, in Greek. With Lexicon. ISmo. 
 Anabasis of Xerf^phon. With Notes and References to Crosby's, Had- 
 
 ley's, and Kuhner's Grammara. ISmo. 
 
YB 35652 
 
 Standard Classical Text-Books, 
 
 «eeB, John L. CyropadU of Zeaopboo. With NoIm, tie. 
 
 Iteto. 
 
 Greek R«MJer. IJino. 
 
 Homer's Iliad. With Note*. Itmo. 
 
 Homer's Odyssey. With Notes. Tenth edition. ISao. 
 
 Tbacydides. With Notes, Map, etc ISmo. 
 
 Plato. SoeTTLER. 
 
 PlaUrch. Sec Uackbtt and Ttlbr. 
 
 Bobbins's Memorabilia of Xenopbon. With Notes. R«TlMd edltloa. Itoo. 
 
 Bobinaon, Edward. 8oe Habn. 
 
 aUber, William B. Projtresalve Lmsods io OroelL With Notes aod Bator- 
 
 encee to the Gramnurs of Sophocles. Hadley. acd Crosby. Also. Vocabolaiy 
 
 and Epitome of Greek Grammar, for Beginners. ISmo. 
 Imead, If . J. The Antigone of Sophocles. With Notes. Itmo. 
 The I. II, III Hhilipplcs of Demostheoea. With Historical latfodoe- 
 
 tions, and Note*. New. enlarged edit'.on. ISmo. 
 Sophocles. 8ce Cbosbt, H., and Siuad. 
 Thucydides. SceOwm. 
 
 Tyler, W. 8. nato'a Apology and Crito. With Notea. Itmo. 
 Tyler aud Haokett Pluurch on the Delay of the Deity In Pnkhlaf tho 
 
 Wicked. With Note*. Itmo. 
 Wbiton, Jamei M ., and Mary B Three Months' PreparaHoo tor Bcadlsf 
 
 Xenopbon. 
 Wbiton, James M. First Leesons in Greek : the Befinner's Compealon to Bed* 
 
 ley'» Grammar. Itmo. 
 Winchell. 8. B. Lensons in Greek Syntax. 
 Xenopbon. bee Boisb, Owbh, and Robbihs. 
 
 SYRIAC. 
 
 Uhlemann. Svriac Grammar. TransUted fttm the Qernan by liiooa BofOB* 
 ntsoN. With a Coarse of Exercises in Syrlac Grammar, a Chreetoaaihy 
 and brief Lexicon, prepared by the Translator. Secoixl etlitloB, with Oot 
 rectlons and Additions. 8ro. 
 
 HEBREW. 
 
 BOMnina. Ilehrsw Grammar. Sdited by RoDioaa. Translated from the kMt 
 (the eerenteenih) German edition by CooaoL With an lodes. §ro. 
 
 D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers, 
 
 Nnr YoBK, Bonoit, Csicaoo, Atlaxta, 8a» FkuMnoou